Operation Manual - Erection and Maintenance

Operation Manual SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear
Erection and Maintenance Type ELK-04
ABB AG - High Voltage Products

¤ Product Manual GIS
Overview
Main List of Documents
Erection and Maintenance

1 Delivery
1.1 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 070 A
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 100
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 101 A
1.4 Building requirements (until 50 kA, 3150 A) . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 100 I
1.5 Building requirements (until 63 kA, 4000 A) . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 123 A
2 Installation
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 200 K
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 015 C
2.3 Outdoor Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 533
2.4 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 103 H
2.5 Mobile working platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 480
2.6 1pole Earthing Switch with Short Making Capacity . . . . . 1HDG 118 528 D
2.7 Cable Sealing End Type TPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 355 E
2.8 Cable Compact Terminal Box EHSVS
(Type A & B (KUD)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 354 E
2.9 Cable Compact Terminal Box EHSVS Type D (KUD) . . . 1HDG 118 358 F
2.10 Cables (HPFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 348
2.11 Cables (IEC, LXGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 351 E
2.12 Installation of the dead-end plugs for the compact-cable
sealing end type EHSVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 230 A
2.13 Control Cubicle (conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 067 F
2.14 Control Cubicle (SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 706 B
2.15 Bay Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 531 M
2.16 Bay Coupling 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 586 C
2.17 Outdoor Bushings (linear type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 546 B
2.18 Silicon outdoor bushing (Cellpack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 231 A
2.19 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 536 E
2.20 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Insulation Equipment 1HDG 118 543 C
2.21 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 537 C
2.22 Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 539 E
2.23 3-phase Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 118 C
2.24 Busducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 534 B
2.25 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 220 B
2.26 Test bushing on test adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 357 B
1
Overview
3 Commissioning
3.1 Setting up and Configuration of a PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 311 A
3.2 Setup and Configuration of a PISA (1.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 310 I
3.3 System Start SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 321
3.4 System Start-up SMART-GIS (with PISA1.5) . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 320 C
3.5 Commisioning of a SMART-GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 330 B
3.6 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 024 AE
3.7 Capacitve Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 340 B
3.8 High Voltage Tests of the Main Circuits
(with test adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 023 Q
3.9 High Voltage Tests of the Main Circuits
(with new test adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 363 H
4 Equipment and Functional Descriptions

4.1 Gas Density Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 400 B
4.2 Gas Density Relay (WIKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 516 A
4.3 Gas-Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 401 A
4.4 Arc Sensor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 411
4.5 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 - 40/50/63 (O-CO) . . . 1HDG 118 520 O
4.6 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-CB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 012 A
4.7 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 (SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 484 A
4.8 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms Type HMB . . . . . 1HDG 518 425 D
4.9 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1 (O-CO) . . 1HDG 118 576
4.10 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-2 . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 577
4.11 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1S . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 578
4.12 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE04 DR 04 . 1HDG 118 521 N
4.13 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE04 DR 04
(new operating mechanism) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 564 A
4.14 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE04 DR 04
(SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 490 B
4.15 Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 621 A
4.16 Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity
type ELK-EB 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 522 M
4.17 Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity
type ELK−EB 04 (SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 491 D
4.18 1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
(Type ELK-EB 03/04 S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 529 D
4.19 Separate Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 504 B
4.20 Separate Current Transformer (Bella Vista) . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 569 A
4.21 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 410 A
4.22 Inductive Voltage Transformer Type ELK-PI 04 . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 505 G
4.23 Inductive Voltage Transformer 0.3 ZZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 565 A
2
Overview
4.24 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation Device . . . . 1HDG 118 566
4.25 Electro-optical voltage sensor EOVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 420 A
4.26 Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 575 A
4.27 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 525 A
4.28 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 575 C
4.29 3-Phase GIS-Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 545 A
4.30 Composite insulating bushing type VDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 430 A
4.31 Composite insulating bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 431 A
4.32 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 450 A
4.33 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 460 A
4.34 Capacitive Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 470 A
4.35 Mounting UHF PD sensor on barrier insulator . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 567 A
4.36 High Voltage Detection System on Cable Sealing End . . 1HDG 518 471
4.37 Camera Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 408 A
4.38 Free Standing Control Cubicle
(design 800: conventional, conventional process control) 1HDG 518 403 B
(design 1200: conventional, conventional process
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 319 B
4.40 Integrated Control Cubicle
(conventional, conventional process control,
SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 321 B
4.41 Free Standing Control Cubicle (MONA 1200) . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 331
4.42 Integrated Control Cubicle (MONA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 332
4.43 Free Standing Control Cubicle (MONA 800-1000)) . . . . . 1HDG 518 415 A
4.44 Outdoor Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 402 A
4.45 Control Cubicle (Outdoor)
(conventional, conventional process control) . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 404
4.46 Control Cubicle (Indoor)
(integrated and free standing)
SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 405 B
(integrated and free standing)
SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 416
4.48 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle (conventional) . . . 1HDG 518 406 A
4.49 Heat Balance of the Control Cubicle
(integrated: conventional process control, SMART-GIS)
(free standing: conventional process control) . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 407 A
4.50 Power Demand Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 409 E
4.51 Functional Description (conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 027 M
4.52 Functional Description (conventional process control) . . 1HDG 118 650 G
3
Overview
4.53 Functional Description (SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 411 A

4.54 Functional Description
(SMART-GIS, circuit breaker with redundant PISA) . . . . 1HDG 118 151 A
4.55 Conventional Bay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 480 B
4.56 Control System: Conventional Substation Automation
(with REF542plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 412 D
4.57 Control via SCADA Systems (with REC580) . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 481 A
4.58 SMART-GIS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 482 A
4.59 Mobile Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 370 E
5 Service
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 500
5.2 SF6 Gas Moisture Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 470 I
5.3 Control Devices, conventional design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 520 D
5.4 Control Devices
(conventional process control and SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 521 E
5.5 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 473 T
5.6 Circuit Breaker 50 / 63 kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 478 K
5.7 Disconnector / Earthing Switch
(conventional, SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 471 N
5.8 Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 371 C
5.9 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . 1HDG 118 472 O
5.10 Capacitive Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 540
5.11 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 542 B
5.12 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 531
5.13 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS (with PISA 1.5) . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 530 B
5.14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 510
5.15 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 099 G
4
Content
Erection and Maintenance
Content
1 ¤ Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Transport ................................................. 1.1-1
1.1.1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.3 Container data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.5 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.2 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses in transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.4 Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.5 Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-1
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.1 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.2 Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.4 Parts and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3
1.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5
1.4 Building requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.1 Static and dynamic loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.2 Building requirements and dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
ToC − 1
Content
2 ¤ Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-2
2.1.3 Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-3
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-5
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-5
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
2.3 Outdoor Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.1 Operating Mechanism and Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.2 Outdoor Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.4 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1
2.4.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-2
2.4.2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-2
2.4.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.4 Local Control Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.5 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4
2.4.6 Busduct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-6
2.4.7 Surge Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-7
2.4.8 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-7
2.5 Mobile working platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.6 1pole Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.2 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.3 Mechanical check for correct operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.4 Electrical check for correct operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.6.5 Power-consumption check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.7 Cable Sealing End Type TPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-1
2.7.1 Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.1.1 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.1.2 Installation Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.2 Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-4
2.8 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-1
2.8.1 Preparation of Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-3
2.8.2 Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-4
2.9 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-1
2.9.1 Fitting of Cast-resin Insulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-2
2.9.2 Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-3
2.10 Cables (HPFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10-1
2.10.1 Mounting Fixed Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10-1
2.10.1.1 Preparation Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10-1
ToC − 2
Content
2.11 Cables (IEC, LXGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-1

2.11.1 Mounting Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-1
2.11.1.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.3 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.4 Mounting Variants for Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.5 Example Fixed Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-6
2.11.2 Mounting Cable Sealing End Type LXGA . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-8
2.11.2.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-9
2.12 Installation of the Dead-end Plugs for the Compact-cable
Sealing End Type EHSVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12-1
2.12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12-1
2.12.2 Installation of the Dead-end Plug Type EHSVSM . . . . . 2.12-1
2.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-1
2.13.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-1
2.13.2 Intermediate Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-1
2.13.3 Condition of Switchgear Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-1
2.13.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-2
2.13.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-2
2.13.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-2
2.13.7 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-3
2.13.7.1 Cable Gland with Earthing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-3
2.13.7.2 Cable Gland without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring 2.13-4
2.14 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-1
2.14.4 Installation of Control Cubicle and Optical Waveguide . 2.14-2
2.14.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-2
2.14.7 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-3
2.15 Bay Coupling 3150 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-1
2.15.1 Setting up and Aligning the First Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-1
2.15.2 Flange Joint with Plug Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-2
2.15.3 Coupling with Transverse Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.1 Mounting and Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.2 Connecting to Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.3 Mounting the Transversal Insertion Unit Compensator 2.15-5
2.15.3.4 Service and Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-6
2.15.3.5 Preparation of Conductor Connection for Test . . . . . . . . 2.15-7
2.15.4 Transversal Insertion Unit in Tube Connector . . . . . . . . 2.15-8
ToC − 3
Content
2.16 Bay Coupling 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-1

2.16.1 Setting up and aligning the first bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-1
2.16.2 Flange joints with plug contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-2
2.16.3 Coupling with transversal insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.1 Mounting and dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.2 Connecting to busbar: Principal procedure . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.3 Mounting the transversal insertion housing
compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-5
2.16.3.5 Preparation for test configuration of conductor
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-7
2.16.4 Transversal insertion housing on a pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-8
2.17 Split-up Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17-1
2.18 Silicon outdoor bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.18.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.18.2 Installation of silicon outdoor bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.19 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19-1
2.20 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation Equipment . . . . . 2.20-1
2.21 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21-1
2.22 Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-1
2.22.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-1
2.22.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-2
2.23 3-phase Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-1
2.23.1 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-1
2.23.2 Adjusting Gauge 1HDG 114 000 R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.23.3 Information on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.23.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.24 Busducts ................................................. 2.24-1
2.24.1 Connection with Double-ended Internal Insulators . . . . 2.24-1
2.24.2 Connection to External Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24-2
2.24.3 Busduct Installation without Transverse Erection . . . . . 2.24-4
2.24.4 Busduct Installation with Transverse Erection . . . . . . . . 2.24-4
2.25 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-1
2.25.1 Gas-Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-1
2.25.2 Inductive Rotary Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-2
2.25.2.1 Installation and alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-2
2.25.2.2 Calibration and check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-3
2.25.2.3 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-3
2.25.3 Inductive Proximity Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-4
2.25.4 Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-5
2.25.4.1 Operational description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-5
2.25.4.2 Installation of Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-6
2.25.4.3 Dismounting the Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-8
2.25.4.4 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-9
ToC − 4
Content
2.26 Test bushing on test adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26-1

2.26.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26-1
2.26.2 Connection with double-ended internal insulators . . . . 2.26-1
2.26.3 Installation of the test bushing on the test adapter . . . . 2.26-2
ToC − 5
Content
3 ¤ Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Setting up and Configuration of a PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.1 Abbreviations and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.2 PISA configuration (Release 1.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2.1 Entering configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2.2 Calibrating the spring-travel sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-7
3.1.3 Operating program and setup tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-8
3.1.3.1 Software Installation on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-8
3.1.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and script files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-9
3.1.4 PISA Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.2 Preparing REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.3 Setting up communication with PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-14
3.1.4.4 Functions in setup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-15
3.1.4.5 Example of PISA standard parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-22
3.2 Setup and Configuration of a PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.1 Abbrevations and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.2 PISA-Configuration (Release 1.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2.1 Input of Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2.2 Calibration of Spring Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-8
3.2.3 Operating Software and Setup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and Scriptfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-10
3.2.4 PISA Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-13
3.2.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-13
3.2.4.2 Preparation of the REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-14
3.2.4.3 Establishing the Communication with the PISA . . . . . . . 3.2-15
3.2.4.4 Functions in Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-17
3.2.4.5 Example for PISA Standard Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-24
3.2.4.6 Documentation of PISA Standard Parameters and
Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-26
ToC − 6
Content
3.3 System start SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1

3.3.1 SMART-GIS engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.2 SMART-GIS system start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.3 Starting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.3.1 Switching on REC580 and PISA simultaneously . . . . . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.2 Switching on PISA (REC580 in normal operating mode) 3.3-2
3.3.3.3 Switching on PISA (REC580 remains off) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.4 Switching on REC580 (PISA in “Stand-alone mode”) . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.5 Switching REC580 on while PISA remains off . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4 Behaviour in event of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4.1 Communication failure PISA <−> REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4.2 REC580 failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4.3 PISA failure while REC580 continues running . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.5 Stand-alone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.5.1 PISA without process bus communication . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.5.2 PISA after (re)connection of communication . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.6 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.3.6.1 Decommissioning a single drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.3.6.2 Decommissioning a single bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.4 System Start-up SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.1 Engineering of SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.2 SMART-GIS System Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.3 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.3.1 Simultaneous Switching-On of REC580 and PISAs . . . 3.4-2
3.4.3.2 Switching on PISA with REC580 in Normal Operation . 3.4-2
3.4.3.3 Switching on PISA with REC580 switched off . . . . . . . . 3.4-2
3.4.3.4 Switching on REC580 with PISA in “Stand-Alone Mode” 3.4-2
3.4.3.5 Switching on REC580 with PISA switched off . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4 Behaviour in case of Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.1 Communication Failure PISA <−> REC580 . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.3 Failure of PISA while REC580 continues to operate . . . 3.4-3
3.4.5 “Stand-Alone” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.5.1 PISA without Process Bus Communication . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.5.2 PISA after (Re-)Establishment of Communication . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.6 De-Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
3.4.6.1 De-Commissioning a single Operating Mechanism . . . 3.4-5
3.4.6.2 De-Commissioning a single bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
ToC − 7
Content
3.5 Commissioning of a SMART-GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1

3.5.2 Functional Test of Operating Mechanism and PISA . . . 3.5-1
3.5.2.1 SF6-Gas Compartment and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1
3.5.2.2 Functional Test of a combined Disconnector / Earthing
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-6
3.5.2.3 Functional Test of a Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-8
3.5.3 Check the Bay Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.1 REC580 Binary Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.2 REC580 Binary Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.3 Connection of Protection to the PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-16
3.5.4.1 Pump Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-16
3.5.4.2 Indication of non-executed Switching Commands . . . . 3.5-16
3.6 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-1
3.6.1 Tools for On-Site Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.2 Inspection after Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors . 3.6-3
3.6.5 Check of Gas Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.6 Dew Point Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.7 Visual Inspection & SF6 Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices 3.6-4
3.6.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-4
3.6.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . 3.6-5
3.7 Capacitive Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3.7.1 Setting and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3.7.2 Adjusting the Switching Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3.7.3 Matching the Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
ToC − 8
Content
3.8 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-1

3.8.1 Performance of the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-2
3.8.2 Calculation of the Test Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-3
3.8.3 Test Adapter GPFK 051 310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-4
3.8.3.1 Fitting the Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-6
3.8.3.2 Performance of the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-7
3.8.3.3 Demounting the Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-7
3.8.4 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-8
3.8.4.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position 3.8-10
3.8.4.2 Connection to the Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-12
3.8.4.3 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-12
3.8.4.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End Type EHSVS . . 3.8-13
3.8.5 High Voltage Test at the Bay with Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-14
3.8.6 High Voltage Test on the Outgoing-Feeder . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-18
3.8.7 HV-cable-test at cable end unit with
K&D-plug-in-contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-21
3.8.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-21
3.8.7.2 Carrying out the high voltage test at the cable . . . . . . . 3.8-21
3.9.3 Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-4
3.9.3.1 Content of the delivery pack for ELK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-6
3.9.4.2 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Disconnector 4000 A . . 3.9-13
3.9.5 High Voltage Test of Cables at the Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-16
3.9.6.1 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Feeder 4000 A . . . . . . . 3.9-23
3.9.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-24
ToC − 9
Content
4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Gas Density Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.1 Design and Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-2
4.2.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.3 Gas-Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.4 Arc Sensor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
4.5 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 - 40/50/63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-1
4.5.1 Circuit Breaker Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-2
4.5.2 Operating Principle of the Interrupting Chamber . . . . . . 4.5-3
4.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4
4.5.3.1 Circuit Breaker 40 kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4
4.5.3.4 Guaranteed Values to IEC (40 kA, 50 kA) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
4.5.3.5 Guaranteed Values to IEC (63 kA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-6
4.5.4 Operating Diagram for Circuit Breaker with 3pole
Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-7
4.6 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-CB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-1
4.6.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-4
4.7 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-1
4.7.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4
4.7.3.1 Switching Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4
4.7.3.2 Guaranteed Values to IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4
ToC − 10
Content
4.8 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-1

4.8.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components . . . . . . 4.8-1
4.8.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.2.1 Slow Switching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.2.2 Storage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-3
4.8.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-3
4.8.4 Instructions for the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-4
4.8.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness . . . . . . 4.8-4
4.8.4.2 Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-5
4.8.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-6
4.8.6 Spare Parts, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.7 Tightening Torques for Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.8 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.9 Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-8
4.9 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-1
4.9.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-2
4.9.1.1 Manually Operating the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . 4.9-2
4.9.1.2 Putting Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-3
4.9.2 Technical Data Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism . 4.9-4
4.10.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-2
4.11 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-1
4.11.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-2
ToC − 11
Content
4.12 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 04 DR 04 . . . . . . . 4.12-1

4.12.2 Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-5
4.12.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.3.2 Switch Position Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.3.3 Manual Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.3.4 Manual Control (Control Voltage Present) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-9
4.12.3.5 Manual Control (Control Voltage Absent) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-10
4.12.3.6 Position Interlocking with Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-11
4.12.3.7 Position interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.4.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.4.2 Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-14
4.12.4.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-15
4.12.4.4 Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-15
4.12.5 Operating Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-16
4.13 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present) . . . . . . . . . 4.13-5
4.13.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-9
4.13.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-10
4.13.3.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-10
4.13.3.3 Interlocking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-11
4.13.3.4 Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-12
4.14.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-6
4.14.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-6
4.14.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-12
4.14.4.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-12
4.15 Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15-1
ToC − 12
Content
4.16 Earthing Switch Type ELK-EB 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-1

4.16.1 Design and operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-1
4.16.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-2
4.16.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-3
4.16.4 Manual Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-4
4.16.4.3 Position Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-6
4.16.4.4 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-6
4.16.4.5 Cylinder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-7
4.16.5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-8
4.16.5.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-9
4.17.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-2
4.17.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-3
4.17.4.4 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-6
4.17.4.5 Cylinder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-7
4.17.5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-8
4.17.5.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-9
ToC − 13
Content
4.18 1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 4.18-1
4.18.1 Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-2
4.18.1.1 High Voltage Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-2
4.18.2 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-3
4.18.2.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-3
4.18.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-5
4.18.3.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-6
4.19 Separate Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19-1
4.21 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21-1
4.22 Inductive Voltage Transformer Type ELK-PI 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22-1
4.22.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22-2
4.23 Inductive Voltage Transformer 0.3 ZZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23-1
4.23.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23-2
4.24 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation Device . . . . . . . . . 4.24-1
4.24.2 Integrated Isolating Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-3
4.24.2.1 Description of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-3
4.24.2.2 Optical Switching Position Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-4
4.24.2.3 Electrical Switching Position Indication Manual
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.24.2.4 Electrical Switching Position Indication Automatic
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.24.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.25 Electro-optical voltage sensor EOVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-1
4.25.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-1
4.25.2 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-2
4.25.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-3
4.26 Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26-1
4.26.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26-4
4.27 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27-1
4.27.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27-2
4.28 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28-1
4.28.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28-2
ToC − 14
Content
4.29 3-Phase GIS-Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29-1

4.29.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29-2
4.30 Composite insulating bushing type VDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30-1
4.30.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30-2
4.31 Composite insulating bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.31.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.31.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.32 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32-1
4.33 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1 PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1.2 Commissioning/decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-2
4.33.1.3 Structure / functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-2
4.33.1.4 Measured data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-3
4.33.1.5 Visualisation and interpretation of the data . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-4
4.33.1.6 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-5
4.33.2.1 Design and operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-6
4.33.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-7
4.33.3 Inductive Proximity Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-8
4.33.3.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-9
4.33.4 Main Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-10
4.33.4.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-11
4.34.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.34-3
4.35 Mounting UHF PD sensor on barrier insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35-1
4.36 High Voltage Detection System on Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . 4.36-1
4.36.1 Design and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36-1
4.36.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36-4
ToC − 15
Content
4.37 Camera box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1

4.37.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1
4.37.2 Security notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1
4.37.3 Contents of the camera box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-2
4.37.4 Operation of the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-3
4.37.4.1 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-3
4.37.4.2 Turn on the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.4.3 Select the input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.4.4 Adjusting the picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-5
4.37.6 De-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-6
4.37.7 Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-6
4.37.8 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-7
4.38 Free Standing Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.38-1
4.40 Integrated Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40-1
4.44 Outdoor Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44-1
4.45 Control Cubicle (Outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.45-1
4.45.1 Earthing of Protective Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.45-2
4.46 Control Cubicle (Indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.46-1
4.48 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.48-1
4.49 Heat Balance of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49-1
4.50 Power Demand Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.50-1
4.51 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-1
4.51.1 Circuit-Breaker Control ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-1
4.51.2 Circuit-Breaker Control OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-2
4.51.3 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-3
4.51.4 Hydraulic-Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-4
4.51.5 Disconnector / Earthing-Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-5
4.51.6 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-6
4.51.7 Functions on Bay Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-7
4.51.8 Position Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-8
4.51.9 Alarm Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-9
ToC − 16
Content

4.52.4 Hydraulic Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-4
4.52.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-5
4.52.6 Control Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-6
4.52.7 Functions on the Bay Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-7
4.52.9 Alarm Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-9
4.53.1 Circuit Breaker Control ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-1
4.53.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-2
4.53.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-3
4.53.6 Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-6
4.53.7 Functions on the Process Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-7
4.54.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF with redundant PISA . . . . 4.54-2
4.54.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision with redundant PISA . . . . . 4.54-3
4.54.5 Diconnector/Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54-5
4.54.6 Fast Acting Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54-6
4.55 Conventional Bay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1.2 Additional Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.1.3 Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.1.4 Optional Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-3
4.55.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control . . . . . 4.55-6
ToC − 17
Content
4.56 Control System: Conventional Substation Automation . . . . . . . 4.56-1

4.56.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-1
4.56.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-1
4.56.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-2
4.56.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-4
4.56.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-8
4.56.3 Completion of SCADA-System Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-9
4.57 Control via SCADA Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-3
4.57.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-5
4.57.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-11
4.58 SMART-GIS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-3
4.58.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-5
4.58.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-11
4.59 Mobile Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1 Preparation for Changing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.1 Equipment Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.2 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.3 Protection Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.4 SF6 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.2 Preparation for Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.1 SF6 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.5 Equipment Position for Mounting the Down Droppers . 4.59-2
4.59.2.6 Equipment Position before Energizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
ToC − 18
Content
5 ¤ Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1
5.2 SF6 Gas Moisture Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.1 Replacing the Bursting Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.2.2 Replacing the SF6 Gas Moisture Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.2.3 Mounting the Bursting Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.3 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.4 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.5 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1
5.5.1 Inspection of Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism . . 5.5-2
5.5.2 Exchanging the Interrupting Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.2.1 Dismounting Interrupting Chamber (3pole Drive) . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.2.3 Reassembly of Interrupting Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-6
5.5.2.4 Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-6
5.5.2.5 Test for Correct Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-6
5.5.2.6 Test for Reference Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-6
5.5.3 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-7
5.6 Circuit Breaker 50 / 63 kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-1
5.6.2 Changing of the Interrupting Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-3
5.6.2.6 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-6
5.7.1 Inspection of Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-2
5.7.2 Inspection of Main Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.7.2.1 Visual Inspection at the Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.7.2.2 Visual Inspection at the Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.7.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-5
5.7.3.1 Overhaul of the Main Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-5
5.7.3.2 Dismounting the Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . 5.7-5
5.7.3.3 Replacing Moving Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-7
5.7.3.4 Replacing Fixed Contact Disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-7
5.7.3.5 Replacing Fixed Contact Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-7
ToC − 19
Content
5.8 Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1

5.8.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-6
5.8.3.3 Replacing the Switching Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-9
5.9 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . . . . . . 5.9-1
5.9.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-3
5.9.2 Inspection of the Conducting Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-3
5.9.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-4
5.9.4 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-4
5.11 High Voltage Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-1
5.12 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1 PISA-self-monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1.1 Group alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1.2 Position sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-2
5.12.1.3 SF6 Gas-density sensors, gas-density monitoring . . . . 5.12-3
5.12.1.4 Spring-travel sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-5
5.12.1.5 Protection input circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-7
5.12.1.6 Output circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-8
5.12.1.7 Monitoring switching functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-9
5.12.1.8 Monitoring the hydraulic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-11
5.12.1.9 PISA internal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-12
5.12.2 REC580-self-monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-15
5.12.2.1 Implicit monitoring of process bus devices . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-15
5.12.2.2 Implicit monitoring of REC580 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-16
5.12.2.3 Programmable monitoring of external elements . . . . . . 5.12-16
5.12.3 Standard signal texts and project-specific signal texts . 5.12-18
ToC − 20
Content
5.13 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1

5.13.1 PISA Self-Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1
5.13.1.1 Position Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-2
5.13.1.2 SF6 Gas Density Sensors, Gas Density Supervision . . 5.13-3
5.13.1.3 Spring Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-5
5.13.1.4 Protection Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-7
5.13.1.5 Output Ciruits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-8
5.13.1.6 Monitoring of Switching Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-9
5.13.1.7 Monitoring of Hydraulic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-10
5.13.1.8 Internal PISA Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-11
5.13.1.9 Communication Failure PISA <-> REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-12
5.13.2 REC580 Self Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-13
5.13.2.1 Implicit Supervision of Process Bus Devices . . . . . . . . . 5.13-13
5.13.2.2 Implicit Supervision of REC580-Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-14
5.13.2.3 Freely programmable Supervision of External Elements 5.13-14
5.13.3 Signal Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-16
5.14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-1
5.14.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker . . . 5.14-1
5.14.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-2
5.14.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-2
5.14.4 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 5.14-2
5.14.5 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-3
5.14.6 Other Switchgear Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-3
5.15 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.2 Information on Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.3 GIS Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-2
5.15.4 Material of the GIS-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-6
5.15.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components . . . 5.15-8
ToC − 21
Content
1 ¤ Delivery
Content
1.1 Transport ................................................. 1.1-1
1.1.1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.3 Container data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.5 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.2 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses in transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.4 Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.5 Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-1
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.1 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.2 Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.4 Parts and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3
1.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5
1-1
¤ Delivery
1.1 Transport
1.1.1 Packaging
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements
The following factors must be taken into account when packaging equipment for
shipping:
− stresses occurring during multiple transshipments
− climatic conditions
− shipping routes
− duration of shipment (preservation, environmental factors)
− storage after shipment
− bottoms of containers must be designed to carry the full load of the package
equipment
− packaging must be able to withstand stresses caused by weight and by
forces occurring during transportation
− packaging must be geared to the intended type of transportation and de-
signed to preclude any damage to the equipment
− packaging / equipment may be provided with shock indicators
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging
Wooden support/skid and protective sheeting

− Only for shipment by truck, by rail or by airway
− Not suitable for storage
− To receive on crane use only the crane-eyelets of the switchgear!
Wooden box
− For shipment by truck, rail or ship
− Suitable for storage
Container
− For shipment by truck, rail or ship
− Suitable for storage
Requirements for container

− Container must have nailable wooden floors
Types of container
− within Europe: − Type HTT 6.254 (20’)
− overseas (to ISO standards): − Type 20/8 and 20/8 ½
− 20’ steel dry cargo container
door height 2.26 − 2.28 m
door height 2.58 m
− If containers with any other designations are used, they must be equivalent
to those listed above.
1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-1

¤ Delivery
General container requirements

− Containers holding dangerous goods must be CSC-certified
− Containers bearing the ACEP mark are approved for unrestricted use
− Containers must be checked for proper technical condition prior to shipment
(Containers provided with the ACEP mark have been inspected by the manu-
facturer)
1.1.1.3 Container data

Container data concerning weight and dimensions should, as far as possible, be
geared to the related data for the intended means of transportation.
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors

Equipment may be shipped at temperatures in the range of −30°C to +60°C. The
packaging must ensure that all items of equipment are positively protected against
any direct contact with water. The packing shall provided adequate protection against
dirt, insects and animals.
1.1.1.5 Preservation
The shipment within Europe, specifications concerning equipment preservation shall
be included in the order. If no preservative measures are specified, the freight will be
packaged in the usual manner.
The preservation required depends on the method of transportation, the storage

classification and the storage period.
Storage requirements and classifications are described in detail in chapter “Delivery”

in document “Storage” 1HDG 518 101.
In the case of ocean transport, preservation of the equipment is mandatory, since

ELK-04 components could be damaged by the associated exposure to humidity.
Protection against condensation of humidity is provided for a transportation period of

up to 12 months. If this period is exceeded, adequate measures must be taken to pre-
vent the formation of condensation water.
The packaging may be monitored by means of moisture indicators.
If the expiry date of equipment preservation falls within the period before or during
shipment, or within the expected storage period, persons responsible for ship-
ment / storage shall be informed in due time so that appropriate measures can be
taken.
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment

For transportation the equipment is filled with N2 to a absolute pressure of 150 kPa.
The gas pressure shall not drop below 110 kPa during shipment and storage.
All open flanges must be sealed with a shipping cover.
Shipping covers are chosen according to 1HDG 931 100 (for buses without insulators
according to 1HDG 931 101 P1).

¤ Delivery
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment

Packing and unpacking of equipment shall always take a place in a dry
(air-conditioned) environment.
When unpacking switchgear components, check shock indicators on packag-

ing / equipment, if provided.
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment

Free-standing parts shall be provided with appropriate support structures.
All loads shall be prevented from slipping by lashing and blocking. Means of securing
equipment in place: Chains, lashes, ropes, square timber and wooden wedges.
Make sure that loads are evenly distributed.
The side walls of shipping containers shall not be subjected to any loads. Only con-
tainer bottoms are designed to withstand loading and possess sufficient stability.
The circuit breaker shall be shipped only in its upright (operating) position.
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks

Markings provided on the packaging shall include fixing and hitching points for trans-
portation and hoisting, total weight, installation point of equipment components, and
the packed unit’s centre of gravity.
The place of delivery shall be marked on the packaging in accordance with the data
provided in the order.
When dangerous goods are shipped, applicable regulations (of the countries of origin
and destination as well as transit countries) shall complied with.

¤ Delivery
1.1.2 Shipping
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities
To prevent equipment and parts from being damaged during loading and lifting oper-
ations, the facilities shall be suitable for this purpose in terms of intended applications
and load-carrying capacities.
When moving or lifting packed equipment, make sure that no other than the fixing and
hitching points marked on the packaging are used.
Switchbays and components which are not packed may be lifted at suitable hitching
points, provided that every precaution has been taken to prevent these parts from
being damaged in the process.
The shipping units’ centre of gravity markings shall be taken into account to prevent
the units from tipping over.
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation

The means of transportation be selected so as to ensure that the shipping units will be
subjected to the smallest-possible amount of vibration. Any damage to the equipment
must be prevented by all means.
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses in transportation

The forces are shown in Figure 1.1-1:
FL
FQ
FV
direction
Figure 1.1-1: Forces and stresses in transportation
Table 1.1-1: Forces in g (g = Acceleration due to gravity)
FL FV FQ
Railway 4.0 g 0.5 g 0.4 g
Road 1.0 g 2.0 g 0.6 g
Ship 0.4 g 2.0 g 0.8 g
Note During loading and lifting operations higher values may occur.

¤ Delivery
1.1.3 Inspections
Before shipment
Prior to closing the shipping containers, make sure that the equipment to be shipped
is properly secured and without damage.
Check shipping containers for proper technical condition. This is particularly important
in the case of freight containers.
After shipment
Check shipping container for any damage before opening.
After opening a container, immediately check the equipment for external damage and
completeness.
1.1.4 Irregularities
During shipment
Any damage occurring on the packaging in transit shall, as far as possible, be re-
paired immediately. If this cannot be done, appropriate measures shall be taken at
once to preclude any further damage to the cargo.
All irregularities occurring during shipment as well as any remedial action taken shall
be documented and reported.
After shipment
In the event of any damage detected on the packaging or equipment, the insurance
company should be called in and the damage should be assessed and recorded by an
authorized agent.
Photographs should be taken of any damaged packaging to serve as evidence at a

later time.
Any packaging which is damaged or soaked shall under no circumstances be used for
prolonged storage of equipment.
Any corrective action taken with regard to packaging or equipment preservation shall
be recorded in detail. All materials used for these measure must have been tested
and approved.

¤ Delivery
1.1.5 Standards and regulations

The most important standards and regulations are:
− DIN 50 010 climatic definitions
− DIN 50 019 climates with regard to technology
− DIN 55 402 markings
− DIN 55 405 packaging
− DIN ISO 668 freight container
These standards also make reference to other pertinent standards which must be ob-
served as well.
Additional regulations, guidelines and instruction sheets have been issued by the fol-
lowing organizations:
− German Lloyd (GL-Regulations and codes of practice)
German Lloyd (GL-Vorschriften und Richtlinien)
− Association for Rationalization in Packaging/Packaging Consulting and Re-
search Office (RGV / BFSV Instruction sheets)
Rationalisierungsgesellschaft Verpackung/Beratungs- und Forschungsstelle
Verpackung (RGV / BFSV-Betriebsblätter)
− Association of german Engineers (VDI-Regulations and -Guidelines)
Verein deutscher Ingenieure (VDI-Vorschriften und -Richtlinien)
These regulations, guidelines, instruction sheets and the relevant standards must be
equally observed.
Standards and regulations of the country of destination shall be considered, if appli-

cable.
Applicable regulations and guidelines issued by ABB shall also be observed.

¤ Delivery
1.2 Receiving Inspection

Note All gas compartments of the individual GIS transport units are filled in our factory with N2
to a pressure of approximately 150 kPa. The only exception is the inductive voltage
transformer that will be delivered ex works filled with SF6 to a pressure of approximately
150 kPa. In order to detect transport damages as early as possible, check the pressure
upon arrival of the equipment at site. Gas compartments that are not pressurized have
to be checked for gas tightness prior to assembly of the transport units.
Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_____of_____

Table 1.2-1: Receiving Inspection
Number of Storage
Date Checked by Remarks, Measures, Checks
Transport Unit Class
1HDG 518 100 en 26.06.1998 ACEMEWE 29.06.1998 ACEHENE 1.2-1

¤ Delivery
1.3 Storage
1.3.1 Packing
Storage life depends on the types of packing material and drying agent being used.
Unless otherwise stated, items should remain in the original packing. The storage time
indicated in the delivery documents must not be exceeded.
Note Immediately unpack modules in damaged packing. Parts supplied sealed in plastic or
aluminium foil without damages should be handled with care and should not be unpacked
until shortly before required.
1.3.2 Storage Requirements

All storage areas must comply with the following general requirements:
S Good accessibility for transport and inspection
S Protection against damages
S Restricted access for authorized personnel only
S Guaranteed fire protection
S The storage area must be clean and free from unused packing material
S When stocking, the moisture contents of the packing must be considered
S Flammable material must be stored in a strictly separated area
S Compliance with all local regulations and requirements must be guaranteed
1.3.3 Classification
Every product must be protected from being damaged. This requires a definition of the
individual storage conditions. The classification will be defined from A through F as
follows:
A B C
F
D
E
A − Airconditioned storage building D − Tarpaulin

B − Storage building E − Unprotected outdoor storage
C − Shelter roof F − Container
Figure 1.3-1: Storage Classification

¤ Delivery
Table 1.3-1: Product Example
Classification A B C D E F
Instruments (electrical and electronic) or similarly sensitive

D
products
Paints D
Robust switchgear D
Less sensitive material D
Aluminium parts D
General outdoor material D
Hot dipped galvanized material D
Epoxy cast resin D
Table 1.3-2: Protection against ...
Pressure from stacking and/or excessive cramped packing D D D D D D
Mechanical damage D D D D D D
Rain and snow D D D D
Salty air D D D D
Extreme temperatures (beyond the permissible range) D D D
Detrimental humidity D D D
Temperatures supporting condensation D D
Dust pollution D D
Temperatures below −5 °C D
Table 1.3-3: Storage Requirements
If not stated otherwise, product remains in original packing D D D D D D
Covered by shelter roof, protection against rain and snow D D D D
Fully enclosed D D
With temperature control according to the required storage

D D
temperature
Storage in refrigerated room D
With air filter, protection against dust and detrimental humidity D
With temperature control to prevent condensation D D
Protection against rats, insects etc. D D D

¤ Delivery
With ventilation D
With tarpaulin at minimum 400 mm above the product, sloped

D
for water shedding
With possibility for ventilation (open containers) D
Good drainage required D D
Containers respectively products to be stored at minimum 200

D D
mm above the floor
No standing water on the product D
1.3.4 Parts and Material

Table 1.3-4: Classification of Parts and Material for Site Storage
Parts Material, General Instructions Classification Inspections during Checks before Use
Finish storage
GIS bays and Store in the original Refer to Instructions

Subassemblies packing F for Installation and
Commissioning
If delivered on heavy
goods vehicle
C
If storage period is lon-
ger than 1 month, con-
nect the heaters in the
drive mechanisms
Control Cabinets Electrical Store in the original Measure humidity Touch up any dama-
Control Centers Equipment packing every 6 months ges to the paint finish
B
If storage period is lon- If relative humidity
ger than 1 month, con- exceeds 60 %, renew
nect the heaters in the drying agent
control cabinets
Bushings Porcelain Do not bend during sto- Check every Clean the surfaces
and rage 12 months whether all with Rivolta MTX forte
Silicon parts are dry; if not,
Bushings with sealing B refer to “Checks befo-
rings − refer to rubber re Use”
parts below
Make sure that the
Refer to the instructions parts are not subject
on the packing to stress of any kind

¤ Delivery
Parts Material, General Instructions Classification Inspections during Checks before Use
Finish storage
Flat Gaskets Rubber Store in the original pak- Check elapsed If necessary, clean
O-rings king storage time with soap and water or
O-seals a solution of 1.5 %
Sealing rings Protect from compres- Check surfaces for soda in water
sion, tension and twisting scoring or scratches
B
Protect from direct sun- Check the condition of Rinse with clear water
light and artificial light the vulcanized joints after cleaning
with a high ultra violet
contents Note:
The water temperature
Do not store together must be equal to the
with copper, manganese ambient temperature
metals or plastic foils
Steel Sections Hot dipped Material must be stored Check tarpaulins for Remove the white
galvanized on beams raised at mini- damages and replace, rust-preventive coating
mum 30 cm above the if necessary
floor E
Remove any rusty

binding wires
Bolts, Nuts Hot dipped Store in the original B

galvanized wooden and cardboard
steel boxes
Silver plated Alu- Galvanic The parts can be Check elapsed stora- Remove the transport
minium and Cop- and special stacked, but must be ge time packing
per processes secured against any
movement Randomly check Degrease the silver
silver plated surfaces plated surfaces with
Flexible copper and alu- B Rivolta MTX forte
minium connections shall Check cycle: every Fully remove all remai-
be stored in an upright 6 months in the first ning spots and marks
position and slotted into year, every 12 months
each other thereafter Grease the contact
surfaces with acid free
Check 6 months prior petroleum jelly (vaseli-
to use ne) and protect them
with crepe paper
Castings, Sheet Aluminium Store in the original Check for water pene- Use in accordance
Metal, Sections crates tration after heavy with manufacturer’s
and Tubes out of D rain fall instructions
Aluminiumm Crates must be stored
on beams raised at Check tarpaulins for
minimum 30 cm above damages and replace,
the floor if necessary
Paints, lacquers, Do not store next to any A Randomly check six

thinners, harde- heat source months prior to use
ners

¤ Delivery
1.3.5 Checks
The following checks shall be performed and documented upon delivery to site and
periodically thereafter (take photos of any damages):
S Product designation
S Tightness of packing, covering, sheds and other protective means
S Check the heater connections / activate the heaters
S Check the transport gas filling for appropriate pressure
S Document any mechanical damages
S Keep the storage area clean
S Conform with any additional storage requirements of the manufacturer
S Conform with any additional site storage instructions
S Keep all packing properly sealed to reduce the oxidizing effect of the air

¤ Delivery
1.4 Building requirements

1.4.1 Static and dynamic loads
Leistungsschalter Kabelendverschluss
Circuit Breaker Cable Sealing End
405 405
100
230
20 kN
350 350
700
1 2
700
810
470
20 kN
100
300 1715 1150 350 650
1000
700 1670
2370
1 SF6 mount base (MSH100)

2 dynamic load points of circuit breaker
Figure 1.4-1: Load points double busbar bay with cable sealing end, VT and LCC
Figure 1.4-1 represents a typical double busbar feeder. the loads result from static
and dynamic forces due to bay weight and circuit breaker operation.
For each individual layout, the mechanical forces are calculated and a corresponding
drawing is made.
Static loads
The loads below are calculated per SF6 mount base.

− 2 busbars without Voltage Transformer and Local Control Cubicle 15 kN
− 1 busbar without Voltage Transformer and Local Control Cubicle 12,5 kN
− additional load for Local Control Cubicle 2 kN
− additional load for Voltage Transformer 3 kN
− 2 busbars 4000A with Voltage Transformer and Local Control Cubicle 21 kN
1HDG 118 100 I en 01.06.2004 CHSGAKP 16.08.2004 CHSVOTH 1.4-1

¤ Delivery
Dynamic loads
The dynamic loads are measured in a normal industrial building.
Table 1.4-1: Dynamic loads due to 40 kA design
Load Case Load per point (kN) Impulse time (ms) f (Hz)
On-operation −2.8/2.8 20 − 50 65
Off-operation −8/5 10 − 30 45
Table 1.4-2: Dynamic loads due to 50 kA design
On-operation − 4.3/4.3 20 − 50 65
Off-operation − 12/8 10 − 30 45
The dynamic loads are evenly distributed on the four load points (2). The forces up-
wards (32 kN/40 kA, 48 kN/50 kA) are reduced by the weight of the bay.
Installation
The bay is delivered with a base frame. The base frame will be welded on a
straightening iron (C-rail), which is integrated in the concrete floor.
If there is no iron structure , the GIS supports are to be mounted with chemical
anchors M16 x 190 mm or equivalent.
Max. tensile load per anchor in concrete with minimum stability B25/DIN 1045 is
15 kN. Dowel depth: 125 mm.

¤ Delivery
1.4.2 Building requirements and dimensions

Figure 1.4-1 and Figure 1.4-3 show the recommended dimensions for a GIS in double
busbar layout. Other layouts may require smaller or larger dimensions.
The room tolerances and planeness shoud be equal or better than DIN 18202 which
means:
Planeness (mm) 5 8 12 15 20
on Distance (m) 0.1 1 4 10 15
Final overall dimensions are to be defined in cooperation with the client.
Option
3600
2925
2370
500
(minimum space
900
(ususal case)
for walking)
min. 1700
2500
1600
3900
ca. 4900
7000
Figure 1.4-2: Side View double busbar feeder
Factors to be considered for building dimensions:

S Existing building or other installed equipment
S Type of HV connentions: Cable, transformer SF6 gas-to-oil bushing or SF6-air
bushing
S High voltage cable data, type and outlet direction
S Location of GIS local control cabinets
S Type of lifting device

¤ Delivery
The recommended lifting capacity (depending on the weight of heaviest transport unit)
is 50 kN, service crane: 10 kN
For vertical connection, the cable basement normally has a height of 2.5 m.
WxH = 3000*3000
7000
C160
Circuit
Breaker
C160
min. 2500 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1500

ca. 12500
Figure 1.4-3: Plan View
Figure 1.4-3 shows a 7-bay arrangement. The standard width of a bay is1.2 m.
The building dimension can easily be determined based on the number of bays.
For a convenient and fast HV-cable sealing end assembly, openings for the cables
made 0.7 x 1.0 m are recommended, see Figure 1.4-1. For special cases, contact
ABB.
The large front door (see left side in Figure 1.4-3) is the equipment access door
(width x height = 3 m x 3 m). The second door is a standard door, which is provided
for convenience and safety.

¤ Delivery
1.5 Building requirements

1.5.1 Static and dynamic loads
Circuit Breaker Cable Sealing End

405 405
100
230
27 kN
350 350
100
810
3 2 1 4
700
700
470
27 kN
300 1715 1670 350 650
1000
700 2190
2890
1 SF6 mount base (MSH100)
2 dynamic load points of circuit breaker
3 4 measuring points for dynamic reaction forces
Figure 1.5-1: Load points double busbar bay with cable sealing end, VT and LCC
Figure 1.5-1 represents a typical double busbar feeder. the loads result from static
and dynamic forces due to bay weight and circuit breaker operation.
For each individual layout, the mechanical forces are calculated and a corresponding
drawing is made.
1HDG 118 123 A en 27.07.2004 CHSGAKP 16.08.2004 CHSVOTH 1.5-1

¤ Delivery
Static loads
The loads below are calculated per SF6 mount base.

− 2 busbars without Voltage Transformer and Local Control Cubicle 22 kN
− 1 busbar without Voltage Transformer and Local Control Cubicle 19 kN
− additional load for Local Control Cubicle 2 kN
− additional load for Voltage Transformer 3 kN
Dynamic loads
The dynamic loads are measured in a normal industrial building.
Load per point (kN) Impulse time (ms) f (Hz)
Load point (3) - 4.3 / 4.3 20 - 50 65
Load point (4) - 12 / 8 10 - 30 45
Table 1.5-1: Dynamic loads due to 63/50 kA design
On-operation - 4.3/ 4.3 20 - 50 65

(tension/pressure)
Off-operation - 12 / 8 10 - 30 45
(tension/pressure)
The dynamic loads are evenly distributed on the load points (2). The forces upwards
(48 kN / 63 kA) are reduced by the weight of the bay.
Installation
The bay is delivered with a base frame. The base frame will be welded on a
straightening iron (C-rail), which is integrated in the concrete floor.
If there is no iron structure , the GIS supports are to be mounted with chemical
anchors M16 x 190 mm or equivalent.
Max. tensile load per anchor in concrete with minimum stability B25/DIN 1045 is
15 kN. Dowel depth: 125 mm.

¤ Delivery
1.5.2 Building requirements and dimensions

Figure 1.5-1 and Figure 1.5-3 show the recommended dimensions for a GIS in double
busbar layout. Other layouts may require smaller or larger dimensions.
The room tolerances and planeness should be equal or better than DIN 18202 which
means:
Planeness (mm) 5 8 12 15 20
on Distance (m) 0.1 1 4 10 15
Final overall dimensions are to be defined in cooperation with the client.
Option
3800
3150
2570
500
900
(minimum space
(ususal case)
for walking)
min. 1700
1600
2500
3900
5400
7500
Figure 1.5-2: Side View double busbar feeder

¤ Delivery
Factors to be considered for building dimensions:

S Existing building or other installed equipment
S Type of HV connentions: Cable, transformer, SF6 gas-to-oil bushing or
SF6-air bushing
S High voltage cable data, type and outlet direction
S Location of GIS local control cabinets
S Type of lifting device
The recommended lifting capacity (depending on the weight of heaviest transport unit)
is 50 kN, service crane: 10 kN
For vertical connection, the cable basement normally has a height of 2.5 m.
2680
WxH = 3000*3000
1200
C160
7500
Circuit
Breaker
2020
C160
ca. 2500 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1600
ca. 12000
Figure 1.5-3: Plan View
Figure 1.5-3 shows a 7-bay arrangement. The standard width of a bay is 1.2 m.
The building dimension can easily be determined based on the number of bays.
For a convenient and fast HV-cable sealing end assembly, openings for the cables
made 0.7 x 1.0 m are recommended, see Figure 1.5-1. For special cases, contact
ABB.
The large front door (left side in Figure 1.5-3) is the equipment access door (width x
height = 3 m x 3 m).
The second door is a standard access door, which is provided for convenience and
safety.

Content
2 ¤ Installation
Content
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-2
2.1.3 Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-3
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-5
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-5
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
2.3 Outdoor Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.1 Operating Mechanism and Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.2 Outdoor Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.4 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1
2.4.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-2
2.4.2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-2
2.4.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.4 Local Control Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.5 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4
2.4.6 Busduct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-6
2.4.7 Surge Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-7
2.4.8 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-7
2.5 Mobile working platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.6 1pole Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.2 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.3 Mechanical check for correct operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.4 Electrical check for correct operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.6.5 Power-consumption check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.7 Cable Sealing End Type TPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-1
2.7.1 Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.1.1 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.1.2 Installation Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-3
2.7.2 Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-4
2.8 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-1
2.8.1 Preparation of Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-3
2.8.2 Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-4
2.9 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-1
2.9.1 Fitting of Cast-resin Insulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-2
2.9.2 Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9-3
2-1
Content
2.10 Cables (HPFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10-1

2.10.1 Mounting Fixed Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10-1
2.11 Cables (IEC, LXGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-1
2.11.1 Mounting Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-1
2.11.1.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.3 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.4 Mounting Variants for Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-5
2.11.1.5 Example Fixed Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-6
2.11.2 Mounting Cable Sealing End Type LXGA . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-8
2.11.2.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-9
2.12 Installation of the Dead-end Plugs for the Compact-cable
Sealing End Type EHSVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12-1
2.12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12-1
2.12.2 Installation of the Dead-end Plug Type EHSVSM . . . . . 2.12-1
2.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-1
2.13.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-2
2.13.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-2
2.13.7 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13-3
2.14 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-1
2.14.4 Installation of Control Cubicle and Optical Waveguide . 2.14-2
2.14.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-2
2.14.7 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14-3
2-2
Content
2.15 Bay Coupling 3150 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-1

2.15.1 Setting up and Aligning the First Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-1
2.15.2 Flange Joint with Plug Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-2
2.15.3 Coupling with Transverse Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.1 Mounting and Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.2 Connecting to Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15-3
2.15.3.3 Mounting the Transversal Insertion Unit Compensator 2.15-5
2.15.3.5 Preparation of Conductor Connection for Test . . . . . . . . 2.15-7
2.15.4 Transversal Insertion Unit in Tube Connector . . . . . . . . 2.15-8
2.16 Bay Coupling 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-1
2.16.1 Setting up and aligning the first bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-1
2.16.2 Flange joints with plug contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-2
2.16.3 Coupling with transversal insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.1 Mounting and dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.2 Connecting to busbar: Principal procedure . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-3
2.16.3.3 Mounting the transversal insertion housing
compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-5
2.16.3.5 Preparation for test configuration of conductor
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-7
2.16.4 Transversal insertion housing on a pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-8
2.17 Split-up Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17-1
2.18 Silicon outdoor bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.18.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.18.2 Installation of silicon outdoor bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18-1
2.19 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19-1
2.20 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation Equipment . . . . . 2.20-1
2.21 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21-1
2.22 Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-1
2.22.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-1
2.22.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22-2
2.23 3-phase Direct Transformer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-1
2.23.1 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-1
2.23.2 Adjusting Gauge 1HDG 114 000 R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.23.3 Information on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.23.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23-2
2.24 Busducts ................................................. 2.24-1
2.24.1 Connection with Double-ended Internal Insulators . . . . 2.24-1
2.24.2 Connection to External Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24-2
2.24.3 Busduct Installation without Transverse Erection . . . . . 2.24-4
2.24.4 Busduct Installation with Transverse Erection . . . . . . . . 2.24-4
2-3
Content
2.25 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-1

2.25.1 Gas-Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-1
2.25.2.1 Installation and alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-2
2.25.2.2 Calibration and check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-3
2.25.2.3 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-3
2.25.3 Inductive Proximity Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-4
2.25.4 Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-5
2.25.4.1 Operational description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-5
2.25.4.2 Installation of Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-6
2.25.4.3 Dismounting the Optical Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-8
2.25.4.4 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-9
2.26 Test bushing on test adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26-1
2.26.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26-1
2.26.2 Connection with double-ended internal insulators . . . . 2.26-1
2.26.3 Installation of the test bushing on the test adapter . . . . 2.26-2
2-4
¤ Installation
2.1 Installation of the GIS

These instructions refer to the installation of a GIS and to all works that require open-
ing a gas compartment.
WARNING! All actions described in this chapter may only be executed if all notes, cautions and
warnings of the product documentation, especially the safety instructions in
chapter “Operating Instructions” in document 1HDG 518 020 “Safety Instruc-
tions” have been read and were understood and that all given conditions are ful-
filled. Otherwise, the manufacturer will not take any responsibility due to damages
caused by improperly handling.
It must be possible to clean the shoes before entering the immediate working area.
The working clothes must be made of non-fluffing material.
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area

Securing the Installation Area:
The installation area must be secured against entry of unauthorized personnel.
Power Supply:
The following power supply outlets must be made available in the installation area:
S 1-phase AC outlets (16 A) and
S 3-phase AC outlets (16 A)
Walls and Ceilings:

S Walls and ceilings have to be in a condition, that neither dirt nor plaster might
fall or rub off
S If necessary, apply a surface-binding coat of paint
S Formation of condensation water on the ceiling has to be prevented under
any circumstance
Floor Conditions:
S The floor in the installation area must have a firm surface
S It must be possible to keep the floor dust-free with a vacuum cleaner
Outdoor Installation:
S In case of an outdoor installation of the GIS or of GIS components, open gas
compartments must be protected from the entry of dust or humidity (e. g. by
means of installation covers, tarpaulins etc.)
Room for Repair Works:
A room must be provided for necessary repair works that is:

S weather protected
S lockable
S separated from the installation area
1HDG 518 200 K en 22.05.2006 EXTMEHA 24.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.1-1

¤ Installation
2.1.2 Cleaning
CAUTION SF6 can loose its arc quenching and insulating properties when contaminated. For
this reason, all surfaces and components that will be in contact with SF6 have been
thoroughly cleaned in our factory and have been installed under conditions of ut-
most cleanliness. When working on open devices or gas compartments, avoid the
entry of or contact with dirt, sweat and humidity at any time.
Water, acid contamination and oxygen (especially when simultaneously present) can
cause corrosion that might have a negative impact on the mechanical function of the
GIS components.
Water, especially when combined with acid contamination, can reduce the dielectric
strength of the GIS due to condensation at low operating temperatures and high pres-
sure. For this reason, the degree of contamination has to be limited to a level that cor-
rosion and/or condensation are of no significance.
Installation Area:
Prior to opening a gas compartment, thoroughly clean and vacuum clean the installa-
tion area, especially in the immediate vicinity of the flanges to be connected. Avoid
dust disturbance in the installation area.
Note Carry out a visual inspection of the interior of an open gas compartment.
Note Rub the insulators and all teflon parts with a cloth moistened with a suitable cleaning
agent. Cleaned insulators may only be touched wearing disposable latex gloves. Do not
use water for cleaning under any circumstance!
Cleaning the GIS Components:
Immediately before assembly, clean all loose metal parts and subassemblies that
have to be installed and all contacting and sealing surfaces.
Table 2.1-1: Material and cleaning agent
Material Cleaning agent
Flange sealing surfaces and O-rings

Contacting surfaces of the conductors
Connectors Rivolta M.T.X. 60 (preferably)
Links Ethanol 99
Screens Isopropanol, purity min. 99%
Insulators
Teflon parts
painted surfaces of the GIS pure water or soap suds (0.5%)
Silicon shielding of the bushing Wacker Silicon-Oilemulsion E 1044

¤ Installation
Use a non-fluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent. Rub all parts
with this cloth. Take note of the following:
S Try to avoid touching the components internal to the gas compartments
S Use disposable gloves for cleaning
S Use a spray bottle to prevent contamination of the cleaning agent
S Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the
cleaning agent
S Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
S Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth
Cleaning the painted GIS:
Painted surfaces are only allowed to be cleaned by means of pure water or soap suds
(0.5%).
Cleaning the silicon bushing :
Use a non-fluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent Wacker Sili-
con-Oilemulsion E 1044. Rub all the silicon shieldings with this cloth. Take note of the
following:
S Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the
cleaning agent
S Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
S Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth
2.1.3 Flange Connections

Once the transport covers have been removed, the installation of the flanges must be
completed without interruptions.
If interruptions can not be avoided, open flanges must be covered with a clean plastic
foil. This instruction must also be observed if an insulator is mounted on the flange.
Sealing Surfaces:
S Check sealing surfaces for scratches or similar damages
S Even out any scratches with fine sand paper
S Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner
S Clean the sealing surfaces
O-Rings:
O-Rings have to be cleaned before they are installed (“2.1.2 Cleaning”).
Do not install any O-rings that show damages or deformation from previous use.
Before closing a flange connection, clean the immediate vicinity and all accessible
parts of the components to be connected with a vacuum cleaner. Do not touch the
active parts and the insulators with the vacuum cleaner’s nozzle.

¤ Installation
Overhead installation of O-Rings

S Press the O-Ring into the groove (Figure 2.1-1)
S If the O-Ring fits too loose: Drill O-ring while pressing in the groove for
getting more tension (Figure 2.1-1)
Groove O-ring
Press O-ring in the groove
Drill O-ring and press

continuously in the
groove
Keep O-ring fixed in the groove
Figure 2.1-1: Fixing an O-ring in a groove

¤ Installation
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts

The following tightening torques are valid for non-greased bolts in threads and holes.
Any deviations from these values are indicated in the assembly drawings.
Table 2.1-2: Tightening Torques for non-greased Bolts
Tightening Torque in Nm
Thread
Steel/8.8 *) Steel/A2-70 **) Aluminium ***)
M4 2,9 − 1,5
M5 6 5,2 3
M6 10 7,8 5,5
M8 25 19,5 14
M10 49 38,3 26
M12 86 67,2 45
M16 210 147,6 100
*) Extract from NB305080, tolerance 3%

**) Extract from GPDT049615, tolerance 3%
***) Extract from GPFA820006, tolerance +20% −0%, independent from the material of the
bolts
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments

WARNING! All works related to SF6 are described in chapter “Gas insulated Switchgear” in
document 1HDG 518 005 “Gas-Handling” and have to be followed strictly!

¤ Installation
2.2 Conversion Tables

Temperature
Table 2.2-1: Temperature
°C (Degree Celsius) °F (Degree Fahrenheit)* K (Kelvin) **
0° 32 ° 273.16
15 ° 59 ° 288.16
20 ° 68 ° 293.16
25 ° 77 ° 298.16
30 ° 86 ° 303.16
*n °C = ( 1.8 x n + 32) °F
**n K= n − 273.16 °C
Tightening Torques
Table 2.2-2: Tightening Torques
Nm (Newtonmeter) lbf x ft kpm (Kilopondmeter)
1 0.7376 0.102
1.356 1 0.1383
9.807 7.233 1
Absolute Pressures
Table 2.2-3: Absolute Pressures
kPa MPa bar psi (Pound per Torr

(Kilo-Pascal) (Mega-Pascal) Square Inch)*
0.133322 0.0001333 0.001333 0.01934 1
6.8948 0.0068948 0.068948 1 51.715
100 0.1 1 14.504 750.06
420 0.42 4.2 60.917 3150.25
440 0.44 4.4 63.817 3300.26
500 0.5 5 72.520 3750.3
600 0.6 6 87.024 4500.36
620 0.62 6.2 89.925 4650.37
700 0.7 7 101.528 5250.42
* psig = pound per square inch gauge (overpressure)
psi may also be expressed as lbf / in2
1HDG 518 015 C en 13.07.2005 EXTMEHA 21.07.2005 CHSVOTH 2.2-1

¤ Installation
Force
Table 2.2-4: Force
N (Newton) lbf (Pound)
1 0.22481
4.4482 1
Length
Table 2.2-5: Length
mm (Millimeter) in (Inches)
1 0.03937
25.4 1
Weight
Table 2.2-6: Weight
kg (Kilogramm) t (Tons metric) lbm (Pound) US t (2000 lbm)
1 0.001 2.20462 0.0011
1000 1 2204.62 1.1
0.4536 0.00045 1 0.0005
507.185 0.907 2142.56 1
Volume
Table 2.2-7: Volume
gal (liquid) gal (dry) m3 ft3

l (Liter)
Gallons Gallons Cubicmeter Cubicfeet
1 0.26417 0.22702 0.001 0.03531
3.78541 1 0.85937 0.0037 0.13368
4.40489 1.16365 1 0.0044 0.15556
1000 264.17 227.02 1 35.31467
28.31685 7.48052 6.42851 0.02832 1

¤ Installation
2.3 Outdoor Installation of the GIS

2.3.1 Operating Mechanism and Terminal Box
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
Anti-condensation heaters (70 W) have to be installed in the circuit breaker operating

mechanism enclosure.
All elements which are connected to the circuit breaker operating mechanism box via
a bolt hole (i.e. Camloc closures) have to be sealed waterproof on the inside of the
operating mechanism box with Hannokitt GON 598 019 P106.
Disconnector / Earthing Switch Operating Mechanism
Anti-condensation heaters (15 W) have to be installed in the disconnector / earthing

switch operating mechanism enclosure.
All elements which are connected to the lower side of the operating mechanism box
via a bolt hole (i.e. anti-condensation heating, auxiliary switches) have to be sealed
waterproof on the lower side of the operating mechanism box with Hannokitt
GON 598 019 P106.
Operating Mechanism of Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
Anti-condensation heaters (15 W) have to be installed in the operating mechanism

enclosure.
All elements which are connected to the operating mechanism box via a bolt hole
(i.e. Camloc closures) have to be sealed waterproof on the inside of the operating
mechanism box with Hannokitt GON 598 019 P106.
Current and Voltage Transformer
Anti-condensation heaters (15 W) have to be installed in the terminal box.
All elements which are connected to the terminal box via a bolt hole (i.e. attachement
of name plate) have to be sealed waterproof on the inside of the operating mechanism
box with Hannokitt GON 598 019 P106.
2.3.2 Outdoor Flange Connections

Note Make sure to use only designated, stainless nuts, bolts, washers and spring washers for
outdoor connections!
Treatment of the Flange Sealing Surfaces:
A thin and even layer of fluor silicone grease FS 12 92 (Nr. GON 598 000 P8) has to
be applied onto the complete contacting surface of all surfaces marked with
in Table 2.3-1 (contact and sealing surfaces). It has to be approved that
no tailings like brush-hair are remaining on the sealing surface. Afterwards the flanges
can be connected as previously described.
CAUTION The grease must not be applied to the insulator within the inner diameter of the
sealing groove!
1HDG 118 533 C en 02.09.1999 ACEMEWE 21.10.1999 ACEHOSC 2.3-1

¤ Installation
Note All connections that do not have to be opened during the installation at site, have been
treated for outdoor installation in the factory prior to delivery. If such connections have to
be opened at site, the flanges have to be cleaned as described in chapter “Installation”
in document “Installation of the GIS” before they are sealed again.
Table 2.3-1: Flange Connections
Type of Flange Application
Insulator / Enclosure
Enclosure / Enclosure
Enclosure / Enclosure
Insertion unit
Bursting disc
Inspection window, blind cover, gas connec-

tion
Apply a thin film of grease
1HDG 118 533 C en 02.09.1999 ACEMEWE 21.10.1999 ACEHOSC 2.3-2

¤ Installation
2.4 Earthing
“Earthing” is defined as the entirety of means and procedures associated with the
earthing of equipment. Earthing means to connect a conductor via an earthing system
to earth.
“Earth” refers to both, the earth as a location and the earth as a substance such as
humus, clay, sand, gravel and rock. The earth is a conductor whose potential outside
the influence of earthing systems is considered to be zero. The “Reference Earth”
(neutral earth) is defined as a part of the earth, especially of its surface, outside the
influence of an earthing system in which between two random points no voltages de-
riving from the earth current can be measured.
“Earthing system” is defined as the entirety of electrically connected earthes, metal

parts acting similarly (e g. pole bases, armatures, metal cable sheathing) and earthing
leads.
“Earth electrode” is a conductor which is embedded in the ground and electrically con-
nected to it, or a conductor embedded in concrete which is in contact with the earth
over a large area (e. g. foundation earth).
“Earthing lead” is defined as an electrical lead laid either outside the earth or insulated
in the earth, that connects a GIS part to be earthed with the earth. If a disconnecting
link, a disconnector or a Petersen coil is installed between a center point or an outer
conductor and the earth, only the connection between earth and the earthing terminal
of such a device is considered as an earthing lead.
Note The earthing of the GIS is to be documented in the site test protocol “commissioning”
1HDG 118 680.
WARNING! The installation of the GIS earthing and the earthing leads shall be strictly in ac-
cordance with the project-specific earthing layout diagrams and the earthing plans
in the project-specific part of this documentation!
1HDG 118 103 H en 05.07.2002 ACEMEWE 25.07.2002 ACEVOTH 2.4-1

¤ Installation
2.4.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays

The individual modules of a GIS bay are interconnected through their enclosures.
Each GIS bay is connected to an earthing conductor by means of connecting bolts
and nuts and earthing leads. The connecting bolts and nuts must have minimum a
dimension of M12.
Crimping of the terminal ends, branch terminals etc. is carried out at site.
The GIS enclosure must be connected to earth. All metallic parts, that shall be
earthed and do not belong to a main or auxiliary circuit, shall be connected individually
to earth. Frames and supports do not need to be earthed separately if they are welded
or bolted to the GIS enclosure.
To be observed during Installation of the Earthing System:

S All electrical connections within the earthing system shall be properly in-
stalled
S Earth leads shall be protected against mechanical damage
S Earth leads shall be installed without loops
S Earthing system shall not be interrupted at any point
S Earthing system shall be inspected before commissioning
2.4.2 Dimensioning
The GIS is dimensioned for a rated short-time withstand current of up to
40 kA / 3 sec.
The material necessary for connecting the GIS to the earthing system of the customer
is delivered together with the equipment.
Earthing:
Cross section Short-circuit duration 1 sec Short-circuit duration 3 sec
Solid copper (Cu) 220 mm2 (50 x 5 mm2)* 440 mm2 (40 x 10 mm2)*
Copper rope (Cu) 2 x 120 mm2 (2 x 120 mm2)* 4 x 120 mm2 (4 x 95 mm2)*
* The cross section used by ABB; in brackets the standardized minimum cross sections
according to the IEC.
Connect the earthing conductors of the GIS with 2 x M12.
Potential Earthing:
Use 16 mm2 earthing conductors for potential earthing of the local control cabinets
and all other modules.
Connect the conductors for potential earthing with 1 x M12.

¤ Installation
2.4.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing

Earthing:
The individual GIS bays are interconnected through the busbar enclosures.
Connect the circuit breaker base plate of the outer bays (Figure 2.4-1) each via
1 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec) with the building’s earthing grid.
If only one GIS bay is to be installed, attach 2 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 4 x 120 mm2
(3 sec) to the circuit breaker base plate (Figure 2.4-1).
Potential Earthing of the Busbar:

S Either connect the busbar at both ends and at least every 3 m with the
earthing grid or the steel reinforcements in the floor ( 16 mm2 Cu)
... or ... connect the base plate of the circuit breaker in each GIS bay at the ends of
the steel reinforcements in the floor ( 16 mm2 Cu)
S Connection e. g. through earthing holes, slotted bars, earthing lugs
( 16 mm2 Cu)
S Mounting rails incorporated in the floor have to be connected to the earthing
grid respectively the steel reinforcements in the floor
40 kA = 1 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 50 kA = 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec)
40 kA = 1 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 50 kA = 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec)

Figure 2.4-1: Position of Earthing Terminals
2.4.4 Local Control Cabinets

Earthing:
The protective conductor bar is connected with the GIS enclosure through 1 x M12
earthing connection bolt and an earthing conductor ( 16 mm2 Cu).
Potential Earthing for separated Local Control Cabinets:

1. Install the conductor for potential earthing ( 16 mm2 Cu) in parallel to the
control cables
2. Connect it to the GIS enclosure and the protective conductor bar inside the
control cabinet
3. In addition, connect the protective conductor bar for potential earthing with
the building’s earthing system ( 16 mm2 Cu)

¤ Installation
2.4.5 Cable Sealing End

Install the earthing connection between the cable jacket and the enclosure of the
cable termination as shown in Figure 2.4-2, Figure 2.4-3 or Figure 2.4-4:
The earthing of power cables terminated on the GIS is project-specific: the cable
jacket earthing (Figure 2.4-2 and Figure 2.4-3) is connected either unilateral or in both
substations interconnected by the power cable (bilateral).
Bilateral Earthing:
Connect on both sides as per Figure 2.4-2, or as per Figure 2.4-3 if ring-type current
transformers are installed.
Unilateral Earthing:
Connect one side as per Figure 2.4-2 and the remote side as per Figure 2.4-4. For
surge protection install shock-proof surge arrestors on the remote side.
Direct Earthing:
5
4
X
3
2 1 X
1 − Cable jacket earthing (optional) 5 − Thrust collar

2 − Earthing bolt 6 − Cable sealing end insulator
3 − Cable base plate 7 − Enclosure ELK-04
4 − Earthing jumper 3x on periphery
Figure 2.4-2: Direct Earthing of Cable Sealing End

¤ Installation
Direct Earthing with Ring-type Current Transformers:
8
1 − Ring-type current transformer
7 2 − Cable jacket earthing (optional)
3 − Earthing lead passing through transformer
6 (2 to 4 times on the cable periphery), coming
and going leads tied together
4 − Earthing bolt
5 X 5 − Cable base plate
4 6 − Thrust collar
1 7 − Cable sealing end insulator
8 − Enclosure ELK-04
3
Figure 2.4-3: Direct Earthing with Ring-type Current Transformer
Unilateral Earthing on Remote Side:
7
6
4 1 − Surge arrestor ABB type MVR 0,44 for cable

X
lengths < (50 m ... 100 m)
3 2 − Ring-type current transformer (optional)
3 − Earthing bolt
2 1 4 − Cable base plate
5 − Thrust collar
6 − Cable sealing end insulator
7 − Enclosure ELK-04
Figure 2.4-4: Unilateral Earthing on Remote Side

¤ Installation
2.4.6 Busduct Connections

Outdoor bushings are connected to the steel reinforcements in the floor underneath
the GIS and to the ring earth electrode. The sleeve bearings in the contact areas of
the GIS busducts are to be bridged using the shortest possible route with a minimum
of 16 mm2 Cu (Figure 2.4-5).
For long busduct connections, the GIS enclosure has to be connected with all metal
parts that are being passed in close proximity.
Connect all parts installed outdoors to the external ring earth electrode using the
shortest possible route (Figure 2.4-5). In order to protect the following GIS compo-
nents sufficiently against the intrusion of electromagnetic waves, copper rope of
120 mm2 (1 sec) / 240 mm2 (3 sec) or solid copper must be used for such connec-
tions.
Busduct contact area

with insulating
intermediate layer
16 mm2 Cu
16 mm2 Cu
120 mm2 Cu
Detail X
120 mm2 (EMC)
Figure 2.4-5: Earthing of Busduct Connections

¤ Installation
2.4.7 Surge Arrestors

Conventional surge arrestors, that are directly linked to the SF6-air bushings, must be
connected to the external ring earth electrode using the shortest possible route. Use
solid copper with a minimum cross section of 220 mm2 (1 sec) / 440 mm2 (3 sec) per
arrestor pole.
SF6-encapsulated surge arrestors are bolted to the GIS bay and thus sufficiently
earthed. However, it is recommended to install a short additional connection to the
steel reinforcement in the floor or the earthing grid.
For seperatly mounted responding counters, the earthing sheet 1HDG 111 940 has to
be fixed at the closest enclosure-flange. At the contact surface the flange has to be
electr. conductive (no paint, contact grease). The response counters are to be con-
nected with the earthing sheet by 120 mm2 Cu in the shortest possible way. An addi-
tional potential balancing has to be realized by an 120 mm2 Cu which is mounted for
EMC-reasons in the shortest possible way between earting sheet and floor steel rein-
forcement.
2.4.8 Example
Example of a GIS earthing as shown in Figure 2.4-6 through Figure 2.4-8
1. Earthing of the first and the last GIS bay with copper rope:
Connect to the external ring earth electrode (1) diagonally with 1 x 120 mm2
(1 sec) / 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec) on each side
2. Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcement in the floor:
Install at the bays on each end of the installation with 16 mm2 Cu, preferably
in each GIS bay, at minimum every 10 m (2)
3. Connect earthing to the external ring earth electrode and to the steel rein-
forcement in the floor (3)
4. Earth the local control cabinet (4) together with the GIS bay (Detail:
Figure 2.4-7)
Schnitt A−A, Fig. 6
3 Als Seilquerschnitt:
1 1, 2 120 mm2 (1 sec) /
240 mm2 (3 sec)
1 − Connection of the first and the last GIS bay to the earthing grid
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcements in the floor
3 − Connection to the external ring earth electrode and the steel reinforcements
4 − Connection of the local control cabinet and earthing through the GIS bay
Figure 2.4-6: Earthing of the GIS bay

¤ Installation
Detail X
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcements
Figure 2.4-7: Earthing at circuit breaker

¤ Installation
1, 2 1, 2
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcement
3 − Connection of earthing to the external ring earth electrode and the steel reinforcement
4 − Connection of local control cabinet and earthing through the GIS bay
Figure 2.4-8: Earthing of the GIS

¤ Installation
2.5 Mobile working platform

Installation of working platform
The mobile working platform is designed to provide easy access to the drive mechan-
ism of the circuit breaker in the case of inspection and maintenance work. With its four
wheels (6) it can be moved along the gangway from one bay to the other.
2 10
3 9
6
ÊÊ
ÉÉÉÉÉÊÊÊ
7
1 − Hand rail 5 − Adjusting screw 8 − Disconnector housing

2 − Pivoted platform 6 − Wheel 9 − Pivoted support
3 − Pivot 7 − Additional weight 10 − Pivot
4 − Staircase
Figure 2.5-1: Mobile working platform
Installation
1. Dismount hand rail (1) before moving the mobile working platform
2. Move the working platform to the middle of the bay
3. Swing the pivoted platform (2) slowly to the horizontal position, until the pi-
voted support (9) can be attached to the surface of the disconnector housing
(8)
4. Fix the mobile working platform by turning the adjusting screw (5) to the
ground (the additional weight provides additional stability)
5. Mount hand rail (1)
CAUTION The platform is designed for a max. load of 300 kg!
Note For bays with lower single busbar the pivoted support has to be substituted by an
extended support.
1HDG 118 480 en 20.10.2003 ACEMEWE 24.10.2003 ACEVOTH 2.5-1

¤ Installation
2.6 1pole Earthing Switch

1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity, Type ELKEB 04 S
Note The tightening torques for non-greased bolts in threads and holes are listed in chapter
“Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS” in table “Tightening
Torques for non-greased Bolts”.
2.6.1 General
All installation work on a device must be completed before commissioning can begin,
i.e.
S Installation control cables must be laid and associated connectors connected
at the device and control cubicle
S Gas compartments must be filled with SF6 gas in accordance with standard
specifications
S All earth connections between single devices must be established and earth-
ing of buildings and frameworks must be carried out to correspond with rel-
evant diagrams
2.6.2 Visual inspection

Release the four clamping fixtures of the protective cover and remove cover.
Note For reasons of weight, two persons should do this.
2.6.3 Mechanical check for correct operation

After operating the crank-handle lock, insert and turn the crank handle until the con-
tact tube clips into the tulip contact. Turn crank handle further and check acknowl-
edgement of final position. It should also be ensured that the reversing switch and
position indicator switch over. This procedure must be repeated with the other two
poles.
1HDG 118 528 D en 30.05.2006 EXTMEHA 31.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.6-1

¤ Installation
2.6.4 Electrical check for correct operation

Connect a voltage source to the pole of the installation to be checked. The connector
in the relevant pole of the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity has been
removed. Measurements can now be made using the insulated earthing switch.
ON and OFF switching times are determined from the pulse level for motor startup
and compared with the specified values in document 1HDG 118 529.
2.6.5 Power-consumption check

The motor current of each pole is measured and compared with the specified values
in document 1HDG 118 529.

¤ Installation
2.7 Cable Sealing End Type TPC

To be greased before assembly
10 Spring contact mounted in opposite

direction (opposite thread)
9 12 Mounted before shipped
max2
7
11
6 19
2 4
1
3
17 16
18 15 13 14
1 − Cable sealing end 7 − Spiral contact 14 − Base plate

isolator (TPC) 8 − Screw set 15 − Cable
2 − Screening 9 − Contact piece 16 − O-ring
3 − Screw set 10 − Partition insulator 17 − Screw set
4 − Screw set 11 − Cable sealing 18 − O-ring
5 − Contact clip 12 − Corona hat 19 − Burst protection,
6 − Contact connection 13 − Screw set gas supply
Figure 2.7-1: Cable Sealing End Type TPC
Note The corona hat must be mounted by test and operation without mounted cables!
1HDG 118 355 E en 28.09.1999 ACEMEWE 30.09.1999 ACEMIKI 2.7-1

¤ Installation
11
Figure 2.7-2: Mounting length Cable Sealing End
Note The cable mounting length, including the contact pin is 900 11 mm (Figure 2.7-2).
The total height of the cable sealing end is 1155 1 mm (Figure 2.7-1).
Note The corona hat (12) must be mounted by test and operation without mounted cables
(Figure 2.7-1).

¤ Installation
2.7.1 Scope of Supply

2.7.1.1 Cable Sealing End
The scope of supply includes all items (2 − 14, 16 − 19) of the cable sealing end and
all necessary mounting parts (Figure 2.7-1).
The cable sealing end, consisting of the housing (11), base plate (14), corona hat (12)
and pressure resistant transport cover, is delivered pre-mounted (Figure 2.7-1).
The gauge (20) is also included in the scope of supply (Figure 2.7-3).
Note The isolator (1) and cable (15) are not part of scope of supply (Figure 2.7-1).
2.7.1.2 Installation Aids
20
20 − Gauge
Figure 2.7-3: Installation Aid (gauge without contact piece)
The mounting aid consists of a gauge (20) with contact pieces (9), (Figure 2.7-1),
screwed onto the curved shoulders of the gauge (20), (Figure 2.7-3).
When the gauge is mounted, it shows the orientation of the barrier insulator (10) and
gives the possibility to align the contact connections (6), (Figure 2.7-1).
After alignment of the contact connection (6) the contact piece (9) is removed from the
gauge (20) and attached to the barrier insulator (10), (Figure 2.7-1).

¤ Installation
2.7.2 Installation Notes

Before commencing mounting all delivered parts should be checked for completeness
and signs of damage. Any damaged parts must be replaced.
CAUTION The bending moment, vertical to the insulator axis during mounting work and dur-
ing operation, must not exceed 10 000 Nm (1 000 kpm).
CAUTION When mounting the gauge (20) take care not to damage the sealing surfaces
(Figure 2.7-3).
Note The handling of insulator surfaces, O-rings, sealing nuts and sealing surfaces is
described in detail in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the
GIS”.
The possibility to insert the cable and the complete cable sealing end, with suitable
lifting tackle, into the housing or lift onto the installation is dependant on the room
available and the installation position of the cable sealing end.
During mounting please observe the following:

1. The cable (15) is to be prepared in accordance with valid standards of the
cable supplier of the cable sealing end insulator supplier (Figure 2.7-1)
2. After mounting the cable sealing end the pre-mounted housing (11), base
plate (14), and transport cover must be removed as the insulator can only be
secured from inside
3. The corona hat (12) have to be replaced by the contact pieces (9)
4. To ensure correct alignment of the contact connection the gauge (20) is to be
positioned on the housing as though it is the barrier insulator (10)
5. The arms of the gauge (20) must have the same alignment as the barrier
insulator (10)
6. The contact pieces, mounted on the gauge, must be lightly greased
7. Check the 2 mm setting between the contact connection (6) and the contact
piece (9)

¤ Installation
2.8 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type A and B

CAUTION The cast-resin insulator (Figure 2.8-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a pressure of 150
kPa. The SF6 must be evacuated before assembly of the connector socket.
Prior to beginning the installation, check that all components have been delivered and
that they are undamaged. Damaged parts must be replaced.
The cast-resin insulators (connector sockets) (1) have been fitted at the factory and
need only be removed if they are found to have been damaged (Figure 2.8-1). The
gas compartment of the outgoing isolating switch (4) is therefore unaffected by the
cable installation.
5
2
1 − Cast-resin insulator
2 − Cable connector
3 − Hexagon screw (DIN 933 M12x40)
4 − Outgoing isolating switch
5 − Sealing cover
6 − Earthing cable
Figure 2.8-1: Cable compact terminal box, fitted
1HDG 118 354 E en 30.05.2006 EXTMEHA 31.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.8-1

¤ Installation
WARNING! In case the cast-resin insulators are damaged, equalize the pressure inside the GIS
with the ambient pressure: release the N2 out of the disconnector gas compart-
ment and evacuated the SF6 out of the sockets. Afterwards dismount and replace
the cast resin insulator (1) (Figure 2.8-1).
For the installation of the HV power cables the required cable sealing ends of plug-
type (2) are delivered to site. The installation of the plugs (2) onto the cable and after-
wards to the cast-resin insulator (1) must be supervised by ABB personnel. All special
instructions of the cable and the sealing end suppliers must be observed.
Check all parts delivered for intactness and completeness prior to commencement of
the installation. Replace all damaged components.
Installation of the Cable Sealing Ends on the Cast-Resin Insulator
Note Observe all safety regulations for working on high voltage switchgear during the
installation of the cable termination.
Required Materials
− Cleaning agent Rivolta M.T.X. forte
− Fluff-free cloth
− One-way gloves (clean and without talcum, abrasion-proof)
− 18 recessed hexagonal screws M12 x 40
− Spring washers
− Auxiliary threaded bolts (to be provided by supplier of sealing plugs)
− SGF high voltage grease (to be provided by supplier of sealing plugs)

¤ Installation
2.8.1 Preparation of Plug Connection

WARNING! When making the connections, the safety regulations governing work on high volt-
age systems must be observed.
The cable must be prepared according to the current installation instructions of the
cable manufacturer or of the cable terminal box manufacturer. The cable connector
must be fitted according to the current installation instructions of the cable terminal
box manufacturer.
6
5 − Lock cover
6 − Gas connection
Figure 2.8-2: Lock cover fitted on connector sockets (top view of cable terminal box)
1. Evacuated the transport gas (SF6 gas) from the connector sockets at the gas
connection (6) (Figure 2.8-2)
2. Remove the lock cover (5) from the connector sockets (Figure 2.8-2)
3. Position the cable connector in front of the socket opening (the surface of the
tapered stress section (7) must be clean and dry) (Figure 2.8-3)
4. Clean the stress cone (7) with a fluff-free cloth using the cleaning agent
Rivolta M.T.X. forte prior to installation
5. Let the stress cone (7) air out for 10 minutes
6. Apply a thin and even layer of SGF high voltage grease with one-way gloves
(clean and without talcum, abrasion-proof) onto the stress cone (7)
1 7
1 − Cast-resin insulator
7 − Tapered stress section
Figure 2.8-3: Inserting the cable connector

¤ Installation
2.8.2 Plug Connection

CAUTION The contacts of the cable sealing end must not touch the inner surface of the insu-
lator: Risk of damage!
1. Insert the cable sealing plug up into the insulator and press in as far as it will
go
2. Fix the cable sealing plug provisionally
3. Using the auxiliary threaded bolts, move the plug enclosure close enough to
the insulator that the connection can be tightened with the recessed hexag-
onal screws (6) with the fitted spring washers (1) (Figure 2.8-4)
4. Place the earth connection bracket (5) under one of the screws (6)
5. Tighten the hexagon screws(6) on the connector housing using an even
torque of 50 Nm
6. Crimp the screened wires (3) with a cable lug (4)
7. Install the cable lug (4) on the earth connection bracket (5)
8. Slide the shrink-fit hose (2) over the center of the plug housing
9. Shrink-on the shrink-fit hose (2) according to the instructions of the cable
sealing end supplier
10. Fit the star-shaped cable bracket retaining plate to the cable retaining struts
11. Connect the cable bracket on the retaining plate
12. Earth the cable screen according to customer’s information or project-spe-
cific engineering specifications
6 5 4 3
1 2
1 − Spring washers 4 − Crimped cable lug

2 − Shrink-fit hose 5 − Earth connection bracket
3 − Screened wires 6 − Recessed hexagonal screws (M12 x 40)
Figure 2.8-4: Installation of Earth Connection Bracket
Note For the continuons without connected HV-cables, cable−dummies have to be used.
The sealing cover must be earthed. (Figure 2.8-1)

¤ Installation
2.9 Cable Compact Terminal Box Type D

CAUTION The cast-resin insulator (Figure 2.9-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a pressure of 150
kPa. The SF6 must be evacuated before assembly of the connector socket.
Prior to beginning the installation, check that all components have been delivered and
that they are undamaged. Damaged parts must be replaced.
1HDG 118 358 F en 30.05.2006 EXTMEHA 31.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.9-1

¤ Installation
2.9.1 Fitting of Cast-resin Insulators

The cast-resin insulators (connector sockets) (1) have been fitted at the factory and
need only be removed if they are found to have been damaged (Figure 2.9-1). The
gas compartment of the outgoing disconnector (4) is therefore unaffected by the cable
installation.
Note During the cable installation the pressure in the adjacent gas compartment may not be
reduced.
5 3
1 − Cast-resin insulator 2
2 − Cable sealing ends of plug-type
3 − Hexagon screw (DIN 933 M12x40)
4 − Disconnector
5 − Sealing cover
6 − Earthing cable
Figure 2.9-1: Cable compact terminal box, fitted

¤ Installation
2.9.2 Cable Installation

The cable must be prepared according to the current installation instructions of the
cable manufacturer or of the cable terminal box manufacturer. The cable connector
must be fitted according to the current installation instructions of the cable terminal
box manufacturer.
Preparation of Plug Connection
Note Observe all safety regulations for working on high voltage switchgear during the
installation of the cable termination.
7
8
7 − Cover
Figure 2.9-2: Lock cover fitted on connector sockets (top view of cable terminal box)
1. Evacuated the transport gas SF6 from the cast-resin insulator through the
gas fitting (8) (Figure 2.9-2)
2. Remove the cover (7) from the cast-resin insulator
3. Position the cable sealing end in front of the socket openings (the surface of
the stress cone (9) must be clean and dry) − (Figure 2.9-3)
4. Clean the stress cone (9) with a fluff-free cloth using the cleaning agent
Rivolta M.T.X. forte prior to installation
5. Let the stress cone (9) dry thoroughly for 10 minutes
6. Apply a thin and even layer of SGF high voltage grease with one-way gloves
(clean and without talcum, abrasion-proof) onto the stress cone (9)

¤ Installation
1 9
10
9 − Stress cone
10 − Connection end piece
Figure 2.9-3: Inserting the cable connector
Plug Connection
CAUTION The contacts of the cable sealing end must not touch the inner surface of the insu-
lator: Risk of damage!
7. Insert the cable sealing plug up into the insulator and press in as far as it
will go
8. Fix the cable sealing plug provisionally
9. Using the auxiliary threaded bolts, move the plug enclosure close enough
to the insulator that the connection can be tightened with the recessed
hexagonal screws (3) with the fitted spring washers (Figure 2.9-4)
10. Place the earth connection bracket (11) under one of the hexagonal
screws (3) − (Figure 2.9-4)
11. Evenly tighten all hexagonal screws (3) with a torque of 50 Nm (Figure 2.9-4)
12. Slide the shrink-fit hose (14) over the center of the plug housing
13. Fit the star-shaped cable bracket retaining plate to the cable retaining struts
14. Crimp the screened wires (13) with a cable lug (12) and install with hexa-
gonal screws (3), spring cups and nuts on the earth connection bracket (11)
− (Figure 2.9-4)
15. Shrink-on the shrink-fit hose (14) according to the instructions of the cable
sealing end supplier
16. Connect the cable bracket from the cable terminal box manufacturer on the
retaining plate
17. Earth the cable screen according to customer’s information or project-
specific engineering specifications

¤ Installation
11
12
3
1113
14
11 − Earth connection bracket

12 − Cable lug
13 − Screened wires
14 − Shrink-fit hose
Figure 2.9-4: Installation of Earth Connection Bracket
Note For the continuons operation without connected HV-cables, cable-dummies have to be
used. The sealing cover must be earthed. (Figure 2.9-1)

¤ Installation
2.10 Cables (HPFF)

2.10.1 Mounting Fixed Cable Sealing End
The insertion of HPFF cable sealing ends (CSE) into the GIS requires a fixed mount-
ing. This means cable and cable sealing ends are fixed before mounting the GIS.
The coupling of the complete cable sealing end to the GIS is done normally by a
transversal insertion. by doing so, eventually occuring tolerances are compensated.
2.10.1.1 Preparation Measures

Before starting the mounting work, all parts supplied shall be subjected to a thorough
visual inspection to check if they are complete and free of damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
CAUTION The bending moment perpendicular to the insulator axis must not exceed 10 000
Nm (1 000 kpm) during the mounting work or in service.
Note Treating of insulator surfaces, O-rings, sealing grooves, and sealing surfaces is
described in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS”.
Mounting steps
1. Prepare the cable as specified in applicable instructions by the supplier of the
cable and cable sealing end
2. Align the cable according to the coordinates of the arrangement drawing
(Figure 2.10-1)
3. Place plate (3) onto cable and secure with connection set 1 (1)
(Figure 2.10-2)
Note See that the gasket of the cable insulators (2) are placed in correct position
(Figure 2.10-2)!
Figure 2.10-1: Mounting fixed cable ends onto the cable sealing end plate

¤ Installation
1 − Connection set 1 4 − Gasket housing 7 − Conductor short

2 − Gasket cable insulator 5 − Cable insulators 8 − Conductor long
3 − Plate 6 − Conductor clamp 9 − Connection piece
Figure 2.10-2: Conductors of Cable Sealing End (CSE)

4. Screw conductor clamps (6) onto cable insulators (5) (Figure 2.10-2)
5. Assemble the conductor connection consisting of conductor short (7), con-
ductor long (8) and connection piece (9) (Figure 2.10-2)
6. Put the conductor connection into the conductor clamps (6) and fix it in a way,
that the postitioning of the conductor conection is still possible (Figure 2.10-2)
7. Place the gasket of the housing (4) into the groove of the floor plate
(Figure 2.10-2)
8. Put the housing over the pre-assembled component parts (adjust mounting
opening according to the arrangement drawing) and fix it with connection
set (2) (Figure 2.10-3)
CAUTION The shieldings of the cable insulators must not be damaged!
9. Adjust the conductor connection and fix it finally with the prescribed tighten-
ing torque into the conductor clamp (6) (Figure 2.10-2)

¤ Installation
dimension
setting
4
1 − Connection set 2 4 − Cover

2 − CSE-housing 5 − Connection set 3
3 − Mounting opening
Figure 2.10-3: Conductors in housing
2 1
setting dimension
33±1 mm
1 − Barrier insulator of adjacent module of the CSE
2 − Plug contact
Figure 2.10-4: Mounting the plug contacts
10. Assemble plug contact (2) onto insulator (7) of the module which is adjacent
to the CSE (Figure 2.10-4)
11. Put insulator or module with insulator onto CSE
Note Check via mounting opening (3) that the conductors are inserted properly into the plug
contacts (Figure 2.10-3)
12. Mount cover plate (4) (Figure 2.10-3)

¤ Installation
2.11 Cables (IEC, LXGA)

2.11.1 Mounting Cable Sealing End

The mounting instructions described below are only applicable to PE cables conform-
ing to IEC standards.
Cable sealing ends are available in two different configurations (Figure 2.11-1): They
may either be integrated in a single gas compartment with outgoing-feeder disconnec-
tor (configuration 1), or they may be sealed in a separate gas compartment (configur-
ation 2). The cable sealing end insulators (1) as well as the plug-type contacts (7) are
identical in both configurations.
When mounting cable sealing ends contained in separate gas compartments, the
orientation of the bursting disc on the sealing end casing (8) may be varied
(Figure 2.11-3).

¤ Installation
1 7
Configuration 1: 8
Cable sealing and an outgoing-feeder
disconnector contained in a single gas
compartment
Configuration 2:
Cable sealing end sealed off in
1 − Cable sealing end insulator separate gas compartment
7 − Plug-type contact
8 − Cable sealing end casing, separately sealed
Figure 2.11-1: Cable sealing end configurations

¤ Installation
5
4
Cable 3
1HDG118351−1
1 − Cable sealing end insulator 5 − Klingerit ring

2 − Cable sealing end casing 6 − O-ring
3 − Bolt 7 − Plug-type contact
4 − Clamping ring
Figure 2.11-2: Cable sealing end

¤ Installation
Various options for mounting cable

sealing ends with separate gas 6
compartments. Position of the
bursting disc may be rotated in 30° 9
steps around the axis of the casing.
5
4
3
Cable
1HDG118351−2
1 − Cable sealing end insulator 5 − Klingerit ring 8 − Cable sealing end casing
3 − Bolt 6 − O-ring 9 − Cable sealing end plate
4 − Clamping ring 7 − Plug-type contact
Figure 2.11-3: Cable sealing end configurations

¤ Installation

Before starting the mounting work, all parts supplied shall be subjected to a through
visual inspection to check if they are complete and free of damage. Replace any dam-
aged parts.
CAUTION The bending moment perpendicular to the insulator axis must not exceed 10 000
Nm (1 000 kpm) during the mounting work or in service.
Note Treating of insulator surfaces, O-rings, sealing grooves, and sealing surfaces are
2.11.1.2 Mounting
Note Depending on the space available in the mounting area and the exact mounting position
of the cable sealing end, an appropriate lifting facility may be used to insert the cable
insulator into the casing.
For mounting work the following steps are required (Figure 2.11-2, Figure 2.11-3):
2. Slide clamping ring (4) and Klingerit ring (5) onto the cable in correct order
3. Connect the insulator (1) to the prepared cable
(establish electrical connection at the conductor contact fitting).
4. Place O-ring (6) in sealing groove on cable sealing end casing or cable seal-
ing end plate
5. Protect insulator against mechanical damage with a protective hose
6. Insert cable sealing end insulator (1) complete with cable into cable sealing
end casing and plate without damaging the insulator surface
7. 2 cm − 3 cm before the cable sealing end is completely inserted, the protec-
tive hose is to be removed
8. Insert the sealing end completely, particular care shall be taken with regard
to the bottom section of the insulator (sealing area)
9. Secure Klingerit ring (5) and insulator (1) to casing (9) and plate (8): Tighten
screws (3) uniformly to a torque of 25 Nm each, making sure that the parts
are properly aligned, i.e. parallel to each other
2.11.1.3 Inspection
A visual inspection of the plug-in connection is recommended.
2.11.1.4 Mounting Variants for Cable Sealing End

The following example demonstrates how fixed cable sealing ends with separate gas
compartments are mounted to switchbays of the 1½ circuit breaker, ring-circuit, or H-
circuit types (fixed = cable fixed in place, premounted).

¤ Installation
2.11.1.5 Example Fixed Cable Sealing End

For mounting work the following steps are required (Figure 2.11-4):
2. Position and align the the cable and cable sealing end plate according to the
coordinates specified in the layout drawing
3. Place the switchbays provisionally in its intended position
4. Mount the disconnector module complete with the cable sealing end casing
(8) to the cable sealing end plate (9) (Figure 2.11-5)
5. Connect the disconnector module to the bay using a transverse insertion unit
and separable contacts (Figure 2.11-6)
1HDG118351−4
Figure 2.11-4: Mounting of fixed cable sealing end

¤ Installation
Placing the disconnector module with cable sealing end on cable sealing end
plate
Disconnector module
1HDG118351−4
Figure 2.11-5: Placing the disconnector module on cable sealing end plate
Connecting the disconnector module to the switchbay, using separable

contacts and transverse insertion unit
Transverse insertion unit
Open disconnector flange
1HDG118351−4
Figure 2.11-6: Connecting the disconnector module to the switchbay

¤ Installation
2.11.2 Mounting Cable Sealing End Type LXGA
8 1
630 −10
+0
7
+0
585 −5
2
1HDG118351−3
1− Transverse insertion unit casing 6− Support structure

2− Cable sealing end casing 7− Clamp
3− O-ring 8− Bolt
4− Bolt 9− Contact pin
5− Cable sealing end LXGA
Figure 2.11-7: Cable sealing end type LXGA

¤ Installation

Before starting the mounting work, all parts supplied shall be subjected to a through
visual inspection to check if they are complete and free of damage. Replace any dam-
aged parts.
Note Treating of insulator surfaces, O-rings, sealing grooves, and sealing surfaces are
Note The cable shall be inserted to a mounting length of 585 0

5 mm (Figure 2.11-7).
2.11.2.2 Mounting
For mounting work the following steps are required (Figure 2.11-7):
cable sealing end
2. Align the switchbay, if necessary
3. Push back the transverse insertion unit (1)
4. Loosen bolts (8) and remove clamp (7)
5. Check measurement 630 +0 −10 mm (Figure 2.11-7) and make corrections as

necessary by adjusting the support structure (6)
6. Place O-ring (3) in the sealing groove on cable sealing end casing (2)
7. Insert cable sealing end (5) in cable sealing end casing (2)
8. Fasten cable sealing end uniformly to cable sealing end casing, making sure
that it is properly aligned and parallel to bolt (4)
9. Fasten cable sealing end (5) to the conductor connection by means of bolts
(8) and clamp (7) (tightening torque for bolts: 86 Nm)
10. Slide out transverse insertion unit (1) and fasten by means of bolts

¤ Installation
2.12 Installation of the Dead-end Plugs for the

Compact-cable Sealing End Type EHSVS
2.12.1 General
In cases where the compact-cable sealing end of a switchgear is operated without
connected HV-cables, dead-end plugs have to be used.
The instruction is valid for the compact-sealing end types A, B, C or D.
2.12.2 Installation of the Dead-end Plug Type EHSVSM
DOC.1HDG 518230−1
Figure 2.12-1: Dead-end plug

11. Evacuate SF6 of the of the connection housing (3, Figure 2.12-2) through
the gas valve (1, Figure 2.12-2) in accordance with the operating instructions
12. Equalize with atmospheric pressure
1HDG 518 230 A en 22.05.2006 EXTMEHA 24.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.12-1

¤ Installation
13. Remove the transportation cover (2, Figure 2.12-2)
1 DOC.1HDG 518230−1
Figure 2.12-2: Cable sealing end isolator with transportation cover

14. Insert the dead-end plug (5, Figure 2.12-3) carefully into the cable sealing
end insulator
Note Damages and marks of the inner surface of the cable sealing end insulator are not
allowed.
15. Tighten the screws (4, Figure 2.12-3) with torque in accordance with the
supplier instruction
5
DOC.1HDG 518230−1
4
Figure 2.12-3: Cable sealing end insulator with dead-end plug

¤ Installation
2.13 Control Cubicle

2.13.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment
When it arrives at the construction site, please check whether your equipment is com-
plete and whether it has been damaged during shipping. If damage is found, deter-
mine the extent and cause of damage and the person responsible and compile a dam-
age report.
2.13.2 Intermediate Storage

If the control cubicles are not mounted immediately after they have been delivered to
the construction site, they must be stored temporarily in a dry, dust-free place.
Permissible temperature range for storage site

S Dry air conditions (max. 40 %) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −40 _C to +55 _C
S Damp air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −25 _C to +40 _C
Packaging which has been opened for check purpose of the delivered equipment
must then be carefully resealed.
Note When the control cubicles are unpacked, the cubicle heating must be switched on without
delay in order to prevent the build-up of condensation water.
CAUTION Do not affix labels to the painted surfaces of control cubicles!
2.13.3 Condition of Switchgear Building

Before mounting work begins, the switchgear building in which the control cubicles are
to be mounted must be completed to such an extent that no further damage resulting
from damp or dirt can arise.
Requirements for the GIS Building

S Windows and doors must be fitted
S Walls and ceilings must be cleaned, painted and dry
S Subframes, cable ducts and floor openings must be provided in accordance
with the constructional drawings and designed with the correct dimensions
S No further work which creates dust and dirt shall be carried out once the con-
trol cubicles have been mounted

¤ Installation
2.13.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles

The bay-integrated control cubicle is generally preassembled to the bay. The reverse
side of the cubicle is locked in the transportation position by four clamps. For on-site
mounting, the cubicle merely has to be lowered into its final position. The following
steps must be observed:
1. Put a jacklift under the control cubicle, raise the forks (place squared beams
underneath as required) and take up the load without lifting the cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the reverse side of the cubicle
3. Lower the cubicle to a final height of 100 mm
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution:
In so doing, alway retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the cubicle has been lowered, tighten the four clamps and remove the
jacklift
5. Switch on the cubicle heating
2.13.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle

1. Disconnect the cubicle from the power supply
2. Make ring-feeder connections between the upstream and downstream
cubicles (see order-specific drawings)
3. Disconnect connector cables and internal and external bay wiring
4. Remove the cubicle from the bay
(“2.13.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles”)
2.13.6 Wiring
Connector Cables
Connector cables are manufactured and checked at the factory (parts list
“GSXE 030 160”).
Bay Wiring
Instrument transformers and gas density monitors are normally wired at the construc-
tion site (see order-specific connection diagrams).
All bores in the high-voltage devices and control cubicles have been designed for the
maximum cable or cable-gland diameters.
Note In the case of cables with smaller diameters, install cable glands with the designated
adapters!

¤ Installation
2.13.7 Cable Glands

The control cables are usually introduced into the control cubicle by way of cable
glands. It is preferable to install the glands from below. The strain relief device for the
cable gland is clamped to the cable jacket.
CAUTION The strain relief device must not be clamped to the cable shield and must not be
used to earth the shield.
Note Pay attention to the connection between the cable glands and the sheet metal of the local
control cubicle. Abrade all paint from the contacting area!
2.13.7.1 Cable Gland with Earthing Ring

In the case of a cable gland with earthing ring, the shield of the control cable is
earthed in accordance with Figure 2.13-1.
Earthing of the Cable Shield (Figure 2.13-1)

1. Strip the cable jacket (1)
2. Cut the cable shield (6) to the length of the earthing ring (7) (length of the
overhanging cable shield (6) equal to width of the earthing ring (7))
3. Disentangle the stripped portion of the cable shield (6)
4. Radially bend the stripped portion of the cable shield (6) outwards
5. Clamp the cable shield (6) between the two earthing rings (5) and (7)
180 mm
160 mm
7
6
5
4
3
1 − Insulated cable jacket of the 5 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)

control cable 6 − Cable shield
2 − Bracket for traction relief 7 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)
3 − Thrust collar 8 − Hexagonal bottom
4 − Sealing ring
Figure 2.13-1: Earthing of cable shield with earthing ring

¤ Installation
2.13.7.2 Cable Gland without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring

In the case of cable gland without earthing sleeve or earthing ring, the shield of the
control cable is earthed in accordance with Figure 2.13-2. Table 2.13-1 provides an
overview of the cables and cable glands available.

1. Strip the cable jacket of the control cable (1)
2. Disentangle the cable shield and twist to one side to a plait
(max. length of the plait: 10 cm)
3. Pull a yellow-green insulating sleeve (5) over the plait
4. Crimp a cable lug (4) onto the end of the plait
5. Connect the cable lug (4) to a PE bar or and earthing bolt
CAUTION A plait which is too long may result in malfunctions caused by transient overvol-
tages. The length of the plait must therefore not exceed 10 cm.
1 − Control cable 4 − Cable lug (for connection to PE bar or

2 − Cable gland earthing bolt)
3 − Metal cover 5 − Twisted cable shield with yellow-green
insulating sleeve
Figure 2.13-2: Earthing of cable shield for a cable gland without earthing sleeve or earthing ring

¤ Installation
Table 2.13-1: Identification and Order Numbers for cables and cable glands with earthing rings
Cables Cable glands
Type Cross section in mm2 Identification No. Order No. Identification No.
Silflex 3 x 1.5 1HDN 140 032 P1 ZEV2−S1−PG11 1HDN 140 024 R1
Silflex 4x4 1HDN 140 032 P4 ZEV2−S2−PG16 1HDN 140 024 R4
Silflex 4 x 10 1HDN 140 032 P6 ZEV2−S2−PG21 1HDN 140 024 R6

¤ Installation
2.14 Control Cubicle

2.14.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment
When it arrives at the construction site, please check whether your equipment is com-
plete and whether it has been damaged during shipping. If damage is found, deter-
mine the extent and cause of damage and the person responsible and compile a dam-
age report.
2.14.2 Intermediate Storage

If the control cubicles are not mounted immediately after they have been delivered to
the construction site, they must be stored temporarily in a dry, dust-free place.
Permissible temperature range for storage site

S Dry air conditions (max. 40 %) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −40 _C to +55 _C
S Damp air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −25 _C to +40 _C
Packaging which has been opened for check purpose of the delivered equipment can
be checked must then be carefully resealed.
Note When the control cubicles are unpacked, the cubicle heating must be switched on without
delay so as to prevent the build-up of condensation water.
CAUTION Do not affix labels to the painted surfaces of control cubicles!
2.14.3 Condition of Switchgear Building

Before mounting work begins, the switchgear building in which the control cubicles are
to be mounted must be completed to such an extent, that no further damage, resulting
from damp or dirt, can arise.
Requirements for the GIS Building

S Windows and doors must be fitted
S Walls and ceilings must be cleaned, painted and dry
S Subframes, cable ducts and floor openings must be provided in accordance
with the constructional drawings and designed with the correct dimensions
S No further work which creates dust and dirt may be carried out once the con-
trol cubicles have been mounted
1HDG 118 706 B en 24.09.2004 EXTMEWE 30.09.2004 CHSVOTH 2.14-1

¤ Installation
2.14.4 Installation of Control Cubicle and Optical Waveguide

The bay-integrated control cubicle is generally preassembled to the bay. The reverse
side of the cubicle is locked in the transportation position by four clamps. For on-site
mounting, the cubicle merely has to be lowered into its final position. The following
steps must be observed:
CAUTION The optical waveguides (LWL) are sensitive to mechanical loads: Do not bend,
kink, or pull on waveguide. Do not dirty the optical waveguide plug or allow it to
hang freely (protective cap). It is essential to refer to installation instructions in
chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 220 “SMART-GIS”!
1. Put a jacklift under the control cubicle, raise the forks (place squared beams
underneath as required) and take up the load without lifting the cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the reverse side of the cubicle
3. Lower the cubicle to a final height of 100 mm
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution:
In so doing, always retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the cubicle has been lowered, tighten the four clamps and remove the
jacklift
5. Connect the optical waveguides (LWL): The installation of the optical
waveguides is described in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 220
“SMART-GIS”
6. Switch on the cubicle heating
2.14.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle

1. Disconnect the cubicle from the power supply
2. Make ring-feeder connections between the upstream and downstream
cubicles (see order-specific drawings)
3. Disconnect connector cables and internal and external bay wiring
4. Remove the optical waveguides (LWL): The dismounting of the LWL is
described in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 220 “SMART-GIS”
5. Remove the cubicle from the bay
(“2.14.4 Installation of Control Cubicle and Optical Waveguide”)
2.14.6 Wiring
Connector Cables
Connector cables are manufactured and checked at the factory

(parts list “GSXE 030 160”).
Bay Wiring
Instrument transformers and gas density monitors are normally wired at the construc-
tion site (see order-specific connection diagrams).
All bores in the high-voltage devices and control cubicles have been designed for the
maximum cable or cable-gland diameters.
Note In the case of cables with smaller diameters, install cable glands with the designated
adapters!

¤ Installation
2.14.7 Cable Glands

Usually the control cables are introduced into the control cubicle by way of a bottom
aperture which is closed by a movable steel plate. In some exeptional cases also
screwed cable glands are used. It is preferable to install the glands from below. The
strain relief device for the cable gland is clamped to the cable jacket.
CAUTION The strain relief device must not be clamped to the cable shield and must not be
used to earth the shield.
Note Pay attention to the connection between the cable glands and the sheet metal of the local
control cubicle. Abrade all paint from the contacting area!
2.14.7.1 Cable Gland with Earthing Ring

In the case of a cable gland with earthing ring, the shield of the control cable is
earthed in accordance with Figure 2.14-1.

1. Strip the cable jacket (1)
2. Cut the cable shield (6) to the length of the earthing ring (7) (length of the
overhanging cable shield (6) equal to width of the earthing ring (7))
3. Disentangle the stripped portion of the cable shield (6)
4. Radially bend the stripped portion of the cable shield (6) outwards
5. Clamp the cable shield (6) between the two earthing rings (5) and (7)
180 mm
160 mm
7
6
5
4
3
1 − Insulated cable jacket of the 5 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)

control cable 6 − Cable shield
2 − Bracket for traction relief 7 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)
3 − Thrust collar 8 − Hexagonal bottom
4 − Sealing ring
Figure 2.14-1: Earthing of cable shield with earthing ring

¤ Installation
2.14.7.2 Cable Gland without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring

In the case of cable gland without earthing sleeve or earthing ring, the shield of the
control cable is earthed in accordance with Figure 2.14-2. Table 2.14-1 provides an
overview of the cables and cable glands available.

1. Strip the cable jacket of the control cable (1)
2. Disentangle the cable shield and twist to one side to a plait
(max. length of the plait: 10 cm)
3. Pull a yellow-green insulating sleeve (5) over the plait
4. Crimp a cable lug (4) onto the end of the plait
5. Connect the cable lug (4) to a PE bar or and earthing bolt
CAUTION A plait which is too long may result in malfunctions caused by transient overvol-
tages. The length of the plait must therefore not exceed 10 cm.
1 − Control cable 4 − Cable lug (for connection to PE bar or

2 − Cable gland earthing bolt)
3 − Metal cover 5 − Twisted cable shield with yellow-green
insulating sleeve
Figure 2.14-2: Earthing of cable shield for a cable gland without earthing sleeve or earthing ring

¤ Installation
Table 2.14-1: Identification and Order Numbers for cables and cable glands with earthing rings
Cables Cable glands
Type Cross section in mm2 Identification No. Order No. Identification No.
Silflex 3 x 1,5 1HDN 140 032 P1 ZEV2−S1−PG11 1HDN 140 024 R1
Silflex 25 x 1,5 1HDN 140 035P15 ZEV2−S2−PG21 1HDN 140 024 R6

¤ Installation
2.15 Bay Coupling 3150 A

2.15.1 Setting up and Aligning the First Bay
Figure 2.15-1: Bay coupling
Setting up the first bay
The first bay is erected according to the applicable layout drawing. Before mounting
work is started, check the floor surface for levelness and measure the position of wall
and ceiling penetrations. This is necessary for compensation of tolerances on the
whole frame, in order to ensure proper alignment of the installation.
Use the circuit breaker adjusting screws to align the first bay in a way that, when set-
ting up the following bays, the permissible tolerances in floor surface level can be
properly compensated and a perfect coupling of the flanges is ensured. In the case of
installations with direct connection of transformers, the height of the connection points
must be given due consideration. Align the first bay by applying a water level to the
flange surfaces.
Setting up the second bay
The second bay is set up and adjusted in the desigated distance beneath the first bay.
Afterwards, the conductor connections and the flange connections are contacted.
WARNING! These operation has to be done only during voltage-free condition of the bay.
1HDG 118 531 M en 30.05.2006 EXTMEHA 31.05.2006 CHSVOTH 2.15-1

¤ Installation
2.15.2 Flange Joint with Plug Contact
5 4 3 5 4 8 5 4
2
1
6 12
1
10
1 9
7 11
1 − Plug contact 5 − Fitting material 9 − Guide pin

2 − Fitting material 6 − Conductor 10 − Barrier insulator
3 − O-ring 7 − Guide rod 11 − Support insulator
4 − Fitting material 8 − O-ring 12 − Fitting material
Figure 2.15-2: Flange joint with plug contact
The plug contact piece (1) can be screwed onto gas barrier and post insulators as well
as conductor ends (Figure 2.15-2).
When supplied loose, the plug contact (1) is fitted to the gas barrier insulator (10), the
support insulator (11), or the conductor (6), according to the applicable layout dia-
gram, by using the fastening elements (12), comprising screw, lockwasher and plain
washer.
Procedure (Figure 2.15-2)

1. Bring the flanges to be coupled as close together as possible
2. Screw guide pins (9) onto available threaded studs with spacers at 4 points
arranged at even distances over the whole flange periphery. The location of
the bush spacers is indicated by punch marks on the outer perimeter. For
flange connections without insulators use guide rods (7)
3. Place O-rings (3) or (8), respectively, into position
4. Align the flanges so that they are parallel and in line and draw together on
the guide pins (9) or guide rods (7). When doing so, ensure proper contact of
the active parts
5. Before doing so, remove guide pins (9) / rods (7)
6. Working diagonally, tighten fastening bolts and nuts (2, 4, 5)

¤ Installation
2.15.3 Coupling with Transverse Insertion

2.15.3.1 Mounting and Dismounting
Before dismounting an insertion unit, remove any sensible surface damage or rough-
ness and clean the outside surface according to chapter “Installation”, document
1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS”.
When sliding the insertion unit, be careful not to damage the sealing areas on the
unit’s outer surface and on the sealing flange. Grease the contact pieces prior to
mounting the insertion unit contacts. After mounting, fasten the short-circuit bridges
(2, 5) (Figure 2.15-4).
2.15.3.2 Connecting to Busbar
Figure 2.15-3: Insertion unit contact

¤ Installation
A= 52±3
9 10 11 12 11 10 13 14,15 B = A/2 − 2
4 A 16
16
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B
10 10
1 − Transversal insertion unit 7 − O-ring 12 − Theraded sleeve
2 − Short-circuit bridge 8 − Housing 13 − Toroidal sealing ring
3 − Screw 9 − Screw 14 − Barrier insulator
4 − Split contact 10 − Contact piece 15 − Support insulator
5 − Short-circuit bridge 11 − Threaded rod 16 − Pins
6 − Conical nipple doc.1hdg118531−3
Figure 2.15-4: Insertion unit for busbars

1. The switchbays must be aligned in such a way that the busbar flanges to be
coupled are parallel and in line and do not exceed the tolerance limits speci-
fied in Figure 2.15-8
2. Measure the gap A between the contact pieces (10) and turn the pins (16)
with an equal amount on both sides of the carriage until the distance be-
tween pin and contact piece is 2 mm on both sides
3. Connect the conductor with the split contact (4)
4. Set the pins (16) to the correct distance
5. Fix the pins (16) in place using Loctite GMN 598 019 P14
6. Remount the transversal insertion unit (1)
7. When screwing together the threaded rod (11) and the threaded sleeve (12),
adjust the length of thread engagement to at least 15 mm

¤ Installation
2.15.3.3 Mounting the Transversal Insertion Unit Compensator
230±5
1 2 3 4 6 78 9 10 11 13
5 12
doc.1hdg118531−4
1 − Screw 6 − Unit compensator 10 − Threaded sleeve

2 − Transverse installation ring 7 − Washer 11 − Distance piece
3 − Transverse installation ring 8 − Nut 12 − Washer
4 − Pressing sheet 9 − Screw 13 − Insulator stud
5 − HF-contact spring
Figure 2.15-5: Transversal installation on the busbar with unit compensator
1. The aligned bays must be firmly fixed to their support structure before
mounting the unit compensators
2. The insulator studs (13) must be screwed out as far as possible in direc-
tion A, so that the unit compensator can be inserted
3. Threaded sleeve (10) must be fully screwed onto the bolt (9),
(Figure 2.15-5)
4. Insert the HF-Contact spring (5) in the groove of the transverse installa-
tion ring (3)Figure 2.15-5)
5. The unit compensators (6) are loosely screwed into place on the switch-
gear, on the sealing flange side, with the transverse installation rings (2
and 3), the HF-contact spring (5) and the pressing sheet (4) using the
screws (1)
6. Hold the bolts (9) in place and pre-tension the compensator devices by
fully tightening the nuts (8)
7. Screw in loosely the insulator stud (13) together with the threaded
sleeve (10), and push simultaneously the distance piece (11) and the
washers (12) onto the insulator stud (13)
8. Align the unit compensator (6) and secure with screw (1)
9. Screw the threaded sleeve (10) tightly up to the insulator stud (13)

¤ Installation
10. After gas filling, the threaded sleeve (10) is locked with the nut (8), which
first has
to be released from the compensator device with the bolt (9) held in
place.
The washer (7) remains on the screw (9)
11. Secure the loose washer (7) against vibrations by means of cable fas-
teners
2.15.3.4 Service and Extension
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
doc.1hdg118531−6
4 3 2 1
1 − Short-circuit bridge 7 − HF-contact spring

2 − Screw fitting 8 − Pressing sheet
3 − Short-circuit bridge 9 − Insertion unit contact
4 − Screw fitting 10 − Unit compensator
5 − O-ring 11 − Transversal insertion housing
6 − Transversal insertion ring 12 − Toroidal sealing ring
Figure 2.15-6: Busbar flange with insertion unit

1. Dismount the unit compensators (10)
2. Remove the short-circuit bridge (1 and 3)
3. Loosen the screw fittings (2) and (4). The insulator stays attached to the op-
posite flange
4. Slide in the insertion part (11) and remove the insertion unit contacts (9)
Assembly is carried out in the reverse order. By mounting the insertion unit contact
note the chapter “2.15.3.2 Connecting to busbar”

¤ Installation
2.15.3.5 Preparation of Conductor Connection for Test
1 − Insertion unit contacts

2 − Corona shield
3 − Contact piece
Figure 2.15-7: Corona shield mounted
Procedure
1. Dismount the unit compensators (10), (Figure 2.15-6)
2. Remove the short-circuit bridge (1 and 3), (Figure 2.15-6)
3. Loosen the screw fittings (2 and 4) leaving the insulator attached to the oppo-
site flange (Figure 2.15-6)
4. Slide in the transversal insertion housing (11), (Figure 2.15-6) and remove
the insertion unit contacts (1), (Figure 2.15-7)
5. Dismount the contact piece (3) from the insulator contact (Figure 2.15-7)
6. Put up the corona shield (2) onto the bus bar contact (Figure 2.15-7)
7. Remount the insertion unit (according to step “2.15.3.3 Mounting the trans-
versal insertion unit compensator”)

¤ Installation
2.15.4 Transversal Insertion Unit in Tube Connector
230 ± 5
1HDG118531-5
Figure 2.15-8: Measurement for aligning the transversal insertion unit
The purpose of the insertion unit is to compensate for manufacturing and building tol-
erances in large installations. In addition, it is used to join two adjacent sections which
are already in place and aligned within the permissible erection tolerances.

¤ Installation
2.16 Bay Coupling 4000 A

2.16.1 Setting up and aligning the first bay
Figure 2.16-1: Bay coupling
Setting up the first bay
The first bay is erected according to the applicable layout drawing. Before mounting
work is started, check the floor surface for levelness and measure the position of wall
and ceiling penetrations. This is necessary for compensation of tolerances on the
whole frame, in order to ensure proper alignment of the installation.
Use the circuit breaker adjusting screws to align the first bay in a way that, when set-
ting up the following bays, the permissible tolerances in floor surface level can be
properly compensated and a perfect coupling of the flanges is ensured. In the case of
installations with direct connection of transformers, the height of the connection points
must be considered. Align the first bay by applying a water level to the flange sur-
faces.
Setting up the second bay

The second bay is set up and adjusted in the desigated distance beneath the first bay.
Afterwards, the conductor connections and the flange connections are contacted.

¤ Installation
2.16.2 Flange joints with plug contact

3 4 5 4 3
10
2 1
7 8/9 7 2
1 − Fastening elements: 5 − O-Ring
screw, lockwasher, 6 − Connecting conductor
plain washer 7 − Insulator bolt
2 − Plug contact 8 − Barrier insulator
3 − Nut 9 − Support insulator
4 − Washer 10 − Connecting conductor
Figure 2.16-2: Flange joint with plug contact
The plug contact piece (2) (Figure 2.16-2) can be screwed onto barrier and support
insulators as well as on conductor ends.
When supplied loose, the plug contact (2) is fitted to the barrier insulator (6), the sup-
port insulator (9), or the connecting conductor (6), according to the applicable layout
diagram, by using the fastening elements (1), comprising screw, lockwasher and plain
washer.
Procedure
1. Bring the flanges to be coupled as close together as possible
2. The heigth of the second bay is to adjust in a way that the plug contact (2) of
the conductor ends are adjusted symmetrically to the connecting conductor
(10) and that the spiral rings are tensioned equally in the mounted position
3. Place O-rings (5) into position
4. Align the flanges so that they are parallel and in line and draw together.
When doing so, ensure proper contact of the active parts and ensure also
symmetric positioning of conductors and spiral rings
5. Working diagonally, tighten fastening bolts and nuts (3,4)

¤ Installation
2.16.3 Coupling with transversal insertion

2.16.3.1 Mounting and dismounting
Before dismounting an transversal insertion housing, remove any sensible surface
damage or roughness and clean the outside surface according to chapter “Installa-
tion”, document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS”. When sliding the transversal
insertion housing, be careful not to damage the transversal insertion housing.
2.16.3.2 Connecting to busbar: Principal procedure

1. The transversal insertion housing (7) is inserted into the busbar housing
(Figure 2.16-3)
2. The second bay is pre-adjusted to the first bay regarding the connecting con-
tact (4) and the plug contact (2), (Figure 2.16-3)
1 2
4
7 6 5
1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Short-circuit bridge

2 − Plug contact 6 − Short-circuit bridge
3 − Twisted contact 7 − Transversal insertion housing
4 − Connecting contact 8 − Busbar conductor
Figure 2.16-3: Coupling of two bays

3. Therefore, the switchbays must be aligned in such a way that the busbar
flanges to be coupled are parallel and in line and do not exceed the tolerance
limits specified in Figure 2.16-8
4. Loosen softly the screw between the busbar conductor (8) and the twisted
contact (3), (Figure 2.16-3)
5. Put the bays together, while doing so, make sure they fit well and check
centering
6. Tighten the screw of the twisted contact (3) with the specified torque
(Figure 2.16-3)
7. Mount the transversal insertion housing (7) to the neighbour bay
(Figure 2.16-3)

¤ Installation
8. When screwing together the threaded rod (9) and the threaded sleeve (10),
adjust the length of thread engagement to at least 15 mm (Figure 2.16-5)
9. Set the pins to the correct distance
10. Fix the pins in place using Loctite GMN 598 019 P14
11. After mounting, fasten the short-circuit bridges (5, 6) (Figure 2.16-3)
1
1 − Connecting conductor
2 − Twisted contact
3 − Busbar conductor
Figure 2.16-4: Connecting element

¤ Installation
2.16.3.3 Mounting the transversal insertion housing compensator
230±5
13 11 10 9 87 6 4 3 2 1
12 5
14
15
16
17
1 − Screws 7 − Washer 13 − Insulator stud

2 − Transverse installation ring 8 − Nuts 14 − Screw
3 − Transverse installation ring 9 − Screws 15 − Twisted contact
4 − Pressing sheet 10 − Threaded sleeve 16 − Connecting conductor
5 − HF-Contact spring 11 − Distance piece 17 − Plug contact
6 − Unit compensator 12 − Washer
Figure 2.16-5: Transversal insertion housing on the busbar with unit compensator
Procedure
1. The aligned bays must be firmly fixed to their support structure before
mounting the unit compensators
2. The insulator studs (13) must be screwed out as far as possible in direc-
tion A, so that the unit compensator can be inserted (Figure 2.16-5)
3. Threaded sleeve (10) must be fully screwed onto the screw (9)
4. Insert the HF-Contact spring (5) in the groove of the transverse installa-
tion ring (3)
5. The unit compensators (6) are loosely screwed into place on the switch-
gear, on the sealing flange side, with the transverse installation rings
(2,3), the HF-Contact spring (5) and the pressing sheet (4) using the
screw bolts (1)
6. Hold the screws (9) in place and pre-tension the compensator devices
by fully tightening the nuts (8)
7. The insulator stud (13) together with the threaded sleeve (10) are now
loosely screwed in. Simultaneously the distance piece (11) and the
washers (7) are to be pushed onto the insulator stud (13)
8. Align the unit compensator (6) and secure with screw (1)
9. Screw the threaded sleeve (10) tightly up to the insulator

¤ Installation
10. After gas filling, the threaded sleeve (10) is locked with the nut (8), which
first has to be
released from the unit compensator (6) with the bolt (9) held in place.
The washer (7)
remains on the bolt (9). The loose washer (7) can be secured against
vibrations by means of cable fasteners
2.16.3.4 Service and Extension
5 6
10
4 3 2 1 2
1 − Short-circuit bridge 6 − Unit compensator

2 − Screw fitting 7 − Connecting contact
3 − Short-circuit bridge 8 − Twisted contact
4 − Screw fitting 9 − Screws
5 − Transversal insertion housing 10 − Plug contact
Figure 2.16-6: Busbar flange with transversal insertion housing

2. Remove the short-circuit bridge (1, 3)
3. Loosen the screw fittings (2) and (4) leaving the insulator attached
to the opposite flange
4. Slide in the transversal insertion housing (5) and loosen the screws (9) of
the twisted contact (8)
5. Turn twisted contact (8) and connecting contact (7) to the side and tear on
the plug contact (10)

¤ Installation
6. Put twisted contact (8) and connecting contact (7) via the opening of the
transversal insertion housing (5) to the outside
Assembly is in the reverse order.
2.16.3.5 Preparation for test configuration of conductor connection
1 2 3
1 − Corona shield
2 − Opening of transversal insertion
3 − Transversal insertion housing
Figure 2.16-7: Corona shield mounted
2. Loosen the screw fittings (2 and 4) while leaving the insulator attached to the
opposite flange (Figure 2.16-6)
3. Slide in the transversal insertion housing (3) to the inner side (Figure 2.16-7)
4. Remove the screw (14) of the twisted contact (15), (Figure 2.16-5)
5. Turn aside the twisted contact (15) together with the connection conduc-
tor (16), (Figure 2.16-5)
6. Pull the twisted contact (15) with the connection conductor (16) off the plug
contact (17), (Figure 2.16-5)
7. Put the twisted contact outside via the opening of te transversal insertion (2),
(Figure 2.16-7)
8. Put up the corona shield (1) onto the busbar contact (Figure 2.16-7)
9. Remount the transversal insertion housing according to “2.16.3.3 Mounting
the transversal insertion housing compensator”

¤ Installation
2.16.4 Transversal insertion housing on a pipe
230 ± 5
Figure 2.16-8: Measurement for aligning the transversal insertion housing
The purpose of the transversal insertion housing is to compensate for manufacturing

and building tolerances in large installations. In addition, it is used to join two adjacent
sections which are already in place and aligned within the permissible erection toler-
ances.

¤ Installation
2.17 Split-up Module

The overhead-line connector (Figure 2.17-1) is supplied pre-assembled ready for con-
nection. This means that the plug-in contacts (10), Figure 2.17-3, for retaining the con-
tact pins of the outdoor bushing are already installed in the housing (7) on the barrier
insulator (8).
Note The connecting surfaces of the outdoor bushing must be clean and dry!
7 2
1 − Seal for transport-protection cover

2 − Transport-protection cover 8
7 − Housing
8 − Barrier insulator
Figure 2.17-1: Overhead-line connector
1HDG 118 546 B en 06.06.2006 EXTMEHA 06.06.2006 CHSVOTH 2.17-1

¤ Installation
9 − O-ring
Figure 2.17-2: Installation flange of connecting module
Installation
1. Fit O-ring (9) to installation flange of connecting module (Figure 2.17-2)
2. Once the outdoor connection is installed at corresponding flange, remove the
transport-protection cover (2), (Figure 2.17-1)
3. Remove the transport-protection cover seal (10), (Figure 2.17-3)
4. Insert outdoor bushing O-ring (6) in housing (7), (Figure 2.17-3)
5. Using a suitable lifting device, lift the outdoor bushing and insert in an upright
position in plug-in contact (4). In doing this, ensure that the sealing ring (6)
does not slip (Figure 2.17-3)
6. Tighten securing screws (5) to specified torque (Figure 2.17-3)
7. Carry out necessary gas handling
6 3
5
10
doc.1HDG118546−2
3 − Outdoor bushing 6 − O-Ring for outdoor bushing

4 − Contact pins 7 − Housing
5 − Securing screw 10 − Plug-in contact
Figure 2.17-3: Installed outdoor bushing

¤ Installation
2.18 Silicon outdoor bushing

2.18.1 General
This instruction is valid for silicon outdoor bushing1HDG131620M1.
Counteracting the locked up stress of the flange, the silicon outdoor bushing has to be
mounted in accordance to this instruction.
Note Installations not according to this regulations lead to damage of the cast-flange.
2.18.2 Installation of silicon outdoor bushing
Figure 2.18-5
DOC.1HDG 518231−1
Figure 2.18-1: silicon outdoor bushing 1HDG131620M1

1. Draw off N2-gas on the gas valve (3, Figure 2.18-2).
2. Remove the transport-protection cover (1, Figure 2.18-2).
Note Its not allowed using the o-ring (2, Figure 2.18-2) for final assembly.
1
3
Figure 2.18-2: State of delivery of the silicon outdoor bushing
1HDG 518 231 A en 10.08.2001 ACEMEWE 27.07.2001 ACEFRVW 2.18-1

¤ Installation
3. Contact surface of the flange (5, Figure 2.18-3)silikon-sealing material

(Hanno-Kit. transparent) GON 5980019P106 thin coating.
Note It is sufficient to coat the contact surface on the outer edge. The silicon-sealing material
are only prevent the intermediate ring from falling down during mounting or dismounting.
4. Lay up intermediate ring (4, Figure 2.18-4).

5. Mounting silicon outdoor bushing with new o-ring.
Figure 2.18-5: Mounting of the intermediate ring
1HDG 518 231 A en 10.08.2001 ACEMEWE 27.07.2001 ACEFRVW 2.18-2

¤ Installation
2.19 Inductive Voltage Transformer

Inductive voltage transformers are measuring transformers in which the secondary

voltage for all practical purposes is proportional to and in phase with the primary
voltage. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the network voltage to be
measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective
devices. The primary and the secondary windings are galvanically seperated.
During installation the barrier insulator (2, Figure 2.19-1) of the voltage transformer
must not be dismounted, as the voltage transformer is already being shipped with a
SF6 prefilling. For the installation of the voltage transformer, a lifting device with a
minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg is required.
CAUTION The inductive voltage transformer (Figure 2.19-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a
pressure of 150 kPa. Do not evacuate!
3
1
1 − Connection flange
3 − Gas fitting
Figure 2.19-1: Voltage Transformer

¤ Installation
Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Figure 2.19-2 shows the connection of the voltage transformer to a feeder module
with integrated disconnector / earthing switch. The voltage transformer is connected in
this case to the GIS side.
Installation of the Voltage Transformer to the GIS side (Figure 2.19-2)
1. Connect the voltage transformer conductor (4) without a gauge to the barrier
insulator (1)
2. Place an o-ring (7) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the voltage
transformer
3. Lower the voltage transformer straight and carefully into the connection
flange (8) using a lifting device with a minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg
4. Make sure that the voltage transformer conductor (4) smoothly slides into the
voltage transformer connector (5) without jamming; check correct fitting of
the o-ring (7)
5. Bolt the voltage transformer flange and the connection flange (8) together
with the specified torque
7
8
1
6
4 3 2
DOC.1HDG118544−2
1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Voltage transformer connector

2 − Plate 6 − Fitting bolt
3 − Screews with accessories 7 − 0-Ring
4 − Voltage transformer conductor 8 − Connection flange
Figure 2.19-2: Connection of voltage transformer

¤ Installation
DOC.1HD118536−1
Figure 2.19-3: Voltage transformer installed at outgoing disconnector

¤ Installation
2.20 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation

Equipment
Inductive voltage transformers are measuring transformers in which the secondary

voltage for all practical purposes is proportional to and in phase with the primary
voltage. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the network voltage to be
measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective
devices. The primary and the secondary windings are galvanically seperated.
During installation the barrier insulator (2) of the voltage transformer must not be dis-
mounted, as the voltage transformer is already being shipped with a SF6 prefilling
(Figure 2.20-1). For the installation of the voltage transformer, a lifting device with a
minimum lifting capacity of 1000 kg is required.
Lifting Lugs
Four lifting lugs are provided on the voltage transformer tank. For lifting the transfor-
mer (either horizontally or vertically) both respective lifting lugs shall be used.
CAUTION The inductive voltage transformer (Figure 2.20-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a
pressure of 150 kPa. Do not evacuate!

¤ Installation
3 4
1 − Connection flange 3 − Gas fitting

2 − Barrier insulator 4 − Lifting lug
Figure 2.20-1: 3phase Voltage Transformer

¤ Installation
Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Figure 2.20-2 shows the connection of the voltage transformer to a feeder module
with integrated disconnector / earthing switch. The voltage transformer is connected in
this case to the GIS side.
Installation of the Voltage Transformer to the GIS side
1. Connect the voltage transformer conductor (4) without a gauge to the barrier
insulator (1) (Figure 2.20-2)
2. Place an o-ring (7) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the voltage
transformer
3. Lower the voltage transformer straight and carefully into the connection
flange (8) using a lifting device with a minimum lifting capacity of 1000 kg
4. Make sure that the voltage transformer conductor (4) smoothly slides into the
voltage transformer connector (5) without jamming; check correct fitting of
the o-ring (7)
5. Bolt the voltage transformer flange and the connection flange (8) together
with the specified torque
7
8
1
6
4 3 2
DOC.1HDG118544−2
1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Voltage transformer connector

2 − Plate 6 − Fitting bolt
3 − Screews with accessories 7 − 0-Ring
4 − Voltage transformer conductor 8 − Connection flange
Figure 2.20-2: Connection of voltage transformer

¤ Installation
2.21 Surge Arrester

CAUTION The surge arrester (Figure 2.21-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a pressure of 120
kPa. Do not evacuate!
The surge arrester (1) is supplied fully pre-assembled (Figure 2.21-1).

11 View A"
7
5(2,3)
9
5 10
4
View A" 4
1 − Surge arrester 7 − Barrier insulator
2 − Density monitor 8 − Grounding terminal, 4xM16
3 − Right-angle adapter 9 − Bushing segment
4 − Bursting disc 10 − Discharge counter
5 − Gas connection 11 − Plug contact
6 − Base plate
Figure 2.21-1: Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ0

¤ Installation
Installation steps
1. Install plug contacts (11) at barrier insulator (7) (Figure 2.21-1)
2. Position O-ring
3. Using a suitable lifting device, lift the surge arrester and position in an upright
position on the mating flange
Note Ensure that the O-ring is fitted correctly when positioning the surge arrester!
4. Screw on flange connection in accordance with standard specifications


¤ Installation
2.22 Direct Transformer Connection

3 1
9 − Transformer connection
10 − Dividing piece
11 − Transformer
Figure 2.22-1: Direct transformer connection mounted
2.22.1 General
The transformer-connection housing (Figure 2.22-1, 1) is pre-installed on the dividing
piece (2). Connection housing on the transformer side is sealed with a transportation
cover.

¤ Installation
2.22.2 Mounting
Check all parts for completeness, obvious transport damages etc. well before com-
mencement of the installation.
1. Bellows must be installed on the transformer side (Figure 2.22-1, 3) in order

to absorb transformer oscillations
2. Remove housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7) of transformer connections from flange
(Figure 2.22-2, 6) of installation or dividing piece (Figure 2.22-1, 2)
3. Retaining clips (Figure 2.22-2, 14) must be turned outwards (check this) (this
ensures that the sealing ring (Figure 2.22-2, 12) remains secured to the
housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7))
4. After removing the pressure disk (Figure 2.22-2, 5), remove the transporta-
tion cover (Figure 2.22-2, 13)
5. Remove housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7) from dividing piece (Figure 2.22-1, 2) and
install with pressure disk (Figure 2.22-2, 5) on flange of transformer bushing
(Figure 2.22-2, 11) (a new O-ring (Figure 2.22-2, 4) must be used for this)
6. Turn retaining clips (Figure 2.22-2, 14) inwards so that they hold the sealing
ring (Figure 2.22-2, 12) at the flange of the transformer bushing
(Figure 2.22-2, 11)
7. Loosen the pressure disc (Figure 2.22-2, 5) and push back the housing
(Figure 2.22-2, 7)
8. Set the transformer or installation to the required position as specified in the
location diagram
9. Install housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7) on flange (Figure 2.22-2, 6), a check in-
stallation
10. Dismount the housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7) from the flange (Figure 2.22-2, 6)
again and let it down

¤ Installation
Dividing piece Transformer

6 13 5
9 8 10 14
7 12 4 5
12 − O-ring 18 − O-Ring
13 − Pressure disk 19 − Flange 11
14 − Flange 20 − Sealing ring
15 − Enclosure 21 − Transportation cover
16 − O-ring 22 − Retaining clips
17 − tSplit contact
Figure 2.22-2: Direct transformer connection

¤ Installation
11. Measure clearance between conductors (Figure 2.22-3)

12. Install split contacts (Figure 2.22-3, 9) in accordance with installation instruc-
tions for field coupling (1HDG 118 531)
13. Secure feedthrough flange of transformer and flange of dividing piece to
housing (Figure 2.22-2, 7), use new sealing rings (Figure 2.22-2, 8 and 10)
(screws must be tightened in a diagonally opposite sequence)
14. Carry out gas treatment at transformer connections
52±3
Figure 2.22-3: Split contact installed

¤ Installation
2.23 3-phase Direct Transformer Connection

2.23.1 Delivery
The transformer connection enclosures (1) are ready preassembled ex-works. The
connection enclosure is enclosed on both sides with transportation covers (5). The
conductor elements (3 and 4) and split transverse mount contacts (2) are supplied
complete, but loose.
For final installation of the transformer connection an adjusting gauge

(1HDG 114 000 R1, Figure 2.23-2) is required for the purpose of aligning the conduc-
tors.
1
8
2203
7
3 4 6
DOC.1HDG118530−1
9
1 − Transformer connection enclosure 4 − Connection element 7 − Transverse mount connection

2 − Split transverse mount contact 5 − Transportation cover 8 − O-ring
3 − Conductor 6 − Transformer leadthrough 9 − End cover
Figure 2.23-1: Installed 3-phase direct transformer connection

¤ Installation
2.23.2 Adjusting Gauge 1HDG 114 000 R1
Figure 2.23-2: Adjusting gauge for conductors
2.23.3 Information on Installation

The enclosure can be installed in two ways:
S Install the enclosure complete with end cover (9) onto the transformer lead-
throughs (Figure 2.23-1)
or
S Install the end cover (9) loosely on the transformer leadthroughs
(Figure 2.23-1) and
S Fasten the enclosure to the preassembled end plate
Note This type of installation causes increased expenditure!
2.23.4 Installation
1. Remove the transportation cover (5) from the end cover and transverse
mount device (Figure 2.23-1)
2. Demount the transverse mount connection (7) and slide back the transverse
mount enclosure (Figure 2.23-1)
3. Insert the O-ring (8) into the seal groove in the enclosure (1) (Figure 2.23-1)
4. Push the enclosure onto the transformer leadthroughs (6) and fasten it
(Figure 2.23-1)
5. Slide the enclosure over the leadthroughs (Figure 2.23-1)
6. Screw the connection elements (4) tightly to the conductors (3)
(Figure 2.23-1)
7. Fasten the installed conductors by means of the fastening parts (10) loosely
to the transformer leadthroughs (Figure 2.23-3)
8. Install the adjusting gauge (Figure 2.23-4)

¤ Installation
10
doc.1hdg118118−1
10 − Fastening parts
Figure 2.23-3: Conductors installed
10
11
12
13
doc.1hdg118118−1
1 − Enclosure 12 − Adjusting bolt

10 − Fastening parts 13 − Adjusting gauge
11 − Fastening parts
Figure 2.23-4: Adjusting gauge installed

9. Loosen nuts of the fastening parts (10) and (11) until the adjusting bolt (12) is
turnable (Figure 2.23-4)
10. Screw the adjusting bolts (12) onto the enclosure stud bolts (1) until the ad-
justing gauge (13) is at a constant contact distance from the spacing angle
brackets on the enclosure wall − at the same time the conductors are to be
inserted into the plastic bushes that are screwed onto the gauge
(Figure 2.23-4)
11. If the conductors are then aligned without any voltage, the screws of the
fastening parts (10) can be tightened to the prescribed torque (Figure 2.23-3)

¤ Installation
12. Demount the gauge

13. Measure the spacing dimension of the conductors (Figure 2.23-1)
14. Align unit or transformer and connection enclosure with one another
15. Install an enclosure flange gasket
16. Install split contacts (2) (Figure 2.23-5)
17. Open the contact supplied complete in loose form by removing one of the
two fastening screws (1) (Figure 2.23-5)
18. Adjust set screws (3) to dimension 52 3 −2 (Figure 2.23-5)

2
2
52±3
3
1 − Screw
2 − Split contact
3 − Set screw
Figure 2.23-5: Split contact installed

19. Put half-round contact sections back together and tighten the screw (1)
(Figure 2.23-5)
20. Pull out the transverse mount enclosure and close
21. Install transverse mount connections (7) (Figure 2.23-1)
22. Install the earth bridges exactly at the opposite side

¤ Installation
2.24 Busducts
If not already factory-installed, busducts are supplied in two variations:
S Double-ended with internal insulators
S Ready for connection to external insulators
2.24.1 Connection with Double-ended Internal Insulators

In the case of double-ended internal insulators (both insulators are factory-installed),
the installation of mating contacts is described in the Installation Instructions for mat-
ing flanges.
After installation of contact connections, insert O-rings and screw busduct onto
counter flange.
Figure 2.24-1: Busduct with double-ended internal insulator
1HDG 118 534 B en 26.08.1999 ACEMEWE 30.08.1999 ACEVOTH 2.24-1

¤ Installation
2.24.2 Connection to External Insulator
Figure 2.24-2: Busduct with transportation protective cover
In this case, the busduct is only fitted with an internal insulator on one side. The fixed
contacts are pre-installed in this insulator at the factory.
2
1
1 − Straight contact
2 − Contact for 30°-rotation
Figure 2.24-3: Fixed contacts

¤ Installation
The plug-in contacts (2) are screwed onto a transportation protective cover (1) and
support the conductor (3) during transportation.
2 3
1 − Transportation protective cover

2 − Plug-in contact
3 − Conductor
Figure 2.24-4: Plug-in contact installed on transportation protective cover
For installation, remove the transportation protective cover and unscrew plug-in con-
tacts. Plug-in contacts are required for final installation.
1 2
1 − Straight contact
2 − Contact for 30°-rotation
Figure 2.24-5: Plug-in contacts without phase rotation

¤ Installation
2.24.3 Busduct Installation without Transverse Erection

After the plug-in contacts are positioned and installed on the connecting flange, con-
nect the busduct so that it is straight. Ensure that all contacts slide into each other
without damage. Insert O-rings and screw flanges together.
Figure 2.24-6: Busduct with burst protection without transverse erection module
2.24.4 Busduct Installation with Transverse Erection

After the plug-in contacts are installed on the insulator of the connecting flange, con-
nect the busduct so that it is straight. Check the contacts being pushed on and ensure
that they slide into each other without damage. Screw the transverse erection module
onto the connecting flange.
Note The coupling of feeders with the transverse erection module is described in detail in
chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 118 531 “Bay Coupling”.
Figure 2.24-7: Busduct with burst protection and transverse erection module

¤ Installation
2.25 SMART-GIS
2.25.1 Gas-Density Sensor
The gas-density sensor (Figure 2.25-1) should be installed in the following steps:
1. The sealing surface of the flange coupling and sensor must be clean, remove
foreign bodies if necessary
2. In each case, a new copper gasket must be used − they must not be used a
second time
3. Before insertion, the copper gaskets should be coated on both sides with
OKS VP 980 grease
4. Then insert the gasket and tighten the gas-density sensor to a torque of
70 Nm. The gasket becomes deformed (the wrench size is 27 mm A / F)
5. Following this, another gas-leakage test should be carried out at the new
joint (sniff-test)
1 − Gas-density sensor 3 − Copper gasket

2 − Screwed gland (tightening torque 70 Nm) 4 − Flange coupling
Figure 2.25-1: Mounted gas-density sensor

¤ Installation
2.25.2 Inductive Rotary Transducer

1 2 3
2 mm
6
7
8
1 − Angular connection (plug) 5 − Fastening block

2 − Inductive rotary transducer 6 − M5 Allen screws
3 − Retaining plate 7 − Gear wheel
4 − Spherical head 8 − Cam segment
Figure 2.25-2: Mounted inductive rotary transducer on the HMB-1
2.25.2.1 Installation and alignment

The inductive rotary transducer (rotary sensor) should be installed in the following se-
quence (Figure 2.25-2):
1. Ensure that the circuit-breaker cannot receive a switch command
(deactivate PISA)
2. Screw the inductive rotary transducer (2) firmly in place on the retaining plate
(3). When aligning, the cable of the angular connector (plug) (1) should point
downwards. As a marking aid, the rotary transducer has a small guide lug
pointing downwards on the connector
3. Using a threaded pin and 2 mm wrench, secure the gear wheel (7) onto the
flat part of the shaft approx. 2 mm from the retaining plate (3)
4. Secure the threaded pin with 1 drop of Loctite 241, blue
CAUTION It is essential to observe the following when installing / disassembling: Do not

lever the sensor shaft or subject it to impacts since magnetic shells are stuck to
the inside of the shaft. If care is not taken, the sensor will be destroyed. Heat the
gear wheel if necessary.
5. Using two M5 Allen screws (6) (4 mm wrench) and washers, screw the as-
sembled unit onto the securing blocks (5)
6. Keep the gear play to a minimum but ensure ease of movement over the en-
tire running surface. To do this, detach the spherical head (4) from the oper-
ating mechanism spring and move the cam segment (8) by hand
7. Slightly grease gear rack
8. Tighten both M5 screws (6) and secure with varnish
9. Reinstall spherical head (4)

¤ Installation
10. Cut angular connection (plug with cable) to size and attach crimp contacts
11. Unscrew and remove the PISA protective cover and connect the data lines
incl. screen in accordance with the schematic diagram to connector -X1
2.25.2.2 Calibration and check

12. Calibrate the sensor in PISA
13. To check: Pull spring energy store over the PISA electronics system as far as
the locking device O-CO
14. Using a reference dimension, check the covered distance: The spring excur-
sion of an HMB-1 up to the ”OCO locking device” is 47 ± 1 mm
CAUTION An uncalibrated inductor. Rotary sensor is not ready for operation. Unintended
reactions from the circuit-breaker are possible!
2.25.2.3 Removal
The inductive rotary transducer (rotary sensor) (Figure 2.25-2) can be removed by
following the same steps as in “2.25.2.1 Calibration and check”.
The following points are especially important:

1. Firstly, ensure that the circuit-breaker cannot receive switch commands
(deactivate the PISA)
2. Observe the above-mentioned note on mechanical manual operation

¤ Installation
2.25.3 Inductive Proximity Switch

Installation and Disassembly of the Inductive Proximity Switch
(using the HMB-1 as an example)
The following steps should be taken when installing the inductive proximity switch
(Figure 2.25-3).
1 2 3 4
Switching linkage side
CLOSE
Operating OPEN
mechanism side
Distance a = 116 mm (HMB-)1

1 − Indicator bolts Switching distance s = 1 to 1.5mm
2 − Nut, 17A/F, Md = 6 Nm, fixing varnish
3 − Inductive proximity switch
4 − Light-emitting diode (LED)
Figure 2.25-3: Mounting of inductive proximity switch to HMB-1

1. The circuit-breaker is in OPEN position
2. Ensure that the circuit-breaker cannot receive a switching command
(switch off PISA)
3. Align proximity switch for the OPEN position centrally with respect to the indi-
cator bolt and set switching distance s
4. Align proximity switch for the CLOSE position with respect to distance a and
set switching distance s (Figure 2.25-3)
The switching distance s depends on the switching device. With disconnec-
tors or fast acting earthing switches, the switching distance s is smaller (cf
corresponding switching device)
5. Check switching distance with gauge:
The LEDs must be facing upwards (visibility)
6. Tighten nuts with a 17-mm wrench to a torque of 6 Nm
7. Secure all nuts with fixing varnish
8. Cut the cables to the proper length and fit the 3 cores with crimp contacts
9. Unscrew and remove PISA protective cover and connect the proximity switch
to connector −X1 in accordance with the schematic diagram
10. Integrate cable in wiring harness
11. Secure the protective cover back onto the PISA
12. Check: Actuate the switching device by means of the REC580 and store the
motion times in PISA

¤ Installation
2.25.4 Optical Waveguide

The optical waveguide facilitates unidirectional data transfer between the process en-
vironment electronics PISA and the bay control unit REC580 in the control cubicle.
One fibre is required for the transmission and one for the return of the signals respec-
tively. Optical waveguides are completely insensitive to electromagnetic interference.
Shipping and storage
The fibres, single cores and buffered fibres should be protected against damage and
moisture during shipping and storage. Cable ends must also be protected against
moisture when transporting or storing. Coils with rolled-up cables must be rolled out
only in the direction indicated by arrows on the coil flanges and transported with hori-
zontal coil axles. Bumps should be avoided.
2.25.4.1 Operational description
Maintenance
We recommend that you contact our service department when work involves access
to the interior of the system.
Note Please find our contact address in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction”
in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 007 “Gas insulated
switchgear 52-170 kV: After-sales service”.
Precautionary measures / cross reference
Note Relevant safety and accident-prevention measures should be observed when performing
any kind of work on the unit. Suitable precautions must be taken to protect system
components against contamination through dust, rain or condensed water.
This is described in detail in 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS”.
Installation
When unwinding fibres and cores from coils or rings, ensure that they are not kinked
or twisted. End caps and, where applicable, corrosion protection at the cable ends
must not be damaged during installation. If damage occurs in spite of the above pre-
cautions, deficiencies should be rectified immediately. During installation, ensure that
the minimum permissible bending radius of the optical waveguide cable is observed.
The minimum permissible bending radius can be obtained from the data sheet and/or
from the following documentation (Figure 2.25-4).
The mechanical properties of the cables are temperature-dependent (depending on

type). When installing and rewinding optical waveguide cables, ensure that you ob-
serve the permissible temperature ranges in accordance with the data sheet. The
specified temperature conditions can only be described as fulfilled if the affected
cables have not been exposed to temperatures outside the permissible range during
the 12 hours before installation or rewinding.
The optical waveguides are sensitive to mechanical loads and cold conditions: Do not
bend, kink, or pull on waveguide. Do not install waveguides at temperatures under
5°C. Particular attention must be paid to positions (8) in Figure 2.25-4. Further in-
formation may be obtained from the corresponding waveguide data sheet.

¤ Installation
Do not dirty the optical waveguide plug or allow it to hang freely (protective cap). To
prevent damaging connectors when carrying out installation or disassembly work,
tools such as pliers must not be used.
7 6 5
4
Bending radius > 10 S Diameter
2
8
1 − Heavy-duty screwed gland 5 − ST connector with bayonet lock

with strain relief 6 − End sleeve
2 − Diameter 7 − Protective cap
3 − Jacket of breakout cable 8 − Particularly kink-sensitive position
4 − Conductor
Figure 2.25-4: Optical waveguide (breakout cable) with heavy-duty screwed gland
2.25.4.2 Installation of Optical Waveguide

The optical waveguides are prefabricated complete with ST connectors and heavy-
duty screwed glands (13.5) (Figure 2.25-4). The waveguides must be correctly
installed before the heavy-duty screwed glands are tightened. When disassembling,
first release and remove the heavy-duty screwed glands and then pull out the wave-
guide.
When pulling through a tube, it may be necessary to secure the transmission wire at
the breakout cable (Figure 2.25-4) and cover the waveguide with adhesive tape.
Taking the disconnector / earthing switch operating mechanism as an example for all
operating mechanisms, the following is a list of installation steps.
1. Insert optical waveguide with corresponding heavy-duty screwed glands and
fitted protective cap (!) into the threaded hole at the operating mechanism
case (do not bend cable and plug)
2. The heavy-duty screwed gland union nut and the strain relief must be loose.
When turning the heavy-duty screwed gland, the waveguide must not be
twisted.
3. Pull or push at the breakout cable jacket until installation length in the operat-
ing mechanism case has been reached.
CAUTION Pull only at the breakout cable jacket (Figure 2.25-4) and never at the waveguide
or plug!

¤ Installation
Never use unsuitable tools (e.g. pliers) when installing the ST connector of
the optical waveguide. When pulling through tubes or performing similar op-
erations, it may be necessary to additionally insulate the connectors with wa-
veguide up to the connection point waveguide-jacket of the breakout cable.
4. The optical waveguide is connected to the elbow coupling in the operating
mechanism case. The remaining connection between elbow coupling and
PISA is by means of a waveguide extension.
When exchanging the optical waveguide between the operating mechanism
and control cubicle, the PISA does not have to be opened.
The following note applies only to work involving electronic compo-
nents, e.g. when replacing the waveguide extension (items 6 to 10), or
to the control cubicle.
Note All electronic devices should be protected against electrostatic discharge. To avoid
damage, the prescribed, earthed wrist strap should be worn when working with (handling)
printed-circuit boards. The wrist strap must have a built-in protective resistor. For storage
and shipping of printed-circuit boards, it is essential that the conductive plastic protective
coverings be used.
5. Unscrew PISA electronics screening cover

6. For safety reasons, make sure you are earthed before removing connectors
The PISA rating plate with connector pin assignment is beside the protective
cover
7. Connector −X1 (Figure 2.25-5) should be removed to make installation eas-
ier. To do this, remove grid clamps from the top and bottom. If necessary, you
can also remove connector −X4 (barbed hook). Do not remove the feeder-
cable screen earthing connections.
8. Remove the waveguide protective cap, insert the ST connector lug in the
prescribed groove on the mating connector on the PISA printed-circuit board
and close the bayonet lock. When doing this, touch the connector only! Do
not use any tools!
The designations on the waveguide correspond to the designation of the
mating connectors on the PISA and/or the REC580 star-coupling card in the
control cubicle:
-TX= transmit (T) , -RX=receive (R),
and/or designation of the waveguide fibre must match the LED designation.
9. Reconnect the disconnected connectors -X1 and -X4 to PISA; when doing
this, secure −X1 to both grid clamps
10. Integrate the optical waveguide in the wiring harness and screw the PISA
electronic screening cover firmly into place. When doing this, make sure that
the waveguide is not routed over a steel edge of the screening cover. Do not
kink the waveguide!
11. Align the waveguide in the operating mechanism along the wiring harness,
secure with cable binders. Observe bending radii of optical waveguide
(Figure 2.25-4). Do not kink the waveguide!
12. Tighten the union nut of the heavy-duty screwed gland (the waveguide goes
through this into the operating mechanism case)
13. Slightly tighten the heavy-duty screwed gland strain relief
14. Check that all plugs and screen earthing connections are correctly fitted

¤ Installation
Latching
element
Optical
waveguide
connection
Latching
element
Figure 2.25-5: Connector layout in PISA
2.25.4.3 Dismounting the Optical Waveguide

Disassembly is carried out in reverse sequence to installation.
Note The following must be observed when handling circuit-breakers

(as opposed to all other operating mechanisms):
Even though the waveguide is disconnected, the circuit-breaker is still switchable

since external protection commands are received by PISA via copper cables. The
pump motor can also start up.
Disassembly is carried out exactly in reverse sequence to installation. The optical

waveguide is connected to the elbow coupling in the operating mechanism case. The
remaining connection between elbow coupling and PISA is by means of a waveguide
extension.
When exchanging the optical waveguide between the operating mechanism and con-
trol cubicle, the PISA does not have to be opened.
The following note applies only to work involving electronic components, e.g.
when replacing the waveguide extension, or to the control cubicle.

¤ Installation
Note All electronic devices should be protected against electrostatic discharge. To avoid
damage, the prescribed, earthed wrist strap should be worn when working with (handling)
printed-circuit boards. The wrist strap must have a built-in protective resistor. For storage
and shipping of printed-circuit boards, it is essential that the conductive plastic protective
coverings be used.
The 24-pin HTS plug can only be released either after complete disassembly of the
waveguide, or else when the copper cable with plug has been relieved of strain (se-
cure to operating mechanism case).
The waveguide on its own should not bear the weight of the copper cable and the
24-pin HTS plug.
If signal transmission is faulty, the switching device cannot be controlled from the con-
trol cubicle.
The following special feature, however, applies to the circuit-breaker:
External protection commands (independent of the waveguide) can cause circuit-

breaker actuation. Neither is it possible to prevent a pump motor start-up.
2.25.4.4 Function check

The best method of testing an optical waveguide is with an attenuation measuring de-
vice. A simple, optical light check (e.g. torch) is not sufficient. For this purpose, ABB
Service can provide you with a complete portable test set.

¤ Installation
2.26 Test bushing on test adapter

2.26.1 General
− Check the supplied parts for damage.
− Remove transportation protective cover.
Note Protect the opened gas comparments from pollution.
− Mounting of flanges and seals and gas treatment has to be carried out ac-
cording to specification.
2.26.2 Connection with double-ended internal insulators

Connection with double-ended internal insulators (Figure 2.26-1)
1. Clean the flange of the test bushing (1) and the adapter flange (2)
2. Fix the O-ring (7) with the adapter flange (2) at the test bushing (1). For this
use the fixing parts (8-10).
3. Tighten screws (8) to the specified moment of torsion
4. Clean the contact bolt (3) and the conductor end of the test bushing (1)
5. Grease the contact surface according to the installation instruction.
6. Fix the contact bolt (3) with the fixing parts (4-6)
7. Tighten screws (4) to the specified moment of torsion
2 1
4, 5, 6
DOC.1HDG118357−1
7 8, 9, 10
1 − Test bushing 6 − Washer A−17 DIN 125

2 − Adapter flange 7 − O-ring 300x10
3 − Contact bolt 8 − Screw M12x60 DIN 933
4 − Screw M16x200 DIN 912 9 − Spring washer A−13 DIN 128
5 − Spring washer A−17 DIN 128 10 − Washer A−13 DIN 125
Figure 2.26-1: Installation of the contact bolt at the test bushing

¤ Installation
2.26.3 Installation of the test bushing on the test adapter

Installation of the test bushing on the test adapter (Figure 2.26-2)
1. Lift the test bushing (5) with a suitable device
2. The Contact bolt (3) and opposite contact (2) have to be greased thinly be-
fore mounting
3. Put the O-ring (4) in the sealing groove
4. Fix the test bushing (5) with the fixing parts (6-9) at the test adapter (1)
5. Tighten screws (6, 9) to the specified moment of torsion
1 2 3 4 5
6,7,8,9
1 − Test adapter 4 − O-Ring 420x10 7 − Spring washer A−13 DIN 128

2 − Opposite contact 5 − Test bushing 8 − Washer A−13 DIN 125
3 − Contact bolt 6 − Screw M12x100 DIN 933 9 − Hexagon nut M12 DIN 934
Figure 2.26-2: Installation of the test bushing at the test adapter

Content
3 ¤ Commissioning
Content
3.1 Setting up and Configuration of a PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.1 Abbreviations and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.2 PISA configuration (Release 1.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2.1 Entering configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2.2 Calibrating the spring-travel sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-7
3.1.3 Operating program and setup tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-8
3.1.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and script files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-9
3.1.4 PISA Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.2 Preparing REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-12
3.1.4.3 Setting up communication with PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-14
3.1.4.4 Functions in setup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-15
3.1.4.5 Example of PISA standard parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-22
3.2 Setup and Configuration of a PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.2 PISA-Configuration (Release 1.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2.1 Input of Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2.2 Calibration of Spring Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-8
3.2.3 Operating Software and Setup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and Scriptfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-10
3.2.4 PISA Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-13
3.2.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-13
3.2.4.2 Preparation of the REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-14
3.2.4.3 Establishing the Communication with the PISA . . . . . . . 3.2-15
3.2.4.4 Functions in Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-17
3.2.4.5 Example for PISA Standard Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-24
3.2.4.6 Documentation of PISA Standard Parameters and
Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-26
3-1
Content
3.3 System start SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1

3.3.1 SMART-GIS engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.2 SMART-GIS system start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.3 Starting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.3.3.1 Switching on REC580 and PISA simultaneously . . . . . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.2 Switching on PISA (REC580 in normal operating mode) 3.3-2
3.3.3.3 Switching on PISA (REC580 remains off) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.4 Switching on REC580 (PISA in “Stand-alone mode”) . . 3.3-2
3.3.3.5 Switching REC580 on while PISA remains off . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4 Behaviour in event of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4.2 REC580 failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.4.3 PISA failure while REC580 continues running . . . . . . . . 3.3-3
3.3.5 Stand-alone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.5.1 PISA without process bus communication . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.5.2 PISA after (re)connection of communication . . . . . . . . . 3.3-4
3.3.6 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.3.6.1 Decommissioning a single drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.3.6.2 Decommissioning a single bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-5
3.4 System Start-up SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.1 Engineering of SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.2 SMART-GIS System Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.3 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.4.3.1 Simultaneous Switching-On of REC580 and PISAs . . . 3.4-2
3.4.3.2 Switching on PISA with REC580 in Normal Operation . 3.4-2
3.4.3.3 Switching on PISA with REC580 switched off . . . . . . . . 3.4-2
3.4.3.4 Switching on REC580 with PISA in “Stand-Alone Mode” 3.4-2
3.4.3.5 Switching on REC580 with PISA switched off . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4 Behaviour in case of Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.1 Communication Failure PISA <−> REC580 . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3
3.4.4.3 Failure of PISA while REC580 continues to operate . . . 3.4-3
3.4.5 “Stand-Alone” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.5.1 PISA without Process Bus Communication . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.5.2 PISA after (Re-)Establishment of Communication . . . . 3.4-4
3.4.6 De-Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
3.4.6.1 De-Commissioning a single Operating Mechanism . . . 3.4-5
3.4.6.2 De-Commissioning a single bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
3-2
Content
3.5 Commissioning of a SMART-GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1

3.5.2 Functional Test of Operating Mechanism and PISA . . . 3.5-1
3.5.2.1 SF6-Gas Compartment and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1
3.5.2.2 Functional Test of a combined Disconnector / Earthing
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-6
3.5.2.3 Functional Test of a Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-8
3.5.3 Check the Bay Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.1 REC580 Binary Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.2 REC580 Binary Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.3.3 Connection of Protection to the PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-12
3.5.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-16
3.5.4.1 Pump Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-16
3.5.4.2 Indication of non-executed Switching Commands . . . . 3.5-16
3.6 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-1
3.6.1 Tools for On-Site Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.2 Inspection after Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-2
3.6.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors . 3.6-3
3.6.5 Check of Gas Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.6 Dew Point Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.7 Visual Inspection & SF6 Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3
3.6.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices 3.6-4
3.6.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-4
3.6.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . 3.6-5
3.7.1 Setting and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3.7.2 Adjusting the Switching Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3.7.3 Matching the Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7-1
3-3
Content

3.8.3 Test Adapter GPFK 051 310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-4
3.8.5 High Voltage Test at the Bay with Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-14
3.8.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-21
3.9.3 Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-4
3.9.3.1 Content of the delivery pack for ELK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-6
3.9.4.2 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Disconnector 4000 A . . 3.9-13
3.9.5 High Voltage Test of Cables at the Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-16
3.9.6.1 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Feeder 4000 A . . . . . . . 3.9-23
3.9.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-24
3-4
¤ Commissioning
3.1 Setting up and Configuration of a PISA 1.0

In this document all works associated with the handling of PISA and PC for commis-
sioning are described. The listed procedures are needed for first commissioning but
also after maintanance or changes of the GIS.
Following procedures are described:

1. Start up PROCOMM PLUS and set up a connection with the hardware unit
(“3.1.3.2.2 Setting up a connection to the hardware component”)
2. Preparing REC580 to set up communication with PISA
(“3.1.4.2 Preparing REC580”)
3. Log on to PISA (“3.1.4.3.2 Logging on to PISA”)
4. Setting or changing of parameters
5. Testing special functions
3.1.1 Abbreviations and definitions

BIO Binary Input / Output Module
CB Circuit-Breaker
CPU Central Processing Unit
Di Disconnector
Di / Er Disconnector / Earthing Switch Combination
ELK-04 Gas Insulated Switchgear (product designation)
Er Earthing Switch
EXK-01 Gas Insulated Switchgear (product designation)
FE Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
Field Value
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear
HMB-1 Hydraulic Stored-Energy Spring Mechanism (product designation)
ID Identification Number
ITM Isolation Transducer Module
LWL Optical Fibre
MBA Multi-function Process Bus Administrator
MTM Mixed Transformer Module
MVB Multi-function Vehicle Bus
PISA Process Interface for Sensors and Actuators
PSM Power Supply Module
REC580 Bay Control Unit (product designation)
SCM Star Coupler Module
SiMon Simple Monitor
Value Field
1HDG 518 311 A en 28.10.2002 ACEMEWE 05.11.2002 ACEVOTH 3.1-1

¤ Commissioning
3.1.2 PISA configuration (Release 1.0)

When PISA is delivered from the factory it contains system software which can be
used for actuating the following switching devices:
S Circuit-breaker operating mechanism HMB-1 (ELK-04 und EXK-01)
S Disconnector / earthing switch combination (ELK-04 und EXK-01)
S Disconnector (ELK-04 und EXK-01)
S Earthing switch w. short circuit making capacity (ELK-04 und EXK-01)
3.1.2.1 Entering configuration parameters

After fitting the PISA in the operating mechanism casing, the required parameters
must be entered. To do this, carry out the following initial steps:
1. Start up PROCOMM PLUS and set up a connection with the hardware unit
(“3.1.3.2.2 Setting up a connection to the hardware component”)
2. Preparing REC580 to set up communication with PISA
3. Log on to PISA (“3.1.4.3.2 Logging on to PISA”)
PISA is now in setup mode; this is recognisable in PROCOMM PLUS at the status
line:
Pisa Setup >
All configuration parameters have an ID (identification number) which makes them
clearly identifiable. There are parameters that are absolutely essential as well as op-
tional parameters. If the optional parameters are not set, they receive a specified
value which is correct for all standard applications.
The parameters are entered, after the request for input

Pisa Setup >
firstly by entering the parameter ID and then, after a blank, the value(s):
Pisa Setup ><ID> <Field 1> {<Field 2>...}
(“3.1.4.4.2 Setting parameters”)
A comprehensively presented example of system parameters that have to be set for a

double busbar feeder panel is shown in “3.1.4.5 Example of PISA standard para-
meters”.
Note The system has to be reset after entering all parameters!
The system parameters will be explained in more detail below.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.2.1.1 Required system parameters

Parameters and values have to be entered in the syntax described below:
Table 3.1-1: Required system parameters
Parameter for ID Value Designation
Node ID ID: 1 Node number of bay unit at interbay bus (1..63)
Device ID ID: 2 PISA device number at process bus (6..29)
Switching Device ID: 3 Type and model series of switching device

This parameter requires two values:
Type of switch:
1 Functionstest (only for PISA production)
2 Circuit-breaker
3 Combined disconnector / earthing switch
4 Disconnector
5 −
6 Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
7 −
Model series:
1 HMB_1 (to combine with circuit-breaker)
2 (Reserve)
3 ELK_04
(to combine with disconnector / earthing switch)
4 EXK_01
(to combine with disconnector / earthing switch)
5 (Reserve)
Examples Switching device Type of switch Model series-

Modul <ID> <Field 1> <Field 2>
Circuit-breaker, HMB-1: 3 2 1
Comb. disconnector / earthing switch, ELK-04: 3 3 3
Busbar longitudinal disconnector , ELK-04: 3 4 3
Earthing switch with
short circuit making capacity, ELK-04: 3 6 3
Comb. disconnector / earthing switch, EXK-01: 3 3 4
Busbar longitudinal disconnector , EXK-01: 3 4 4
short circuit making capacity, EXK-01: 3 6 4
Function mode ID: 5 This parameter must be initialised if the software is to be

started for switch simulation.
If PISA is not to be used for switch simulation, this para-
meter can be omitted.
1 Normal operation
2 Simulation mode
3 Redundant PISA without bus
Total BIOs and ID: 8 In order to guarantee reliable communication on the

PISAs data highway, the total number of BIO modules and
PISAs in each respective bay must be entered here.
For the double busbar feeder panel with 5 PISAs and
2 BIO modules that served as an example, this para-
meter would have to be in initialised with the value 7.

¤ Commissioning
SF6 input 1 ID: 11 Use of an SF6 density sensor on analogue input 1
SF6 input 2 ID: 12 Use of an SF6 density sensor on analogue input 2
The following values apply to both parameters:
0 Input not used

1 Gas compartment in which the switching device is
located
Monitoring limits
with circuit-breaker:
Stage 1: 620 kPa
Stage 2: 600 kPa
with disconnector / earthing switch:
Stage 1: 440 kPa
Stage 2: 420 kPa
2 Additional gas compartment

(extension, outgoing transformer unit,
conventional voltage transformer EXK-01)
Monitoring limits
Stage 1: 440 kPa
Stage 2: 420 kPa

(conventional voltage transformer ELK-04
separate current tranformer EXK-01)
Monitoring limits
Stage 1: 620 kPa
Stage 2: 600 kPa
Hinweis: With a circuit-breaker, it is absolutely essential that parameter 11 be initialised

with the value 1.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.2.1.2 Extended system parameters

Table 3.1-2: Extended system parameters for circuit-breakers
Protection inputs These parameters require two values.

BI_6 ID: 17
BI_7 ID: 18
BI_8 ID: 19
Value 1 The first value defines the function of the inputs for
external protection commands:
0 Input not used
1 Applied voltage leads to closing
2 Applied voltage leads to opening
Value 2 The second value programmes the voltage threshold

for the input-circuit monitoring.
0...500 Monitoring threshold
Only integers can be entered.
Voltage in 1/10 V. The determination of voltage is
described in “3.1.4.4.8 Calling up sensor data”.
Note: No monitoring at value “0”!
Battery voltage ID: 21 48...250 Battery voltage in volts for stipulating the limit thresh-
old for all three protection command inputs.
PISA calculates the limit thresholds on the basis of
this voltage as follows:
− Rising slope (command coming):
80% of battery voltage
− Falling slope (command going):
65% of battery voltage
Signal Outputs Defines the function of the signal outputs for signal-
BO_3 ID: 24 ling to external protection devices.
BO_4 ID: 25
3 Signalling opening is blocked

(contact closed)
4 Signalling closing is blocked
(contact closed)
5 Signalling when auto-reclosure is blocked
(contact closed)
6 Intertripping contact closes, when the circuit-breaker
is not in the position ”On” or an attempt was made to
switch off (contact closed)
7 Intertripping contact with max. closing time of
1 second (contact closed)
13 Signalling opening is blocked

(contact opened)
14 Signalling closing is blocked
(contact opened)
15 Signalling when auto-reclosure is blocked
(contact opened)
16 Intertripping contact opened, when the circuit-
breaker is not in the position ”On” or an attempt was
made to switch off (contact opened)
17 Intertripping contact with max. closing time of
1 second (contact opened)

¤ Commissioning
Autotrip with SF6 ID: 35 When SF6 density falls below stage 2, the circuit-
stage 2 breaker is switched off automatically
0 No Autotrip
1 Autotrip activated
Autotrip with ID: 36 When the level drops below the opening-operation
opening oper- block limit, the circuit-breaker is switched off auto-
ation blocked matically
0 No Autotrip
Autotrip with ID: 44 When all inputs for protection off are faulty, the
faulty protection circuit-breaker is switched off automatically
input circuits
0 No Autotrip
Table 3.1-3: Extended system parameters for disconnector resp. disconnector / earthing
switch combinations
Leading make ID: 39 Simulation of the function of a leading make contact

contact
0 No leading make contact

1...4000 Time in ms after leaving the opening position until the
position “CLOSE” is signalled to the busbar protection
via signal output BO_1

¤ Commissioning
3.1.2.1.3 Power system quantities

Parameters with an ID between 60 and 80 are for storing power system quantities
such as calibration values and counters. Normally these parameters must not be over-
written.
However, if necessary these values can be overwritten in order to correct a counter

reading.
Table 3.1-4: Power system quantities
CB: Spring travel calibration ID: 61 Sensor value with unloaded spring
CB: Switching cycles ID: 72 Switching-cycle counter for circuit-breaker
Di: Switching cycles ID: 73 Switching-cycle counter for disconnector
Er or FE: Switching cycles ID: 74 Switching-cycle counter for earthing

switch
CB: Pump motor starts ID: 75 Counts all pump starts, including unsuc-
cessful pump activation
3.1.2.1.4 Optional system parameters (deviation from standard)

Table 3.1-5: Optional system parameters
Alarm acknowledg- ID: 9 Decides whether alarms on the REC580 display

ment are acknowledged after 10 seconds automatically
or manually.
0 Manual alarm acknowledgment

1 Automatic alarm acknowledgment after
10 seconds (default value / standard)
3.1.2.1.5 Terminate setup mode

After setup operations have been completed or inorder to validate newly entered con-
figuration parameters, setup mode must be terminated with the function “f99”.
Pisa Setup > f99 Change to operating mode
Operating mode is configured, a signal transmitted, the connection to user interrupted
and a system restart (Reset) is executed. PISA then starts in operating mode.
3.1.2.2 Calibrating the spring-travel sensor

Logging on to PISA (“3.1.4.3.2 Logging on to PISA”)
After fitting a new PISA in a circuit-breaker and after all work at the rotary sensor
where the position of the rotary shaft in relation to the gear rack could have been
changed, the spring-travel sensor must be recalibrated.
Calibration is described in “3.1.4.4.7 Calibrating the single-turn sensor”.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.3 Operating program and setup tools

When configuring and commissioning a PISA, a terminal program can be used to
create a connection to the PISA via the bay unit REC580.
Several script files - files with command sequences (programs) for the terminal pro-
gram, are used to set up the communication and help the configuration process.
The necessary software must be installed on a PC (Notebook) with operating system

DOS 6.xx or MS Windows 3.x.
3.1.3.1 Software Installation on a PC

The enclosed installation disk contains the executable files for installation, which can
be launched under Windows 3.1x or Windows-NT. The user can specify the path for
the software installation.
Installation
1. Double-click on the installation file
2. Follow the instructions of the installation software:
a) Specify the target directory:
Note The directory name may not exceed eight characters!
Figure 3.1-1: Specification of the Target Directory

b) Click on “Unzip”
c) After unzipping the file, click on “OK” to finish the installation

¤ Commissioning
3.1.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and script files

The terminal program PROCOMM PLUS is used for communication with the SiMon of
the various substation control modules. (Simple Monitor: Software for loading and
storing system software).
In particular, PISA uses it to run in setup mode which makes it possible to initialise or
change configuration parameters, to inspect sensors or to carry out test switching.
3.1.3.2.1 Operation
Before calling up a script file, a connection must always be set up beforehand to the
monitor program on the REC580 processing unit.
Following this, a connection can be made to the SiMon (Simple Monitor) of the PISA
which is to be configured.
3.1.3.2.2 Setting up a connection to the hardware component

In order to set up a connection to the hardware component, the PC is connected to
the “Serial Port 1 / Console” interface on the MVME (REC580 CPU) and the terminal
program PROCOMM PLUS is started. The arrangement of the interface cable is
presented in Figure 3.1-2.
REC580 side PC side
(25-pin plug SUB-D) (9-pin socket SUB-D)
Transmit 2 2 Receive
Receive 3 3 Transmit
Earth 7 5 Earth
Figure 3.1-2: Connecting cable between the REC580 serial interface and the PC interface
Now PROCOMM PLUS is started with the file START.BAT in the directory TOOLS.
Example, if the standard installation directory was selected:

c:> cd pisa\tools (Change to directory c:\pisa\tools)
c:> start
The hardware component is then switched on (or the reset button is pressed on the
MVME) and, finally, the <SPACE> button on the PC keyboard is pressed several
times.
Note After the hardware component has been switched on (or the reset button has been
pressed), the user has approx. 5 seconds to set up the connection to the PC. After this,
pressing the <SPACE> button no longer has an effect.
At this point, the SiMon answers with the status message:

PROCOMM PLUS Ready!
**** Welcome to SiMon for MVME162 V3.10 from
ABB Network Partner
...
SiMon CRB01 5 >

¤ Commissioning
Note If the REC580 does not answer with the status message SiMon CRB01 5 >
the baud rate should be set to 9600
(proceed in PROCOMM PLUS: <ALT> <P>, 5, <ALT> <S>).
Now attempt to log on again.
Connection with the REC580 has now been established. In order to communicate with
the PISAs, the bus administrator must be started up.
The actual communication is partly by means of direct text input in the terminal pro-
gram and partly via script files that run within PROCOMM PLUS.
Start scriptfiles
A selection list of the script files can be called up with the key combination <ALT−F5>
and then by pressing the <ENTER> button.
The desired script file can now be selected and started by pressing <ENTER>.
Setting parameters
Communication parameters, e.g. the baud rate, can be changed within PROCOMM
PLUS using <ALT><P>.
Help
A help screen listing all of the functions of the terminal program PROCOMM PLUS
can be called up with the <ALT><Z> button.
End terminal program
After confirmation of a corresponding message, the terminal program is ended by

pressing the <ALT><X> button.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.3.2.3 Status messages following establishment of connection to REC580

When communicating with the REC580, there are various status messages that
appear after repeatedly pressing the <ENTER> button. These messages allow you to
determine what status the system is in.
Possible status messages (acknowledgment with <ENTER>):
SiMon CRB01 5 > and the yellow LEDs at the 500SCM01 cards are off:
S Connection to the REC580 was just established, however communication
with PISAs is not yet possible since the bus administrator (500MBA01) does
not work
S Meaningful script:
RUN_MBA
SiMon CRB01 5 > and the yellow LEDs at the 500SCM01 cards light up:
S REC580 is ready for communication with PISA Setup mode, the bus adminis-
trator is running. This status is achieved after successful execution of the
script RUN_xSCM.
S Meaningful scripts:
GO2SETUP (Goto PISA Setup)
LOAD_SW (Load new software)
Pisa Setup >

S Communication with the PISA is set up. PISA runs in setup mode. This
status is achieved after successful execution of the script GO2SETUP.
ON_SITE (Testfunctions for commissioning an operating mechanism)
KONFIG (First configuration of a new PISA, only ABB-Service)

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4 PISA Setup Mode

3.1.4.1 General description
The PISA differentiates between the operating statuses setup mode and normal op-
eration. With corresponding script files it is possible to switch between the operating
statuses.
Setup mode:
In setup mode, the following function can be selected via PROCOMM PLUS:
S Setting / changing configuration parameters
S Reading, checking and calibrating sensor inputs (SF6, spring energy)
S Carrying out test switching and switching sequences
S Reading out motion times
S Reading out possible problem log entries
PISAs straight from the factory have a standard bus address:

Device-ID: 254 (hexadecimal: FE)
A PISA that has already been configured is reconfigurable, this means it can be
switched back into setup mode.
3.1.4.2 Preparing REC580
Preparing REC580 to set up communication with PISA
After setting up the connection between the PC and the REC580 (“3.1.3.2.2 Setting
up a connection to the hardware component”), the bus administrator (MBA) and the
star coupler must be started up as described below.
Press the <ENTER> button several times to ensure that the status message in
PROCOMM PLUS is as follows:
SiMon CRB01 5 >
Start script RUN_MBA
While the script file is being worked through, follow the instructions of the program:
S First, enter the amount of star coupler modules SCM in REC580:
Preparing REC580 to set up communication with PISA !
***********************************************************
How many SCM-Cards are mounted into REC580 (1..3)?
S Please specify the type of connection between the interbay-bus and the star-
coupler module (SCM) in slot 4:
***********************************************************
Type of connection to the interbay-bus (1/2)?
− Typical: Connection 1 (Tx1 and Rx1)
− Using MBA01: Connection 2 (Tx2 and Rx2)
Enter = 1 (Setup value)

¤ Commissioning
S Finally, the type of connection between PC and REC580 has to be entered.

Only if REC580 is connected to the SERIAL PORT 1/CONSOLE the trans-
mission rate can be set to 38400 baud. Via connection with the optical front-
plate only 9600 baud can be used. While loading new software this is a big
difference.
***********************************************************
On which port the PC is connected (1/2)?
1: SERIAL PORT 1/CONSOLE (25pole on MVME162−010A)
2: optical port on the frontplate
Enter = 1 (Setup value)
S If the input was correct, following message appears on the display:

***********************************************************
* All entered data was correct! *
***********************************************************
After approx. 20 seconds, a request to press RESET appears at the REC580

******************************************************
* Please press Reset at REC580 !! *
* *
* confirm with <Return> and wait approx. 1 min. *
******************************************************
The Reset button on the MVME card must then be pressed and <Return> /
<ENTER> must be pressed on the PC within 3 seconds. When <ENTER> is pressed,
this is acknowledged on the PC with “OK”.
Approx. 1 minute later the end of the program is indicated as follows:

******************************************************
* End of script *
* *
* Logging on to PISA (2 options): *
* 1. By script: GO2SETUP (instructions interaktive) *
* 2. Manually: SiMon CRB01 5 > tv <device_ID *
******************************************************
SiMon CRB01 5 >
The REC580 is now ready to communicate with every connected PISA.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.3 Setting up communication with PISA

Setting up communication with PISA (setup mode)
3.1.4.3.1 Basic information

During the configuration of the PISAs, each device is assigned a definitive bus
address. This comprises:
Node_ID: Address of the REC580 at the interbay bus
Device ID Address of the REC580 at the process bus
Within a data highway, i.e. from a REC580, communication can be made with every
single PISA with the help of the Device_ID. These addresses are assigned to the
PISAs during the REC580 engineering. In a table supplied with every REC580, it is
possible to find out the Device_ID on the basis of the switching device designation
(Q0, Q1Q51, ..).
Table 3.1-6: Example
Switching device Node_ID Device_ID
E01-Q0 11 6
E01-Q1Q51 11 7
E01-Q2Q52 11 8
E01-Q9Q53 11 9
E01-Q8 11 10
Note An unconfigured PISA straight from the factory has the Device_ID 254.
3.1.4.3.2 Logging on to PISA

Start PROCOMM PLUS script file “GO2SETUP” (read: “go to setup”).
While the script file is being worked through, follow the instructions of the program:
Please enter Device ID (decimal) and apply with Return
The appropriate Device_ID (“3.1.4.3.1 Basic information”) must be entered here.
Switch PISA off and back on
Switch off automatic circuit-breaker for desired PISA, wait approx. 3 seconds and
switch back on.
− Circuit-breaker (Q0): Automatic circuit-breaker F101
− All disconnector / earthing switches: Automatic circuit-breaker F102
Immediately after the PISA back on (< 3 seconds), press <ENTER> at the PC.
After approx. 15 seconds, PISA signals that it is in setup mode:

Pisa Setup >
Note Only one PISA can be in setup mode at one time. All other PISAs must either be:
− Working in normal operating mode

− Switched off or
− Disconnected from the REC580 (optical fibre disconnected)

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4 Functions in setup mode
3.1.4.4.1 Calling up function commands

Pisa Setup > ? Display list of function commands
Note The values “Value 1” to “Value n” are designated in the list of setup functions as “Field_1”
to “Field_n”.
The list contains Functions f1 to f99:

Table 3.1-7: List of setup functions
<ID> <Field_1> .. <Field_n>: Store a configuration parameter

<ID>: Display a configuration parameter
F1: Display all configuration parameters
F2: Clear PDS
F3 <id>: Erase Parameter
F4: PDS Collect Garbage
F5: Load Configuration File
F8: Clear Problem Log
F9 <Start_Offset> <count>: Display problems
F11: Start the calibration
F12: Store the calibration value
F13: Enable automatic pumping
F21: Display all sensor values
F23: Display protection input voltages
F32: Pump short above O-Block limit
F34: Pump short above CO-Block limit
F36: Pump short above OCO-Block limit
F39: Enable switching without SF6 Supervision
-More-
F41: Close Disconnector Switch
F42: Open Disconnector Switch
F43: Close Earther Switch
F44: Open Earther Switch
F45: Close Circuit Breaker Switch
F46: Open Circuit Breaker Switch
F47: Circuit Breaker CO Sequence
F48: Circuit Breaker OCO Sequence
F49: Circuit Breaker OCOCO Sequence
F50: Circuit Breaker OC Sequence
F51: Circuit Breaker OCOC Sequence
F61: Display Firmware Version
F62: Load Firmware (nyi)
F70: Enable Data Monitoring Display
F71: Disable Data Monitoring Display
F73: Write SF6-Sampling Primary Compartment
F74: Write SF6-Sampling Guest Compartment
F98: Disconnect from User and restart in setup mode
F99: Disconnect from User and restart in operating mode
Note The letter “f” can be written small or big and does not stand for function key.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.2 Setting parameters

Pisa Setup > <ID> <Field 1> {<Field 2> }
Each parameter can be set individually.
If a parameter has several fields and you want to change one of them, then all of the
fields prior to the field you want to change must be entered as well. Fields following
the one you want to change can be omitted.
3.1.4.4.3 Display of set parameters

Pisa Setup > <ID> The parameter with the ID <ID> is displayed
Examples:
Display of Node-ID (parameters ID = 1)

Pisa Setup > 1
1: 28 (Node-ID: 28)
Display of switching device type (parameters ID = 3)
Pisa Setup > 3
3: 2 1
(Field 1 (device type): 2 = circuit-breaker
Field 2 (model): 1 = HMB-1)
Pisa Setup > f1 List all parameters
3.1.4.4.4 Erasing parameters

Pisa Setup > f2 Erase all parameters
Confirm security query with “y”.
Pisa Setup > f3 <ID> Erase a single parameter
It is not possible to erase a single field of a parameter.
3.1.4.4.5 Correcting inconsistent memory contents

Pisa Setup > f4 <ID>
Compress the memory allocation in the external memory.
If this function is ever required because memory location is full, it is called up automat-
ically. But “f4” can also be used to correct memory contents that have been reported
inconsistent (for whatever reason).

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.6 Fault memory (Problem Log)

All detected faults are stored by PISA in a problem log with room for at least
7000 fault messages. The software source text is necessary to interpret the fault
messages.
Pisa Setup > f9 <Offset> <Count>
Display of problem log
Up to 10 new fault messages are displayed. If there are no new fault messages, the
last fault message will be displayed.
Parameter:
<Offset>: The pointer on the current fault message is displaced by this value backwards (nega-
tive offset z. B. −10) or forwards (positive offset).
<Count>: Number of displayed entries
Pisa Setup > f8 Clearing problem log
The problem log is cleared completely.
Example:
Pisa Setup > f9
21: 00:00:00.002 NONE SOFTWARE, Module: 7, Problem: 2
Pisa Setup > f9 −10 5
12: 1998− 8− 28 17:09:00.379 NONE EXTERN, Module: 15, Problem: 1
Pisa Setup >

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.7 Calibrating the single-turn sensor

The measured value of the inductive single-turn sensor at the spring pack must be
calibrated to correspond to the current spring travel. With the spring (0 mm) unloaded,
the current measured value is stored as a reference.
Procedure:
1. Initiate calibration mode (block pump)
Pisa Setup > f11
− The pump is blocked in order not to start up automatically after pressure
has been relieved
− Relieve spring with pressure-relief valve
2. Store calibration point
Pisa Setup > f12
− The value of the single-turn sensor which is now current is stored in the
external memory under “Spring_Zero” (ID 61)
− Close pressure-relief valve again (release screw and press).
3. End calibration mode (release pump)
Pisa Setup > f13
− The follow-on pumping is active − the pump should start up
Note These commands must be entered in the order shown above, although it is possible to
omit “f13”. “f11” and “f13” can also be used independently of a calibration.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.8 Calling up sensor data

Pisa Setup > f21 Display of values of inputs
Active protection inputs: BINARY_TYPE_2_3 BINARY_TYPE_2_2

Logical Spring Travel Sensor: PUMP_OFF
Pysical spring position [mm]: 52.56
Circuit breaker position: OFF
Blocking Causes: none
Circuit Breaker SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [0.1 kPa]: 7120
ADDITIONAL SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [0.1 kPa]: 5023
Board Temperature [degrees Celsius]: 25.0
Figure 3.1-3: Return confirmation (example: circuit-breaker)
Disconnector position: OFF

Earther position: OFF
Blocking Causes: HANDCRANK INTERLOCK
PRIMARY SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [0.1 kPa]: 7120
ADDITIONAL SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [0.1 kPa]: 5023
Βoard Temperature [degrees Celsius]: 25.0
Figure 3.1-4: Return confirmation (example: disconnector / earthing switch combination)
Meaning:
− The protection inputs 3 and 2 are active
− The spring is completely loaded, spring travel: 52.56 mm
− The circuit-breaker is in open position
− Switching operations are not blocked
− SF6 pressure set at a standard 20 °C amounts to:
S In the circuit-breaker gas compartment: Appr. 710 kPa
S In the additional monitored gas compartment: Appr. 500 kPa
Pisa Setup > f23

Display of current voltages at the protection inputs
Return confirmation:
The Binary Input Voltages [0.1 V] are: 152 148 160
The voltages at the protection inputs are:

Input 1: 15.2 V
Input 2: 14.8 V
Input 3: 16.0 V
This function is used to select the resistors for protection input circuit monitoring.
The monitoring switching threshold selected (parameter 17..19, field 3) should be set
to 8 V.
Note For monitoring more than one contact per input, please contact the ABB-Service!
Please find our contact address in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction”

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.9 Function for testing the primary technology

Pumping to a defined limit:
Pisa Setup > f32 Pump short above O-block limit
Pisa Setup > f34 Pump short above CO-block limit
Pisa Setup > f36 Pump short above OCO-block limit
The first thing all pump functions do is to switch off automatic pumping. If automatic
pumping should be required later, this can be activated with f13.
Pisa Setup > f41 Close disconnector switch
Pisa Setup > f42 Open disconnector switch
Pisa Setup > f43 Close earthing switch
Pisa Setup > f44 Open earthing switch
Pisa Setup > f45 Close circuit-breaker switch
Pisa Setup > f46 Open circuit-breaker switch
With switching functions f41 − f47, the following times are recorded in each case:
t0 = Switch-on time of motor / coil
t1 = Leaving starting position
t2 = Reaching final position
Always transmitted back:

Δt1 = t1 − t0
Δt2 = t2 − t0
With the following functions that execute several switching operations, Δt1 and Δt2 are
supplied for every switching operation. There is a pause of 300 ms between O and C
in each case.
Pisa Setup > f47 Circuit-breaker CO sequence
Pisa Setup > f48 Circuit-breaker OCO sequence
Pisa Setup > f49 Circuit-breaker OCOCO sequence
Pisa Setup > f50 Circuit-breaker OC sequence
Pisa Setup > f51 Circuit-breaker OCOC sequence
Output of switching commands f41 to f46
Fault messages:
This is not a[n] <Switching device>!

The requested position is already established!
Switching not successful!
Normal dialogue:
Pisa Setup > f41

The Disconnector is closed now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms
Pisa Setup > f42
The Disconnector is open now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms
Pisa Setup > f43
The Earther is closed now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms
Pisa Setup > f44
The Earther is open now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms
Pisa Setup > f45
The Switch is closed now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms
Pisa Setup > f46
The Switch is open now. t1 = <Zahl> ms, t2 = <Zahl> ms

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.4.10 System software
Calling up the current system software version:

Pisa Setup > f61 Calling up the system software version
Loading new system software:

1. New system software is delivered as a packed file (Norton Commander 5.0
or PKZIP) on diskette
Execute the programm:
c:\pisa\tools\sw_inst
The software is unpacked in the file “c:\pisa\tools\rom_sw\pisa.x”.
2. Prepare REC580 to set up communication with PISA
3. Start script LOAD_SW
Follow the instructions in the script:
***********************************************************
Please enter Device ID (decimal) and apply with Return
Note The device ID of a PISA can be obtained from the system documentation!
***********************************************************
* PLEASE SWITCH OFF PISA AND SWITCH BACK ON AND PRESS *
* <RETURN> IMMEDIATELY AFTER SWITCHING BACK ON. *
***********************************************************
4. Switch off automatic circuit-breaker for desired PISA, wait approx.
3 seconds and switch back on:
− Circuit- breaker(Q0): Mini-circuit breaker F101
− All disconnector / earthing switches: Mini-circuit breaker F102
5. Immediately after switching the PISA back on (< 3 seconds), press <ENTER>
at the PC. Following message appears:
OK, Please wait ...
Loading the software will take following time depending on type of connection
PC-REC580:
− 10 min. (via SERIAL PORT 1/CONSOLE at 38400 baud)
− 40 min. (via optical frontplate at 9600 baud)
6. Successful loading is displayed with following message:
*****************************************************
* End, PISA SW updated!! *
*****************************************************
7. In case the script broke up with a fault message the script “LOAD_SW” has to
be started again

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4.5 Example of PISA standard parameters

All necessary parameters are stored and classified according to fields and switching de-
vices in an Excel form (name: PISAPAR.XLS). Table 3.1-8 is an extract from this Excel
form. It lists all parameters in field E01.
The parameters are explained in “3.1.2.1.1 Required system parameters”.
The parameters printed in italics with ID > 60 are written during system operation
while the rotary sensor is being calibrated. They are not specified or set in advance.
The counter readings (72, 73, 74, 75), however, can be corrected at a later time.
Example of a standard feeder panel:
Special features:
− No autotrip functions (35, 36, 44)
− Protection switch-off with inputs 1 and 2 (17, 18)
− Auto-reclosure with input 3 (19)
− Transmission of a tripping block with signal output 3 (24)
− Transmission of a tripping block with signal output 4 (25)
− Conv. voltage transformer monitored by Q9Q53-PISA (11: 3)
− Position signal of busbar disconnector leading make contact, signal 100 ms
after leaving the open position

¤ Commissioning
Table 3.1-8: PISA standard parameters
E01 Value range Para- Q0 Q1 Q2 Q9 Q8

meter Q51 Q52 Q53
ID
Standard data
Node ID 1 .. 63 1 11 11 11 11 11
Device ID 6 .. 29 2 6 7 8 9 10
Switching device: Type 2 .. 6 3 2 3 3 3 6
Model 1 .. 4 1 3 3 3 3
Modus norm | Sim | Stand Al 1 .. 3 5 1 1 1 1 1
BIO + PISA 1 .. 24 8 7 7 7 7 7
SF6 input 1 0|1 11 1 1 1 3 1
SF6 input 2 0|2|3 12 0 0 0 0 0
Only circuit-breaker
BI_1: not | On | Off 0|1|2 17 2
Test voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
BI_2: not | On | Off 0|1|2 18 2
Test voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
BI_3: not | On | Off 0|1|2 19 1
Test voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
Battery voltage [V] 48 .. 250 21 110
Signal output BO_3 3 .. 7 | 13..17 24 3
Signal output BO_4 3 .. 7 | 13..17 25 5
SF6 autotrip 0|1 35 0
O-block autotrip 0|1 36 0
BI fault autotrip 0|1 44 0
Circuit-breaker calibration point 61 850
Circuit-breaker switching cycles 72 28
Circuit-breaker pump 75 40
Only disconnectors
Leading make contact [ms] 0 .. 4000 39 100 100 0 0
Disconnector switching cycles 73 88 77 86
Earthing switch switching cycles 74 87 77 85 25

¤ Commissioning
3.2 Setup and Configuration of a PISA

This document describes the necessary steps to operate a PISA and the setup-PC.
These steps need to be taken during initial setup, but in part also after repair work or
modifications.
The following steps will be described:

1. Start-up of PROCOMM PLUS and establishing of a connection with the hard-
ware unit (“3.2.3.2.2 Establishing a Connection with the Hardware Unit”)
2. Preparation of the REC580 for communication with the PISA
(“3.2.4.2 Preparation of the REC580”)
3. Inititalizing the PISA (“3.2.4.3.2 Initializing the PISA”)
4. Setting and changing of parameters
5. Special test routines
3.2.1 Abbrevations and Definitions

CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Central Processing Unit
DS Disconnector Switch
DS / ES Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
ELK-04 Gas-Insulated Switchgear (product name)
ES Earthing Switch
EXK-01 Gas-Insulated Switchgear (product name)
FES Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
Field Value
F/O Fiberoptic
GIS Gas-Insulated Switchgear
HMB-1 Hydraulic-Spring Operating Mechanism (product name)
ID Identification Number
MVB Multi-function Vehicle Bus (Station- or Prozess Bus)
PISA Process-Interface for Sensors and Actuators
REC580 Bay Control Unit (product name)
SCM Star Coupler Module
SiMon Simple Monitor
Value Field
1HDG 518 310 I en 28.10.2002 ACEMEWE 05.11.2002 ACEVOTH 3.2-1

¤ Commissioning
3.2.2 PISA-Configuration (Release 1.5)

A factory-delivered PISA contains a system software that allows control of the follow-
ing devices:
S Circuit breaker operating mechanism HMB-1 (for ELK-04 and EXK-01)
S Combined disconnector / earthing switch (for ELK-04 and EXK-01)
S Disconnector switch (for ELK-04 and EXK-01)
S Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity (for ELK-04 and EXK-01)
3.2.2.1 Input of Configuration Parameters

After installation of the PISA in the respective operating mechanism the necessary
parameters must be set. This requires the following initial steps:
1. Start-up of PROCOMM PLUS and establishing a connection with the hard-
ware unit (“3.2.3.2.2 Establishing a Connection with the Hardware Unit”)
2. Preparation of the REC580 for communication with the PISA
3. Inititalizing the PISA (“3.2.4.3.2 Initializing the PISA”)
The PISA is in the Setup-Mode (in PROCOMM PLUS identified by the status line)
Pisa Setup >
All configuration parameters have their individual ID (identification number). There are
two types of parameters, required and optional ones. If the optional parameters are
not defined, they get a default setting that is valid for all standard applications.
After the input command

Pisa Setup >
the parameters can be set by first defining the parameter-ID and then setting the
field(s), separated by blanks:
(“3.2.4.4.2 Setting of Parameters”)
Chapter “3.2.4.5 Example for PISA Standard Parameters” shows an example of set-
ting the base parameters for a double busbar feeder.
Note After setting of all parameters a reset must be performed (“3.2.4.6 Documentation of
PISA Standard Parameters and Logfiles”)!
In the following the system parameters are explained more in detail.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.2.1.1 Required System Parameters:

The parameters and their values are set in the following way:
Table 3.2-1: Required System Parameters
Parameter for ID Valu Description

e
Node ID ID: 1 Node number of the bay control unit on the station bus
(1 .. 63)
Device ID ID: 2 Device number of the PISA on the process bus

(1 .. 255)
Switching Device ID: 3 Type and model of the switching device

This parameters requires two values:
Device type:
1 Functional test (for PISA-manufacturing only)
2 Circuit breaker
3 Combined disconnector / earthing switch
4 Disconnector switch
5 −
6 Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
7 −
Model:
1 HMB_1 (to be combined with circuit breaker)
2 (Spare)
3 ELK_04 (to be combined with disconnector / earthing
4 switch
5 EXK_01 (to be combined with disconnector / earthing
switch
(Spare)
Example
Device Type Model
Module <ID> <Field1> <Field2>
Circuit breaker, HMB-1: 3 2 1

Combined disconnector / earthing switch, ELK-04: 3 3 3
Busbar sectionalizing disconnector switch, ELK-04: 3 4 3
short circuit making capacity, ELK-04: 3 6 3
Combined disconnector / earthing switch, EXK-01: 3 3 4
Busbar sectionalizing disconnector switch, EXK-01: 3 4 4
short circuit making capacity, EXK-01: 3 6 4
Function Mode ID: 5 This parameter must be set, if the software shall be used
for breaker simulation.
If the PISA shall not be used for simulation, this parameter
can be left blank.
1 Normal operation
2 Simulationmode
3 Redundant PISA without Bus
REC580 ID: 7 The Software−Version of the REC580 must be pro-

SW−Version grammed into each attached PISA

¤ Commissioning

e
300 REC580 Version 3.00.xxx

341 REC580 Version 3.41.xxx

¤ Commissioning

e
SF6-Input 1 ID: 11 Use of a SF6-gas density sensor on analog input 1
SF6-Input 2 ID: 12 Use of a SF6-gas density sensor on analog input 2
Both parameters can have the following values:
0 Input not used

1 Gas compartment for this switching device
Supervision thresholds
for circuit breaker:
Stage 1: 620 kPa
Stage 2: 600 kPa
for disconnector / earthing switch:
Stage 1: 440 kPa
Stage 2: 420 kPa

(extension module, transformer connection,
conventional voltage transformer EXK-01)
Stage 1: 440 kPa
Stage 2: 420 kPa

(conventional voltage transformer ELK-04,
separate current transformer EXK-01)
Stage 1: 620 kPa
Stage 2: 600 kPa
Hinweis: For a circuit breaker parameter 11 must be set with the value 1.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.2.1.2 Extended System Parameters

Table 3.2-2: Extended System Parameters for Circuit Breaker
Parameter for ID Value Description
Protection Input These parameters require two values

BI_6 ID: 17
BI_7 ID: 18
BI_8 ID: 19
Field 1 The first value defines the input function for external
protection commands:
0 Input not used
1 Normally open (applied voltage leads to closing)
2 Normally closed (applied voltage leads to opening)
Field 2 The second value defines the voltage threshold for

the input circuit supervision.
0...500 Supervision threshold
Only integer input allowed.
Voltage in 1/10 V. The calculation of the voltage is
defined in chapter “3.2.4.4.8. Polling of Sensor Data”
Note: With value “0” the supervision will be deacti-
vated!
Battery Voltage ID: 21 48...250 Battery voltage in Volt to define the trigger level for
the three protection inputs.
The trigger levels will be calculated in the PISA as
follows:
− Rising slope (command coming):
80% of the battery voltage
− Falling slope (command going):
65% of the battery voltage
Signal Outputs Defines the function of the signal outputs for signal-
BO_3 ID: 24 ling to external protection devices
BO_4 ID: 25
3 Signalling of opening released (contact closed)

4 Signalling of closing released (contact closed)
5 Signalling of auto-reclosing released
(contact closed)
6 Intertripping contact closing, if circuit breaker is not
in “CLOSED” position or if an attempt was made to
open the breaker (contact closed)
7 Intertripping contact with max. closing time of 1 sec-
ond (contact closed)
13 Signalling of opening blocked

(contact open)
14 Signalling of closing blocked
(contact open)
15 Signalling of auto-reclosing blocked
(contact open)
16 Intertripping contact opening, if circuit breaker is not
in “CLOSED” position or if an attempt was made to
open the breaker (contact open)
17 Intertripping contact with max. closing time of 1 sec-
ond (contact open)

¤ Commissioning
Autotrip at ID: 40 Circuit breaker is tripped if SF6-gas density is below

SF6-Stage 2 stage 2
0 Autotrip deactivated
Autotrip at ID: 41 Circuit breaker is tripped if level drops below the

Opening opening blocking threshold
Blocking
0 Autotrip deactivated
Autotrip at ID: 42 Circuit breaker is tripped, if all inputs for protection-

defective trip are defective
protection input
circuits 0 Autotrip deactivated
Table 3.2-3: Extended System Parameters for Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch and
Disconnector Switch
Leading Make ID: 39 Functional replication of a leading make contact

Contact
0 No leading make contact

1...4000 Time in ms from leaving the OPEN position to signalling
the CLOSE position to the busbar protection through
signal output BO_1.
3.2.2.1.3 Operational Values

Parameters with an ID between 60 and 80 can be used for storing operational values
such as calibration and counter values. Normally, these parameters shall not be ex-
ceeded.
If necessary, these values can be overwritten to correct a counter value.

Table 3.2-4: Operational Values
CB: Spring Travel-Calibration ID: 61 Sensor value for discharged spring
CB: Number of Operations ID: 72 Operation counter for circuit breaker
DS: Number of Operations ID: 73 Operation counter for disconnector

switch
ES or FES: ID: 74 Operation counter for earthing switch

Number of Operations
CB: Number of Pump Starts ID: 75 Counts all pump starts, including
unsuccessful pump activations

¤ Commissioning
3.2.2.1.4 End Setup Mode

To finish setup or to activate reset configuration parameters, the setup mode must be
quit with function “f99”.
Pisa Setup > f99 Change to Operational Mode
Function “f99” configures the operational mode, generates a message, terminates the
user connection and performs a reset. Afterwards, the PISA starts in operational
mode.
3.2.2.2 Calibration of Spring Travel Sensor

Initializing the PISA (“3.2.4.3.2 Initializing the PISA”)
The spring travel sensor has to be recalibrated whenever a new PISA is installed in
the circuit breaker or after works on the rotating sensor that changed the position of
the rotating shaft to the gear rack.
The calibration is described in “3.2.4.4.7 Calibration of the RAP-Rotating Angle

Sensor”.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3 Operating Software and Setup Tools

To configure and set up a connection between the bay control unit REC580 and the
PISA a terminal program can be used.
A number of scriptfiles, i. e. files with command sequences (programs) for the terminal
program, establish the communication and control the configuration sequence.
The minimum hardware required for this software is a PC (Notebook) with operating
system MS-Windows 3.1x or Windows-NT.
3.2.3.1 Software Installation on a PC

The enclosed installation disk contains the executable files for installation, which can
be launched under Windows 3.1x or Windows-NT. The user can specify the path for
the software installation.
Installation
1. Double-click on the installation file
2. Follow the instructions of the installation software:
a) Specify the target directory:
Note The directory name may not exceed eight characters!
Figure 3.2-1: Specification of the Target Directory

b) Click on “Unzip”
c) After unzipping the file, click on “OK” to finish the installation

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3.2 PROCOMM PLUS and Scriptfiles

The terminal program is used to establish the communication between the SiMon of
the various control modules (Simple Monitor: program for loading and storing system
software).
In particular, the terminal program operates the PISA in the setup mode. The setup
mode allows setting or changing of configuration parameters, sensor testing and test
switching.
3.2.3.2.1 Operation
Before starting the scriptfiles a connection to the monitor program of the REC580
processing unit must be established.
Afterwards, a connection with the SiMon (Simple Monitor) of the PISA to be confi-
gured can be made.
3.2.3.2.2 Establishing a Connection with the REC580

In order to establish a connection with the REC580 the PC needs to be linked to the
“SMC1”-interface on the 500CPU03-board, and the terminal program PROCOMM
PLUS is started. The interface cable needs to be configured as shown in Figure 3.2-2.
REC580 side PC side
(RJ45 − 8-pin western plug) (9-pin socket SUB-D)
TxD (Transmit) 4 2 RxD (Receive)

RxD (Receive) 5 3 TxD (Transmit)
Signal Ground 3 5 Signal Ground
Figure 3.2-2: Interface Cable between the serial interfaces of the REC580 and the PC
Afterwards, PROCOMM PLUS is started with the file START.BAT out of the directory
that has been defined during installation (default: c:\pisa\tools).
Then, switch on the REC580 (or press the Reset-button on the 500CPU03-board) and
press the <SPACE>-bar on the PC keyboard several times.
Note After switching on the REC580 (respectively after pressing the Reset-button) you have
approximately 5 seconds to establish the connection with the PC. Afterwards, pressing
the<SPACE>-bar will not have any effect.

¤ Commissioning
The SiMon will answer with the status message:

PROCOMM PLUS Ready!
**** Welcome to SiMon for MSYS...
...
SiMon CRB01 5 >
or:
SiMon CRB02 5 >
(depending on the REC580-configuration)
Note All the following examples refer to a REC580 with 500CRB01 bus. For configuration with
500CRB02 the SIMon-status message CRB01 has to be replaced with CRB02.
The connection with the REC580 is established now. In order to be able to communi-
cate with the PISAs the bus administrator needs to be started.
The actual communication partly consists of direct text input in the terminal program
and partly of scriptfiles that are executed within PROCOMM PLUS.
Starting Scriptfiles
Pressing <ALT-F5> and then <ENTER> calls a list of scriptfiles.
Select a scriptfile from the list and start it by pressing <ENTER>.
Setting Parameters
Communication parameters such as the Baudrate can be set within PROCOMM

PLUS by pressing <ALT> <P>.
Saving of Communication in Logfile
Every communication via Procomm Plus may be saved in a text file (Logfile).
All entered and received data is saved in this file. The logfile has to be opened with
the key combination <ALT><F1>. On request a file name including a complete path
specification has to be provided.
Note A file without path specification will be stored in the PISA-installation subdirectory
PCPLUS. The status of the logfile is shown in the lowest line of Procomm Plus
(LOG OPEN resp. LOG CLOSED).
Pressing <ALT><F1> again will close the logfile.
Help
Pressing <ALT><Z> starts a help function for all functions of the terminal program
PROCOMM PLUS.
End the Terminal Program
Pressing <ALT><X> ends the terminal program upon confirmation of a respective

message.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3.2.3 Status Messages after Connection with REC580

There are different status messages for communication with the REC580 that appear
after repeatedly pressing <ENTER>. This message allows to determine the status.
Possible Status Messages (after pressing <ENTER>):
SiMon CRB01 5 > and the yellow LEDs on the 500SCM01-board are dark:
S Connection to REC580 just established, but communication with PISA
impossible, because the bus administrator (500MBA01) does not work
S Meaningful script:
RUN_MBA
SiMon CRB01 5 > and the yellow LEDs on the 500SCM01-board are lit:
S REC580 is ready for communication with PISA in setup mode, the bus
administrator is working. This status is reached after successful completion
of the script RUN_xSCM.
GO2SETUP (Go to PISA setup mode)
LOAD_SW (Load new system software)
Pisa Setup >

S Communication with the PISA is established. The PISA is in setup mode.
This status is reached after successful completion of the script GO2SETUP.
ON_SITE (Test functions during setup of an operating mechanism)
KONFIG (Initial configuration of a new PISA, ABB-Service only)

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4 PISA Setup Mode

3.2.4.1 Description
The PISA distinguishes between the setup mode and the operational mode. Respect-
ive scriptfiles allow to switch between these two operational modes.
Setup Mode:
The setup mode allows selection of the following functions from PROCOMM PLUS:
S Setting / changing of configuration parameters
S Reading, testing and calibrating of sensor inputs (SF6, spring stored energy)
S Performing test switching and switching sequences
S Reading of operating times
S Reading of possible fault storings
A factory-delivered PISA has the default bus address:

Device-ID: 254 (hex: FE)
A configured PISA can be reconfigured by switching it back into the setup mode.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.2 Preparation of the REC580
Preparation of the REC580 for Communication with the PISA
After communication has been established between the PC and the REC580
(“3.2.3.2.2 Establishing a Connection with the Hardware Unit”) the bus administrator
(MBA) and the star coupler modules have to be started.
Make sure that the PROCOMM PLUS shows the following status message by repeat-
edly pressing the <ENTER>-key:
SiMon CRB01 5 >
Call the script RUN_MBA.
Follow the program instructions while the scriptfile is being processed:
After approx. 10 seconds the request to press Reset on the REC580 will appear.
**********************************************************
Please press Abort on the REC580 !!
**********************************************************
Press the Reset-button (switch labelled AB, for Abort) on the 500CPU03-board.
A few seconds later the end of the program will be displayed as follows:
******************************************************
* End of script *
* *
* You may proceed as soon as the diodes on the *
* SCM-boards light up (after max. 30s) *
* *
* Logging on to PISA (2 possibilities): *
* 1. script: GO2SETUP (interactive instructions) *
* 2. manually: SiMon CRB01 5 > tv <device_ID> *
******************************************************
SiMon CRB01 5 >
The yellow light-emitting diodes in the left column of all star coupler modules must
light up within max. 30 seeconds. Otherwise all steps described in this chapter must
be repeated.
The REC580 is now prepared to communicate with all connected PISAs.
Note A PISA that is connected to the Tx2 / Rx2 of the 500CPU03-board can not be addressed
in the setup mode. In this case, the fiberoptics of this PISA must be temporarily connected
to a star coupler module for the duration of configuration respectively setup (in exchange
for another PISA that is not currently addressed). Make sure to correctly connect the
receiving and transmitting fibers.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.3 Establishing the Communication with the PISA

Establishing the communication with the PISA (setup mode)
3.2.4.3.1 Basic Principles

During PISA setup each device is assigned a definitive bus address. This address is
composed of:
Node_ID: address of the REC580 on the interbay bus
Device_ID: address of the PISA on the process bus
Each individual PISA on one process bus, i.e. connected to one REC580, can be ad-
dressed with its Device_ID. During engineering of the REC580 these addresses are
assigned to the individual PISAs. The Device_ID can be found in a table that is deliv-
ered with each REC580 by reference to the switching device name (Q0, Q1Q51, ..).
Table 3.2-5: Example
Switching Device Node_ID Device_ID
E01-Q0 11 32
E01-Q1Q51 11 33
E01-Q2Q52 11 34
E01-Q9Q53 11 35
E01-Q8 11 36
Note A factory-delivered and unconfigured PISA has the default Device_ID: 254

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.3.2 Logging on at the PISA

Start PROCOMM PLUS scriptfile: “GO2SETUP” (read: “go to setup”)
Follow the program instructions while the scriptfile is being processed:
Please enter Device ID (decimal) and confirm with Return
Enter the respective Device_ID (“3.2.4.3.1 Basic Principles”)
Switch PISA off and back on
Switch off the selected PISA’s micro circuit breaker (MCB); wait approximately
3 seconds and switch it back on.
− Circuit Breaker (Q0): MCB F101
− All Disconnector and Grounding Switches: MCB F102
− Circuit Breaker (Q0) redundant PISA: MCB F121
(if installed)
Note The redundant PISA (if installed) is not permanently connected to the process bus. To
establish a communication link to the REC580, the optical fibre of the main PISA must
be connected to the optical plugs of the redundant PISA that are easily accessible within
the circuit breaker drive case. The correct assignment of Tx and Rx must be checked
thoroughly. After configuring the redundant PISA the main PISA must be connected
again.
Within 3 seconds of switching the MCB back on press <ENTER>-key on the PC.
After approximately 15 seconds the PISA signals setup mode
Pisa Setup >
Note Only one PISA at a time may be in the setup mode. All other PISAs must be either:
− In operational mode or
− Switched off or
− Disconnected from the REC580 (fiberoptics disconnected)

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4 Functions in Setup Mode
3.2.4.4.1 Calling Function Commands

Pisa Setup > ? Call the list of function commands
Note The values “Value 1” through “Value n” are referred to in the list of function commands
as “Field_1” through “Field_n”.
The list shows functions from f1 through f99:

Table 3.2-6: List of Function Commands
<ID> <Field_1> .. <Field_n>: Store a configuration parameter

<ID>: Display a configuration parameter
F1: Display all configuration parameters
F2: Clear PDS
F3 <id>: Erase Parameter
F4: PDS Collect Garbage
F5: Load Configuration File
F8: Clear Problem Log
F9 <Start_Offset> <count>: Display problems
F11: Start the calibration
F12: Store the calibration value
F13: Enable automatic pumping
F21: Display all sensor values
F23: Display protection input voltages
F32: Pump short above O-Block limit
F34: Pump short above CO-Block limit
F36: Pump short above OCO-Block limit
F39: Enable switching without SF6 Supervision
-More-
F41: Close Disconnector Switch
F42: Open Disconnector Switch
F43: Close Earther Switch
F44: Open Earther Switch
F45: Close Circuit Breaker Switch
F46: Open Circuit Breaker Switch
F47: Circuit Breaker CO Sequence
F48: Circuit Breaker OCO Sequence
F49: Circuit Breaker OCOCO Sequence
F50: Circuit Breaker OC Sequence
F51: Circuit Breaker OCOC Sequence
F61: Display Firmware Version
F62: Load Firmware (nyi)
F70: Enable Data Monitoring Display
F71: Disable Data Monitoring Display
F73: Write SF6-Sampling Primary Compartment
F74: Write SF6-Sampling Guest Compartment
F98: Disconnect from User and restart in setup mode
F99: Disconnect from User and restart in operating mode
Note The letter “f” can be written in small or big cases and does not represent function key!

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.2 Setting Parameters

Pisa Setup > <ID> <Field 1> {<Field 2> }
Each parameter can be set individually.
If a parameter contains more than one field, than all fields before the one to be
changed must be entered, as well. Fields behind the one to be changed can be left
out.
3.2.4.4.3 Display of set Parameters

Pisa Setup > <ID> The parameter is displayed with its ID <ID>.
Examples:
Display of Node-ID (Parameter ID = 1)

Pisa Setup > 1
1: 28 (Node-ID: 28)
Display of switching device type (Parameter ID = 3)
Pisa Setup > 3
3: 2 1
Field 1 (device type): 2 = Circuit Breaker
Field 2 (model): 1 = HMB-1)
Pisa Setup > f1 List all parameters
3.2.4.4.4 Delete Parameters

Pisa Setup > f2 Delete all parameters
Confirm security query with “y”.
Pisa Setup > f3 <ID> Delete an individual parameter
It is not possible to delete an individual field of a parameter.
3.2.4.4.5 Fix inconsistent Memory Contents

Pisa Setup > f4 <ID>
Compress the memory allocation in the external memory.
This function is called automatically if memory is exhausted. “f4” can also be used to
fix a memory contents that has been signalled as inconsistent.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.6 Fault Memory (Problem Log)

The PISA stores all recorded faults into a fault memory with a capacity for at least
7000 fault messages. The interpretation of the fault messages requires the source
code of the software.
Pisa Setup > f9 <Offset> <Count>
Display of the Fault Memory
Up to 10 new fault messages will be displayed. If no new fault messages exist, the
last fault messages will be shown.
Parameters:
<Offset>: The pointer to the current fault message will be displaced by this offset value, either
backwards (negative offset, e.g. -10) or forwards (positive offset).
<Count>: Number of displayed fault messages
Pisa Setup > f8 Erase Fault Memory
The fault memory will be completely erased.
Example:
Pisa Setup > f9
21: 00:00:00.002 NONE SOFTWARE, Module: 7, Problem: 2
Pisa Setup > f9 −10 5
Pisa Setup >

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.7 Calibration of RAP-Rotating Angle Sensor

The measured value of the inductive rotating angle sensor on the disk spring column
needs to be calibrated to the actual spring travel. As a reference the measurement at
fully released spring (0 mm) is stored.
Procedure:
1. Enter calibration mode (block pump)
Pisa Setup > f11
− The pump is blocked to prevent automatic pump start after pressure
release
− Release the spring through the pressure-release valve
2. Store the calibration point
Pisa Setup > f12
− The current value of the RAP-sensor will be stored in the external
memory under “Spring_Zero” (ID 61)
− Close the pressure-release valve (open the screw and press)
3. End the calibration mode (activate pump)
Pisa Setup > f13
− The automatic pump start is reactivated, and the pump should start
operating
Note The commands must follow the above sequence, however, “f13” is not required.
“f11” and “f13” can be used independently from a calibration.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.8 Polling of Sensor Data

Pisa Setup > f21 Display of input values
Active protection inputs: BINARY_TYPE_2_3 BINARY_TYPE_2_2

Logical Spring Travel Sensor: PUMP_OFF
Pysical spring position [mm]: 52.56
Circuit breaker position: OFF
Blocking Causes: none
Circuit Breaker SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [kPa]: 712
ADDITIONAL SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [kPa]: 502
Board Temperature [degrees Celsius]: 25.0
Figure 3.2-3: Message (Example: circuit breaker)
Disconnector position: OFF

Earther position: OFF
Blocking Causes: HANDCRANK INTERLOCK
PRIMARY SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [kPa]: 712
ADDITIONAL SF6 Pressure at 20 Degrees [kPa]: 502
Βoard Temperature [degrees Celsius]: 25.0
Figure 3.2-4: Message (Example: combined disconnector / earthing switch)
Explanation:
− The protection inputs 3 and 2 are activated
− The spring is fully charged, the spring travel is 52,56 mm
− The circuit breaker is in position “OPEN”
− Switching operations are not blocked
− The SF6-pressure, set to a standard temperature of 20 °C is:
S In the circuit breaker compartment: Approx. 710 kPa
S In the additionally supervised gas compartment: Approx. 500 kPa
Pisa Setup > f23

Display of the current voltages on the protection inputs
Message:
The voltages on the protection inputs are currently:

Input 1: 15,2 V
Input 2: 14,8 V
Input 3: 16,0 V
This function is used to determine the resistors for the protection input circuit supervi-
sion. The supervision threshold (parameters 17..19, field 3) should be programmed to
be approximately 8 V.
Note If more than one contact per input shall be supervised, please contact the ABB-Service!

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.9 Functions for Testing the Primary Technology

Pump to defined limit:
Pisa Setup > f32 just above O-blocking
Pisa Setup > f34 just above CO-blocking
Pisa Setup > f36 just above OCO-blocking
All pump functions first deactivate automatic pump start. If afterwards automatic pump
start shall be reactivated, use f13.
Pisa Setup > f41 Close disconnector switch
Pisa Setup > f42 Open disconnector switch
Pisa Setup > f43 Close earthing switch
Pisa Setup > f44 Open earthing switch
Pisa Setup > f45 Close circuit breaker
Pisa Setup > f46 Open circuit breaker
For switching sequences f41 − f47 the following times are recorded:
t0 = Activating of motors / coil
t1 = Leaving initial position
t2 = Reaching of final position
Always returned:
Δt1 = t1 − t0
Δt2 = t2 − t0
For the following functions that perform a switching sequence, Δt1 and Δt2 will be re-
corded for each individual operation. A pause of 300 ms will be made between each O
and C operation.
Pisa Setup > f47 Circuit Breaker CO-sequence
Pisa Setup > f48 Circuit Breaker OCO-sequence
Pisa Setup > f49 Circuit Breaker OCOCO-sequence
Pisa Setup > f50 Circuit Breaker OC-sequence
Pisa Setup > f51 Circuit Breaker OCOC-sequence
Issuing switching commands f41 through f46
Fault Messages:
This is not a[n] <switching device>!

Normal Dialogue:
Pisa Setup > f41

The Disconnector is closed now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Pisa Setup > f42
The Disconnector is open now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Pisa Setup > f43
The Earther is closed now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Pisa Setup > f44
The Earther is open now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Pisa Setup > f45
The Switch is closed now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Pisa Setup > f46
The Switch is open now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.4.10 System Software
Polling the current System Software Release

Pisa Setup > f61 Polling the current system software release
Loading new System Software

1. Make sure that the latest delivered PISA-Software is installed on your PC
(“3.2.3.1 Software Installation on a PC”).
2. Prepare the REC580 for communication with the PISA
3. Start the script LOAD_SW:
Follow the instructions of the script:
***********************************************************
Please type in the Device−ID (decimal) and press <Return>.
***********************************************************
Note The Device-ID of the PISA can be obtained from the system documentation!
***********************************************************
* Please switch PISA off and back on, press <Return> *
* immediately after switching back on. *
***********************************************************
4. Switch off the micro circuit breaker (MCB) of the selected PISA,
wait approx. 3 seconds and switch it back on:
− Circuit Breaker (Q0): MCB F101
− All Disconnector and Earthing Switches: MCB F102
− Circuit Breaker (Q0) redundant PISA: MCB F121
(if installed)
Note The redundant PISA (if installed) is not permanently connected to the process bus. To
establish a communication link to the REC580, the optical fibre of the main PISA must
be connected to the optical plugs of the redundant PISA that are easily accessible within
the circuit breaker drive case. The correct assignment of Tx and Rx must be checked
thoroughly. After configuring the redundant PISA the main PISA must be connected
again.
5. Press <RETURN> on the PC within 3 seconds after switching the MCB back
on. The following message will appear:
OK, please wait ...
Loading the software takes approx. 15 minutes.
6. Successful loading of the software is confirmed with the following message:
*****************************************************
* End, PISA SW updated!! *
*****************************************************
7. In case the script was interrupted with an error message before, the script
“LOAD_SW” has to be started again.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.5 Example for PISA Standard Parameters

All required parameters are stored in an Excel-spreadsheet (file name:
PISAPAR.XLS), sorted after feeders and devices. Table 3.2-7 shows an extract
of this spreadsheet with all parameters of the PISAs in feeder E01.
The individual parameters are described in “3.2.2.1.1 Required System Parameters”.
Note The parameters in italics with ID > 60 are written during operation respectively during
calibration of the rotary sensor. They are not specified and set in advance.
The counter values (72, 73, 74, 75) can be corrected at a later date.
Example for a standard feeder:
Special features:
− No Autotrip-functions (40, 41, 42)
− Protection trip on inputs 1 and 2 (17, 18)
− Auto-reclosing on input 3 (19)
− Pass-through of trip blocking with signal output 3 (24)
− Pass-through of reclose blocking with signal output 4 (25)
− Conventional voltage transformer, monitored with Q9Q53-PISA (11: 3)
− Position indication of busbar disconnector switch: Leading make contact,
signal 100 ms after leaving the initial position

¤ Commissioning
Table 3.2-7: PISA-Standard Parameters
E01 Range Para- Q0 Q1 Q2 Q9 Q8

meter Q51 Q52 Q53
ID
Base Data
Node ID 1 .. 63 1 11 11 11 11 11
Device ID 1 .. 255 32 33 34 35 36 37
Device: Type 2 .. 6 3 2 3 3 3 6
Model 1 .. 4 1 3 3 3 3
Mode norm | Sim | Stand Al 1 .. 3 5 1 1 1 1 1
REC 580 Version 300 | 341 7 30 30 30 30 30
SF6-input 1 0|1 11 0 0 0 0 0
SF6-input 2 0|2|3 12 0 0 0 0 0
Circuit Breaker only
BI_1: not | On | Off 0|1|2 17 2
Test Voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
BI_2: not | On | Off 0|1|2 18 2
Test Voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
BI_3: not | On | Off 0|1|2 19 1
Test Voltage [1/10 V] 0 .. 500 100
Battery Voltage [V] 48 .. 250 21 110
Signal Output BO_3 3 .. 7 | 13..17 24 3
Signal Output BO_4 3 .. 7 | 13..17 25 5
SF6-Autotrip 0|1 40 0
O-Block-Autotrip 0|1 41 0
BI-Fault Autotrip 0|1 42 0
CB-Calibration Point 61
CB-Number of Operation 72
CB-Pump Starts 75
Disconnector Switch only
Leading Make Contact [ms] 0 .. 4000 39 100 100 0 0
DS-Number of Operations 73
ES-Number of Operations 74
Note The counters 72..75 are not set during configuration (“3.2.3 Operating Software and
Setup Tools”). Prior to hand-over to the client the current value will be noted here.
Note The parameters in italics with ID > 60 are written during operation respectively during
calibration of the rotary sensor. They are not specified and set in advance.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4.6 Documentation of PISA Standard Parameters and Logfiles

After commissioning the PISA standard parameters have to be documented by the
commissioning personal.
The PISA standard parameters inserted into the Excel-Sheet “PISAPAR.XLS”

(“3.2.4.5 Example for PISA Standard Parameters”) have to be compared to the para-
meters stored in the PISAs. Then the Excel-sheet will be actualized and will be sent to
the regarding department with a new revision index, date of changing and name of the
commissioning person.
Logfiles which are created during commissioning, i.e. during function tests of discon-
nector / earthing switch resp. circuit breaker (1HDG 518 330 “Commissioning of a
SMART-GIS Bay”), have to be filed at the regarding department.

¤ Commissioning
3.3 System start SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0

3.3.1 SMART-GIS engineering
With a SMART-GIS, all substation control and protection devices used must be config-
ured and parametrized.
The required work steps are described in detail in the respective operating instructions
of the individual devices.
REC580: “Operating Instructions”
PISA: 1HDG 518 310 “System-start and configuration of a PISA”

in chapter “Commissioning”
When a SMART-GIS system or a single bay is delivered, this engineering is already

done. All bay-internal wiring circuitry and configurations have been completed and
tested.
3.3.2 SMART-GIS system start

CAUTION Before switching on an automatic circuit-breaker, particularly the power supply
circuits for the motors and coils (F105, F107, F111), it is essential to check the po-
larity of the connected supply voltage. Otherwise PISA elements could be de-
stroyed.
After checking the connected supply voltage, all mini-circuit breakers of a switching
bay can be switched on in any sequence.
3.3.3 Starting up
In the following, it is assumed that REC580 and PISA were correctly configured.
Under normal operating conditions, a PISA is operated in conjunction with an REC580
bay control unit. All messages and signals are transmitted to REC580 via the process
bus, as are all switching commands from REC580.
In order to guarantee protection command processing, PISA can continue to function
even though process bus communication has been interrupted. This status is referred
to below as “Stand-alone mode” (“3.3.4.2 REC580 failure”).
In normal circumstances, REC580 and all PISAs of a single bay are switched on
simultaneously (“3.3.3.1 Switching on REC580 and PISA simultaneously”). However,
this is not an absolute precondition. The following chapters describe how the system
reacts to various combinations of starting and non-operational devices.
1HDG 518 321 en 08.06.2000 ACEMEWE 10.07.2000 ACEMIKI 3.3-1

¤ Commissioning
3.3.3.1 Switching on REC580 and PISA simultaneously

This precondition applies when both devices are switched on within approx. 2 minutes
of one another.
Procedure:
− REC580 system software is initialised
− At the same time, the PISA system software is initiated and attempts to log
itself in
− REC580 waits 5 minutes for all configured process bus devices to log on −
usually the process bus devices are already waiting for log-on acceptance
− PISA logs on and waits for acceptance and synchronisation by REC580
− REC580 starts, accepts process bus devices and transmits synchronisation
data
− PISA starts in “normal operating mode”
3.3.3.2 Switching on PISA (REC580 in normal operating mode)

Procedure:
− PISA system software is initialised (approx. 1 min.)
− REC580 accepts PISA and transmits synchronisation data
− PISA starts in “normal operating mode”
3.3.3.3 Switching on PISA (REC580 remains off)

Procedure:
− PISA system software is initialised
− PISA attempts for 10 minutes to log on to REC580
− PISA starts (unsynchronised) in “Stand-alone mode”
(“3.3.4.2 REC580 failure”)
3.3.3.4 Switching on REC580 (PISA in “Stand-alone mode”)

Procedure:
− REC580 waits 5 minutes for all configured process bus devices to log on
(In “Stand-alone mode”, PISA constantly attempts to log on again
(“3.3.4.2 REC580 failure”))
− REC580 starts, accepts process bus devices and transmits synchronisation
data
− PISA continues to operate in “normal operating mode”

¤ Commissioning
3.3.3.5 Switching REC580 on while PISA remains off

Procedure:
− REC580 waits 5 minutes for all configured process bus devices to log on
− PISA is designated as “Not Ready” − corresponding switching devices are
registered in intermediate position
3.3.4 Behaviour in event of failure

3.3.4.1 Communication failure PISA <−> REC580
Communication failure PISA <−> REC580, REC580 continues running
Possible cause, fault:

− Optical fibre connection faulty
... or / and ... − Star-coupler module for process bus failed
... or / and ... − REC580 bus administrator failed
Procedure:
− PISA does not transmit an explicit fault signal
− The fault is interpreted by REC580 as a PISA failure and signalled
− PISA continues to operate in “Stand-alone mode”
(“3.3.4.2 REC580 failure”)
After reconnection of communication:

− The PISA continues to run in normal operating mode after a maximum of
2 minutes
3.3.4.2 REC580 failure

Procedure:
− The fault is detected by the substation control system and signalled.
− PISA continues to operate in “Stand-alone mode”
After reconnection of communication (REC580 restart):

− See “3.3.3.4 Switching on REC580 while PISA is in “Stand-alone mode””
3.3.4.3 PISA failure while REC580 continues running

Procedure:
− The fault is signalled by the REC580
− PISA functions are no longer possible
− Protection switching via PISA is no longer possible
After a PISA restart:

− See “3.3.3.2 Switching on PISA while REC580 is in normal operating mode”

¤ Commissioning
3.3.5 Stand-alone mode

3.3.5.1 PISA without process bus communication
Behaviour of PISA without process bus communication:
− Normal processing of external protection commands
− Supervision of blocking by the SF6 and spring energy
(with autotrip, if configured)
− Automatic follow-up pumping
− No monitoring functions
− No storing of time-coded events since synchronisation is missing
− Processing external interlocking systems:
S Open interlocking:
The status valid at the time of the failure remains
S Closing interlocking:
The status valid at the time of the failure remains
S Exception:
If the circuit-breaker is in the “Open” position, the closing interlocking is
initialised for safety reasons
3.3.5.2 PISA after (re)connection of communication

Behaviour of PISA after (re)connection of communication:
− Log on to REC580 and wait for time synchronisation
− Transmission of current signal states, including event reporting after possible
status changes. For these events, the logging back time code is transmitted
− Restart of mean-value generation for monitor functions

¤ Commissioning
3.3.6 Decommissioning
3.3.6.1 Decommissioning a single drive
To decommission a drive for repair purposes, the following automatic circuit-breakers
should be switched off in specified sequence:
Circuit-breakers:
1. F101 (PISA)
2. F107 (Pump motor power supply)
3. F111 (Trip coils power supply)
4. Automatic circuit-breakers of the auxiliary voltage for protection devices
connection
Disconnector / earthing switches:
Simultaneous decommissioning of all disconnectors / earthing switches of a bay:

1. F102 (all PISAs in disconnectors / earthing switches)
2. F106 (all power supplies for moving motors and
interlocking deactivation magnets)
3. Automatic circuit-breakers of the auxiliary voltage for protection devices
connection
Individual decommissioning of a single disconnector / earthing switch is only possible

by pulling out the corresponding terminal plug in the control cubicle (X1, X2, ...).
3.3.6.2 Decommissioning a single bay

To decommission a complete SMART-GIS switch bay, the following automatic circuit-
breakers should be switched off in specified sequence:
1. F105 Bay computer REC580
2. F104 Signalling-circuit voltage
3. F101 PISA in the circuit-breaker
4. F102 PISAs in disconnector / earthing switches
5. F106 Supply voltage for motors and interlocking deactivation magnets)
6. F107 Supply voltage for hydraulic pump motor
7. F111 Supply voltage for trip coils
8. Further project-specific automatic circuit-breakers

¤ Commissioning
3.4 System Start-up SMART-GIS

3.4.1 Engineering of SMART-GIS
All substation control and protection devices of a SMART-GIS need to be configured
and parametrized.
The necessary steps are described in detail in the instruction manuals of the individual
devices:
REC580: “Operating Instructions“
PISA: 1HDG 518 310 “Setup and Configuration of a PISA”

in chapter “Commissioning”
When the SMART-GIS is delivered this engineering is already concluded. All bay-wide
wiring and configurations have been completed and tested.
3.4.2 SMART-GIS System Start

CAUTION Verify the polarity of the supply circuits for motors and coils (F105, F107, F111) be-
fore closing the respective micro circuit breakers. If wrongly connected, PISA el-
ements may be destroyed.
Once the supply voltage connections have been verified the micro circuit breakers can
be closed in any sequence.
3.4.3 Start-up
The following is assuming that the REC580 and the PISA have been correctly confi-
gured.
During normal operation the PISA and the bay control unit REC580 are operated to-
gether. All messages and signals are transmitted to the REC580, all commands from
the REC580 are transmitted via the process bus.
In order to guarantee processing of a protection command under any event, the PISA
can operate with interrupted process bus communication. This condition will be re-
ferred to as “Stand-alone” mode (“3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580”).
Normally, the REC580 and all PISAs of a feeder will be switched on simultaneously
(“3.4.3.1 Simultaneous Switching-On of REC580 and PISAs”). This, however, is not
mandatory. The following chapters describe the system behaviour under various com-
binations of starting and non-operational devices.
1HDG 518 320 C en 10.06.1999 ACEMEWE 10.06.1999 ACEHENE 3.4-1

¤ Commissioning
3.4.3.1 Simultaneous Switching-On of REC580 and PISAs

If the two devices are switched on within approximately 2 minutes, it is considered
simultaneous.
Sequence:
− Initializing of REC580 system software
− The PISA system software is initialized simultaneously and starts. Signals
will not be transmitted until after time-synchronization from the REC580. Prior
to the first time-synchronization the PISA operates in “stand-alone” mode
without generating any signals.
− The REC580 starts in operational mode and commences time synchroniz-
ation regardless of whether all the configured PISAs already have initialized.
Already initialized PISAs will be tagged “Ready”.
Non-initialized PISAs will be tagged “Not Ready”, and their signals will be
discarded.
− After receiving the first synchronization telegram, each PISA transmits its
initial status to the REC580 and continues in normal operation.
3.4.3.2 Switching on PISA with REC580 in Normal Operation

Sequence:
− Initializing the PISA system software (approx. 1 min.)
initial status to the REC580 and continues in operational mode.
3.4.3.3 Switching on PISA with REC580 switched off

Sequence:
− Initializing the PISA system software
− The PISA starts unsynchronized in “stand-alone” mode
(“3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580”)
3.4.3.4 Switching on REC580 with PISA in “Stand-Alone Mode”

Sequence:
− Initializing the REC580 system software
Already initialized PISAs will be tagged “Ready”.
Non-initialized PISAs will be tagged “Not Ready”, and their signals will be
discarded.

¤ Commissioning
3.4.3.5 Switching on REC580 with PISA switched off

Sequence:
Already initialized PISAs will be tagged “Ready”. Non-initialized PISAs will be
tagged “Not Ready”, and their signals will be discarded.
3.4.4 Behaviour in case of Failure

3.4.4.1 Communication Failure PISA <−> REC580
Failure of Communication PISA <−> REC580, REC580 continues to operate
Possible cause, failure:

− Fiberoptic connection disturbed
... and / or ... − Failure of the REC580 star coupler module for the process bus
... and / or ... − Failure of the REC580’s process bus administrator
Sequence:
− The PISA will not generate an explicit failure message
− The REC580 interpretes the failure as a failure of the PISA and generates a
respective error message
− The PISA continues to operate in “stand-alone” mode
(“3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580”)
After communication has been re-established:

3.4.4.2 Failure of REC580

Sequence:
− The failure is detected by the station control system, which generates a
respective error message
− The PISA continues to operate in “stand-alone” mode
After communication with the REC580 has been re-established

(Reset of the REC580):
− Refer to section
“3.4.3.4 Switching on REC580 with PISA in “Stand-Alone Mode””
3.4.4.3 Failure of PISA while REC580 continues to operate

Sequence:
− The REC580 generates an error message
− The PISA-functions are no longer available
− Protection trip through the PISA is no longer possible
After reset of the PISA:

− Refer to section
“3.4.3.2 Switching on PISA with REC580 in Normal Operation”

¤ Commissioning
3.4.5 “Stand-Alone” Mode

3.4.5.1 PISA without Process Bus Communication
Behaviour of a PISA without process bus communication:
− Supervision of blocking for SF6 and stored spring energy conditions
(with Autotrip, if configured this way)
− Automatic pumping
− No monitoring functions
− Generation of time-tagged events
S Previously time-synchronized:
Generation and storage of up to100 time-tagged events after change of
status
S Not previously time-synchronized:
No generation and storage of time-tagged events
− Processing of external blocking:
S Open-Blocking:
The last valid status before failure will be maintained
S Close-Blocking:
The status valid at failure will be maintained
S Exception:
If the circuit breaker is in the OPEN position, for safety reasons close-
blocking will be activated.
3.4.5.2 PISA after (Re-)Establishment of Communication

Behaviour of the PISA after (re-)establishment of communication:
− Log-on at the REC580 and waiting for time synchronization
For first-time time synchronization of the PISA:

− Transfer of the current signal statuses including events. All these events will
be time-tagged with the log-on time.
− Restart of the mean value calculation for the monitoring functions
For repeated time synchronization of the PISA:

− Transfer of the stored events
− Restart of the mean value calculation for the monitoring functions

¤ Commissioning
3.4.6 De-Commissioning
3.4.6.1 De-Commissioning a single Operating Mechanism
In order to decommission an operating mechanism for repair the following micro
circuit breakers need to be switched off in the sequence given below:
Circuit Breaker:
1. F101 (PISA)
2. F107 (Pump motor supply)
3. F111 (Trip coil supply)
4. MCBs for auxiliary supply of the protection devices
Disconnector and Earthing Switches:
Simultaneous decommissioning of all disconnector / earthing switches of a feeder:

1. F102 (all PISAs in Disconnector / Earthing Switches)
2. F106 (all supplies for motors and interlocking deactivation magnets)
3. MCBs for auxiliary supply of the protection devices
Individual disconnector / earthing switches can only be decommissioned by unplug-

ging the respective connections in the local control cabinet (X1, X2, ...).
3.4.6.2 De-Commissioning a single bay

In order to decommission a complete SMART-GIS bay the following micro circuit
breakers need to be switched off in the sequence given below:
1. F105 Bay control unit REC580
2. F104 Signal voltage
3. F101 PISA of the circuit breaker
4. F102 PISAs of the disconnector / earthing switches
5. F106 Supply voltage for motors and interlocking deactivation magnets
6. F107 Supply voltage for hydraulic pump motor
7. F111 Supply voltage for trip coils
8. Further project-specific micro circuit breakers

¤ Commissioning
3.5 Commissioning of a SMART-GIS Bay

3.5.1 Abbrevations and Definitions
CB Circuit-Breaker
Di Disconnector
Di / Er Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
ELK-04 Gas-Insulated Switchgear (product name)
Er Earthing Switch
EXK-01 Gas-Insulated Switchgear (product name)
FE Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
LWL Optical Fibre
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear
HMB-1 Hydraulic Spring Operating Mechanism (product name)
3.5.2 Functional Test of Operating Mechanism and PISA

Note All works associated with commissioning of a PISA are described in detail in chapter
“Commissioning” in document 1HDG 518 310 “Commissioning and Configuration of a
PISA”.
3.5.2.1 SF6-Gas Compartment and Sensors

Note The test of the gas density sensor shall be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680 (ELK-04) or 1HDG 918 680 (EXK-01).
Two measuring points shall be checked at each gas compartment:

− Measuring Point 1: Alarm level Stage 2
− Measuring Point 2: Operating pressure
The following values are to be acquired (Table 3.5-1):

a) Actual ambient temperature, measured with a thermometer (column 4)
b) Actual SF6 pressure in the compartment, measured with a pressure gauge
(column 5)
c) Reading of pressure gauge normed to 20 °C (column 6) (calculate with equa-
tion b))
d) Sensor reading acquired through the PISA (column 7)

¤ Commissioning
Read the measured values in the operating mode of the PISA:

Pisa Setup > f21
Sensor PISA input
−B104 1 Circuit Breaker

PRIMARY
−B105 2 ADDITIONAL
ADDITIONAL
The pressure reading is to be documented in a table as follows:

Table 3.5-1: SF6-Pressure
SF6-Filling Pressure
easuring point
int
Remarks
Measured Measured values (Permissible deviation
PISA-
value with standardized to between measured
Bay Gas Density Sensor TU sensor value
manometer 20°C (calculate with value from equation b)
(at 20°C)
at TU equation b)) and sensor
Mea
value 10 kPa)
°C kPa kPa kPa
1
−B104
2
1
−B105
2
TU = ambient temperature
If the deviation between the pressure gauge reading normed to 20 °C and the sensor
reading of the PISA exceeds 10 kPa, the sensor and the PISA are to be checked for
integrity:
1. Insert an Ammeter into the sensor output circuit and measure the current
2. The ratio between the sensor output current and the SF6-pressure at 20 °C
can be derived from Table 3.5-2 and Table 3.5-3
S If the output current of the sensor correlates with the measured pres-
sure, the sensor is intact, and the PISA input is defective
S If the output current correlates with the pressure reading of the PISA, the
sensor is defective, and the PISA is intact
Note The PISA input can also be tested without a gas density sensor by feeding the
corresponding current from a WIKA-test set. As an alternative, the current can also be
fed from a potentiometer and an ammeter.

¤ Commissioning
Formula for pressure calculation in relation to the temperature
Note The following formula are only valid for the gaseous state, not for partial liquification!
a) Calculation of gas pressures for ambient temperatures other than 20 °C:
Pí = P 20· 273 í
273 20
Pí = pressure at temperature í
í = actual gas temperature in °C = ambient temperature in °C
P 20 = pressure at 20°C
Example:
Circuit breaker, pressure at 40°C:
P 40 = 700 kPa· 273 40 748 kPa

273 20
b) Equation for calculating the standardized gas pressure at 20 °C
p 20 p í· 273 20
273 í
Pí = pressure at temperature í
í = actual gas temperature in °C = ambient temperature in °C
P 20 = pressure at 20°C
Example:
Gas compartment with 515 kPa at 25°C:
p 20 515kPa· 273 20 506.36kPa

273 25

¤ Commissioning
Table 3.5-2: Conversion SF6 density into SF6 pressure for entire range 0... to 60 kg / m3 at 20°C
D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa] D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa] D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa]

0.0 4.00 000 20.0 9.33 321 40.0 14.67 616
0.5 4.13 008 20.5 9.47 328 40.5 14.80 623
1.0 4.27 017 21.0 9.60 336 41.0 14.93 630
1.5 4.40 025 21.5 9.73 344 41.5 15.07 637
2.0 4.53 033 22.0 9.87 351 42.0 15.20 644
2.5 4.67 042 22.5 10.00 359 42.5 15.33 651
3.0 4.80 050 23.0 10.13 367 43.0 15.47 658
3.5 4.93 058 23.5 10.27 374 43.5 15.60 665
4.0 5.07 066 24.0 10.40 382 44.0 15.73 672
4.5 5.20 074 24.5 10.53 389 44.5 15.87 679
5.0 5.33 083 25.0 10.67 397 45.0 16.00 686
5.5 5.47 091 25.5 10.80 404 45.5 16.13 693
6.0 5.60 099 26.0 10.93 412 46.0 16.27 700
6.5 5.73 107 26.5 11.07 419 46.5 16.40 707
7.0 5.87 115 27.0 11.20 427 47.0 16.53 713
7.5 6.00 123 27.5 11.33 434 47.5 16.67 720
8.0 6.13 131 28.0 11.47 442 48.0 16.80 727
8.5 6.27 139 28.5 11.60 449 48.5 16.93 734
9.0 6.40 148 29.0 11.73 457 49.0 17.07 741
9.5 6.53 156 29.5 11.87 464 49.5 17.20 748
10.0 6.67 164 30.0 12.00 472 50.0 17.33 754
10.5 6.80 172 30.5 12.13 479 50.5 17.47 761
11.0 6.93 180 31.0 12.27 486 51.0 17.60 768
11.5 7.07 188 31.5 12.40 494 51.5 17.73 775
12.0 7.20 196 32.0 12.53 501 52.0 17.87 781
12.5 7.33 203 32.5 12.67 508 52.5 18.00 788
13.0 7.47 211 33.0 12.80 516 53.0 18.13 795
13.5 7.60 219 33.5 12.93 523 53.5 18.27 801
14.0 7.73 227 34.0 13.07 530 54.0 18.40 808
14.5 7.87 235 34.5 13.20 537 54.5 18.53 815
15.0 8.00 243 35.0 13.33 545 55.0 18.67 821
15.5 8.13 251 35.5 13.47 552 55.5 18.80 828
16.0 8.27 259 36.0 13.60 559 56.0 18.93 834
16.5 8.40 266 36.5 13.73 566 56.5 19.07 841
17.0 8.53 274 37.0 13.87 573 57.0 19.20 848
17.5 8.67 282 37.5 14.00 580 57.5 19.33 854
18.0 8.80 290 38.0 14.13 588 58.0 19.47 861
18.5 8.93 298 38.5 14.27 595 58.5 19.60 867
19.0 9.07 305 39.0 14.40 602 59.0 19.73 874
19.5 9.20 313 39.5 14.53 609 59.5 19.87 880
60.0 20.00 887
Note 1 kg / m3 = 1 g / l

¤ Commissioning
Table 3.5-3: Conversion SF6 density into SF6 pressure for partial range 25... to 48.8 kg / m3 at 20°C
D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa] D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa] D [kg/m3] I [mA] P [kPa]

25.0 10.67 397 33.0 12.80 516 41.0 14.93 630
25.2 10.72 400 33.2 12.85 518 41.2 14.99 633
25.4 10.77 403 33.4 12.91 521 41.4 15.04 636
25.6 10.83 406 33.6 12.96 524 41.6 15.09 639
25.8 10.88 409 33.8 13.01 527 41.8 15.15 641
26.0 10.93 412 34.0 13.07 530 42.0 15.20 644
26.2 10.99 415 34.2 13.12 533 42.2 15.25 647
26.4 11.04 418 34.4 13.17 536 42.4 15.31 650
26.6 11.09 421 34.6 13.23 539 42.6 15.36 653
26.8 11.15 424 34.8 13.28 542 42.8 15.41 655
27.0 11.20 427 35.0 13.33 545 43.0 15.47 658
27.2 11.25 430 35.2 13.39 547 43.2 15.52 661
27.4 11.31 433 35.4 13.44 550 43.4 15.57 664
27.6 11.36 436 35.6 13.49 553 43.6 15.63 667
27.8 11.41 439 35.8 13.55 556 43.8 15.68 669
28.0 11.47 442 36.0 13.60 559 44.0 15.73 672
28.2 11.52 445 36.2 13.65 562 44.2 15.79 675
28.4 11.57 448 36.4 13.71 565 44.4 15.84 678
28.6 11.63 451 36.6 13.76 568 44.6 15.89 680
28.8 11.68 454 36.8 13.81 570 44.8 15.95 683
29.0 11.73 457 37.0 13.87 573 45.0 16.00 686
29.2 11.79 460 37.2 13.92 576 45.2 16.05 689
29.4 11.84 463 37.4 13.97 579 45.4 16.11 691
29.6 11.89 466 37.6 14.03 582 45.6 16.16 694
29.8 11.95 469 37.8 14.08 585 45.8 16.21 697
30.0 12.00 472 38.0 14.13 588 46.0 16.27 700
30.2 12.05 474 38.2 14.19 590 46.2 16.32 703
30.4 12.11 477 38.4 14.24 593 46.4 16.37 705
30.6 12.16 480 38.6 14.29 596 46.6 16.43 708
30.8 12.21 483 38.8 14.35 599 46.8 16.48 711
31.0 12.27 486 39.0 14.40 602 47.0 16.53 713
31.2 12.32 489 39.2 14.45 605 47.2 16.59 716
31.4 12.37 492 39.4 14.51 608 47.4 16.64 719
31.6 12.43 495 39.6 14.56 610 47.6 16.69 722
31.8 12.48 498 39.8 14.61 613 47.8 16.75 724
32.0 12.53 501 40.0 14.67 616 48.0 16.80 727
32.2 12.59 504 40.2 14.72 619 48.2 16.85 730
32.4 12.64 507 40.4 14.77 622 48.4 16.91 733
32.6 12.69 510 40.6 14.83 625 48.6 16.96 735
32.8 12.75 513 40.8 14.88 627 48.8 17.01 738
Note 1 kg / m3 = 1 g / l

¤ Commissioning
3.5.2.2 Functional Test of a combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch

Enter the PISA commissioning mode with GO2SETUP.
3.5.2.2.1 Switching and Acquisition of Operating Times

The following functions can be tested by switching with the PISA in commissioning
mode:
− Position detection (inductive proximity sensors)
− Integrity of switching transistors
− Mechanics
Procedure:
1. Open the ProComm-Plus logfile:
<Alt>-F1 (function key F1)
Allocate a filename according to the following example:
E03Q9.TXT
The directory is automatically set as follows:
c:\pisa\tools\pcplus\
2. Open script “ON_SITE” (<Alt>-F5)
S While the script is running, the type of switching device and its designa-
tion will have to be entered:
Types of switching devices:
1: Circuit Breaker
2: Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
3: Disconnector Switch (e. g. busbar sectionalizer)
4: Earthing Switch with Short-Circuit Making Capacity
Device designation:
e. g.: E03 Q9Q53
S Functions of the script:
3. Switch the devices into a defined starting position:
− Combined Di / Er: Neutral position after Er CLOSED
− Di: Position OPEN
− Er: Position OPEN
4. List all PISA configuration parameters for archiving purposes

¤ Commissioning
5. Execute a pre-defined switching sequence:

The measured operating times are stored in a log-file for further processing
S Di / Er:
− Disconnector switch CLOSE (after earthing switch OPEN)
− Disconnector switch OPEN
− Disconnector switch CLOSE (after disconnector switch OPEN)
− Earthing switch CLOSE (after disconnector switch OPEN)
− Earthing switch OPEN
− Earthing switch CLOSE (after earthing switch OPEN)
− Earthing switch OPEN
S Di:
− Disconnector switch CLOSE
S FE:
− Earthing switch with short-circuit making capacity CLOSE
− Earthing switch with short-circuit making capacity OPEN
6. Close ProComm-Plus logfile:

¤ Commissioning
3.5.2.3 Functional Test of a Circuit Breaker

Enter the PISA commissioning mode with GO2SETUP
3.5.2.3.1 Test of spring travel measurement

1. Deactivate automatic pumping:
Pisa_Setup > f11

2. Discharge spring with fine release valve, close valve afterwards
3. Check spring travel with spring discharged:
Pisa_Setup > f21
Input Default
Spring Travel 0..1 mm
If the deviation exceeds the default value, check the connection between the
cogwheel and the sensor rod for tightness
Recalibrate the sensor
3.5.2.3.2 Charging time of Hydraulic Spring Operating Mechanism

1. Deactivate automatic pumping
Pisa_Setup > f11
3. Activate automatic pumping and measure the charging time manually
(e. g. with a stop watch)
Pisa_Setup > f13
Charging time Default
Measured manually < 1 minute
4. Check spring travel:

Pisa_Setup > f21
Input Default
Spring Travel 52 + 1,0 mm
5. Compare reading with actual measurement on the operating mechanism

¤ Commissioning
3.5.2.3.3 Monitoring of excessive pump runtime (optional)

1. Deactivate automatic pumping:
Pisa_Setup > f11
2. Discharge spring with fine release valve and leave the valve open
3. Activate automatic pumping
Pisa_Setup > f13
4. The subsequent sequence must be the following:
− 60 s Pumping (1. trial)
30 s Pause
30 s Pause
− 30 s Pause
No further pumping
Note This function can also be checked in normal operation with an operational REC580 :
1. Switch off PISA (F101)

2. Discharge spring with fine release valve and leave valve open
3. Switch on PISA (F101, booting time approx. 1 min. with operational REC580)
After each pumping interval an error message has to appear in the event list of the
REC580, i. e. the error message “excessive pump runtime” will appear four times.

¤ Commissioning
3.5.2.3.4 Switching
The following functions can be checked with an OCO-switching sequence:
S Closing
S Opening
S Operating times
S Stored energy
1. Deactivate automatic pumping
Pisa_Setup > f11
3. Open ProComm-Plus logfile:
Allocate filename according to the following example:
E03Q0.TXT
The directory is automatically set as follows:
c:\pisa\tools\pcplus\
4. Start script „ON_SITE“ (<Alt>-F5)
S While the script is running, the type of switching device and its designa-
tion will have to be entered:
Types of switching devices:
1: Circuit Breaker
Device designation of the Circuit Breaker:
e. g.: E03 Q0
S Functions of the script:
a) Switch circuit breaker into starting position CLOSE
b) Charge spring just above the blocking threshold for an
OCO-switching sequence
c) List all PISA configuration parameters for archiving purposes
d) Trigger an OCO-switching sequence
The measured operating times are stored in a logfile for further
processing.
5. Close ProComm-Plus logfile:
6. Note the operating times for the second opening and for auto-reclosing
(where applicable):
Pisa Setup > f48

The Switch is closed now. t1 = <Integer> ms, t2 = <Integer> ms
Figure 3.5-1: Indication after switching operation:

7. Compare operating times with the values from the routine test protocol
(permissible deviation ± 5 ms)

¤ Commissioning
3.5.2.3.5 Input circuit supervision

Each binary input for commands from the protection scheme allows for circuit supervi-
sion of “one” switching contact. For this circuit supervision, a resistor needs to be in-
stalled in parallel with the trip contact. The small current then flowing through the trip
circuit can be measured by the PISA.
1. Check whether the resistor is installed in accordance with the circuit dia-
grams
2. Read the applied test voltage in the Setup-mode:
Pisa Setup > f23
Display of the actual voltages on the protection inputs
Figure 3.5-2: Indication (sample)

The voltages on the protection inputs are:
Input 1: 13,5 V
Input 2: 14,8 V
Input 3: 13,0 V
The measured voltages should be in the range between 13 .. 20 V
(setting: 130 ... 200).
3. Check the parameters of the supervision thresholds:
The switching supervision thresholds have to be adjusted individually for
each input and should be set at 8 V (setting: 80)
This threshold has to be set as a second value for the parameters 17, 18 and
19, which are used for configuration of the binary inputs.
Check the parameters:
Pisa Setup > f1
Sample of indication:
...
17: 2 80 (Function: OPEN,Supervision: 8 V)
18: 2 80 (Function: OPEN,Supervision: 8 V)
19: 1 80 (Function: CLOSE,Supervision: 8 V)
...
If the supervision thresholds are programmed to be 0, these three para-
meters have to be reset completely:
Pisa Setup > 17 2 80
4. Functional check of supervision and signalling:
Switch PISA to normal operation using “f99” , if not already done
Set REC580 to normal operation (in case of doubt, press the Reset button)
CAUTION Switch off the auxiliary voltage while installing or working on the resistor!
Remove the resistor from the protection contact
An error message has to appear in the REC580-event list
Reinstall the resistor
A message has to appear in the REC580-event list that the error has been
cleared
Note Note that switching off the auxiliary voltage will also generate an error message!

¤ Commissioning
3.5.3 Check the Bay Control Functions

(Function- and circuit diagrams)
All functions that are shown in the circuit diagram of the local control cubicle have to
be checked.
3.5.3.1 REC580 Binary Input signals

− REC580 −> Normal operation
− Select the display page showing an overview over the binary in- and outputs
of a BIO-board
− Generate a signal (bridge the connected auxiliary contacts or apply an exter-
nal voltage to the input)
3.5.3.2 REC580 Binary Output signals

S REC580 −> Normal operation
S Generate a signal that activates a binary output
S Switch the binary output
3.5.3.3 Connection of Protection to the PISA
3.5.3.3.1 Circuit Breaker

Establish the in- and output allocation of the PISA using the circuit diagrams and com-
pare with the settings of the configuration parameters.
Table 3.5-4: Possible configurations of the Protection Inputs
Port Param. Pins Default PISA Alternative PISA
BI_6 17 -X0 B1, B2 OPEN 1 17: 2 OPEN 1 17: 2
BI_7 18 -X0 B3, B4 OPEN 2 18: 2 OPEN 2 18: 2
BI_8 19 -X0 B5, B6 CLOSE 1 19: 1 OPEN 3 19: 2
Table 3.5-5: Possible configuration of the Signal Outputs
Port Param. Pins Default Par. Option 1 Par. Option 2 Par.
BO_1 22 -X0 D1, D2 CLOSE -- --
BO_2 23 -X0 D3, D4 OPEN -- --
BO_3 24 -X0 C1, C2 O-Block 3 -- latching 6 or 7
BO_4 25 -X0 C3, C4 OCO- Block 5 CO- Block 4 latching 6 or 7
Inverting of Outputs:
All binary outputs can be used as “normally open” contacts (parameters 3..7) as well
as “normally closed” contacts (parameters + 10, i. e. 13..17)
Latching contacts:
Passing on of a trip command to other devices (e. g. generator excitation).

¤ Commissioning
Permanent (Parameter 6)
This contact will be closed under the following conditions:

− Switch is not in the CLOSED position
(i. e. in OPEN or intermediate position) or
− A trip signal was received over the process bus or a protection command
input or
− An autotrip occured due to a blocking situation
Check:
1. Switch CB to CLOSE position −> contact in OPEN position
2. Switch CB to OPEN position −> contact in CLOSED position
1-Second-Pulse (Parameter 7)
This contact will be closed under the following conditions:

S A CLOSE-OPEN-command was received over the process bus or a protec-
tion command input or
S The circuit breaker was manually opened
Check:
1. Switch CB to CLOSE position −> contact in OPEN position
2. Switch CB to OPEN position −> contact in CLSOED position for 1
second
Note Not all of the above mentioned functions are necessarily connected.
Protection Inputs / Trip Signals
Bridge the protection contact and check the selected switching operation.
S OPEN operation
S CLOSE operation: check anti-pumping
Anti-pumping:
Leave the bridge across the closing contacts. Open the circuit breaker from
the REC580.
−> CB must not close again
Signal Outputs
Depending on the function:

S Position indication:
Device in respective position: contact in CLOSED position
S O-/CO-/OCO-Block:
No Blocking: contact in OPEN (3, 4, 5) / CLOSED position (13, 14, 15)
Blocking: contact in CLOSED (3, 4, 5) / OPEN position (13, 14, 15)
S Latching:
Circuit Breaker CLOSED: contact in OPEN (6, 7) / CLOSED position (16, 17)
Circuit Breaker OPEN: contact in CLOSED (6, 7) / OPEN position (16, 17)

¤ Commissioning
Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch

Table 3.5-6: Function of the Signal Outputs
Port Pins
BO_1 -X.. D1, D2 Disconnector Switch CLOSE, possibly as leading contact
BO_2 -X.. D3, D4 Disconnector Switch OPEN
BO_3 -X.. C1, C2 Earthing Switch CLOSE, used for routine testing only
BO_4 -X.. C3, C4 Earthing Switch OPEN, used for routine testing only
Switching device in respective position: contact in CLOSED position
Leading “normally open” Contact
In order to be able to connect a busbar protection, the binary output BO_1 on a

disconnector switch can be set as leading “normally open” contact.
When the disconnector switch is switched into the CLOSE position, the signal contact
for the CLOSE position closes a configurable period of time tleading after the switch
has left its OPEN position.
tleading = 1 ... 10.000 ms
If tleading is set to 0, the CLOSE position is signalled when the limit sensors have
established the CLOSE position of the disconnector switch (default setting).
Configuration:
− PISA-Parameter-ID: 39 contains tleading in ms
− For setting / description, refer to chapter “Commissioning”, document
1HDG 518 310 „Setting up and Configuration of a PISA“

¤ Commissioning
3.5.3.3.2 Measurement of Signal Outputs
If control voltage is not available
Check whether contact is closed using a continuity test device (DC current, diode
tester).
The signal outputs only block in one distinctive direction, which has to be used for the
continuity check, as well. In the other direction the output always conducts.
BO_1 D1 D2
BO_2 D3 D4
BO_3 C1 C2
BO_4 C3 C4
Direction for Measurement
Figure 3.5-3: Direction for Measurement
If control voltage and detecting device are available
Direct measurement at the input of the detecting device
Example:
Detection of disconnector switch position by the busbar protection:
The control voltage can be measured directly at the respective input of the busbar
protection relay.

¤ Commissioning
3.5.4 Troubleshooting
3.5.4.1 Pump Circuit
If the pump does not run:
− Automatic pumping may be switched off
−> Reactivate with “f13”
− PISA may be defective
− Wiring may be faulty
− Pump motor may be defective
3.5.4.2 Indication of non-executed Switching Commands

For identification of fault, trigger individual switching operations:
Faulty indication:
The Switch is closed/open now. t1 = 0 ms, t2 = 0 ms
Possible causes:
S Switching device did not operate at all:
− Check supply voltage of the load circuits
− Check actors
S Switching device exceeded maximum operating time:
− Clear mechanical faults
− Reconfigure supervision of operating time (reset parameters):
Disconnector Switch: ID = 30
Earthing Switch : ID = 31
Sample:
The earting switch with short-circuit making capacity shall be configured for a total
operating time of 4 seconds and a reaction time of 2 seconds:
Pisa Setup > 31 4000 2000
− The maximum operating time is preset with the following default values:
t2 t1
Circuit Breaker 500 ms 300 ms
Disconnector / Earthing Switch ELK-04 1500 ms 1000 ms
Disconnector / Earthing Switch EXK-01 3500 ms 1500 ms
Disconnector Switch MT100 13000 ms 4000 ms
t1: Max. total operating time (reaction- + moving time)

t2: Max. time for leaving the start position (reaction time)
This is not a[n] <Device Designation>!

¤ Commissioning
Possible causes:
S The wrong switching device function was selected,
e. g. f41 for circuit breaker
S The PISA was not configured correctly:
− Correct parameter 3
− Reboot PISA with f99
Possible causes:
S The wrong function was selected
S The position sensors are possibly swapped
Possible causes:
S The switch is mechanically blocked
S The inductive position sensors are not properly adjusted
S The PISA is defective
S The wiring is faulty
S The trip coil is defective

¤ Commissioning
3.6 Tests prior to Commissioning

This document decribes the basic procedures for testing of the GIS at site prior to
commissioning. These procedures are based on the following:
S IEC 517
S IEEE C37.122
S Experience from more than 2500 installed ELK-0 bays
S Technical, commercial and practical aspects of the tests at site prior to
commissioning
In most cases the shipping units delivered to site consist of complete bays or large
assemblies. These shipping units are subject to a complete factory test prior to
delivery.
The purpose of the tests at site prior to commissioning is:

S To detect any rare possible damage or anomaly that may occure during
transport
S To test the complete GIS installation after final assembly at site
S To ensure uninterrupted operation in service
The sequence of tests described in the following subclauses represents our standard
sequence. For special conditions prevailing at site or practical reason this sequence
may be modified by agreement between manufacturer and user.
Note The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 has to be
documented in the site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680 in section
SF6 Inventory.
Note All documents required for the tests prior to commissioning are listed in the site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680.
1HDG 118 024 AE en 29.06.2006 EXTMEHA 10.07.2006 CHSVOTH 3.6-1

¤ Commissioning
3.6.1 Tools for On-Site Tests

In addition to the test equipment recommended in Table 3.6-1 (extract), a standard
tool set is required.
Table 3.6-1: Recommended Test Equipment
Test Test Tool Manufacturer
Voltage Drop Micro-Ohmmeter, range 0 − 600 A Programma
Gas Tightness Leakage Detector L-780 a ISM
Dew Point Hygrometer DP19 MBW Elektronik AG
Gas Density Relays Gas Density Relay Tester SK509 DILO
Devices Metrahit 13S / 18S Gossen Metrawatt
Test Adapter ABB
Resonance-Test Set of variable frequency

Type WRV 1,5 / 460 A HIGHVOLT
High-Voltage Test of Test Voltage 460 kV (can be ordered
the Main Current Path Frequency Range 50 − 250 Hz through ABB:
Rated Current 1,5 A KB 15 min 1HDS112203R0001
1,0 A KB 60 min WZ-Nr. 37/77)
Rated Inductivity appr. 720 H
Capacitive Load Range 0,6 − 14 nF
Note Suitable test devices that are not listed above may be used alternatively.
3.6.2 Inspection after Transport

Check the GIS for completeness, obvious transport damages etc. well before com-
mencement of the installation.
Note A form for the transport inspection is included in chapter “Delivery” in document
1HDG 518 100 “Receiving Inspection”.
3.6.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop

All contact connections assembled at site are subject to a measurement of the voltage
drop.
The measurement of the voltage drop is performed on two different locations with
100 A supplied from a suitable battery or DC supply source. Both test locations are
connected to the test device. The actual measurement is effective on the connecting
lead (not on the connection to the measuring location).
The resistance is calculated using the following formula:
RU
I in which: R = resistance
U = voltage drop
I = current
Note The default values are specified in chapter “3.6.10 Default Values for Measurement of
Voltage Drop”.

¤ Commissioning
3.6.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors

The gas density relays / sensors are checked before their installation on the GIS. The
test is performed with SF6.
The test is to establish the correct contact making of the gas density relay / sensor at
a given pressure. The pressure measured at contact making and the actual ambient
temperature are compared with the default value. The default value can be obtained
from the site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680 by correlating the contact
characteristics with the ambient temperature measured at the time of the test.
Note The test of the gas density relays / sensors is to be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680 in section “Gas Density Relay” resp. “Gas Density
Sensor”.
3.6.5 Check of Gas Tightness

The following components shall be subjected to gas tightness test:
S All flange connections assembled at site
S All gas couplings and connections assembled at site
All other components are tested in the factory prior to delivery.

Note The test for gas tightness at site prior to commissioning is to be documented in the site
test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680.
3.6.6 Dew Point Measurement

The moisture content of the gas is measured in all gas compartments.
The dew point measurement is performed once the gas compartments have been
filled and pressurized with SF6. In order to allow an equalization between the residual
moisture of the GIS enclosure material and the dry SF6 filling, this measurement
should not be carried out immediately after the filling. The permissible values and the
procedures associated with the dew point measurement are listed in chapter “Gas
Insulated Switchgear” in document “Gashandling” 1HDG 518 005.
Note The dew point measurement prior to commissioning is to be documented in the site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680.
3.6.7 Visual Inspection & SF6 Inventory

Note Check the continuity between the name plates on the equipment and the respective gas
scheme drawings. Details are included in the site test protocol “Commissioning”
1HDG 118 680:
− Earthing
− Voltage Transformer
− Current Transformer
− Surge Arrester
− Amount of filled SF6
Note The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 have to be
documented in the site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680 in section
SF6 Inventory.

¤ Commissioning
3.6.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices

All switching devices shall be subjected to a final mechanical functional test at site.
Details are included in the on-site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680:
− Circuit Breaker
− Disconnector / Earthing Switch
− Switch Disconnector
− Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
CAUTION The circuit breaker shall only be operated if it is filled with SF6 at minimum operat-
ing pressure (min. 600 kPa) at least!
3.6.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet

Note The test of the local control cabinet prior to commissioning is described in site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680; the test shall be documented in the mentioned
protocol.

¤ Commissioning
3.6.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop

In case of a new installation, the voltage drop is measured on complete shipping units
(Figure 3.6-1). For measurement on individual modules please refer to Figure 3.6-4 −
Figure 3.6-32.
The measuring points shall be as close as possible to the cast-in contacts of the insu-
lators for all measurements.
29
24
35 34
2
3 2 32
3 1
x
35
4
x
4
3 1 37
x x
*) R 40 μΩ
R ≤ 24 μΩ **) R 35 μΩ R ≤ 20 μΩ
*) R 84 μΩ *) 24 Flange 4 = long
**) R 79 μΩ **) 24 Flange 4 = short
4
4
Figure 3.6-1: Complete Bay ( 3150 A)

¤ Commissioning
29
24 30
34
34
2 32
3 2 4 3 1
x x
0
x x 1
34
4 x
1
3 1
37
R 15 μΩ R 26 μΩ R 10 μΩ R 10 μΩ
R 61 μΩ
21
0
x 0
Figure 3.6-2: Complete Bay (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
29
24 30
34
34
2
32
3 2 4 3 1
0 1
x x
34
4 x x
1
3 1
37
x
SS1 R 81 μΩ
SS2 R 87 μΩ
SS1 R 55 μΩ
SS2 R 61 μΩ
SS1 R 81 μΩ
21 SS2 R 87 μΩ
0
0
x
Figure 3.6-3: Complete Bay (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 45 μΩ
24
x x
x
R ≤ 20 μΩ
2 4
R 40 μΩ
x
x
x
1 3
R 30 μΩ
DOC.1HDG117003
Figure 3.6-4: Circuit Breaker, Double Busbar ( 3150 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 26 μΩ
24
x x
x
R ≤ 10 μΩ
2 4
R 20 μΩ
x
x
1
Figure 3.6-5: Circuit Breaker, Double Busbar (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 50 μΩ
24
x x
x
R ≤ 30 μΩ
2 4
x
1
R ≤ 42 μΩ
DOC.1HDG118024−2
Figure 3.6-6: Circuit Breaker with current-transformer, Double Busbar ( 3150 A)

¤ Commissioning
24
x x
R ≤ 40 μΩ
R ≤ 42 μΩ
2 4
x x
1 3
DOC.1HDG117003
Figure 3.6-7: Circuit Breaker, Bus Coupler, Circuit Breaker, Ring ( 3150 A)
24
x
R ≤ 20 μΩ
Figure 3.6-8: Circuit Breaker, Bus Coupler, Circuit Breaker, Ring (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 42 μΩ
24
DOC.1HDG117003
Figure 3.6-9: Circuit Breaker, Single Bus (3150A)
R ≤ 20 μΩ
24
Figure 3.6-10: Circuit Breaker, Single Bus (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 20 μΩ R ≤ 22 μΩ
x
R ≤ 22 μΩ
3
x 35
x x x
4 2
x
R ≤ 12.5 μΩ
R ≤ 5 μΩ R ≤ 12.5 μΩ
Figure 3.6-11: Busbar with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch ( 3150 A)
R ≤ 10 μΩ R ≤ 15 μΩ
x
R ≤ 15 μΩ
3
x 34
x
x
x x
4 2
R ≤ 5 μΩ R ≤ 5 μΩ
R ≤ 10 μΩ
Figure 3.6-12: Busbar with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 27 μΩ R ≤ 16 μΩ
R ≤ 4 μΩ R ≤ 15 μΩ
x
3 x
34
4 2
x x
x
x x
R ≤ 22 μΩ
Figure 3.6-13: Busbar disconnector
R ≤ 15 μΩ
R ≤ 15 μΩ
x
3 x
34
4
R ≤ 8 μΩ
x
2
x x
1
R ≤ 13 μΩ
Figure 3.6-14: Outgoing disconnector

¤ Commissioning
x
2
R ≤ 16 μΩ
x x
1 3
R ≤ 15 μΩ
Figure 3.6-15: Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch
30
x x
0 1
R ≤ 12 μΩ
Figure 3.6-16: Current Transformer for Bus Coupler ( 3150 A)

¤ Commissioning
30
x x
1 0
R ≤ 10 μΩ
Figure 3.6-17: Current Transformer for Bus Coupler (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
Connection of Subassemblies
When connection subassemblies the contact resistance has to be considered. the

moving contact has a resistance of 5 μΩ.
Example
Bus (4 m + 2 m) + moving contact (4 x) =

4 x 10 μΩ + 2 x 10 μΩ + 4 x 5 μΩ = 80 μΩ
R ≤ 5 μΩ
R ≤ 5 μΩ
R ≤ 5 μΩ
R ≤ 5 μΩ
R ≤ 10 μΩ /m R ≤ 10 μΩ /m
11 11
x x x x
x x x
3 1 3 1
Figure 3.6-18: Pipe module ( 3150 A)

R 4.8 μΩ / m
R 4 μΩ / m
R 3.3 μΩ
R 2.1 μΩ
R 3.2 μΩ
R 2.1 μΩ
R 3.8 μΩ
700 mm
R 2 μΩ
R 4 μΩ / m
11
11 11
x x x
x x x x x x x
1 3 1 3 1 3
Figure 3.6-19: Pipe module (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
x x
2 22
3 1
x x x
7 8 9
R ≤ 15 μΩ R ≤ 30 μΩ
R ≤ 22.5 μΩ R ≤ 22.5 μΩ
R ≤ 30 μΩ R ≤ 30 μΩ
Figure 3.6-20: Three Phase / Single Phase Connection Module
R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
16 x
x
1
Figure 3.6-21: 30° Angle Piece

¤ Commissioning
15
R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
Figure 3.6-22: 90° Angle Piece ( 3150 A)
15
R ≤ 10 μΩ
Figure 3.6-23: 90° Angle Piece (4000 A)

¤ Commissioning
38
2
x x
3 1
x
R ≤ 5 μΩ R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
Figure 3.6-24: Tee Off with Disconnecting (Cable End Unit, horizontal)
R ≤ 5 μΩ R ≤ 15 μΩ
38
2
x x x
3 1
Figure 3.6-25: Tee Off with Disconnecting (Cable End Unit, vertical)

¤ Commissioning
R 15 μΩ R 15 μΩ
x 38
x x
3 1
R 15 μΩ R 15 μΩ
Figure 3.6-26: Outgoing module
R ≤ 25 μΩ
34
x
R ≤ 25 μΩ
x
x x
R ≤ 15 μΩ
3 1
37
Figure 3.6-27: Cable End Unit with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch

¤ Commissioning
34
R ≤ 25 μΩ
x
x x
3 1
R ≤ 15 μΩ
4
37
R ≤ 25 μΩ
Figure 3.6-28: Plug-in Cable End Unit with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
DOC.1HDG118024−18
2 34
x
R ≤ 25 μΩ
x
R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
3 1
R ≤ 8 μΩ
x x
37
R ≤ 25 μΩ
Figure 3.6-29: Cable End Unit Type LXGA with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 35 μΩ
34 37
2
1 1
x x
x
x
3
R ≤ 10 μΩ
x R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
R ≤ 17.5 μΩ
Figure 3.6-30: Cable End Unit with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
R 30 μΩ
28
x
1
R ≤ 15 μΩ
Figure 3.6-31: Outdoor Bushing

¤ Commissioning
R ≤ 15 μΩ R ≤ 25 μΩ
x
34
4
1 3
R ≤ 17.5 μΩ R ≤ 25 μΩ
Figure 3.6-32: X-connection with Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
R ≤ 26 μΩ
x x
32
Figure 3.6-33: Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity

¤ Commissioning
3.7 Capacitive Voltage Indicator

3.7.1 Setting and Adjustment
Note Before taking the voltage detection unit into service, the amplitude of the amplifier must
be checked at the output of the input amplifier stage.
Adjustment Potentiometer
There is an adjustment potentiometer on the circuit board: P1 − value 5 MΩ adjust-

able part of the input impedance.
Jumper field
Using a 4pole jumper field J3 and J4, the input impedance can be preselected in 2
rough steps of 4.7 MΩ (see component mounting diagram).
This jumper field and the potentiometer P1 are used to set the value of the input impe-
dance between 1 MΩ and 11 MΩ. This adjustment is necessary in order to set a refer-
ence voltage level for nominal voltage (by loading the capacitive voltage divider from
the earth side).
The jumper J4 covers a nominal voltage range of 69 − 170 kV.
Note Potentiometer P1 is high-resolution; 25 revolutions of the adjusting screw are required!
3.7.2 Adjusting the Switching Thresholds

When nominal voltage is applied, the amplitude at the output of the input amplifier
stage should be following value (measuring point MP1).
Table 3.7-1: Amplitude at MP1
Type V RMS at MP1
ELK-04 0,65 V
EXK-01 1,0 V
3.7.3 Matching the Input Impedance

Tolerances of the electronic components of the capacitive voltage divider require ad-
justment by means of P1 and jumper fields J3 and J4. However, this adjustment can
only take place after the voltage detection unit has been mounted − on the switch
housing − by activating all three phases. Here, the amplitude at the output of the input
amplifier (measuring point MP1) should be 0.65 ( 1,0) V RMS (measured using a
digital multimeter); for this purpose, press the “voltage test” key.
1HDG 518 340 B en 16.07.2001 ACEHOSC 16.07.2001 ACEVOTH 3.7-1

¤ Commissioning
To cap. scanning
100 MΩ
MP1 Connection cable
Control panel, 14pole
Battery +
B
GND A
Battery −
5M
P1
Jumper fields J3 and J4 (from top to bottom) GND
Switchover of input impedance
Jumper J3 : 1 x 4.7 MW + Trimmer 5M + 1M

Jumper J4 : − Trimmer 5M + 1M
DOC.1HDG118110−2
Figure 3.7-1: Circuit board with cover
1HDG 518 340 B en 16.07.2001 ACEHOSC 16.07.2001 ACEVOTH 3.7-2

¤ Commissioning
3.8 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits

Prior to commissioning the GIS is subject to a high voltage test. The test is performed
with an AC voltage and a test transformer of suitable size (Table 3.8-1 and
Table 3.8-2).
As an alternative, both, the GIS and the power cables, can be tested with a resonance
test set with variable frequency.
The aim of this test is to detect any dielectric irregularities. Such irregularities can
have their origin in transport damages, foreign bodies etc.
This test of one minute duration has been proven over many years of practical ap-
plication. The subsequent successful energizations of the tested GIS shows that this
test guarantees a safe and reliable operation of the GIS.
The high voltage test of the GIS is usually performed before the installation of the
power cables. In case the power cables have already been installed prior to the high
voltage test, they have to be disconnected for the duration of the test. The cables can
be disconnected from the GIS by opening the disconnector.
Once the power cables have been installed and connected to the GIS, they are high
voltage tested; usually this test is performed by the cable manufacturer.
1HDG 118 023 Q en 10.08.2006 EXTMEHA 16.08.2006 CHSVOTH 3.8-1

¤ Commissioning
3.8.1 Performance of the Test

The high voltage test of the main circuits will be performed after all installation work
has been concluded. If a breakdown occurs, the test has to be repeated.
The AC test voltages are listed in Table 3.8-1.

Note The test is to be performed at filling pressure.
Note All pressures of the GIS and the recalculation to the ambient temperatures are described
in detail in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 004 “Gas
Pressures”.
Note The high voltage commissioning test is to be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680. It must be performed in the following sequence:
1. Calculate the maximum number of GIS bays that can be simultaneously tested
using the values given in Table 3.8-1
2. Raise the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s up to the test voltage listed in
Table 3.8-1 and apply for one minute
3. Lower the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s to zero
Table 3.8-1: Test voltages
Rated voltages according to IEC 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV 170 kV
Power frequency voltage at routine test

140 kV 230 kV 275 kV 325 kV
Test duration: 1 minute, frequency: 50 − 60 Hz
Power frequency voltage at site

120 kV 200 kV 235 kV 270 kV
Rated maximum voltages according to ANSI* 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV 170 kV

160 kV 215 kV 310 kV 365 kV

128 kV 172 kV 248 kV 292 kV
*IEEE Std C37.122

¤ Commissioning
3.8.2 Calculation of the Test Burden

The required power of the test transformer depends on the capacitance of the GIS
modules (Table 3.8-2). The test burden of the GIS can be calculated by adding the
individual capacitances of these GIS modules. Test transformers are available within
the range of 45 kVA to 1300 kVA.
The test burden can be determined using the following formula:
Q = U2 x ω x Cges
Q = test burden (power) [VA]
U = test voltage [kV]
w 2·p·f
1000
f = frequency [Hz]
Cges = sum of all the modules’ capacitances incl. insulators [nF]
The test burden is determined as an equation in units with:
f = 50 Hz: Q [VA] = U2 [kV] x 0,31 x Cges [nF]
Note If the test is performed with a resonance test set with variable frequency, the selected
frequency of the resonance test set has to be used in the equation above.
The capacitance C is determined by adding the individual capacitances of all the GIS
modules for the arrangement to be tested. The result obtained is the capacitance load
per phase with the other two phases being earthed through their connection to the
GIS enclosure.
Table 3.8-2: Capacitance per Module
Module Capacitance in nF
Disconnector / earthing switch * 0,046
Circuit breaker, closed * 0,15
Circuit breaker, open * 0,12
Additional condensator
3,5
for 50kA with outdoor connection
Current transformer * 0,04
T-section , cross module * 0,06
Busduct per linear m * 0,04
90°-module * 0,06
Outdoor bushing, porcelain / composite (silicone) 0,3 - 0,5
Cable termination with conical insulator (without cable) * 0,15
Barrier insulator 0,025
Support insulator 0,015
* without barrier and support insulators

¤ Commissioning
3.8.3 Test Adapter GPFK 051 310

The test adapter is used for the high-voltage test. The test is carried out on a selected
phase. Infeed of the test voltage is effected via an test bushing (Figure 3.8-1) or di-
rectly by means of a test transformer (Figure 3.8-18). The test adapter can be
mounted either in place of the voltage transformer (Figure 3.8-1 and Figure 3.8-18) or
on ends of the bus bars (Figure 3.8-3).
DOC.1HDG118024−14−16
Figure 3.8-1: Test adapter with test bushing fitted
DOC.1HDG118024−19
Figure 3.8-2: Test adapter with test transformer mounted

¤ Commissioning
DOC.1HDG118024−13
Figure 3.8-3: Test adapter with test transformer mounted on the bus bar
If space problems arise when installing the test adapter, it is possible, after loosening
the flange securing bolts (6) to rotate the angle housing (7) of the test adapter through
360° infinitely variable (Figure 3.8-5).

¤ Commissioning
3.8.3.1 Fitting the Test Adapter

1. The part of the installation or outgoing feeder of bay, on which the cable test
is to carried out, as well as the cable must be de-energized and earthed on
both sides
4. Remove the cover and voltage transformer mounted on the plant flange
5. Place the O-ring in the seal groove between the test adapter flange and con-
nection housing flange
6. Mount the test adapter ready for connection (complete with test bushing and
transformer connection) (1) onto the GIS flange (3), (Figure 3.8-5)
8. Earth all phases on the test adapter
9. Turn the earth actuator’s control knob (2) in ON direction (Figure 3.8-5)
10. Connect test voltage supply to the test adapter
Figure 3.8-4: On / off indicator plate on the earth actuator

¤ Commissioning
3.8.3.2 Performance of the Test

1. Switch on the phase to be tested by means of the control knob (5) and switch
off the earth by turning the earth actuator (2) to OFF (Figure 3.8-5)
2. Perform the test
3. After completion of the test, switch off the test voltage and earth the GIS
4. Repeat the procedure described in points 1 to 3 for the other two phases
5 1
DOC.1HDG118349−1
3
1 − Test adapter 5 − Control knob

2 − Earth actuator 6 − Securing bolts
3 − GIS flange 7 − Angle housing
4 − Moving contact
Figure 3.8-5: Test adapter mounted on ELK-04
3.8.3.3 Demounting the Test Adapter

Upon completion of the test:
1. Switch off the test voltage
2. Earth all phases
3. Disconnect the test voltage supply
6. Demount the test adapter (1), (Figure 3.8-5)
7. Seal the plant flange in accordance with the relevant installation instructions

¤ Commissioning
3.8.4 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set

Usually a portable high voltage test set is being used (Figure 3.8-6). The test trans-
former (4) is connected to the phases to be tested by means of a test adapter (2).
The phase to be tested can be selected on the test adapter, while the other two
phases are earthed.
Depending on the type and individual arrangement, the test adapter can be connected
either to the end of the busbar or to the voltage transformer flange position. Other ar-
rangements are possible as well.
1
2
1 − Variable transformer
2 − Test adapter
3 − Encapsulated test transformer
Figure 3.8-6: Encapsulated High Voltage Test Set
As an alternative, the test adapter (2) can be connected to an SF6-air test bushing (1).
This enables testing with a separate test transformer (Figure 3.8-7).
2
1
1 − SF6-air test bushing

2 − Test adapter
Figure 3.8-7: Test Adapter with SF6-Air Test Bushing

¤ Commissioning
4 5
1 2
9 8
1 − ELK-04 6 − HV test set (medium) TES 510

2 − Test adapter 7 − Variable transformer
3 − SF6-air test bushing 8 − HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460
4 − Transition piece, size 1 (resonance test set with control unit)
5 − HV test set (small) TES 230 9 − Transition piece, size 3
Figure 3.8-8: Overview over the available High Voltage Test Sets
Table 3.8-3: Picture Title
Picture-Nr. Title Document No.
1 ELK-04 project-specific
2 Test adapter tool no. 37-32 (GPFK 051 310 R1) 1HDS 112 058 R0001
3 SF6-air test bushing (tool no. 37-55) GSXN 391 001 R0092
4 Transition piece, size 1 (scope of supply 37-25) GPFA 020 450 R0001
HV test set (small) TES 230

5 1HDS 112 205 R0001
(including variable transformer and peak voltmeter) (tool no. 37-25)
HV test set (medium) TES 510

6 1HDS 112 204 R0001
7 Variable transformer (included in TES 230 and TES 510)
HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460

8 1HDS 112 203 R0001
(including control unit and step-up transformer) (tool no. 37-77)
9 Transition piece, size 3 (scope of supply 37-26 and 37-77) GPFA 020 450 R0003

¤ Commissioning
3.8.4.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position

phases are earthed.
If the switchgear is equipped with SF6 air-bushings, then feeding is possible via these
bushings. The test voltage will be controlled by the control unit. Phases can be
earthed via test adapter.
Test without Power Cables

The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position (Figure 3.8-9). The
disconnector is closed. The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity is
opened. The power cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS.
Note If a EHSVS cable sealing end is mounted, the isolator of the sealing end may be included
in the test arrangement (“3.8.4.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End type EHSVS”).
2
3
Detail Z
DOC.1HDG118024−23
Detail Z
5
DOC.1HDG118023−9
6
1 − Outgoing disconnector switch 4 − Variable transformator
2 − Test adapter 5 − Cable sealing end contact
3 − Test set 6 − Corona shield
Figure 3.8-9: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, without Power Cables
Note These connection possibilities are also valid for use of a test adapter with SF6-air test
bushing.

¤ Commissioning
The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position (Figure 3.8-10).
The test adapter is connected to the contacts from the outgoing disconnector (1)
switch on the circuit breaker side. The disconnector is open and the earthing switch
with short circuit making capacity closed. The power cables are connected to the GIS
and earthed via the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity.
2 3
1 − Outgoing disconnector switch 3 − Test set

2 − Test adapter 4 − Variable transformator
Figure 3.8-10: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, with Power Cables
bushing.

¤ Commissioning
3.8.4.2 Connection to the Busbar

The encapsulated test set is connected to the busbar (Figure 3.8-11). The power
cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS.
DOC.1HDG118024−13
Figure 3.8-11: Test Set connected to the Busbar
3.8.4.3 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing

If the GIS layout has a three-phase outdoor bushing connection to an overhead line or
a transformer, a separate test transformer can be connected to the phases. During the
test, the test voltage is applied to one phase while the other two are earthed. The
power cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS.

¤ Commissioning
3.8.4.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End Type EHSVS

During this test, the GIS and the cable plug-in sockets are high voltage tested. The
power cables are not inserted into the sockets.
High Voltage Test without Cables

2. Establish pressure equalisation with atmosphere
3. Connect the test set to the GIS
4. Vent the disconnector (3) and fill it with SF6 up to filling pressure
(Figure 3.8-12)
5. Vent the N2 out of the cable sealing ends’ plug-in sockets (1) through the gas
fittings (2) on the covers
6. Check the earthing of the cover
8. Close the disconnector (3)
9. Open earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
10. Carry out the high voltage test
Final Works
11. Earth the GIS with the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
14. Dismount the test adapter
15. Evacuate the SF6 out of the plug-in sockets (1) and insert the power cables
16. Close arrangement flange acc. to respective mounting instruction
3
1
2
1 − Plug-in sockets DOC.1HDG118024−19
2 − Gas fitting
3 − Outgoing feeder
Figure 3.8-12: High Voltage Test without Power Cables

¤ Commissioning
3.8.5 High Voltage Test at the Bay with Cable

If the cables are to be subjected to a high-voltage test from the GIS side, this can be
performed using the same testing adapter at the potential transformer position. With
the disconnector open and the test connections mounted it is possible to test the
cables. In this case, the test adapter is connected by means of a test cable or a test
bushing.
Note The insulators must be conditioned with AC voltage prior to the DC voltage test (cable
test after AC voltage test). Only the insulators fo the outgoing modules (Figure 3.8-13,
direction A-A, earthing switch with short circuit making capacity, shielded or twin cable
termination, as the case may be) may be exposed to the test voltage.
2 3
Insulator DC exposed
due to cable testing
DOC.1HDG118024−14−16
1 − Disconnector
2 − Test adapter
3 − Test bushing
Figure 3.8-13: Cable testing with test bushing

1. Mount test bushing (3) with test adapter (2) to the potential transformer
flange of the disconnector (Figure 3.8-13)
2. The disconnector has to be in earthed position
3. The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity has to be in opened
position
4. Carry out high voltage test as previously described
In this example, the insulator on the right-hand side is under DC voltage. The maxi-
mum test value is 300 kV DC (15 min).

¤ Commissioning
1
2
DOC:1HDG118024−17−1
1 − Test cable
2 − Test adapter
3 − Cable test adapter
Figure 3.8-14: Cable testing with test cable
1. Mount cable test adapter (3) with test adapter (2) to the potential transformer
position

¤ Commissioning
With horizontally mounted cable end terminals it is possible, after removing the divid-
able contact (1) to carry out the high voltage test on the cable side (Figure 3.8-15).
The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity has to be in opened position
and the bay side has to be earthed.
The dividable contacts have to be shielded.
DOC.1HDG118024−18
1 − Dividable contact
2 − Test adapter
3 − Test bushing
Figure 3.8-15: Cable testing with test adapter in case of horizontally mounted cable end unit
As an alternative, the cable test can also be performed using AC voltage. For special
circumstances it is possible to apply voltage directly by the test transformator, depend-
ing on capacity of the cables. But in this case the use of an resonance testing unit is
recommended.

¤ Commissioning
2
4
DOC.1HDG118024−20
1 − Cable 4 − Test transformator / Resonance inductor

2 − Disconnector 5 − Control unit
3 − Test adapter
Figure 3.8-16: Cable testing of EHSVS cable compact end unit
1. Mount test transformer (4) with test adapter (3) to the potential transformer
flange of the disconnector (2), (Figure 3.8-16)
position

¤ Commissioning
3.8.6 High Voltage Test on the Outgoing-Feeder

High Voltage Test on the Outgoing-Feeder with and without Cables
If the cable, mounted at the outgoing-feeder, go in for a high voltage test (GIS-side),
the divided contacts of the outgoing-feeder must be removed. Subsequently the con-
nections must be supplied with suitable shieldings. Also valid for double cable plug.
The same procedure is valid for a HV-Test without connected cables. If cables are not
connected the preceding instruction for the special type of plug-in socket has to be
noticed.
The execution of the high voltage test are the same as described before.
Note The insulators have to be conditioned with AC-voltage before carrying out the DC-test
(cable-test after AC-test). Only the insulators of the outgoing-feeder are allowed to be
tested by test voltage (Figure 3.8-17, direction A-A)!
Corona shield
Insulator with
A DC-voltage
Figure 3.8-17: Cable Testing on the Outgoing Feeder

¤ Commissioning
High Voltage Test before Outgoing-Feeder
If the cable from double cable plug (all types), mounted at the outgoing-feeder, go in
for a high voltage test (GIS-side), the divided contacts of both outgoing-feeders must
be removed. Subsequently the connections must be supplied with suitable shieldings
(Figure 3.8-18).
Sollen die Kabel bei Doppel-Kabelendverschlüssen (alle Typen) von der GIS-Seite
einer Hochspannungsprüfung unterzogen werden, die an Abzweigstücken montiert
sind, welcher sich vor dem Abgangsbaustein befindet, müssen die geteilten Kontakte
beider Bausteine entfernt werden (Figure 3.8-18). Anschließend sind die Kontaktan-
schlüsse mit den entsprechenden Abschirmungen zu versehen.
noticed.
tested by test voltage!
Corona shield
Corona shield
insulator with DC-voltage
Figure 3.8-18: Cable testing on the outgoing-feeder

¤ Commissioning
Split contact
DOC.1HDG118023−20
Figure 3.8-19: Outgoing-feeder with partitioned cable end unit
Corona shield
Insulator with
DC-voltage
DOC.1HDG118023−20
Figure 3.8-20: Cable testing on the outgoing-feeder with partitioned cable end unit

¤ Commissioning
3.8.7 HV-cable-test at cable end unit with K&D-plug-in-contact

3.8.7.1 General
There are various testing possibilities for carrying out the cable test on plastic-insu-
lated HV cable.
The test voltage for plastic-insulated cables should be 3*U0 for 15 minutes according
to DIN VDE 0263 and IEC publication 840.
In special cases, a resonance vibration circuit can be formed using the series swit-
ching of the cable to be tested and additional induction coils; this circuit is fed by
means of a special testing device/unit. Please consult the cable terminal box manu-
facturer about the procedure before carrying out a test of this nature.
The following applies in general: if the cable ends in a transformer or an enclosed

switchgear, an agreement on the test between the user, the manufacturer of the trans-
former or switchgear and the cable manufacturer is required. This agreement can
refer both to the testing facility and to the duration and level of the test voltage.
3.8.7.2 Carrying out the high voltage test at the cable

The following situiations are possible for the cable connection:
Cable connection from GIS to outdoor (Figure 3.8-21) or indoor terminal box
(Figure 3.8-22)
GIS
Figure 3.8-21: Cable connection GIS − outdoor connection
In this case, the cable test will take place using the test voltage input via either the
indoor or outdoor terminal box. The test is carried out as with conventional compact
terminal boxes (as shown in Figure 3.8-22 ).

¤ Commissioning
DOC.1HDG118024−19
Figure 3.8-22: Conventional test situation
Cable connection from GIS to a transformer with fitted terminal boxes
Transformator
GIS
Figure 3.8-23: Cable connection GIS − transformer
The separate high voltage test of this cable connection can only be carried out from
the GIS side. On the transformer side, preparations in accordance with the specifica-
tions of the transformer manufacturer must be made.
Cable connection from GIS to GIS
GIS GIS
Figure 3.8-24: Cable connection GIS − GIS
The cable test can be carried out as with conventional compact terminal boxes (as
shown in Figure 3.8-22).

¤ Commissioning
Another possibility for the test is to test the cable separately from the GIS units,
as long as there is a connecting terminal box on both sides
To do so, a special test adapter, which can be ordered from the terminal box supplier,
is required.
1 − Test cable
2 − Testing adapter
Figure 3.8-25: Testing the cables prior to “plugging in”.
Alternatively, the cables can be tested prior to “plugging in” using a special test adap-
ter fitted directly to the switchgear; this test adapter (1, Figure 3.8-25) can be ordered
from the cable terminal box manufacturer.

¤ Commissioning
3.9 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits

Prior to commissioning the GIS is subject to a high voltage test. The test is performed
with an AC voltage and a test transformer of suitable size (Table 3.9-1 and
Table 3.9-2).
As an alternative, both, the GIS and the power cables, can be tested with a resonance
test set with variable frequency.
The aim of this test is to detect any dielectric irregularities. Such irregularities can
have their origin in transport damages, foreign bodies etc.
This test of one minute duration has been proven over many years of practical ap-
plication. The subsequent successful energizations of the tested GIS shows that this
test guarantees a safe and reliable operation of the GIS.
The high voltage test of the GIS is usually performed before the installation of the
power cables. In case the power cables have already been installed prior to the high
voltage test, they have to be disconnected for the duration of the test. The cables can
be disconnected from the GIS by opening the disconnector.
Once the power cables have been installed and connected to the GIS, they are high
voltage tested; usually this test is performed by the cable manufacturer.
1HDG 118 363 H en 10.08.2006 EXTMEHA 16.08.2006 CHSVOTH 3.9-1

¤ Commissioning
3.9.1 Performance of the Test

The high voltage test of the main circuits will be performed after all installation work
has been concluded. If a breakdown occurs, the test has to be repeated.
The AC test voltages are listed in Table 3.9-1.

Note The test is to be performed at filling pressure.
in detail in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 004 “Gas
Pressures”.
Note The high voltage commissioning test is to be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 118 680. It must be performed in the following sequence:
1. Calculate the maximum number of GIS bays that can be simultaneously tested
using the values given in Table 3.9-1
2. Raise the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s up to the test voltage listed in
Table 3.9-1 and apply for one minute
3. Lower the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s to zero
Table 3.9-1: Test voltages
Rated voltages according to IEC 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV 170 kV

140 kV 230 kV 275 kV 325 kV

120 kV 200 kV 235 kV 270 kV
Rated maximum voltages according to ANSI *) 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV 170 kV

160 kV 215 kV 310 kV 365 kV

128 kV 172 kV 248 kV 292 kV
*) IEEE Std. C37.122

¤ Commissioning
3.9.2 Calculation of the Test Burden

The required power of the test transformer depends on the capacitance of the GIS
modules (Table 3.9-2). The test burden of the GIS can be calculated by adding the
individual capacitances of these GIS modules. Test transformers are available within
the range of 45 kVA to 1300 kVA.
The test burden can be determined using the following formula:
Q = U2 x ω x Cges
Q = test burden (power) [VA]
U = test voltage [kV]
w 2·p·f
1000
f = frequency [Hz]
Cges = sum of all the modules’ capacitances incl. insulators [nF]
The test burden is determined as an equation in units with:
Note If the test is performed with a resonance test set with variable frequency, the selected
frequency of the resonance test set has to be used in the equation above.
The capacitance C is determined by adding the individual capacitances of all the GIS
modules for the arrangement to be tested. The result obtained is the capacitance load
per phase with the other two phases being earthed through their connection to the
GIS enclosure.
Table 3.9-2: Capacitance per Module
Module Capacitance in nF
Disconnector / earthing switch * 0,046
Circuit breaker, closed * 0,15
Circuit breaker, open * 0,12
Additional condensator
3,5
for 50kA with outdoor connection
Current transformer * 0,04
T-section , cross module * 0,06
Busduct per linear m * 0,04
90°-module * 0,06
Outdoor bushing, porcelain / composite (silicone) 0,3 - 0,5
Cable termination with conical insulator (without cable) * 0,15
Barrier insulator 0,025
Support insulator 0,015
* without barrier and support insulators

¤ Commissioning
3.9.3 Test Adapter

The test adapter is used for the high-voltage test. The test is carried out on a selected
phase. Infeed of the test voltage is effected via an test bushing (Figure 3.9-1) or di-
rectly by means of a test transformer (Figure 3.9-22). The test adapter can be
mounted either in place of the voltage transformer (Figure 3.9-1 and Figure 3.9-22) or
on ends of the bus bars (Figure 3.9-3).
Figure 3.9-1: Test adapter with test bushing fitted
Figure 3.9-2: Test adapter with test transformer mounted

¤ Commissioning
Figure 3.9-3: Test adapter with test transformer mounted on the bus bar
For a flexible mounting of the test adapter it is possible after loosening the flange
securing bolts (2) to rotate the housing (1) of the test adapter through 360° in steps of
15° variable (Figure 3.9-4). During rotation, the lower housing with the three earhing
connections stays in position.
9
1
2 3
1 − Housing 3 − Test angle (delivery pack no 8)

2 − Flange securing bolts 9 − Flange ring for bushing
Figure 3.9-4: Test adapter

¤ Commissioning
3.9.3.1 Content of the delivery pack for ELK

1. Test adapter
2. Flange connection to voltage transformer for ELK rotary disconnector
(Figure 3.9-5)
1 − Insulator test adapter
Figure 3.9-5: Voltage transformer flange connection for rotary disconnector

3. Flange connection to voltage transformer for surge disconnector in ELK
4000 A (Figure 3.9-6)

Figure 3.9-6: Flange connection for voltage transformer to surge disconnector in ELK 4000 A
4. Flange connection for testing on voltage transformer flange to outgoing
feeder 4000 A (Figure 3.9-7)
Figure 3.9-7: Flange connection on voltage transformer flange to outgoing feeder 4000 A

¤ Commissioning
5. Test connection consisting of pipe 230 mm length with inner contacts for
mounting the test adapter to an available barrier / support insulator
(Figure 3.9-8)

2 − Insulator on compartment to be tested
Figure 3.9-8: Pipe
6. Angle, if test transformer has to be mounted vertically on test adapter
(Figure 3.9-4)
CAUTION The test adapter is filled with SF6 with 150 kPa!
All gas compartments under steel covers, which must be demounted for testing,
are filled with N2 with 150 kPa!

¤ Commissioning
3.9.3.2 Fitting the Test Adapter

1. The part of the installation or outgoing feeder of bay, on which the cable test
is to carried out, as well as the cable must be de-energized and earthed on
both sides
4. Remove the cover and voltage transformer mounted on the plant flange
5. Mount the test adapter ready for connection (complete with test bushing and
transformer connection) (1) onto the GIS flange (3), (Figure 3.9-9)
Note If using the angle (No 8 from delivery pack) the flange ring (9) has to be dismounted from
the test adapter and mounted onto the angle (Figure 3.9-4)
7. Earth all phases on the test adapter
8. Connect test voltage supply to the test adapter
The test bushing can be mounted to the test adapter either directly at the lateral
flange or by mounting with the enclosed angle element.
This angle element allows the rotation of the test bushing each with 30 degrees over
the bolt circle of the angle (in the axis X, which is vertical to the main axis of the test
bushing), so that respective distances of hv-conducting parts to earth can be provided
and disadvantageous designs can be equalized (Figure 3.9-4).
Additionally, the test adapter is rotatable in its main axis in steps of 15 degrees. If ro-
tating this axis the view ports for viewing the correct fitting of the main contact and the
correct earthing of the other phases will be positioned not more over the respective
phases (see Figure 3.9-4 and description underneath of Figure 3.9-3).

¤ Commissioning
3.9.3.3 Performance of the Test

1. Switch on the phase to be tested by means of the control knob (5) and switch
off the earth by turning the earth actuator (2) to OFF (Figure 3.9-9)
2. Perform the test
3. After completion of the test, switch off the test voltage and earth the GIS
4. Repeat the procedure described in points 1 to 3 for the other two phases
5 1
4
2
6
3
1 − Test adapter 6 − Securing bolts

2 − Earth actuator 7 − Angle housing
3 − GIS flange 8 − Flange connection to disconnector
4 − Moving contact (delivery pack no 2.)
5 − Control knob 9 − Flange ring for bushing
Figure 3.9-9: Test adapter mounted on ELK-04
3.9.3.4 Demounting the Test Adapter

Upon completion of the test:
1. Switch off the test voltage
2. Earth all phases
3. Disconnect the test voltage supply
6. Evacuate the gas chamber of the test adapter/plant housing to 150 kPa
7. Demount the test adapter (1), (Figure 3.9-9)
8. Seal the plant flange in accordance with the relevant installation instructions

¤ Commissioning
3.9.4 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set

Usually a portable high voltage test set is being used (Figure 3.9-10). The test trans-
former (4) is connected to the phases to be tested by means of a test adapter (2).
phases are earthed.
2
1 − Variable transformer
2 − Test adapter
3 − Encapsulated test transformer
Figure 3.9-10: Encapsulated High Voltage Test Set
As an alternative, the test adapter (2) can be connected to an SF6-air test bushing (1).
This enables testing with a separate test transformer (Figure 3.9-11).
2 1
1 − SF6-air test bushing

2 − Test adapter
Figure 3.9-11: Test Adapter with SF6-Air Test Bushing

¤ Commissioning
4 5
1 2
9 8
1 − ELK-04 6 − HV test set (medium) TES 510

2 − Test adapter 7 − Variable transformer
3 − SF6-air test bushing 8 − HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460
4 − Transition piece, size 1 (resonance test set with control unit)
5 − HV test set (small) TES 230 9 − Transition piece, size 3
Figure 3.9-12: Overview over the available High Voltage Test Sets
Table 3.9-3: Picture Title
Picture-Nr. Title Document No.
1 ELK-04 project-specific
2 Test adapter 1HDG 114 500 R100
3 SF6-air test bushing (tool no. 37-55) GSXN 391 001 R0092
4 Transition piece, size 1 (scope of supply 37-25) GPFA 020 450 R0001
HV test set (small) TES 230

5 1HDS 112 205 R0001
HV test set (medium) TES 510

6 1HDS 112 204 R0001
7 Variable transformer (included in TES 230 and TES 510)
HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460

8 1HDS 112 203 R0001
(including control unit and step-up transformer) (tool no. 37-77)
9 Transition piece, size 3 (scope of supply 37-26 and 37-77) GPFA 020 450 R0003
phases are earthed.
If the switchgear is equipped with SF6 air-bushings, then feeding is possible via these
bushings. The test voltage will be controlled by the control unit. Phases can be
earthed via test adapter.

¤ Commissioning
3.9.4.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position
Test without Power Cables

The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position in direction cables
(Figure 3.9-13). The disconnector is closed. The earthing switch with short circuit
making capacity is opened. The power cables and the cable sealing ends are not con-
nected to the GIS.
On the ELK-insulator of the test adapter the flange connection elements have to be
mounted (“3.9.3.1 Content of the delivery pack for ELK”, no. 2).
2 3
1
4
Detail Z
DOC.1HDG118363−01
Detail Z
6
DOC.1HDG118023−9
7
1 − Outgoing disconnector switch 5 − Variable transformator
2 − Test adapter 6 − Cable sealing end contact
3 − Test set 7 − Corona shield
4 − Connection elements
(delivery pack no 2.)
Figure 3.9-13: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, without Power Cables
bushing.

¤ Commissioning
Test with Power Cables

The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position (Figure 3.9-14).
The test adapter is connected to the contacts from the outgoing disconnector (1)
switch on the circuit breaker side. The disconnector is open and the earthing switch
with short circuit making capacity closed. The power cables are connected to the GIS
and earthed via the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity.
On the ELK-insulator of the test adapter (3) the flange connection elements (2) have
to be mounted (Figure 3.9-14).
3 4
1 − Outgoing disconnector switch 3 − Test adapter

2 − Connection elements 4 − Test transformator / Resonance inductor
(delivery pack no 2.) 5 − Variable transformator
Figure 3.9-14: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, with Power Cables
bushing.
WARNING! If the voltage transformer position is direction cable (Figure 3.9-13) and the power
cables are mounted it is impossible to test the GIS without testing the cables.
Only a separate test of cables with DC- and AC-voltage (“3.9.5 High Voltage Test
of Cables at the Bay”) by opening the outgoing feeder is possible.
3.9.4.2 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Disconnector 4000 A

Procedure as described in section 3.9.4.1 while using connection material delivery
pack no. 3, 4, 5.

¤ Commissioning
3.9.4.3 Connection to the Busbar

The encapsulated test set is connected to the busbar (Figure 3.9-15). The power
cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS or separated of the
arrangement by opening the outgoing feeder.
Test possibilities on a Barrier / Support Insulator e.g. busbar end
For testing on a barrier / support insulator the enclosed contact pieces (P10) with bolts
(M12x45) and the enclosed adapting pipe (P11) with o-ring (P12) (delivery pack no. 6.
and 7.) have to be mounted and the contacts (P13) have to be attached.
The three contact pieces (P10) have to be mounted on the barrier insulator of the test
adapter with bolts M12x45. Afterwards, the test adapter can be screwed on the adapt-
ing pipe and on the inner contacts.
For the test the adapting pipe has to be evacuated (0.1 kPa) via the DILO gas fittings
NW 8 and filled with SF6 with 500 kPa.
Figure 3.9-15: Test Set connected to the Busbar, Connection Material Delivery Pack no. 6 & 7
3.9.4.4 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing

If the GIS layout has a three-phase outdoor bushing connection to an overhead line or
a transformer, a separate test transformer can be connected to the phases. During the
test, the test voltage is applied to one phase while the other two are earthed. The
power cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS.

¤ Commissioning
3.9.4.5 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End Type EHSVS

During this test, the GIS and the cable plug-in sockets are high voltage tested. The
power cables are not inserted into the sockets.
High Voltage Test without Cables

3. Connect the test set to the GIS
4. Mount the connection elements onto the test adapter
5. Vent the disconnector (3) and fill it with SF6 up to filling pressure
(Figure 3.9-16)
6. Evacuate N2 out of the cable sealing ends’ plug-in sockets (1) through the
gas fittings (2) on the covers
7. Check the earthing of the cover
9. Close the disconnector (3)
10. Open earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
11. Carry out the high voltage test
Final Works
12. Earth the GIS with the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
13. Evacuate SF6 of gas compartment (3) and vent
14. Dismount test adapter
15. Evacuate the SF6 out of the plug-in sockets (1) and insert the power cables
16. Close arrangement flange according to respective mounting instruction
17. Fill gas compartments including the cable sealing end plug-in sockets (see
point 5.) with SF6

¤ Commissioning
3
1
2
1 − Plug-in sockets 4 − Connection elements

2 − Gas fitting (delivery pack no 2.)
3 − Outgoing feeder
Figure 3.9-16: High Voltage Test without Power Cables
3.9.5 High Voltage Test of Cables at the Bay

If the cables are to be subjected to a high-voltage test from the GIS side, this can be
performed using the same testing adapter at the potential transformer position. With
the disconnector open and the test connections mounted it is possible to test the
cables. In this case, the test adapter is connected by means of a test cable or a test
bushing.
Note The insulators must be conditioned with AC voltage prior to the DC voltage test (cable
test after AC voltage test). Only the insulators fo the outgoing modules (Figure 3.9-17,
direction A-A, earthing switch with short circuit making capacity, shielded or twin cable
termination, as the case may be) may be exposed to the test voltage.

¤ Commissioning
3
2
A
1 4
5
Insulator DC exposed
due to cable testing
1 − Disconnector 4 − Connection elements

2 − Test adapter (delivery pack no 2.)
3 − Test bushing 5 − Support insulator
Figure 3.9-17: Cable testing with test bushing
1. Mount test bushing (3) with test adapter (2) to the potential transformer
2. Mount the connetion elements onto the test adapter
position
In this example, the insulator on the right-hand side is under DC voltage. The maxi-
mum test value is 300 kV DC (15 min).

¤ Commissioning
1
2
3
4
1 − Test adapter 4 − Connection elements

2 − Test cable (delivery pack no 2.)
3 − Cable test adapter 5 − Support insulator
Figure 3.9-18: Cable testing with test cable
1. Mount cable test adapter (3) with test adapter (1) to the potential transformer
2. Mount the connection elements (4) onto the test adapter
position
In Figure 3.9-18, the support insulator (5) is under DC voltage. The maximum test
value is 300 kV DC (15 min).

¤ Commissioning
With horizontally mounted cable end terminals it is possible, after removing the divid-
able contact (1) to carry out the high voltage test on the cable side (Figure 3.9-19).
The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity has to be in opened position
and the bay side has to be earthed.
The dividable contacts have to be shielded.
3
4
1 − Dividable contact 4 − Connection elements

2 − Test adapter (delivery pack no 2.)
3 − Test bushing
Figure 3.9-19: Cable testing with test adapter in case of horizontally mounted cable end unit
As an alternative, the cable test can also be performed using AC voltage. For special
circumstances it is possible to apply voltage directly by the test transformator, depend-
ing on capacity of the cables. But in this case the use of an resonance testing unit is
recommended.

¤ Commissioning
1 − Cable 4 − Test adapter

2 − Outgoing feeder 5 − Test transformator / Resonance inductor
3 − Connection elements 6 − Control unit
(delivery pack no 2.)
Figure 3.9-20: Cable testing of EHSVS cable compact end unit

1. Mount test transformer (5) with test adapter (4) to the potential transformer
flange of the disconnector (2), (Figure 3.9-20)
2. Mount the connection elements (3) onto the test adapter
3. The disconnector (2) has to be in earthed position
position

¤ Commissioning
3.9.6 High Voltage Test on the Outgoing-Feeder

High Voltage Test on the Outgoing-Feeder with and without Cables
If the cable, mounted at the outgoing-feeder, go in for a high voltage test (GIS-side),
the divided contacts of the outgoing-feeder must be removed. Subsequently the con-
nections must be supplied with suitable shieldings. Also valid for double cable plug.
observed.
tested by test voltage (Figure 3.9-21, direction A-A)!
Corona shield
A
Connection elements
Insulator with
A DC-voltage
Figure 3.9-21: Cable Testing on the Outgoing Feeder, Connection Elements Delivery Pack no.
2
Note Testing the GIS without parallel cable testing is not possible (mounted cables cannot be
opened).

¤ Commissioning
High Voltage Test before Outgoing-Feeder
If the cable from double cable plug (all types), mounted at the outgoing-feeder, go in
for a high voltage test (GIS-side), the divided contacts of both outgoing-feeders must
be removed. Subsequently the connections must be supplied with suitable shieldings
(Figure 3.9-22). Afterwards, the contact connections have to be shielded with respect-
ive covers (corona shields).
noticed.
tested by test voltage!
corona shield
corona shield
Figure 3.9-22: Cable Testing on the Outgoing Feeder

¤ Commissioning
Split contact
DOC.1HDG118023−20
Figure 3.9-23: Outgoing Feeder with partitioned Cable End Unit
corona shield
Figure 3.9-24: Cable Testing on the Outgoing Feeder with partitioned Cable End Unit
3.9.6.1 High Voltage Test on Outgoing Feeder 4000 A

Procedure as described in section 3.9.6 while using connection material delivery pack
no. 6.

¤ Commissioning
3.9.7 HV-cable-test at cable end unit with K&D-plug-in-contact

3.9.7.1 General
There are various testing possibilities for carrying out the cable test on plastic-insu-
lated HV cable.
The test voltage for plastic-insulated cables should be 3*U0 for 15 minutes according
to DIN VDE 0263 and IEC publication 840.
In special cases, a resonance vibration circuit can be formed using the series swit-
ching of the cable to be tested and additional induction coils; this circuit is fed by
means of a special testing device/unit. Please consult the cable terminal box manu-
facturer about the procedure before carrying out a test of this nature.
The following applies in general: if the cable ends in a transformer or an enclosed

switchgear, an agreement on the test between the user, the manufacturer of the trans-
former or switchgear and the cable manufacturer is required. This agreement can
refer both to the testing facility and to the duration and level of the test voltage.
3.9.7.2 Carrying out the high voltage test at the cable

The following situations are possible for the cable connection:
Cable connection from GIS to outdoor (Figure 3.9-25) or indoor terminal box
(Figure 3.9-26)
GIS
Figure 3.9-25: Cable connection GIS − outdoor connection
In this case, the cable test will take place using the test voltage input via either the
indoor or outdoor terminal box. The test is carried out as with conventional compact
terminal boxes (as shown in Figure 3.9-26 ).

¤ Commissioning
Figure 3.9-26: Conventional test situation
Cable connection from GIS to a transformer with fitted terminal boxes
GIS
Transformer
Figure 3.9-27: Cable connection GIS − transformer
The separate high voltage test of this cable connection can only be carried out from
the GIS side. On the transformer side, preparations in accordance with the specifica-
tions of the transformer manufacturer must be made.
Cable connection from GIS to GIS
GIS GIS
Figure 3.9-28: Cable connection GIS − GIS
The cable test can be carried out as with conventional compact terminal boxes
(as shown in Figure 3.9-26).

¤ Commissioning
Separate Testing of Power Cables and GIS
Another possibility for the test is to test the cable separately from the GIS units, as
long as there is a connecting terminal box on both sides. To do so, a special test
adapter, which can be ordered from the terminal box supplier, is required.
1 − Test cable
2 − Testing adapter
Figure 3.9-29: Testing the cables prior to “plugging in”.
Alternatively, the cables can be tested prior to “plugging in” using a special test adap-
ter fitted directly to the switchgear; this test adapter (1, Figure 3.9-29) can be ordered
from the cable terminal box manufacturer.

Content
4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions
Content
4.1.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-2
4.2.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.3 Gas-Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.4 Arc Sensor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
4.5 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 - 40/50/63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-1
4.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4
4.5.3.4 Guaranteed Values to IEC (40 kA, 50 kA) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
4.6 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-CB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-1
4.6.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-4
4.7 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-1
4.7.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4
4.7.3.2 Guaranteed Values to IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4
4-1
Content
4.8 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-1

4.8.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components . . . . . . 4.8-1
4.8.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.2.1 Slow Switching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.2.2 Storage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-2
4.8.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-3
4.8.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-3
4.8.4 Instructions for the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-4
4.8.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness . . . . . . 4.8-4
4.8.4.2 Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-5
4.8.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-6
4.8.6 Spare Parts, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.7 Tightening Torques for Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.8 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-7
4.8.9 Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-8
4.9.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-2
4.10.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-2
4.11 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-1
4.11.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-2
4-2
Content

4.12.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.4.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.4.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-15
4.13.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present) . . . . . . . . . 4.13-5
4.13.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-9
4.13.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-10
4.13.3.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-10
4.13.3.3 Interlocking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-11
4.13.3.4 Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-12
4.14.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-6
4.14.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-6
4.14.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-12
4.14.4.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14-12
4.15 Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15-1
4-3
Content

4.16.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-2
4.16.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-3
4.16.4.4 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-6
4.16.4.5 Cylinder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-7
4.16.5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-8
4.16.5.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-9
4.17.3 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-2
4.17.3.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-3
4.17.4.4 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-6
4.17.4.5 Cylinder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-7
4.17.5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-8
4.17.5.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17-9
4-4
Content
4.18 1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 4.18-1
4.18.1 Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-2
4.18.1.1 High Voltage Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-2
4.18.2 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-3
4.18.2.1 Crank Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-3
4.18.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-5
4.18.3.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18-6
4.21 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21-1
4.22 Inductive Voltage Transformer Type ELK-PI 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22-1
4.22.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22-2
4.23 Inductive Voltage Transformer 0.3 ZZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23-1
4.23.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23-2
4.24 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation Device . . . . . . . . . 4.24-1
4.24.2 Integrated Isolating Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-3
4.24.2.1 Description of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-3
4.24.2.2 Optical Switching Position Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-4
4.24.2.3 Electrical Switching Position Indication Manual
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.24.2.4 Electrical Switching Position Indication Automatic
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.24.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24-5
4.25 Electro-optical voltage sensor EOVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-1
4.25.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-1
4.25.2 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-2
4.25.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25-3
4.26 Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26-1
4.26.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26-4
4.27 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27-1
4.27.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27-2
4.28 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28-1
4.28.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28-2
4-5
Content
4.29 3-Phase GIS-Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29-1

4.29.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29-2
4.30 Composite insulating bushing type VDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30-1
4.30.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30-2
4.31 Composite insulating bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.31.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.31.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31-1
4.32 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32-1
4.33 SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1 PISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-1
4.33.1.2 Commissioning/decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-2
4.33.1.3 Structure / functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-2
4.33.1.4 Measured data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-3
4.33.1.5 Visualisation and interpretation of the data . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-4
4.33.1.6 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-5
4.33.2.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-7
4.33.3 Inductive Proximity Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-8
4.33.3.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-9
4.33.4 Main Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-10
4.33.4.2 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33-11
4.34.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.34-3
4.35 Mounting UHF PD sensor on barrier insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35-1
4.36 High Voltage Detection System on Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . 4.36-1
4.36.1 Design and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36-1
4.36.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36-4
4-6
Content
4.37 Camera box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1

4.37.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1
4.37.2 Security notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1
4.37.3 Contents of the camera box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-2
4.37.4 Operation of the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-3
4.37.4.1 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-3
4.37.4.2 Turn on the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.4.3 Select the input channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.4.4 Adjusting the picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-4
4.37.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-5
4.37.6 De-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-6
4.37.7 Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-6
4.37.8 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-7
4.44 Outdoor Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44-1
4.45 Control Cubicle (Outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.45-1
4.48 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.48-1
4.49 Heat Balance of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49-1
4.50 Power Demand Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.50-1
4.51.4 Hydraulic-Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-4
4.51.5 Disconnector / Earthing-Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-5
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-6
4.51.7 Functions on Bay Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-7
4.51.9 Alarm Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51-9
4-7
Content

4.52.6 Control Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-6
4.53.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-2
4.53.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-3
4.53.6 Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53-6
4.54.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF with redundant PISA . . . . 4.54-2
4.54.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision with redundant PISA . . . . . 4.54-3
4.54.5 Diconnector/Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54-5
4.54.6 Fast Acting Earthing Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54-6
4.55 Conventional Bay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-1
4.55.1.2 Additional Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.1.3 Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.1.4 Optional Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55-2
4.55.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control . . . . . 4.55-6
4-8
Content
4.56 Control System: Conventional Substation Automation . . . . . . . 4.56-1

4.56.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-1
4.56.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-1
4.56.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-2
4.56.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-4
4.56.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.56-8
4.57 Control via SCADA Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-1
4.57.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-3
4.57.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-5
4.57.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57-11
4.58 SMART-GIS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-1
4.58.1.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-3
4.58.2.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-5
4.58.2.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58-11
4.59 Mobile Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1 Preparation for Changing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.1 Equipment Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.1.4 SF6 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-1
4.59.2 Preparation for Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.1 SF6 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4.59.2.5 Equipment Position for Mounting the Down Droppers . 4.59-2
4.59.2.6 Equipment Position before Energizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59-2
4-9
¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions
4.1 Gas Density Relay

5 4 3 2 1
1 − Indicator mechanism 5 − Gas compartment

2 − Micro switch 6 − Metal bellows
3 − Operating rod 7 − Plug terminals
4 − Reference gas volume 8 − Cover for outdoor installation
Figure 4.1-1: Gas Density Relay
4.1.1 Design and Operating Principle

If the gas density falls below a predefined value, the gas density relay generates
a warning signal consisting of two stages.
The gas density relay provided for the gas circuit breaker compartment has three con-
tacts (1 x warning-stage 1, 2 x blocking-phase 2), which are directly conducted to the
operating mechanism cabinet of the circuit breaker, where they are processed.
The gas density relays provided for the other gas compartments of the GIS have three
contacts as well. Normally, two of these, namely those inside the control box of the
GIS, can be used to indicate warning signals.
(1 x warning-stage 1, 1 x collective indication-stage 2)
Electrical Indication
The gas density to be supervised in the gas compartment (5) is continuously com-
pared with the gas density of an identical gas in the reference volume (4)
(Figure 4.1-1). Since the gas in both volumes has the same temperature, the densities
can be compared through a comparison of the pressures.
The differential pressure between the two gas volumes (4) and (5) moves the metal
bellows (6). This movement is transferred through the operating rod (3) to the micro
switch (2). The micro switch (2) is electrically connected with the plug terminals (7).
The plug terminals (7) are coded and cannot be swapped. They can be mounted and
dismounted without tools.
Visual Indication
The measured gas density is also indicated visually. In addition to the micro switches
(2), the operating rod (3) also operates the indicator mechanism (1). The indicator has
a simple colour coding:
Green = OK , Red = Gas Density too low
Note The pressure in the gas compartment depends on the ambient temperature. This is why
the gas density is being supervised and indicated instead of the gas pressure. An
indication scaled in kPa would not make sense, because of its temperature dependence.
In the interest of easy indicator reading, the gas density relay has a colour-coded
indication.

in detail in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 004 “Filling
Pressures”.
4.1.2 Technical Data

Table 4.1-1: Gas Density Relay
Rated Values
Manufacturer Trafag AG, Switzerland
Measuring principle − Reference gas measurement
Stainless steel
Metal bellows 1.4404= AISI 316 L
Indicator mechanism −
Outer earthing switch 1.4571 = AISI 316 Ti
Other parts 1.4435 = AISI 316 L
GREEN = o. k.
Visual indication, colour coding −
RED = Density too low
Enclosure material − Aluminium, colourless anodized
Pressure range kPa 0 up to 1000 (pre-calibrated)
Ambient temperature °C −40 up to +70
Switching point distance kPa 20
Switching point tolerance kPa +10
Number of switching points − 2
Leckage rate of the reference gas vol-

kPa / year 0,5
ume
Tensioning torque for screw cap Nm 50
Weight without / with outdoor cover g appr. 1100 / 1150
Maintenance − none
Degree of protection − IP 54
Outdoor suitability − yes
Electrical connection − two triple terminal blocks
Table 4.1-2: Switching Capacity
Operating voltage V 250 (AC) 250 (DC) 220 (DC) 110 (DC) 60 (DC) 24 (DC)
Switching capacity of the A 10,0 0,1 0,3 0,5 0,8 5,0

micro switch (resistive)

4.2 Gas Density Relay
Figure 4.2-1: Gas Density Relay

Table 4.2-1: Gas Density Relay
Rated Values
Masuring principle − Bimetal compensated
Indicator mechanism − Cr-Ni-steel
Enclosure material − Cr-Ni-steel 1.4301
Pressure range barrel −1 ... +9 (pre−calibrated)
Ambient temperature °C −30 up to +70
±1 to ambient temperature +20°C

Tolerance
Indicating/Switching point
% ± 2,5 in temperature range −20° up to
+60°C
Number of switching points − 1−3
Leakage of the measuring mbar S I

10−8
system sec
Weight g ca. 1 250
Maintance − none
Degree of protection − IP 65 (EN 60 529 / IEC 529)
Outdoor suitable − yes
Electrical connection − cable box with connection fitting
Rated voltage V max. 250 V
Switching capacity − 30 W / 50 VA

Switchgear is hermetically sealed and filled with SF6-gas. The essential ma-
terial properties of the SF6-gas for such applications depend on the density of
SF6-gas, for example, the electrical disruptive strenghth or the electric light
arc quenching capability.
1HDG 118 516 A en 10.04.2001 ACEKAFO 25.07.2001 ACEVOTH 4.2-1

The required SF6-gas density depends on the respective application. This

means that the functional safety of the entire system is strongly dependent on
the density of SF6-gas which is why it must be monitored.
Therefore the temperature must also be registered by suitable monitoring sys-
tems working on the pressure measuring principle. This enables the monitor-
ing unit to correct the measured pressure value according to the isochores.
Density monitors
Gas density monitors with local readout and alarm contacts combine the
“readout” and “switching” function.
Each gas density monitor is adjusted individually at its calibration pressue.
The contacts (alarm contact) is adjusted individually to the pressure (alarm pressure).
The case of the gas density switch is hermetically sealed, opening is not allowed.
Accuracy and calibration pressure
The calibration pressure defines the reference isochore which is approxi-

mately imitated through a bimetal. All tolerances apply to the calibration pres-
sure. For density monitors the warning pressure is defined as calibration pres-
sure.
The reference isochore is defined when the calibration pressure is
determined.
The isocheres of the SF6-gas have different gradients, devication will be given
in addition to the accuracy related from 2,5%. The magnitude of the deviation
depends upon the SF6-gas temperature, calibration pressure and switching
point pressure. The magnitude of the switching error can be reduced by se-
lecting a suitable calibration pressure.

4.3 Gas-Density Sensor
Figure 4.3-1: Gas-Density Sensor

The gas-density sensor (Figure 4.3-1) registers the physical variables pressure and
temperature of the SF6 gas in the part of the switchgear it monitors with a piezo ele-
ment and a temperature sensor.
Changes in pressure cause a change in the specific resistance of the measuring ele-
ment (piezo-resistive effect). The electronic analyzer of the gas-density sensor uses
this value and the measured temperature to calculate the current density of the gas.
Thermally induced changes in pressure are compensated dynamically and have no

effect on the output signal.
Electric Indication
The gas-density sensor triggers an error message if the gas density drops below a
predefined threshold. The values for warning and disabling are software-set and can-
not be changed.
The sensor generates an output signal in the range of 4...20 mA; this signal is propor-
tional to gas density and is carried by a shielded two-conductor cable which also
works as the feed cable of the sensor internal electronics.
Due to the long-Term stability of the gas-density sensor no recalibration of the null sig-
nal and maintenance are neccessary.
Visual Indication
The signal is visualized on the control-cabinet display.
Note The signals on the display of the bay control unit REC580 are described in detail in the
product manual in chapter “Operating Instructions” in document 1HDG 518 030 “High
Voltage Device Control”.
1HDG 518 401 A en 15.09.1998 ACEMEWE 15.09.1998 ACEHENE 4.3-1


Table 4.3-1: Gas-Density Sensor
Rated Values
Manufacturer WIKA Alexander Wiegand GmbH & Co
Measuring principle − piezo-resistive
Measuring element − piezo-resistive element and temperature sensor
Enclosure material − CrNi steel 1.4301
Material of medium-contacted com- − CrNi steel 1.4571

ponents
Density range g/l 0 ... 60
Pressure range kPa 0 ... 887
Rated temperature range °C −40 to +60 (gas phase)
Limit temperatures °C −40 to +80 (gas phase)
Measuring precision % < 3 across entire rated temperature range
Stability per year % < 0.3 (under reference conditions)
Tightening torque Nm 70
Weight g 300
Suitable for outdoor installation − yes
Degree of protection − IP67
Electrical protection − against polarity reversal and overvoltage
Electrical connection − 2-wire, shielded, 4 ... 20 mA
Rated voltage V 10 ... 30 (DC)

4.4 Arc Sensor Interface

6 5 4 3
1 − Glass pane 4 − Thread

2 − Gasket 5 − Guide tube
3 − Flange 6 − Cover cap
Figure 4.4-1: Arc sensor interface
The Arc sensor interface (ASI) is the interface between the sensor of the arc detecting
device and the gas compartments of the GIS.
The ASI constists of a glass pane (1) which is pressed between two gaskets (2) by
flange (3) (Figure 4.4-1).
The flange (3) is provided with a thread (4) for fixing the sensor and a guide tube (5)
to hold the optical waveguide of the sensor (Figure 4.4-1).
As long as the sensor of the optical waveguide isn’t screwed into the ASI, a cover cap
(6) protects the thread and the guide tube of dirt and damage (Figure 4.4-1).
The ASI can be mounted − depending on bay layout and available space − onto vary-
ing places of the housings of the gas compartments.

4.5 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04 - 40/50/63

7
5
4
1HDG118520−1
1 − Interrupting chamber 5 − Cover

2 − Barrier Insulator 6 − Rotary Shaft
3 − Current Transformer (Variant) see 7 − Operating Mechanism
Figure 4.5-2 8 − Chamber Insulator
4 − Outgoing Conductor
Figure 4.5-1: Circuit breaker with operating mechanism
The circuit breaker (Figure 4.5-1) is provided with two, three, or four identical coupling
flanges which permit direct connection of other modules. Extremely compact and cost-
effective configurations can be produced by making effective use of this feature in de-
termining the switchgear layout.
The circuit breaker is largely maintenance-free. It is of the single-pressure, self-extin-

guishing type with one interrupter for each pole. During the opening operation, the
pressure increase occurring in the heat chamber produces the gas flow needed for
arc extinction and dielectric recovery.
1HDG 118 520 O en 24.03.2006 EXTMEHA 04.04.2006 CHSVOTH 4.5-1

The circuit breaker operating mechanism is designed as a separate unit and can
therefore be easily dismounted for overhaul purposes. No adjustments are necessary
after remounting.
As an alternative the current transformer can be integrated in the circuit breaker as

well (Figure 4.5-2).
1 − Interrupting chamber
3 − Current transformer
Figure 4.5-2: Integrated current transformer
4.5.1 Circuit Breaker Design

The current transformers (3) are suitably located within the circuit breaker gas com-
partment, excepted for 4000 A. The circuit breaker gas compartment is isolated from
other components by barrier insulators. The interrupting chambers (1) are arranged in
a horizontal row and are connected to the barrier insulators (2) through the outgoing
conductors (4).
The interrupter assemblies are housed in the chamber insulators (15).
The motion produced in the operating mechanism is transmitted to the inside of the gas
compartment through a shaft bushing and distributed to the chambers by rotary shafts
(6).
Dismounting of the interrupter chambers for overhaul purposes is effected through the
face-end flange after removing the operating mechanism (7) and the cover (5).

4.5.2 Operating Principle of the Interrupting Chamber

V1 18
1HDG118520−2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
10 − Fixed Contact 14 − Auxiliary Nozzle 17 − Operating Rod
11 − Permanent Current Contact 15 − Chamber Insulator 18 − Arcing Contact
12 − Arcing Contact 16 − Blast Cylinder V1 − Heat Chamber
13 − Insolating Nozzle
Figure 4.5-3: Interrupting Chamber
CLOSING operation
During the closing operation, the circuit breaker operating mechanism causes the op-
erating rod (17) and, as a consequence, the moving parts of the interrupting chamber,
such as the insulating nozzle (13), the auxiliary nozzle (14), and the blast cylinder (16)
to move in the direction of the fixed contact. Contact is first established through pre-
arcing between the arcing contacts (12) and (18), which subsequently enables the
main contacts to engage at almost zero current.
OPENING operation
Opening is effected by withdrawing the moving contact in the opposite direction. In
this process, the main contacts are separated prior to the disengagement of the arcing
contacts, resulting in the commutation of the current to the arcing contacts
The energy of the arc causes a pressure increase in the heat chamber “V1”. During
the separation of the arcing contacts, a radial gas blast is released through the auxili-
ary and insulating nozzles, cooling down the arc and finally extinguishing it at current
zero.


4.5.3.1 Circuit Breaker 40 kA
Table 4.5-1: Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW04
Rated Values (40 kA) kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 350 550 650 750
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 175 230 275 325 (365)*
Frequency Hz 50 / 60
Current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150
Peak withstand current / rated making current kA 80 (at 31.5 kA) and 100 (at 40 kA)
Short-time withstand current kA 31.5 / 40
Break time ms 20 − 35
Total break time ms 34 − 58
Make time ms 40 − 65
Operating sequence - O − 0.3 sec − CO − 3 min − CO
Short time power frequency withstand voltage
kV 2
auxiliary circuits
Min. functional pressure SF6 / filling pressure (at 20°C) kPa 600 / 700
Weight kg 1 050
SF6 volume ltr 1 185 − 1 439
HMB-1 (3pole)
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism -
HMB-1S (1pole)
* ANSI Values 170 kV

Rated Values (40 kA) kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 175 230 275 325 (365)*
Current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150 / 4 000
Peak withstand current / rated making current kA 135
Short-time withstand current kA 50
Break time ms 213
Total break time ms 27−44
Make time ms 444
Short time power frequency withstand voltage kV 2
auxiliary circuits
Weight kg 1 100
SF6 volume ltr 1 185 − 1 439
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism - HMB-2 (3pole)


Rated Values (63 kA) kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145

Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 350 550 650
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 175 230 275 (310)*
Current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150 / 4 000
Peak withstand current / rated making current kA 164
Short-time withstand current kA 63
Break time ms 213
Total break time ms 28−43
Make time ms 444
Short time power frequency withstand voltage kV
2
auxiliary circuits
Weight kg 1150
SF6 volume ltr 1422 − 1726
4.5.3.4 Guaranteed Values to IEC (40 kA, 50 kA)

Table 4.5-4: Guaranteed values to IEC 62 271-100 at nominal voltage Un = 170 kV
Test RRRV Uc t2/t3 I (40 kA) I (50 kA)

KV/ms kV ms kA kA
Terminal fault test duty:
− TD 10 6.2 319 51 4 5
− TD 30 5.0 312 315 12 15
− TD 60 3.0 312 311 24 30
− TD 100s 2.0 291 312 40 50
− TD 100a 2.0 291 312 40 50
Asynchronous conditions 1.67 434 624 10 − 11 12.5
Short-line fault L75 (Zw=450W)
− Source side 2.0 194 207 30 37.5
− Line side 7.2
− Source side 2.0 194 207 36 45
− Line side 8.6
Capacitive currents
− Line 63 A
− Cable 160 A (tested 182 A)

4.5.3.5 Guaranteed Values to IEC (63 kA)

Test RRRV Uc t2/t3 I (63 kA)

KV/ms kV ms kA
− TD 10 6.0 272 45 6,3
− TD 30 5.0 266 270 18.9
− TD 60 3.0 266 266 37.8
− TD 100s 2.0 249 267 63
− TD 100a 2.0 249 267 63
Asynchronous conditions 1.67 370 531 15.75
− Source side 2.0 166 177 47.25
− Line side 11.3
− Source side 2.0 166 177 56.7
− Line side 13.6
Capacitive currents
− Line 63 A

4.5.4 Operating Diagram for Circuit Breaker with

3pole Operating Mechanism
The tolerance zones of the time values in Figure 4.5-4 are valid for all operating condi-
tions of supply voltage and spring tension of the operating mechanism. The required
synchronism of the three poles for tC and tO 3 ms.
t CLOSE
t OPEN
t 10−19
0 30 70 100
chamber stroke (%)
Auxiliary contact program

Switching angle 105°
1HDG118473−2
* = Auxiliary contacts at terminal 03-104 have to be adjusted 10_ before the circuit breaker is
in closed position.
Remarks: For CO-cycle with energized opening release an minimum stroke of the chamber of
105 mm is allowed.
Figure 4.5-4: Operating diagram for circuit breaker with 3pole operating mechanism


tions of supply voltage and spring tension of the operating mechanism (Figure 4.5-5).
The required synchronism of the three poles for tC and tO 3 ms and for tCO 5 ms.
t CLOSE
t CO
t OPEN
10−19
t
0 30 70 100
chamber stroke (%)

1HDG118473−4
*= Auxiliary contacts at terminal 03-104 have to be adjusted 15_ before the circuit breaker is
in Closed position (For realizing the synchronism for tCO it is allowed to adjust in the
range of 15_ 6°).
105 mm is allowed.

Table 4.5-6: Switching Data for Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
Ur Ik f VOPEN* tOPEN* VCLOSE* tCLOSE*

Type 3pole
kV kA Hz m/s ms m/s ms
ELK-SW04
145 40 60 4.5 − 5.7 20 − 35 2.4 − 3.2 40 − 65
(HMB-1)
ELK-SW04
170 40 60 4.7 − 5.7 20 − 35 2.4 − 3.2 40 − 65
(HMB-1)
ELK-SW04-50
170 50 60 4.9 − 5.7 18 − 24 2.5 − 3.1 40 − 48
(HMB-2)
ELK-SW04/25Hz
145 25 25 4.5 − 5.5 20 − 35 2.5 − 3.2 40 − 65
(HMB-1)
ELK-SW04-63
145 63 60 5.1 − 6.0 18 − 24 2.9 − 3.4 40 − 48
(HMB-2)
Type 1pole
ELK-SW04-40
170 40 60 4.5 − 5.7 20 − 35 2.4 − 3.2 40 − 65
(HMB-1S) **
* Definition acc. to IEC 62 271-100

Values inbetween of the tolerance zone are valid for all operating conditions:
− from minimum supply voltage and minimum spring pressure
to maximum supply voltage and maximum spring pressure
− SF6-gas pressure on blocking limit acc. to switching performance test (*minimum functional pressure 600 kPaabs)
− travel-time diagram see Figure 4.5-4
− determination of velocity results from 30 % and 70 % of stroke
** tco = 70 − 100 ms

4.6 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-CB0

7
5
4
1HDG118520−1

3 − Current Transformer (Variant) see 7 − Operating Mechanism
Figure 4.6-2 8 − Chamber Insulator
4 − Outgoing Conductor


after remounting.
As an alternative the current transformer can be integrated in the circuit breaker as

well (Figure 4.6-2).
1 − Interrupting chamber
3 − Current transformer
Figure 4.6-2: Integrated current transformer

partment, excepted for 4000 A. The circuit breaker gas compartment is isolated from
other components by barrier insulators. The interrupting chambers (1) are arranged in
a horizontal row and are connected to the barrier insulators (2) through the outgoing
conductors (4).
The motion produced in the operating mechanism is transmitted to the inside of the gas
compartment through a shaft bushing and distributed to the chambers by rotary shafts
(6).


V1 18
1HDG118520−2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CLOSING operation
OPENING operation
zero.


Table 4.6-1: Circuit Breaker Type ELK-CB0
Rated Values (40 kA) kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145
Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 350 550 650
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 175 230 275
Frequency Hz 50
Current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150
Operating sequence - O − 0.3 sec − CO − 0.3 sec − CO
kV 2
auxiliary circuits
Weight kg 1 050
SF6 volume ltr 1 185 − 1 439
4.6.3.2 Guaranteed Values to IEC (40 kA)

Test RRRV Uc t2/t3 I (40 kA)

KV/ms kV ms kA
− TD 10 6.2 319 51 4
− TD 30 5.0 312 315 12
− TD 60 3.0 312 311 24
− TD 100s 2.0 291 312 40
− TD 100a 2.0 291 312 40
Asynchronous conditions 1.67 434 624 10 − 11
− Source side 2.0 194 207 30
− Line side 7.2
− Source side 2.0 194 207 36
− Line side 8.6
Capacitive currents
− Line 63 A


t CLOSE
t OPEN
t 10−19
0 30 70 100
chamber stroke (%)

1HDG118473−2
* = Auxiliary contacts at terminal 03-104 have to be adjusted 10_ before the circuit breaker is
in closed position.
105 mm is allowed.

Table 4.6-3: Switching Data for Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
Ur Ik f VOPEN* tOPEN* VCLOSE* tCLOSE*

Type 3pole
kV kA Hz m/s ms m/s ms
ELK-CB0
145 40 50 4.3 − 5.7 20 − 35 2.4 − 3.2 40 − 65
(HMB-1)
* Definition acc. to IEC 62 271-100

Values inbetween of the tolerance zone are valid for all operating conditions:
− from minimum supply voltage and minimum spring pressure
to maximum supply voltage and maximum spring pressure
− SF6-gas pressure on blocking limit acc. to switching performance test (*minimum functional pressure 600 kPaabs)
− travel-time diagram see Figure 4.6-4
− determination of velocity results from 30 % and 70 % of stroke

4.7 Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW 04

7
6
1HDG118520−1

3 − Current Transformer 7 − Operating Mechanism
4 − Outgoing Conductor 8 − Chamber Insulator

1HDG 118 484 A en 22.10.2002 ACEKAFO 25.11.2002 ACEFRVW 4.7-1

after remounting.

partment, which is isolated from other components by barrier insulators. The interrupt-
ing chambers (1) are arranged in a horizontal row and are connected to the barrier
insulators (2) through the outgoing conductors (4).
The motion produced in the operating mechanism is transmitted to the inside of the
gas compartment through a shaft bushing and distributed to the chambers by rotary
shafts (6).

V1 18
1HDG118520−2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

CLOSING operation
OPENING operation

zero.


4.7.3.1 Switching Device
Table 4.7-1: Circuit Breaker Type ELK-SW04-HMB-1(S)
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 175 230 275 325
Current A 1 250 / 1 600 / 2 000 / 2 500 / 3 150
Short-time withstand current kA 31,5 / 40

kV 2
auxiliary circuits
Weight kg 1 050
SF6 volume ltr 1 185 − 1 439
4.7.3.2 Guaranteed Values to IEC

Table 4.7-2: Guaranteed values to IEC 56 at nominal voltage Un = 170 kV
Test I RRRV Uc t2/t3
kA KV/ms kV ms

− TD No. 1 4 6.2 319 51
− TD No. 2 12 5.0 312 315
− TD No. 3 24 3.0 312 311
− TD No. 4 40 2.0 291 312
− TD No. 5 40 2.0 291 312
Asynchronous conditions 10 − 11 1.67 434 624

− Source side 30 2.0 194 207
− Line side 7.2

− Source side 36 2.0 194 207
− Line side 8.6
Capacitive currents
− line 63 A
− cable 160 A (tested 182 A)


Operating Mechanism
The toleranece zones of the time values in Figure 1 are valid for all operating condi-
chamber stroke (mm)
1HDG118473−2
105 mm is allowed.

4.8 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB

4.8.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components
The modular design and the main components of the operating mechanism type
HMB:
The modules are:

S Charging module
S Storage module
S Working module
S Control module
S Monitoring module
The technical concept of the circuit breaker operating mechanism achieves a compact
design by combining the mechanical energy storage in disc springs and the hydraulic
operating and control principles.
The force of the disc spring assembly acts on a storage piston. On the storage piston,
the mechanical energy values spring force and spring travel are converted to the hy-
draulic energy values pressure and volume. The hydraulic power transmission (oil col-
umn) between the high-pressure store and the operating cylinders serves as a
quickly switching changeover variator for the CLOSE- and OPEN-operation and be-
sides it enables a simple setting of the switching speeds by means of the throttle
screws.
The operating mechanism control and the energy transmission are based on the
field-proven structural elements of the hydraulic operating technology such as the
high-pressure hydraulic pump, storage piston, changeover valves as well as an oper-
ating piston with an integrated hydraulic end position damping.
For the HMB circuit-breaker operating mechanism, an easy-to-install and service-

friendly, modular design has been chosen, integrating the hydraulic control and oper-
ating functions in aluminium modules. The circuit breaker operating mechanism do not
have any hydraulic pipework. All modules are interconnected by means of flanges in a
modular design.
1HDG 518 425 D en 19.04.2005 EXTMEWE 26.04.2005 CHSVOTH 4.8-1

4.8.2 Commissioning
The commissioning protocols of the circuit-breaker concerning the operating mechan-
ism shall be observed. Prior to the commissioning, visual checks according to the
commissioning protocols shall be performed.
4.8.2.1 Slow Switching Operations

Slow switching operations do not represent any in-service operations. If nevertheless
slow switching operations must be performed, they shall only be performed by person-
nel authorized for this.
4.8.2.2 Storage Module

The pump motor of the operating mechanism has been designed for a short-time
operation and is not suitable for continuous operation. In order to prevent overheating,
the motor may only be charged with 20 CO-operations per hour.
The collector and the carbon brushes shall be checked after approx. 8 years. The
carbon brushes are wear parts to replace when their length has diminished below
11 mm (Figure 4.8-1).
1 1
1

11
1 − Carbon brushes
2 − Pump motor
Figure 4.8-1: Pump motor

4.8.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures

4.8.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds
The operating speeds of the operating mechanism are preset already in the factory.
A resetting or readjustment is only necessary in exceptional cases.
The operating speeds for the CLOSE- and OPEN-operation can be adjusted indepen-
dently of each other with the throttle screws available on the operating mechanism.
The operating speeds may only be adjusted when the disc spring assembly is
untensioned. For this release the pressure release screw and untension the disc
spring assembly slowly by lowering the system pressure.
Loosen the locknut (2) of the throttle screw (1) and adjust the operating speed by turn-
ing the throttle screw (Figure 4.8-2). The operating speed diminishes when the throttle
screw (1) is turned right and increases when it is turned left.
After the adjustment retighten the locknut (2).

2
1 − Throttle screw
2 − Locknut
Figure 4.8-2: Throttle scews

4.8.4 Instructions for the Operation

The Chapter below contains instructions for the triggering and the operation of the
circuit breaker operating mechanism.
4.8.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness

The gaskets and valves used in the hydraulic system provide maximum technical
tightness. Minimum leakages on metallic sealing seats may cause minimum losses of
spring tension, which are compensated by automatic pump starts.
Different operating mechanism − also from one delivery − may show statistically
caused different amounts of pump starts per day. This affects in no way the life cycle
of the operating mechanism and represents no defect.
Up to 10 pump starts per day are permissible, even when the breaker is not operated.
With more than 10 pump starts per day the operating mechanism shall be monitored.
Note Upon more than 20 pump starts per day the manufacturer shall be contacted.
in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 007 “Contact”.
When determining the pump start numbers the pump starts caused by switching oper-
ations (CLOSE or OPEN) shall be deducted from the total number of the pump starts.
All specifications refer to the monthly avarage.
The leak test shall be done during a period of at least eight hours in the operating
positions CLOSE and OPEN. The test procedure is to bring the breaker into the corre-
sponding position and to tension the disc spring assembly; to prevent an automatic
pump start by disconnecting the motor supply conductor or by switching off the minia-
ture circuit-breaker in the motor circuit.
The following data shall be recorded in the test protocol:
− Time
− Difference of the spring travel (Measure changes as per Figure 4.8-3)
The spring tension may diminish by 30 mm per 24 hours
(with switched-off pump motor).
HMB-1 and HMB-2 HMB-1S
Figure 4.8-3: Measuring the Internal Tightness

4.8.4.2 Oil Level

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are filled in the factory with a hydraulic oil
quantity comprising an oil reserve, too. If the hydraulic oil is visible in the oil gauge
glass with a fully tensioned disc spring assembly there is enough hydraulic oil avail-
able to perform the switching operations (Figure 4.8-4).
Used Oil brand

See 4.8.8 Utilities.
A too low oil level can be corrected by refilling via the low-pressure connector.
Note Only use filtered oil (purity level ISO 4406-13/10) for filling.
max. = middle
min. = visible
Figure 4.8-4: Oil Level in the Oil Gauge Glass in Mounting Position,
Operating Mechanism Tensioned

4.8.5 Checks
The operating mechanism operates to a large extent maintenance-free. Occasional
checks are however recommended and serve to maintain its dependability.
Table 4.8-1 gives an overview of all necessary maintenance actions.

Table 4.8-1: Servicing and Maintenance Checks
Check Maintenance
Before commis- During contact

sioning, after inspections on
Function to check Ocassionally Every 8 years
maintenance the circuit-
work breaker
Oil level check check check check
Carbon brushes *) check − check check
Collector − − check check
Wiring check − check check
Terminals − − check check
Auxiliary switch − − check check
Auxiliary switch − − check lubricate **)

kinematic system
Charging time − − check check
Tightness check check check check
*) Prior to commissioning, check the carbon brushes for seat.

Replace the carbon brushes if their length 11 mm.
**) Relubricate the openings in the auxiliary switch straps after 5000 operating cycles
with special grease NBT 400 107 P1.
WARNING! The disk spring column is mechanically precharged with high tension forces.
Disassembly of disk spring is only permitted by authorized personnel according
to ABB procedure and safety regulation.

4.8.6 Spare Parts, General

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are to a large extent wear-free. The manu-
facturer does not recommend any stocking of spare parts. Upon an express request of
the user spare parts kits
S seals
S electrical spare parts
S hydraulic spare parts
can be supplied; the spare parts should be replaced only by specialists of the supplier.
When ordering spare parts, read the serial and ident. nos. of the operating
mechanism off the nameplate and communicate them.
4.8.7 Tightening Torques for Screws

As far as no other values have been indicated in the present Instructions, the tighten-
ing torques given in the below table shall apply.
Prior to the mounting, slightly lubricate-grease the screws (μ 0,14).
Thread ( mm) Steel screw Steel screw Thread or

galvanized 8.8 stainless Thread insert
Thread in steel A2-70 or A4-70 in aluminium
Thread in steel
Nm Nm Nm
M6 10 8 6
M8 25 20 14
M10 49 38 26
M12 86 67 45
M16 210 148 100
4.8.8 Utilities
The utilities necessary for maintenance have been listed and approved below.
Hydraulic oil Esso Univis HVI 13 (Manufacturer: Esso AG)
ABB Designation:
Hydraulic oil bundle 1 Ltr. 1HDH 114 000 R0001
Hydraulic oil bundle 5 Ltr. 1HDH 114 000 R0005
Lubricating grease Lubricating grease NBT 400 107 P1

4.8.9 Cleaning agents

Material Cleaning agent
Aluminium, steel Rivolta MTX Forte (preferably),

(varnished, anodised, untreated) Alcohol 99, Isopropanol
sealings, o-rings (degree of purity min. 99%)
Housing
(connecting housing, cover half (GFK), Water or soap sud (0,5%)
bottom plate)
If using other than the mentioned above cleaning agents is to make sure that the
structure of the surface is not affected or damaged.

4.9 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1

5 4
6
7 8
2 3
9
1
10 15
11
⇐X
14 SMART-GIS
14a design
12
View X 13
Throttle screw CLOSE
Throttle screw OPEN
1 −Operating piston (working module) 10 − Pump motor

2 −Storage unit (storage module) 11 − Oil gauge glass
3 −Disk spring assembly 12 − Oil drain valve
4 −Low pressure connector 13 − Change over valve (control module)
5 −Spring tension indicator 14 − Spring travel switch
6 −Pressure release screw (monitoring module)
7 −Pump unit (charging module) 14a − Spring travel switch (SMART-GIS de-
8 −High pressure connector sign)
(pressure gauge conn.) 15 − Close position interlock (optional)
9 − Low pressure tank
Figure 4.9-1: Modular design and main components

4.9.1 Commissioning
All adjustments are already factory-made and -fixed. Readjustments can be therefore
left out during the commissioning. At the commissioning, the disc spring assembly of
the operating mechanism shall be tensioned and the operating mechanism coupled
with the circuit-breaker shall be manually switched on and off several times. The
monitoring functions of the spring travel switch and the auxiliary switch shall be
checked.
Prior to switching on the pump motor, the changeover valve shall be switched to the
OPEN position. For this press the rubber cap of the OPEN-solenoid with your thumb.
Thereby it is prevented that the changeover valve stands in an intermediate position
while the operating mechanism is unpressurized and the disc spring assembly cannot
be tensioned (pressure cannot be built up).
Functional tests shall be performed after the completion of the commissioning work
and immediately before the start of the regular operation and after maintenance work
as well. Functional tests may only be performed when the circuit-breaker is discon-
nected from the high voltage system, there is at least blocking pressure in the
SF6-room and the disc springs are tensioned.
4.9.1.1 Manually Operating the Operating Mechanism

It is possible to trigger the circuit-breaker by hand via the hand plungers of the
changeover valve (Figure 4.9-2). A manual triggering serves only to check the reliabil-
ity performance in case of servicing or maintenance work and does not represent any
normal operational case.
CAUTION In this case the electrical interlocks are cancelled. The warning and danger
instructions given in part 1 in chapter 1 “Operating Instructions” in document
1HDG 518 020 “Safety Instructions” shall be imperatively observed.
2 1
1 − CLOSE-solenoid
2 − OPEN-solenoid
Figure 4.9-2: Changeover Valve

4.9.1.2 Putting Out of Service

When doing maintenance work on the operating mechanism, the circuit-breaker shall
be put out of service.
WARNING! An automatic start of the pump motor shall be prevented by disconnecting the
electrical motor connectors or switching off the miniature circuit-breaker.
After the locknut has been loosened, turn the pressure release screw slowly clockwise
in order to untension the disc spring assembly.
CAUTION With opened housing in the area of the disk spring assembly and movable parts
the risk of squashing is given.
1 − Pressure release screw

2 − Disc spring assembly
Figure 4.9-3: Releasing the Disk Spring Assembly

4.9.2 Technical Data Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Table 4.9-1: VAC Universal Motor
Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance % +10 / −15
Motor power W 600
Motor start-up current A − 40 25
Continuous current A − 9 4.5
Operating mode − short-time operation ED = 10%
Table 4.9-2: VDC Compound Motor
Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Motor power W 600
Motor start-up current A 50 30 20
Continuous current A 10 6 3
Table 4.9-3: Charging Times
Rated Values V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Operating sequence − O-CO
Charging times % ± 15
Closing s 5
Opening s 6
CLOSE- / OPEN-operation s 11
OPEN- / CLOSE- / OPEN-operation s 17
The whole store s 30

Table 4.9-4: Opening and Closing Coils
Coil ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance ON-solenoid % +10 / −15
Tolerance OFF-solenoid % +10 / −30
Solenoid power W 300
Number of ON-solenoids − 1
Number of OFF-solenoids − 2
Note If the operating mechanism is equipped with an anti-condensation heater, it is vented.

The technical data of the heater are listed in chapter “Equipment and Functional
Descriptions” in document 1HDG 518 450 “Anti-condensation Heater”.
Table 4.9-5: Ratings of auxiliary switches
Auxiliary Switch Ratings
Insulation voltage V AC 380 / DC 450
Thermal current A 25
Short circuit withstand capability A 1 000 (0.3 s)
Switching capacity 110 ... 125 VDC A 6 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − Plug-in connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − Sliding contacts
Contacts − Silver plated, self cleaning
Number of contacts (24 poles) −

− Normally closed 11 (6) *
− Normally open 11 (7)*
− Wipers 1
− Leading normally open 1
* = Number of unassigned contacts, in double busbar bay

4.10 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-2

5 4
7 8
2 3
9
1
15
10
11
14
Throttle screw CLOSE

12
Throttle screw OPEN
13
1 − Operating piston (working module) 9 −
Low pressure tank
2 − Storage unit (storage module) 10 −
Pump motor
3 − Disk spring assembly 11 −
Oil gauge glass
4 − Low pressure connector 12 −
Oil drain valve
5 − Spring tension indicator 13 −
Change over valve (control module)
6 − Pressure release screw 14 −
Spring travel switch
7 − Pump unit (charging module) (monitoring module)
8 − High pressure connector 15 − Close position interlock (optional)
(pressure gauge conn.)

4.10.1 Commissioning
checked.

It is possible to trigger the circuit-breaker by hand via the hand plungers of the pilot
valves (Figure 4.10-2). A manual triggering serves only to check the reliability per-
formance in case of servicing or maintenance work and does not represent any nor-
mal operational case.
1 − CLOSE-Pilot Valve
2 − OPEN I-Pilot Valve
3 − OPEN II-Pilot Valve
Figure 4.10-2: Control Module HMB-2





Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Motor power W 600
Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Motor power W 600
Rated Values V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Closing s 8
Opening s 16

Coil ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250


− Wipers 1

4.11 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1S
Throttle screw
CLOSE
10 9 7 Throttle screw OPEN
1
14
6 5
1
14
11
1
14
12
13
1 −
Operating piston (working module) (pressure gauge conn.)
2 −
Pump unit (charging module) 8 − Storage unit (storage module)
3 −
Low pressure connector 9 − Oil drain valve
4 −
Spring travel switch (monitoring mod- 10 − Disk spring assembly
ule) 11 − Pump motor
5 − Pressure release screw 12 − Low pressure tank
6 − Spring tension indicator 13 − Oil gauge glass
7 − High pressure connector 14 − Change over valve (control module)

4.11.1 Commissioning
checked.
Prior to switching on the pump motor, the changeover valves shall be switched to the
OPEN position. For this press the rubber caps of the OPEN-solenoid with your thumb.
Thereby it is prevented that the changeover valves stand in an intermediate position
while the operating mechanism is unpressurized and the disc spring assembly cannot
be tensioned (pressure cannot be built up).

It is possible to trigger the circuit-breaker by hand via the hand plungers of the pilot
valve (Figure 4.11-2). A manual triggering serves only to check the reliability perform-
ance in case of servicing or maintenance work and does not represent any normal
operational case.
2 1
1 − CLOSE-solenoid
2 − OPEN-solenoid
Figure 4.11-2: Changeover Valves





Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Motor power W 600
Motor Ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Motor power W 600
Rated Values V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Closing s 5
Opening s 6

Coil ratings V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250


− Wipers 1

4.12 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 04

DR 04
1HDG118050−1
Figure 4.12-1: Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch with mounted operating mechanism

The disconnector and the earthing switch (Figure 4.12-1) are combined into one unit,
the three positions of each movable switching contact (3), (Figure 4.12-2 and
Figure 4.12-3) representing the three usual switching statuses of disconnectors and
earthing switches:
S Disconnector closed
S Disconnector open / Earthing switch open
S Earthing switch closed
1HDG 118 521 N en 03.05.2005 EXTMEWE 04.05.2005 CHSVOTH 4.12-1

7 4
160 ±1 3 2
5
6
1HDG118471−5
1 − Fixed contact earthing switch 5 − Barrier insolator

2 − Fixed contact disconnector switch 6 − Support insolator
3 − Movable switching contact 7 − Insulating shaft
4 − Conductor
Figure 4.12-2: Main contacts of the combined disconnector and earthing switch ( 3150 A)
7 2 3
4 5 5(6) 1

4 − Conductor
Figure 4.12-3: Main contacts of the combined disconnector and earthing switch (4000 A)
The above cross sections represent the switching status disconnector open / earthing
switch open.
The conductors (4) are designed and mounted to the gas-tight barrier insulator (5) −
or support insulator (6) − such a way as to ensure that the axes of rotation of the mov-
able switching contacts form one continuous line (Figure 4.12-2).
The fixed contacts for the earthing switch (1) and the disconnector (2) are mounted on
opposite sides of the moving contact.

The operating mechanism mounted to the outside of the enclosure serves to move the
movable switching contacts (3) to the selected position by means of the insulating
shafts (7).
This basic construction can be modified through various conductor and housing de-
signs for use in
− Busbars with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
− Cable sealing ends with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
− Coupling elements with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
Disconnector/earthing switches for cable sealing ends can be provided with contacts
on both sides of the contact gap for connecting voltage transformers. These contacts
may also be used for connecting voltage test equipment.
1HDG118521−3
Figure 4.12-4: Busbar with combined disconnector / earthing switch ( 3150 A)
Figure 4.12-5: Busbar with combined disconnector / earthing switch (4000 A)

1HDG118521−3
Figure 4.12-6: Cable sealing end with combined disconnector / earthing switch

4.12.2 Operating Mechanism

9 8
9
7
5
6
4
1
2 1HDG118521−4
1 − Interlocking magnet 4 − Intermediate shaft 7 − Gear unit

2 − Plug arrangement 5 − Interlocking magnet 8 − Limit switch
3 − Electric motor 6 − Gear assembly 9 − Limit switch
Figure 4.12-7: Operating mechanism for combined disconnector / earthing switch without interlocking
The operating mechanism is driven by an electric motor (3) with provision made for
emergency manual operation (Figure 4.12-7).
The motor power is transmitted by a connecting rod with cardan joints to a bevel-gear
unit, from where the rotary motion is passed on to the movable switching contacts
through overrunning clutch.
Electrical operation of the disconnector / earthing switch is achieved by means of the

electric motor (3). For emergency manual operation a crank is inserted to engage with
an intermediate shaft (4) in the reduction gear assembly (6).

1HDG118050−3
1
1 − Drive shaft
2 − Overrunning clutch
Figure 4.12-8: Bevel-gear unit ( 3150 A)
Figure 4.12-9: Bevel-gear unit (4000 A)
The bevel-gear unit with integrated overrunning clutch (2) is arranged between the
drive shaft of the gear unit (7), (Figure 4.12-7) and the drive shaft (1) of the movable
switching contacts (Figure 4.12-8 and Figure 4.12-9). The overrunning clutch locks the
movable switching contacts in the end positions
− Disconnector closed
− Disconnector open / earthing switch open
− Earthing switch closed
The overrunning clutch performs the following functions:

− Torqueless starting of the operating mechanism
− End position locking
− Movable switching contact positioning
The reduction gear assembly (6) (Figure 4.12-7) is provided with a controllable free-
wheeling mechanism effective in both directions, which decouples the operating
mechanism from the movable switching contacts after they have been locked in one
of the end positions.

Freewheeling is terminated by the interlocking magnets (1) or (5), respectively, as

soon as a switching operation is initiated (Figure 4.12-7).
When the switch position disconnector open/earthing switch open is reached subse-
quent to disconnector operation, the freewheeling mechanism is triggered by the inter-
locking magnet (5) of the earthing switch. When the same position is reached follow-
ing operation of the earthing switch, the freewheeling mechanism is triggered by the
interlocking magnet (1) of the disconnector (Figure 4.12-7).
The power supply to the motor is cut off by the limit switch (8) (Figure 4.12-7).
In the case of emergency manual operation the motor circuit is interrupted by the limit
switch (9) (Figure 4.12-7).
The alarm switches and the switch-position indicator are actuated through a mechan-
ical connection to the gear unit.
All electrical connections are brought out to a plug arrangement (2) separately coded
for the disconnector and the earthing switch (Figure 4.12-7).
4.12.3 Interlock
As a standard feature, the disconnector / earthing switch operating mechanism is pro-
vided with a combined crank handle / final-position interlock.
Disconnector side Earthing switch side
2 1
3 7
4
6
5
1HDG118521−7
1 − Limit switch 5 − Limit switch

2 − Limit switch 6 − Slide bar
3 − Interlocking magnet 7 − Interlocking magnet
4 − Entry hole
Figure 4.12-10: Combined crank handle / final-position interlock
4.12.3.1 Crank Interlock

The slide bar (6) has two positions for each switch and blocks the crank opening (4).
In a de-energized state, the slide bar is locked in place by the interlocking magnet
(3 or 7), (Figure 4.12-10).
When the slide bar (7) is moved to the left “disconnector” or to the right “earthing
switch” in the presence of the control voltage, the limit switch (1 or 2) closes a test
circuit.

If the interlocking conditions are not satisfied and, therefore, switch operation is not
permissible, the interlocking magnet (3 or 7), respectively, remains de-energized and
prevents any further movement of the slide bar (6).
If the interlocking conditions are satisfied and therefore switch operation is permiss-
ible, the relevant interlocking magnet is energized and the slide bar (6) clears the
crank opening.
The crank handle can now be inserted into the entry hole. Insertion of the crank
handle causes the motor circuit to be interrupted by limit switches.
4.12.3.2 Switch Position Lock
5
2
3 4 locked
4 unlocked 1HDG118521−8
1 − Bolt 4 − Operating lever

2 − Motor 5 − Square end
3 − Support 6 − Turning point
Figure 4.12-11: Switch position lock
The top end of the motor shaft (2) is fitted with a square end (5) which is pinned to
the shaft (Figure 4.12-11). A support (3) is mounted to the corresponding flange end
of the motor. The operating lever (4) is bolted to the side of the support and pivoted in
point (6).
When the bolt (1) is pushed in, the operating lever (4) is moved from the unlocked
position to the locked position, thereby mechanically blocking the square end (5) and,
consequently, the motor.
At the same time, the motor circuit is interrupted by the limit switches (5),
(Figure 4.12-10).
This interlocking is also available optional for a padlock.
4.12.3.3 Manual Local Control
Note For manual local control, the interlocking preconditions must be fulfilled. The switching
position must be unlocked.
The disconnector and earthing switch can be actuated in emergency mode directly at
the system by means of a hand crank. When this is carried out, the electrical control is
automatically interrupted.

4.12.3.4 Manual Control (Control Voltage Present)

Before manually controlling the disconnector / earthing switch, the operating mechan-
ism cover must be removed.
Disconnector Earthing
switch switch
Button
Entry hole
Figure 4.12-12: Disconnector / earthing switch operating elements
Switching the Disconnector Switch
1. Push the button to the left to the “stopper” (Figure 4.12-12)

2. Insert hand crank in the entry hole
3. CLOSE-OPEN disconnector with hand crank,
turn hand crank rapidly to overcome initial resistance
4. Remove hand crank
5. Refit mechanism cover
Switching the Earthing Switch
1. Push the button to the right to the “stopper” (Figure 4.12-12)

3. CLOSE-OPEN earthing switch with hand crank,

4.12.3.5 Manual Control (Control Voltage Absent)
Note After loss of control-voltage electrical conductors or connections must not be

disconnected or removed.
ism cover must be removed.
Disconnector Earthing switch Disconnector Earthing switch
6
3
5
2
1 4
1HDG118521−8
1 − Screws 4 − Entry hole

2 − Cover plate 5 − Button
3 − Magnet 6 − Magnet
Figure 4.12-13: Operating elements after removal of the cover plate

1. Unscrew bolts (1) and remove cover plate (2), (Figure 4.12-13)
2. Press in magnet (3) and, when doing this, push the button (5) to the left over
the pressed-in magnet to the stopper
3. Insert hand crank in the entry hole (4)
6. Screw cover plate (2) back on

2. Press in magnet (6) and, when doing this, push the button (5) to the right
over the pressed-in magnet to the stopper

4.12.3.6 Position Interlocking with Padlock

The purpose of the position interlocking system is to mechanically and electrically lock
the switching device in opened or closed position.
Before locking the disconnector / earthing switch, the operating mechanism cover
must be removed.
Disconnector Earthing switch
1 2 3
1 − Button
2 − Pin
3 − Padlock
Figure 4.12-14: Disconnector/earthing switch operating elements
Position Interlocking
1. Press in pin (2); when doing so, move button (1) slightly (max. ± 2 mm) as
required (Figure 4.12-14)
2. Attach padlock (3)
Note After the switching position has been locked, the switchgear can no longer be actuated
with the hand crank.
Note As an option a mechanic cover (which can be locked by a shackle type connector lock)
of the operating elements can be provided.

4.12.3.7 Position interlocking

the switching device in opened or closed position.
Before locking the disconnector / earthing switch, the operating mechanism cover
must be removed.
Button
Lock
1. Unlock lock and press in cylinder; when doing so, move button slightly
(max. ± 2 mm) as required (Figure 4.12-15)
2. Close lock while it is still pressed in
3. Pull out key


4.12.4.1 Device
Table 4.12-1: Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 03-DR 04
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Lightning impulse withstand voltage across
kV 385 630 750 860
isolating distance
Short-time power frequency withstand 325
kV 175 230 275
voltage to earth (365)*
Short-time power frequency withstand 375
kV 195 265 315
voltage across isolating distance (425)*
Rated current A 1250 / 1600 / 2000 / 2500 / 3150 / 4000
Peak current (at 31.5kA / 40kA / 50kA / 63kA) kA 80 / 100 / 135 / 164
Short-time withstand current kA 31.5 / 40 / 50 / 63
Duration of short time current s 3
1 min. power frequency withstand voltage for
kV 2
auxiliary circuits
SF6 minimum functional pressure / 3150 A: 420 (440)* / 500

filling pressure (at 20 °C)
C) kPa
4000 A: 520 / 600
Weight without SF6 (without transversal
erection module) 3150 A
− 3-flange 380
− 4-flange 400
kg
Weight without SF6
(with transversal erection module)
− 3-flange 430
− 4-flange 450
Weight without SF6 (without transversal

− 3-flange 500
− 4-flange 530
kg
Weight without SF6
− 3-flange 550
− 4-flange 600
Weight of SF6-filling (without transversal

− 3-flange 8.8
− 4-flange 10.2
kg
Weight of SF6-filling
− 3-flange 10.3
− 4-flange 11.7
Weight of SF6-filling (without transversal

− 3-flange 10.6
− 4-flange 12.3
kg
− 3-flange 12.4
− 4-flange 14.0

4.12.4.2 Operating Mechanism

Table 4.12-2: Motor
Ratings DC/AC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance range % +10 / −15
Power W 300
Frequency (AC) Hz 50 / 60
Start-up current 3150 A A 25 15 10
Start-up current 4000 A A 30 20 15
Continuous current 3150 A A 3.3 2.5 1.3
Continuous current 4000 A A 5.5 4 2
Operating mode − Short-time operation ED = 7 %
Table 4.12-3: Center-position interlocking magnet
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power W 30
Table 4.12-4: Operating Times for Disconnector / Earthing Switch 3150 A
Voltage DC V UMin * UMax *
Closing time (contact making) ms 900
Opening time (contact separation) ms 900
* Acc. to IEC and ANSI
Table 4.12-5: Motor Operating Time 3150 A
Ratings DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Disconnector ms < 1000
Earthing Switch ms < 1000
Table 4.12-6: Movable Switching Contacts Angle of Rotation 3150 A
Device Angle of rotation
Disconnector ° 89 − 93
Earthing switch ° 79 − 83
Table 4.12-7: Operating Times for Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A
Voltage DC V UMin * UMax *
Closing time (contact making) ms < 1000
Opening time (contact separation) ms < 900

Table 4.12-8: Motor Operating Time 4000 A
Ratings DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Table 4.12-9: Angle of Rotation / Stroke Movable Switching Contacts 4000 A
Angle of rotation on
Device Nominal Stroke
enclosure bushing
Disconnector 130 mm 295 − 310 °
Earthing switch 130 mm 295 − 310 °

4.12.4.3 Limit Switch

Table 4.12-10: Limit Switch
Insulation Ratings V AC 380, DC 220
Operating current A 2 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − Plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − Snap-action with arc control magnet
Contacts − Silver-plated, self-cleaning
4.12.4.4 Auxiliary Switch

Table 4.12-11: Auxiliary Switches
Short-circuit capability A 1000 (0.3 s)
Switching capacity DC 110...125 V A 3.5 (L/R = 20 ms)
Contacts − Silver-plated, self-cleaning

Number of contacts disconnector −

(23 poles for conventional switchgear)
− normally closed 12
− normally open 8
− trailing normally closed 1
− leading normally open 2
Number of contact earthing switch −

− normally open 5

(15 poles for switchgear with control system)
− normally open 5

(12 poles for switchgear with control system)
− normally open 5
4.12.5 Operating Diagram

IEC-condition: IEC-condition:
Conducting path with full Conducting path with full
current carrying capacity current carrying capacity
(Side of earthing switch) Angle (°) auxiliary switch
(Side of disconnector switch)
IEC-condition:
Isolating distance
IEC-condition:
fulfilled
Isolating distance fulfilled
Signalling auxiliary switch (80°-contact)
Conducting path with full current carrying
capacity
principle motion
characteristics
principle motion characteristics
Signalling auxiliary switch (25°-contact)

Isolating distance fulfilled
Angle (°) main contact (movable switching

contact)
Figure 4.12-16: Contact making from auxiliary switch (for controlling)

View X
x
Figure 4.13-1: Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch with Operating Mechanism
4.13.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device

The disconnector and the earthing switch are combined in one switching device
(Figure 4.13-1). The moving contacts (4), Figure 4.13-2 can be moved into the three
following positions for the disconnector respectively the earthing switch:
− Disconnector open / Earthing switch open (neutral position, Figure 4.13-2)
8 7 2 3
4 5 5(6) 1

2 − Fixed contact disconnector 6 − Support insolator
4 − Conductor 8 − Coupling to drive
Figure 4.13-2: Disconnector / Earthing Switch integrated in the Busbar module (neutral posi-
tion)
The conductors (4) are fixed at the barrier insulator (5) (alternatively at a support insu-
lator) in such a way that the operating rod for the movable switching contacts (3) is
aligned.
1HDG 118 564 A en 02.08.2006 EXTMEHA 04.08.2006 CHSFJKO 4.13-1

The fixed contacts for the earthing switch (1) respectively the disconnector (2) are lo-
cated opposite to the corresponding position of the movable switching contact
(Figure 4.13-2).
The operating mechanism (Figure 4.13-5) is mounted outside the gas compartment
and operates the movable switching contacts ((3), Figure 4.13-2) via the insulating
rods, see Figure 4.13-3.
Insulating rod
Figure 4.13-3: Insulating Rod
In combination with the various available conductor and enclosure arrangements this
layout can be used to realize the following function modules:
− Busbar with integrated disconnector / earthing switch, as shown in
Figure 4.13-2
− Cable termination with integrated disconnector / earthing switch,
Figure 4.13-4
− Connection piece with integrated disconnector / earthing switch

Cable Termination with integrated Disconnector / Earthing Switch
The cable termination with integrated disconnector / earthing switch allows contacting
of the voltage transformer on either side of the disconnector. Figure 4.13-4 shows the
situation that the voltage transformer is connected to the circuit breaker side. The HV
test set can be connected to the same contacts, as well.
voltage transformer side
2 3 1
circuit
breaker
side
1 − Voltage Transformer Contact 4 − Conductor

(circuit breaker side) 5 − Counter Contact for Disconnector
2 − Counter Contact for Earthing Switch 6 − Barrier Insulator
3 − Moving Contact
Figure 4.13-4: Cable Termination with integrated Disconnector/Earthing Switch

8 5 9 7 10
4 6
EarthingSwitch
2
Disconnector
1 − Interlocking Switch 4 − Auxiliary Contacts 8 − Drive Rod

2 − Rod for Emergency 5 − Cam Disk 9 − Carrier
Manual Operation 6 − Plug Connections 10 − Operating
3 − Position Indicator 7 − Gear Spindle Mechanism Motor
Figure 4.13-5: Operating Mechanism of the combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
The operating mechanism is normally motor-operated. Manual operation is possible in

emergencies. The rotating movement of the operating mechanism is transmitted
through a threaded spindle (7) and a cam disk (5) via the drive rod (8) onto the mov-
ing contacts (Figure 4.13-5).
The combined disconnector / earthing switch has two drive motors (10), one for the
disconnector and one for the earthing switch. For manual emergency operation a
handcrank can be attached to the rod (2) that operates the threaded spindle (7).
The cam disk (5) is located between the threaded spindle (7) and the drive rod (8) of
the contact blades and is actuated by a carrier (9). The cam disk (5) locks the device
in the following end positions:
− Disconnector open / Earthing switch open (neutral position)

The cam disk (5) has the following functions (Figure 4.13-5):
− Torque-free start-up of the operating mechanism
− End positioning
The motor current is interrupted by a limit switch.
When the device is manually operated, the interlocking switch (1) automatically dis-
connects the motor circuit.
The auxiliary contacts (4) and the position indicator (3) are linked to the operating
rod (8).
All electrical connections are separated for the disconnector and the earthing switch
and are connected with coded plug connections (6).
4.13.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present)
WARNING! With present control voltage the system is supervised.

Without control voltage the interlocking conditions are not controlled. Therefore,
a secure operation isn’t anymore made sure. Because this case of operation can
be dangerous to life or physical condition (i.E. switching short-circuit), is the oper-
ation without control voltage allowed only for specially trained personal and can
be carried out only with special tools.
Note For manual operation all interlocking conditions (“4.13.2.2 Locking”) have to be fulfilled.
The device has to be unlocked.
In emergencies the disconnector and the earthing switch can be operated locally di-
rectly on the device by means of a handcrank. As soon as the handcrank is inserted,
the motor circuit is automatically interrupted.
For manual operation of the disconnector / earthing switch the front cover has to be
removed from the operating mechanism (Figure 4.13-7). The front cover is secured
with 4 screws M6 (4 Nm).
1 2
1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 4.13-6: Operating Mechanism with Cover, Switching Contact in neutral Position

1 2
1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 4.13-7: Operating Mechanism after removal of its Cover, Switching Contact in neutral
Position
Switching Positions of Handle

3 2 1 1 2 3
1 − Local manual control (hand crank): Local control with hand crank possible
2 − Interlock (electrically switchable) = Default setting: Local and remote control possible,
control with hand crank not possible
3 − Mechanically and electrically blocked
Figure 4.13-8: Switching Positions of Handle
Possible Combinations of Positions
Disconnector ON Earthing switch ON
Disconnector OFF Earthing switch OFF

Manual Operation of the Disconnector (Figure 4.13-9)
3 1 2 4,5
1 − Locking bolt 4 − Cover

2 − Handle 5 − Blocking solenoid
3 − Opening (not shown, behind 4)
Figure 4.13-9: Operating Elements Disconnector (front view)
Precondition: Neutral Position

1. The earthing switch must be open
2. Optional: Remove padlock (if fitted), pulls back
slide is in middle position
3. Move handle (2) in direction switching position “local manual control” until
mechanical resistance
4. In case of existing control voltage:
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the oper-
ating personal for remote control operation for the further moving of the
handle
WARNING! In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is allowed only for specially
trained personal and can be carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a) Remove cover (4) with tool
b) Unlock blocking solenoid (5) by pressing and hold
c) Move handle (2) on position “local manual control”
5. After release for the further moving move handle (2) until mechanical end
stop for releasing the hand crank opening (3) completely
6. Insert hand crank in opening (3)
7. Switch disconnector with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel
10. Tighten handle (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm

Operation Earthing Switch (Figure 4.13-10)
4,5 2 1 3
6 6
1 − Locking bolt 4 − Locking screw

2 − Handle 5 − Blocking solenoid (not shown, behind 4)
3 − Opening 6 − Lock
Figure 4.13-10: Operating Elements Earthing Switch (front view)

1. The disconnector must be open
(otherwise bring the disconnector into the OFF position first)
2. Optional: Remove padlock, pulls back
3. Move handle (2) in direction switching position “local manual control” until
mechanical resistance
4. In case of existing control voltage:
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the oper-
ating personal for remote control operation for the further moving of the
handle
WARNING! In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is allowed only for specially
trained personal and can be carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a) Remove cover (4) with tool
b) Unlock blocking solenoid (5) by pressing and hold
c) Move handle (2) on position “local manual control”
5. After release for the further moving move handle (2) until mechanical end
stop for releasing the hand crank opening (3) completely

6. Insert hand crank in opening (3)

7. Switch earthing switch with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel
10. Tighten handle (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm
4.13.2.2 Locking
It is possible to lock the disconnector/earthing switch electrically and mechanically
both, in the open and in the closed position.
In order to lock the disconnector/earthing switch, the cover must be removed from the
operating mechanism (Figure 4.13-7).
Note After locking the device it can no longer be operated manually with the handcrank.
1 2 2 1
1 − Locking bolt
2 − Handle
Figure 4.13-11: Operating Elements Disconnector and Earthing Switch (front view)

1. Remove padlock ⇒ locking bolt pulls back itself
2. Move handle (2) by pushing in position “locked”
3. Pull locking bolt (1) and fit padlock


4.13.3.1 Device
Table 4.13-1: Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/126 132/145
Lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV 325 550 650
to earth
Lightningimpulse withstand voltage a-

kV 375 630 750
cross isolating distance
Short-time power frequency withstand

kV 140 230 275
voltage to earth

kV 160 265 315
voltage across isolating distance
Rated current A 1250 / 1600 / 2000 / 2500
Peak current (at 31.5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100
1 min. power frequency withstand volta-

kV 2
ge for auxiliary circuits
SF6 minimum functional pressure /

kPa 520 / 600
Weight without SF6

(without transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 200
− 4-flange 210
kg
Weight without SF6
(with transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 250
− 4-flange 260
(without transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 4
− 4-flange 5
kg
(with transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 6
− 4-flange 7


Table 4.13-2: Motor with Permanent Magnet Excitation
Ratings DC/AC V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power W 150
Start-up current A 12 6
Continuous current A 3 1.5
Operating mode − Short-time operation S2 = 10 sec
Table 4.13-3: Operating Times for Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Voltage DC V 0,85 Un − 1,1 Un
Table 4.13-4: Motor Runtime
Ratings DC V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Disconnector ms 3000
Earthing switch ms 3000
Table 4.13-5: Contact Stroke
Device Stroke
Disconnector mm 129
Earthing switch mm 129

4.13.3.3 Interlocking Switch

Table 4.13-6: Interlocking Switch
DC-Operating current A 2 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − snap mechanics, spring loaded
Contacts − silver-plated, self-cleaning

4.13.3.4 Auxiliary Switches

Table 4.13-7: Auxiliary Switches
Short-circuit capability A 1000 (0.3 s)
Connection − plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − wiping contacts
Contacts − silver-plated, self-cleaning

− normally open 8

− normally open 8

Insulating distance Full current carrying
> 80% capacity reached
Contact travel
Main contact
Auxiliary contact, NC
Auxiliary contact, NO
Figure 4.13-12: Operating Diagram Disconnector- / Earthing Switch

4.14 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 04

DR 04
1HDG118050−1
Figure 4.14-1: Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch with mounted operating mechanism

The disconnector and the earthing switch (Figure 4.14-1) are combined into one unit,
the three positions of each switch blade (3), (Figure 4.14-2) representing the three
usual switching statuses of disconnectors and earthing switches:
S Disconnector closed
S Disconnector open / Earthing switch open
S Earthing switch closed
1HDG 118 490 B en 25.03.2002 ACEKAFO 17.04.2002 ACEFRVW 4.14-1

7 4
160 ±1 3 2
5
6
1HDG118471−5

3 − Switch blade 7 − Insulating shaft
4 − Conductor
Figure 4.14-2: Main contacts of the combined disconnector and earthing switch
The above cross sections represent the switching status disconnector open / earthing
switch open.
The conductors (4) are designed and mounted to the gas-tight barrier insulator (5) −
or support insulator (6) − such a way as to ensure that the axes of rotation of the
switch blades form one continuous line (Figure 4.14-2).
The fixed contacts for the earthing switch (1) and the disconnector (2) are mounted on
opposite sides of the moving contact.
The operating mechanism mounted to the outside of the enclosure serves to move the
switch blades (3) to the selected position by means of the insulating shafts (7).
This basic construction can be modified through various conductor and housing de-
signs for use in
− Busbars with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
− Cable sealing ends with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
− Coupling elements with integrated disconnector/earthing switch
Disconnector/earthing switches for cable sealing ends can be provided with contacts
on both sides of the contact gap for connecting voltage transformers. These contacts
may also be used for connecting voltage test equipment.

1HDG118521−3
Figure 4.14-3: Busbar with combined disconnector / earthing switch
1HDG118521−3
Figure 4.14-4: Cable sealing end with combined disconnector / earthing switch


9 8
7
5
1
4
1 − Interlocking magnet 4 − Intermediate shaft 7 − Gear unit

2 − Plug arrangement 5 − Interlocking magnet 8 − Proximity switch
3 − Electric motor 6 − Gear assembly 9 − Proximity switch
Figure 4.14-5: Operating mechanism for combined disconnector / earthing switch without interlocking
The operating mechanism is driven by an electric motor (3) with provision made for
emergency manual operation (Figure 4.14-5).
The motor power is transmitted by a connecting rod with cardan joints to a bevel-gear
unit, from where the rotary motion is passed on to the contact blades through geneva
gearing.
Electrical operation of the disconnector / earthing switch is achieved by means of the

electric motor (3). For emergency manual operation a crank is inserted to engage with
an intermediate shaft (4) in the reduction gear assembly (6).

1HDG118050−3
1
1 − Drive shaft
2 − Geneva gearing
Figure 4.14-6: Bevel-gear unit
The bevel-gear unit with integrated geneva gearing (2) is arranged between the drive
shaft of the gear unit (7), (Figure 4.14-5) and the drive shaft (1) of the switch blades
(Figure 4.14-6). The geneva gearing locks the switch blades in the end positions
− Disconnector open / earthing switch open
The geneva gearing performs the following functions:

− Torqueless starting of the operating mechanism
− Switch blade positioning
The reduction gear assembly (6) (Figure 4.14-5) is provided with a controllable free-
wheeling mechanism effective in both directions, which decouples the operating
mechanism from the switch blades after they have been locked in one of the end posi-
tions.
Freewheeling is terminated by the interlocking magnets (1) or (5), respectively, as

soon as a switching operation is initiated (Figure 4.14-5).
When the switch position disconnector open/earthing switch open is reached subse-
quent to disconnector operation, the freewheeling mechanism is triggered by the inter-
locking magnet (5) of the earthing switch. When the same position is reached follow-
ing operation of the earthing switch, the freewheeling mechanism is triggered by the
interlocking magnet (1) of the disconnector (Figure 4.14-5).
The power supply to the motor is cut off by the proximity switch (8) (Figure 4.14-5).
In the case of emergency manual operation the motor circuit is interrupted by the pro-
ximity switch (9) (Figure 4.14-5).
ical connection to the gear unit.
All electrical connections are brought out to a plug arrangement (2) separately coded
for the disconnector and the earthing switch (Figure 4.14-5).

4.14.3 Interlock
As a standard feature, the disconnector / earthing switch operating mechanism is pro-
vided with a combined crank handle / final-position interlock.
Disconnector side Earthing side
2 1
3 7
4
6
5
1HDG118521−7
1 − Limit switch 5 − Limit switch

3 − Interlocking magnet 7 − Interlocking magnet
4 − Entry hole

The slide bar (6) has two positions for each switch and blocks the crank opening (4).
In a de-energized state, the slide bar is locked in place by the interlocking magnet
(3 or 7), (Figure 4.14-7).
When the slide bar (7) is moved to the left “disconnector” or to the right “earthing
switch” in the presence of the control voltage, the limit switch (1 or 2) closes a test
circuit.
If the interlocking conditions are not satisfied and, therefore, switch operation is not
permissible, the interlocking magnet (3 or 7), respectively, remains de-energized and
prevents any further movement of the slide bar (6).
If the interlocking conditions are satisfied, that is, switch operation is permissible, the
relevant interlocking magnet is energized and the slide bar (6) clears the crank open-
ing.
handle causes the motor circuit to be interrupted by limit switches.

5
2
3 4 locked
1 − Bolt 4 − Operating lever

3 − Support 6 − Turning point
The top end of the motor shaft (2) is fitted with a square end (5) which is pinned to
the shaft (Figure 4.14-8). A support (3) is mounted to the corresponding flange end of
the motor. The operating lever (4) is bolted to the side of the support and pivoted in
point (6).
When the bolt (1) is pushed in, the operating lever (4) is moved from the unlocked
consequently, the motor.
At the same time, the motor circuit is interrupted by the limit switches (5),
(Figure 4.14-7).
This interlocking is also available optional for pin tumbler lock.
4.14.3.3 Manual Local Control
The disconnector and earthing switch can be actuated in emergency mode directly at
the system by means of a hand crank. When this is carried out, the electrical control is
automatically interrupted.


ism safety cover must be removed.
Disconnector Earthing
switch switch
Button
Entry hole
1. Push the button to the left to the “stopper” (Figure 4.14-9)

5. Refit safety cover
1. Push the button to the right to the “stopper” (Figure 4.14-9)


Note Following control-voltage failure, electrical lines or connections must not be disconnected
or removed.
ism safety cover must be removed.
Disconnector Earthing switch Disconnector Earthing switch
6
3
5
2
1 4
1HDG118521−8
1 − Screws 4 − Entry hole

2 − Cover plate 5 − Button
3 − Magnet 6 − Magnet


2. Press in magnet (6) and, when doing this, push the button (5) to the right
over the pressed-in magnet to the stopper

4.14.3.6 Position Interlocking with Padlock

switchgear in opened or closed position.
Before locking the disconnector / earthing switch, the operating mechanism safety
cover must be removed.
1 2 3
1 − Button
2 − Pin
3 − Padlock
Figure 4.14-11: Disconnector/earthing switch operating elements
1. Press in pin (2); when doing so, move button (1) slightly (max. ± 2 mm) as
required (Figure 4.14-11)

4.14.3.7 Position interlocking

switchgear in opened or closed position.
Before locking the disconnector / earthing switch, the operating mechanism safety
cover must be removed.
Button
Lock
1. Unlock lock and press in cylinder; when doing so, move button slightly
(max. ± 2 mm) as required (Figure 4.14-12)
3. Pull out key


4.14.4.1 Device
Table 4.14-1: Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 03-DR 04
Rated Values kV 60/72,5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Lightning impulse withstand voltage across

kV 385 630 750 860
isolating distance

kV 175 230 275 325
voltage to earth

kV 195 265 315 375
voltage across isolating distance
Rated current A 1250 / 1600 / 2000 / 2500 / 3150
Peak current (at 31.5 kA / 40 kA / 50 kA) kA 80 / 100 / 135
Short-time withstand current kA 31.5 / 40 / 50
1 min. power frequency withstand voltage for

kV 2
auxiliary circuits

kPa 420 / 500
Weight without SF6

(without transversal erection module)
− 3-flange 380
− 4-flange 400
kg
Weight without SF6
− 3-flange 430
− 4-flange 450
(without transversal erection module)
− 3-flange 8,8
− 4-flange 10,2
kg
− 3-flange 10,3
− 4-flange 11,7


Table 4.14-2: Motor
Ratings DC/AC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power W 300
Start-up current A 25 15 10
Continuous current A 3.3 2.5 1.3
Operating mode − Short-time operation ED= 7 %
Table 4.14-3: Center-position interlocking magnet
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power W 30
Table 4.14-4: Operating Times for Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Voltage DC V 0.85 Un − 1.1 Un
Table 4.14-5: Motor Operating Time
Ratings DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Table 4.14-6: Contact Blade Angle of Rotation
Device Angle of rotation
Disconnector ° 90
Earthing switch ° 80

4.15 Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch

For the insulated maintenance earthing switch the earthing contacts in the 4-flange
housing of a disconnector/earthing switch are carried out insulated. The insulated
maintenance earthing switch is typically used on the outgoing side of a switchbay.
Figure 4.15-1 shows as an example the outgoing side module of a switchbay.
1 voltage transformer side
1 − Earthing guide bar 4 − Disconnecting Contact

2 − Earthing Contact (insulated design) 5 − Conductor
3 − Moving Contact 6 − Insulator
Figure 4.15-1: Example of outgoing side module
Note The disconnector / earthing switch is described in detail in chapter “Equipment and
Functional Descriptions” in document 1HDG 118 521 “Disconnector / Earthing Switch”.

The earthing contacts are connected by an earthing guide bar on the outside of the
housing of the disconnector / earthing switch. The earthing guide bar is connected by
two bolts with the housing of the disconnector / earthing switch (Figure 4.15-2).
For measurements the earthing guide bar can be dismounted by dismantling the five
screws (1) and (2) for carrying out tests on the single phases (Figure 4.15-2).
CAUTION The insulated earthing contacts may be tested with a test voltage with up to
2 kV max. when filled with the minimum filling pressure with SF6.
Assembly is to be carried out in opposite order as dismounting with the specified

tightening torques. Bolts shall not touch the insulating flanges (distance 5 mm). After
mounting the correct fitting of the bolts has to be checked.
1 2 5 2 3 2 1
outer side
inner side
(housing)
4
L1 L2 L3
1 − Screwing of earthing guide bar L1 − Phase 1
2 − Screwing of bolt L2 − Phase 2
3 − Earthing guide bar L3 − Phase 3
4 − Earthing contact
5 − Insulating flange
Figure 4.15-2: Earthing guide bar on insulated maintenance earthing switch

4.16 Earthing Switch Type ELK-EB 04

Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity type ELK-EB 04
15 14 13 12a 11 10 12b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12a 8 9
1 − Closing spring 7 − Connecting rod 12 − (a/b) Conductor

2 − Motor 8 − Gear assembly 13 − Fixed contact of the unit to be
3 − Intermediate shaft 9 − Plug arrangement earthed
4 − Limit switch 10 − Mechanical connection 14 − Contact tube
5 − Drive lever 11 − Actuator lever 15 − Actuator lever
6 − Limit switch
Figure 4.16-1: Operating mechanism and main contacts of earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
4.16.1 Design and operating principle

The earthing switch consists of the switching device and a fixed contact, which is
mounted to the unit to be earthed (13).
The earthing switch may be disconnected from the main earthing system for the pur-
poses of testing the protective relay and measuring the voltage drop of the main cur-
rent path. Therefore, an insulating connection is provided between the contact tubes
(14) and the operating mechanism arranged in the center of the unit (Figure 4.16-1).
For proper switch operation, the conductors (12a and 12b) must be correctly mounted
to ensure that the contact tubes (14) are connected to earth through the contact lami-
nation. Adequate control of circuit conditions that may occur when parallel overhead
lines are de-earthed is achieved through an appropriate contact system.
1HDG 118 522 M en 16.04.2003 ACEMEWE 16.04.2003 ACETHBE 4.16-1


Operating Mechanism (Figure 4.16-1)
The earthing switch is equipped with a snap-action spring mechanism which is actu-
ated by an electric motor. An intermediate shaft (3) in the gear assembly (8) allows for
emergency manual operation.
Drive lever (5) is rotated by motor (2) through the interposed reduction gear assem-
bly (8). As a result, connecting rod (7) rotates the actuator lever (15), thereby com-
pressing the closing springs (1). As soon as the springs have passed their dead-
center position, a torque is produced which acts upon the actuator lever (15) and,
consequently, effects the actual closing operation.
This independent action of the contact system and the spring mechanism is made
possible by the slot provided in connecting rod (7). The end positions are determined
by internal stops.
The operating mechanism is decoupled from the gear assembly by means of a free-
wheeling mechanism which is effective in both directions.
ical connection (10) to the actuator lever (11). The motor current is cut off by the limit
switch (6). In the case of emergency manual operation the motor circuit is interrupted
by the limit switch (4). All electrical connections are brought out to a coded plug ar-
rangement (9).
4.16.3 Interlock
7
2
6
3
4 5
1HDG118521−7
1 − Limit switch 5 − Locking

2 − Interlocking magnet 6 − Crank opening
4 − Limit switch
As a standard feature, the operating mechanism is provided with a combined crank

handle / final-position interlock.

Crank Interlock (Figure 4.16-2)
The slide bar (7) has two positions and blocks the crank opening (6). In a
de-energized state, the slide bar is locked in place by the interlocking magnet (2).
When the slide bar (7) is moved to the left in the presence of the control voltage, the
limit switch (1) closes a test circuit. If the interlocking conditions are not satisfied and,
therefore, switch operation is not permissible, the interlocking magnet (2) remains de-
energized and prevents the slide bar (7) from being moved any further to the left.
interlocking magnet (2) is energized and the slide bar (7) clears the crank opening (6).
The crank handle can now be inserted into the crank opening. At the same time, the
motor circuit is interrupted by the limit switches (3).
5
2
4 locked
3
1 − Cylinder lock 4 − Operating lever

3 − Support
The top end of the motor shaft (2) is fitted with a square end (5) which is pinned to the
shaft (Figure 4.16-3). A support (3) is mounted to the corresponding flange end of the
motor (2). The operating lever (4) is bolted to the side of the support and pivoted in
point (6). When the cylinder lock (1) is pushed in, the operating lever (4) is moved
from the unlocked position to the locked position, thereby mechanically blocking the
square end (5) and, consequently, the motor. At the same time, the motor circuit is
interrupted by the limit switches (4) (Figure 4.16-2).
This interlocking is also availiable for padlock.

4.16.4 Manual Local Control

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity can be actuated in emergency
mode directly at the system by means of a hand crank. When this is carried out, the
electrical control is automatically interrupted.

Before manually controlling the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity, the
operating mechanism safety cover must be removed (Figure 4.16-4).
Figure 4.16-4: Operating elements of the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
Switching with hand crank (Figure 4.16-4):
5. Push the button (2) to the left to the “stopper”

7. CLOSE-OPEN earthing switch with hand crank
Note With a single-pin layout, the operating elements of the earthing switch with short circuit
making capacity are available for each pin.

or removed.
2
3 4
1 − Cover plate 4 − Entry hole

2 − Screws 5 − Button
3 − Magnet

1. Unscrew bolts (2) and remove cover plate (1)

4.16.4.3 Position Interlocking

switchgear in opened and closed position.
operating mechanism safety cover must be removed.
4.16.4.4 Padlock
1 2
1 − Pin
2 − Padlock
Position interlocking (Figure 4.16-6)
Please observe the following steps when locking:

1. Press in pin (1)
Note After the switching position has been locked, the switching device can no longer be
actuated with the hand crank.

4.16.4.5 Cylinder Lock
cylinder lock

1. Open lock and press in cylinder
3. Pull out key


Table 4.16-1: Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity type ELK-EB 04
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
325
(365)*
Peak current / short circuit making current

kA 80 / 100 / 135 / 164
(at 31.5 kA / 40 kA / 50 kA / 63 kA)
Short-time withstand current kA 31.5 / 40 / 50 / 63
Short circuit duration

s 3/2/1
(at 31.5 kA / 40 kA / 50 kA / 63 kA)

kV 2
voltage (auxiliary circuits)
Power frequency withstand voltage between

contact pin and enclosure with disconnected kV 10
earthing
50 kA: 420 (440)* / 500

Min. SF6 operating pressure / filling pressure
(at 20 °C)
C) kPa
63 kA: 520 / 600
Weight without SF6 kg 70
SF6-volume dm3 65
** ANSI Values 170 kV

Table 4.16-2: Motor
Rated Values DC / AC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power W 300
Continuous current A 8.0 6 2.0
Operating mode − short-time operation ED = 7 %

Table 4.16-3: Hand crank interlocking magnet
Rated Voltage Magnet DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance band % +10 / −15
Power W 10
Table 4.16-4: Operating Times
DC Voltage V UMin * UMax *
Closing time until contact making ms 1400
Opening time until contact separation ms 1000
Table 4.16-5: Motor operating time
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Earthing switch ON ms < 1500
Earthing switch OFF ms < 1900
Table 4.16-6: Contact Pin Stroke
Switching device Stroke
Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity mm 106 − 115


Rated Values Insulation V AC 380, DC 220
Contacting principle − Snap-action with

arc control magnet
Contacts − silver plated, self cleaning


Angle (° ) auxiliary switch First contact of cooperating contact
IEC-condition: IEC-condition: “Contact will reach end
“Isolating distance fulfilled” position sure” comes earlier
Reporting auxiliary switch (80°-contact)

Earthing switch ON
expiration of motion on principle
Reporting auxiliary switch (15°-contact)

Earthing switch OFF
Angle (° ) control lever

(attaching potentiometer)
mm Contact pin stroke
Figure 4.16-8: Contact making from auxiliary switch (for controlling)

Table 4.16-8: Auxiliary Switch
Rated Values V AC 380, DC 450
Short circuit withstand capability A 1000 (0.3 s)
Number of contacts (16 poles with conventional GIS) −

− Normally closed 10
− Normally open 6
Number of contacts (10 poles with control system) −

− Normally closed 5
− Normally open 5

4.17 Earthing Switch Type ELK-EB 04

Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity type ELK-EB 04
14 13 12 11 10 6
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
1 − Closing spring 6 − Proximity switch 11 − Operating lever
2 − Operating mechanism motor 7 − Connecting rod 12 − Power connection
3 − Intermediate shaft 8 − Gear unit 13 − Contact tubes
4 − Limit switch 9 − Plug-and-socket device 14 − Operating lever
5 − Operating mechanism lever 10 − Keyed connection

The earthing switch consists of the switching device and a fixed contact, which is
mounted to the unit to be earthed.
The earthing switch may be disconnected from the main earthing system for the pur-
poses of testing the protective relay and measuring the voltage drop of the main cur-
rent path. Therefore, an insulating connection is provided between the contact tubes
(13) and the operating mechanism arranged in the center of the unit.
For proper switch operation, the conductors (12) must be correctly mounted to ensure
that the contact tubes (13) are connected to earth through the contact lamination. Ad-
equate control of circuit conditions that may occur when parallel overhead lines are
de-earthed is achieved through an appropriate contact system.
1HDG 118 491 D en 16.04.2002 ACEKAFO 17.04.2002 ACEFRVW 4.17-1


The earthing switch is equipped with a snap-action spring mechanism which is actu-
ated by an electric motor. An intermediate shaft (3) in the gear assembly (8) allows for
emergency manual operation.
Drive lever (5) is rotated by motor (2) through the interposed reduction gear assembly
(8). As a result, connecting rod (7) rotates the actuator lever (14), thereby compres-
sing the closing springs (1). As soon as the springs have passed their dead-center
position, a torque is produced which acts upon the actuator lever (14) and, conse-
quently, effects the actual closing operation.
This independent action of the contact system and the spring mechanism is made
possible by the slot provided in connecting rod (7). The end positions are determined
by internal stops.
The operating mechanism is decoupled from the gear assembly by means of a free-
wheeling mechanism which is effective in both directions.
ical connection (10) to the actuator lever (11). The motor current is cut off by the limit
switch (6). In the case of emergency manual operation the motor circuit is interrupted
by the limit switch (4). All electrical connections are brought out to a coded plug ar-
rangement (9).
4.17.3 Interlock
7
2
6
3
4 5
1HDG118521−7
1 − Limit switch 5 − Locking

2 − Interlocking magnet 6 − Crank opening
4 − Limit switch
As a standard feature, the operating mechanism is provided with a combined crank

handle / final-position interlock.


The slide bar (7) has two positions and blocks the crank opening (6). In a de-ener-
gized state, the slide bar is locked in place by the interlocking magnet (2).
When the slide bar (7) is moved to the left in the presence of the control voltage, the
limit switch (1) closes a test circuit. If the interlocking conditions are not satisfied and,
therefore, switch operation is not permissible, the interlocking magnet (2) remains de-
energized and prevents the slide bar (7) from being moved any further to the left.
interlocking magnet (2) is energized and the slide bar (7) clears the crank opening (6).
The crank handle can now be inserted into the crank opening. At the same time, the
motor circuit is interrupted by the limit switches (3).
5
2
4 locked
3
1 − Cylinder lock 4 − Operating lever

3 − Support
The top end of the motor shaft (2) is fitted with a square end (5) which is pinned to the
shaft. A support (3) is mounted to the corresponding flange end of the motor (2). The
operating lever (4) is bolted to the side of the support and pivoted in point (6). When
the cylinder lock (1) is pushed in, the operating lever (4) is moved from the unlocked
consequently, the motor. At the same time, the motor circuit is interrupted by the limit
switches (4) (Figure 4.17-2).
This interlocking is also availiable for padlock.

4.17.4 Manual Local Control

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity can be actuated in emergency
mode directly at the system by means of a hand crank. When this is carried out, the
electrical control is automatically interrupted.

5. Push the button (2) to the left to the “stopper”

Note With a single-pin layout, the operating elements of the earthing switch with short circuit
making capacity are available for each pin.

or removed.
2
3 4
1 − Cover plate 4 − Entry hole

2 − Screws 5 − Button
3 − Magnet

1. Unscrew bolts (2) and remove cover plate (1)

4.17.4.3 Position Interlocking

switchgear in opened and closed position.
operating mechanism safety cover must be removed.
4.17.4.4 Padlock
1 2
1 − Pin
2 − Padlock

1. Press in pin (1)

4.17.4.5 Cylinder Lock
cylinder lock
Position interlocking

1. Open lock and press in cylinder
3. Pull out key


Table 4.17-1: Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity type ELK-EB 04
Rated Values kV 60/72,5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 140 230 275 325

kA 80 / 100 / 135
(at 31,5 kA / 40 kA)
Short-time withstand current kA 31,5 / 40 / 50
Short circuit duration s 3/2/1

kV 2

earthing

kPa 420 / 500
(at 20 °C)
SF6-volume dm3 65

Table 4.17-2: Motor
Power W 300
Continuous current A 8.0 6 2.0
Operating mode − short-time operation ED = 7 %
Table 4.17-3: Hand crank interlocking magnet
Rated Voltage Magnet DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance band % +10 / −15
Power W 10

DC Voltage V Un 0.85 Un 1.1 Un
Table 4.17-5: Motor operating time
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Earthing switch ON ms < 1500
Earthing switch OFF ms < 1900
Switching device Stroke
Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity mm 110


Contacting principle − Snap-action with

arc control magnet

4.18 1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making

Capacity
1pole Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity Type ELK-EB 03/04 S
10
Full section ELK03 9
Full section ELK04
6
11
5
12
4
13
14
3
15
1HDG 118 526−1
16 1 2
1 − Closing spring 6 − Limit switch 12 − Contact pipes

2 − Operating mechanism 7 − Connecting rod 13 − Switch lever
motor 8 − Gear 14 − Pilot switch
3 − Intermediate shaft 9 − Connector 15 − Connector
4 − Limit switch 10 − Keyed connection 16 − Switching-position
5 − Operating-mechanism 11 − Insulating flange indicator
lever
Figure 4.18-1: Operating mechanism and main contacts
1HDG 118 529 D en 10.08.2001 ACEMEWE 25.07.2002 ACEVOTH 4.18-1

4.18.1 Structure and Operation

4.18.1.1 High Voltage Part
The earthing switch consists of three individually operated switching devices and mat-
ing contacts, which are installed on the device to be earthed.
Each breaker pole can be disconnected from installation earth for purposes of setting
and testing the protective relay and measuring the voltage drop in the main circuit. For
this reason, each of the three contact pipes (12) are connected to the operating-mech-
anism system in insulated form.
During operation, the connectors (15) must be installed to ensure correct operation
and in such a way that the contact tubes (12) are connected to earth via contact lami-
nations. Using a suitable contact system it is possible to control both switching drops,
which can occur during de-earthing due to the induction of parallel overhead systems,
and making on a short circuit.

The earthing switch is equipped with three motor-driven spring drives. Manual emerg-
ency operation is possible at the three intermediate shafts (3) of the gear (8).
The operating-mechanism motor (2) turns the operating-mechanism lever (5) via the
step-down gear (8). As a result of this, the connecting rod (7) turns the switch lever
(13) and increases tension in the closing springs (1). If the closing springs exceed the
dead-center position, a torque is applied to the switch lever (13), as a result of which
switching must take place.
After the dead-center position has been exceeded, the elongated hole in the connect-
ing rod (7) allows independent movement of the contact system and lift. The final posi-
tions are established through limit stops located on the inside.
The operating mechanism is separated from the gear through controllable free-wheel-
ing mechanism, which has an effect in both directions.
The pilot switch (14) and switching-position indicator (16) are driven from the switch
lever (13) via a keyed connection (10). The motor current is switched off by the limit
switch (6). In the case of manual emergency operation, the motor circuit is interrupted
by the limit switch (4). All electrical connections are via by two coded connectors (9).

4.18.2 Interlock
7
2
6
3
4
5
1HDG118521−7
Each pole of the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity is fitted, as stan-
dard, with a combined crank handle / final-position interlock.

Each slide valve (7) has two settings and covers the connecting hole (6) of the crank
handle. At zero current, this slide valve (7) is blocked by the locking magnet (2).
If, in the case of an applied control voltage, the slide valve (7) is pushed to the left, the
limit switch (1) actuates a testing circuit. If release conditions are not met, i.e. swit-
ching is not possible, the locking magnet (2) remains in a zero position and the slide
valve (7) can not be pushed any further to the left.
If, however, the release conditions are met, i.e. switching operations are permitted, the
locking magnet (2) is turned on and the slide valve (7) releases the connecting hole
(6) of the crank handle.
handle causes the motor circuit to be interrupted by limit switches (3).

2
5
4 Locked
3
4 Unlocked
1HDG118521−8
A square element (5) is pinned to the upper shaft end of the motor (2). A carrying el-
ement (3) is screwed on at the same flange end of the motor (2). An operating lever
(4) which pivots at point (6) is located at the side of the carrying element.
By pressing in the pin − or in the form of a special version of the cylinder lock (1) − the
operating lever (4) is moved from the unlocked to the locked position in such a way
that the operating lever (4) mechanically blocks the square element (5) and, in turn,
the motor.
At the same time, the motor circuit is interrupted by the limit switch (4) (Figure 4.18-2).
This switch position lock is also available as a special version with a cylinder lock.


Table 4.18-1: Switching Device
Rated Values kV 60/72,5 110/123 132/145 150/170
325
(1 min)

kA 80 / 100
(at 31,5 kA / 40 kA / 50 kA)
Short-time withstand current kA 31,5 / 40
Short circuit duration s 3

kV 2

earthing

kPa 420 / 500
(at 20 °C)
Weight kg 200
SF6-Volume dm3 depending on connected part

Table 4.18-2: Motor
Power W 300
Frequency (AC) 50 / 60
Continuous current A 8,0 4,4 2,0
Operating mode − short-time operation ED= 7 %
Table 4.18-3: Interlocking Magnet for Hand Crank Operation
DC Magnet Voltage V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Power Magnet W 10

DC Voltage V Un 0,85 Un 1,1 Un
Table 4.18-5: Motor Runtime
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Earthing Switch ON ms < 1500
Earthing Switch OFF ms < 1900
Switching Device Stroke
Earthing switch with short circuit making

mm 110
capacity


Table 4.18-7: Rated Values Limit Switch
Connection − Plug connection 4,8 x 0,8
Contacting principle − Snap mechanics with

wash-out magnets


Angle (° ) Auxiliary
Switch first contact of opposite contact
IEC condition:
“Disconnecting area estab- IEC condition: “End position is safely re-
lished” ached” (was fulfilled earlier)
Message Auxiliary Switch (80° contact)

Earthing switch ON
moving principle
Message Auxiliary Switch (15° contact)

Earthing switch OFF
Angle (° ) Switching lever

(Potentiometer building)
mm Stroke contact pin
Figure 4.18-4: Messages on Auxiliary Switch (for control)

Table 4.18-8: Rated Values Auxiliary Switch
Rated Values V AC 380, DC 450
Short circuit withstand capability A 1000 (0,3 s)
Switching capacity DC 110...125 V A 3,5 (L/R = 20 ms)
Switching capacity DC 220...250 V A 2,5 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − Plug connection 4,8 x 0,8
Contacting principle − Wiping contacts
Number of contacts (23pole) −

− normally open 8

4.19 Separate Current Transformer

Figure 4.19-1 represents a plan view of the separate current transformer. It is a low
voltage instrument transformer. The cores (5) are integrated in the gas compartment
of the enclosure (4). The current transformer can be mounted at any coupling flange.
The secondary terminal leads of the cores are brought out of the SF6- gas compart-
ment through a cast-resin insulating plate (3) and are connected to the terminals (4) in
the terminal box (5). The insulating plate (3) accommodates up to 45 outgoing current
leads.
2 3
1
1 − Terminal leads 4 − Enclosure

2 − Terminal box 5 − Cores
3 − Insulating plate
Figure 4.19-1: Separate Current Transformer

4.20 Separate Current Transformer

Figure 4.20-1 represents a plan view of the separate current transformer. It is a low
voltage instrument transformer. The cores (5) are integrated in the gas compartment
of the enclosure (4). The current transformer can be mounted at any coupling flange.
The secondary terminal leads of the cores (5) are brought out of the SF6-gas compart-
ment through a cast-resin insulating plate (3) and are connected to the terminals (1) in
the terminal box (2). The insulating plate (3) accommodates up to 60 outgoing current
leads and can optionally be equipped with a second terminal box.
5
2 ÉÉ
3
4 6
1 − Terminal leads 4 − Enclosure

2 − Terminal box 5 − Cores
3 − Insulating plate 6 − Core support

4.21 Integrated Current Transformer

Design and Operating Principle
Figure 4.21-1 shows the current transformer integrated in the circuit breaker from the
top. The current transformer cores (1) are integrated in the circuit breaker enclosure
(6) and can be installed in either one of the available flanges.
The integrated current transformer is delivered in the layout with or without terminals.
In both layouts the bushing plate (3) allows for connection of up to 45 leads.
Layout with Terminals
The secondary terminals (2) of the current transfomer cores (1) are lead out of the
SF6-gas compartment through a bushing plate (3) with cast-resin insulation. From
there, they are connected to the terminals (4) in the terminal box (5).
Layout without Terminals
The secondary terminals (2) are connected to the control cubicle directly from the
bushing plate (3). The terminals (4) and the terminal box (5) are not required.
CAUTION All terminals are short circuited and earthed for the transport to site. For the
voltage test of the main circuits and the measurement of the voltage drop of the
main conductor path, all terminals must be either short circuited and earthed or
completely connected. After the tests the earthing connection shall be removed.
Layout with terminals Layout without terminals
ÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 6
1 − Current transformer cores 5 − Terminal box

2 − Secondary terminals 6 − Circuit breaker enclosure
3 − Bushing plate 7 − Earthing plate
4 − Terminals
Figure 4.21-1: Current Transformer

4.22 Inductive Voltage Transformer Type ELK-PI 04

Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary
voltage is proportional to and in phase with the primary voltage for all practical pur-
poses. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the network voltage to be
measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective de-
vices. At the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically sep-
arated from each other.
The inductive voltage transformer type ELK-PI 04 (Figure 4.22-1) complies with the
relevant IEC-, ANSI- and IEEE-standards. Usually it has two secondary windings and
one auxiliary winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are project-specific.
The inductive voltage transformer is located in a sealed gas compartment (6) with two
gas connections (4), an SF6 gas moisture filter and a bursting disc assembly (3). The
terminal box (1) attached to the side wall of the enclosure accommodates wiring, ter-
minals and fuses.
CAUTION The inductive voltage transformer is delivered filled with SF6 at a pressure of
150 kPa. Do not evacuate!
View “A” A
5
2
4
3
4
7
6
1 − Terminal box with terminals for 10 mm2 cross section 5 − Earthing connection 2 x M12, 20 mm depth
(Phoenix UK 16) 6 − Barrier insulator
2 − Bursting disc 7 − Lifting lugs ∅ 50 mm
3 − Cable gland standard 8 x PG21 und 1 x PG11 8 − Rating plate
4 − Gas connection ABB-System, 1 x angle type 9 − Additional rating plate if required
Figure 4.22-1: Inductive voltage transformer type ELK-PI 04
1HDG 118 505 G en 08.07.1999 ACEMEWE 22.07.1999 ACEVOTH 4.22-1


Table 4.22-1: Inductive voltage transformer type ELK-PI 04
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth, IEC kV 175 230 275 325
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth, ANSI kV 160 260 310 365
Local voltage test (1 min) kV 0.8 x power frequency withstand voltage
Min. SF6 operating pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 600 / 700
Weight without SF6 kg ca. 700
Weight of SF6 filling kg 6,5
SF6 volume ltr ca. 300
1HDG 118 505 G en 08.07.1999 ACEMEWE 22.07.1999 ACEVOTH 4.22-2

4.23 Inductive Voltage Transformer 0.3 ZZ

The inductive voltage transformer (Figure 4.23-1) complies with the relevant ANSI-/
IEEE-standards. Usually it has two secondary windings and one auxiliary winding for
earth fault detection. The ratings are project-specific.
terminal box (1) accommodates wiring, terminals and fuses.
View ”A” A
8,9
3
4
2
1
7
6
1 − Terminal box with terminals for 10 mm2 cross section 6 − Barrier insulator
3 − Cable gland 8 − Rating plate
4 − Gas connection 9 − Additional rating plate if required
5 − Earthing connection 2 x M12, 20 mm depth
Figure 4.23-1: Inductive voltage transformer


Table 4.23-1: Inductive voltage transformer
Rated Values kV 150 / 170
Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 750
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth, ANSI / IEEE kV 365
Frequency Hz 60
Accuracy class 0.3 ZZ / 400 VA
Secondary thermal power limit VA 3600
Weight without SF6 kg appr. 1050
Weight of SF6 filling kg 16.5
SF6 volume ltr appr. 760

4.24 Inductive Voltage Transformer with Isolation

Device
The voltage transformer is designed with an integrated isolating device for insulating
voltage transformer active parts from the busbar of the GIS.
The bushing insulator, which is made of cast resign, is dimensioned for insulation by
SF6. It is clamped to the coupling flange of the tank and seals the voltage transformer
tank.
The inductive voltage transformer (Figure 4.24-1) complies with the relevant IEC-,
ANSI- and IEEE-standards. Usually it has two secondary windings and one auxiliary
winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are project-specific.
terminal box (1) attached to the side wall of the enclosure accommodates wiring, ter-
minals and fuses.
Note The integrated isolating device is not a disconnector according to IEC 62271−102.
The integrated isolating device shall only be operated for testing purposes.
WARNING! Operation of the voltage transformer is only allowed, if the switching position of
the integrated isolating device is in switch position ON or OFF. If the integrated iso-
lating device is in any position between the two end positions (no electrical auxili-
ary contact message) and high-voltage is applied, the voltage transformer will be
damaged.

View ”A”
2 11
10
4
A
5
2 4
4
7
1 − Terminal box with terminals for 5 − Earthing connection 2 x M12,

10 mm2 cross section 20 mm depth
(Phoenix UK 16) 6 − Barrier insulator
3 − Cable gland standard 8 x PG21 and 8 − Rating plate
1 x PG11 9 − Additional rating plate if required
4 − Gas connection ABB-System, 10 − Operating mechanism
1 x angle type 11 − Drive for operating mechanism
Figure 4.24-1: 3phase Voltage Transformer manual and automatic operation

4.24.2 Integrated Isolating Device

The voltage transformer is equipped with an Integrated Isolating Device, so the active
parts of the voltage transformer can be isolated from the busbar of the switchgear.
The test voltages are the same as well for the opened as for the closed switching
conditions.
CAUTION Operation of integrated isolating device mechanism s is only permitted if voltage

transformer is in voltage-free condition.
By rotating the mechanism the integrated isolating device can also be switched if
specially ordered. There is an optical on-off-indicator at the side of the mechanism
and for electrical on-off-indication auxiliary contacts are placed in the secondary termi-
nal box.
4.24.2.1 Description of the Operating Mechanism

Switching Position ON Manual Operation
Switching position ON means that the active part contacts the high-voltage parts of
the transformer. The high-voltage connection is closed.
By turning the tube of the mechanism clockwise (approx. 20 turns) the internal contact
will be closed and the voltage transformer is in operating condition. Turn until the me-
chanical limit is reached. Overwinding will damage the mechanism.
Switching Position ON Automatic Operation
Switching position ON means that the active part contacts the high-voltage parts of
the transformer. The high-voltage connection is closed. The multi-contact (AMP) is
located at the side of the terminal box for the motor drive unit.
ON
1 2
1 − Optical Indication (white spot) “ON”-Position (I)

2 − Electrical Indication (range limit switch)
Figure 4.24-2: Voltage Transformer in Position ON

Switching Position OFF Manual Operation
Off-switching position means, the active part does not contact the high-voltage parts
of the transformer. The high-voltage connection is opened.
By turning the tube of the mechanism counter-clockwise (approx. 20 turns) the inter-
nal contact will be opened and the voltage transformer is out of operating condition.
Turn until the mechanical limit is reached. Overwinding will damage the mechanism.
Switching Position OFF Automatic Operation
Off-switching position means, the active parts are not contacted to the high-voltage
parts of the transformer. The high-voltage connection is opened. The multi-contact
(AMP) is located at the side of the terminal box for the motor drive unit.
OFF
1 2
1 − Optical Indication (white spot) “OFF”-Position (O)

2 − Electrical Indication (range limit switch)
Figure 4.24-3: Voltage Transformer in Position OFF
4.24.2.2 Optical Switching Position Indication

The voltage transformer is designed with an optical switching position indication. The
indication is mounted collateral at the electrical operating mechanism which is
mounted on the cover of the voltage transformer.

4.24.2.3 Electrical Switching Position Indication Manual Operation

The connection diagram of the indicators can be seen on the diagrammatic name-
plate.
For both switching positions are two NO-contacts (contact 13-14 and 23-24) and two
NC-contacts (contacts 11-12 and 21-22) installed.
All contact-terminals with letter “C” (closed) are for the ON-switching position. The ac-
tive part of voltage transformer is contacted to high-voltage.
All contact-terminals with letter “O” (opened) are for the OFF-switching position. The
active part of voltage transformer is not contacted to high-voltage.
4.24.2.4 Electrical Switching Position Indication Automatic Operation

For both switching positions four NC-contacts and two NO-contacts are available.

Table 4.24-1: Inductive voltage transformer
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/123 132/145 150/170
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth, IEC kV 175 230 275 325
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth, ANSI kV 160 260 310 365
Weight without SF6 kg ca. 720
Weight of SF6 filling kg 8,5
SF6 volume ltr ca. 400

4.25 Electro-optical voltage sensor EOVT

4.25.1 Design
1 6
2 3 4 5
1 − Connection for bursting disk (usage in separate gas compartment)

2 − Name plate
3 − Gas connection (usage in separate gas compartment) or blind cover
4 − Isolator
5 − Connection box with 1xPG21- and 1xPG11-union
6 − Phase plates
Figure 4.25-1: Electro-optical voltage sensor EOVT
Measurement of the voltage is based on the Pockels effect (changing of the polariz-
ation state of light during existance of an electrical field).
The sensor is supplied as standard with a post insulator. As a special order the EOVT
can also be supplied with a barrier insulator, gas connection and a bursting disc.
In a laterally arranged connection box a temperature sensor for the compensation of

the temperature drift of the signal and the beam waveguides to the evaluation elec-
tronics are connected. The outward lead of the fibres is effected via PG unions.
Adaptation to the different rated voltages is effected by calibration of the evaluation

electronics and the use of BGO-crystals of differing lengths. Normally the evaluation
electronics is settled in the controll cubical.

4.25.2 Operating Principle
Prism
High voltage
Metal electodes
Piezoelectric
crystal (BGO)
Earth potential
Ray divider
Polarizators l/4-plate
Collimators Analyzer
Sensor fibre
Electronics
Light source
Signal processing
Transmission fibre
Output
Figure 4.25-2: Structure of the sensor with path of rays
Attenuation of the optical signals conditional on the length of the beam waveguide
fibres has no influence on the measuring result, since the signals are amplified and
standardized in the electronics.
The measuring principle is based on measurement of the light intensity of monochro-

matic, polarized light. Coherent light is conducted through an optically active crystal
(BGO) via lenses (collimators) and polarizers.
The axially adjacent field is modulated via the Pockels effect (double refraction). The
light is sent back via a prism at the crystal end of the high-voltage face. The light is
divided via a ray divider at the crystal end on the earth face.
The first half reaches thepolarizer directly via a 90° prism, the other half is shifted by
means of a l/4-plate by an additional 90° in phase before reaching the polarizer. Fur-
thermore, the two light rays are beamed via collimators.
At the analyzer output intensity-modulated light for onward conductance is present.

The voltage can be determined in the evaluation electronics via the measured light
intensity.


Table 4.25-1: EOVT
Rated Values kV 60 / 72.5 110 / 126 132 / 145 150 / 170
Lightning withstand impulse voltage

kV 350 550 650 750
(to earth)
Power frequency withstand voltage, IEC

kV 175 230 275 325
(to earth)
Power frequency withstand voltage, ANSI

kV 160 260 310 365
(to earth)
On site voltage test (1 min.) kV 0.8 x power frequency withstand voltage

kPa 420 / 500
Weight of SF6 filling kg 0.5

4.26 Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B

Surge arresters of type “AZ0” (Figure 4.26-1) are used in SF6-gas-insulated switch-
gear to protect against atmospheric overvoltages and switching surges. These ar-
resters can be connected at any unused flange (if necessary by using an adapter) of
the switchgear.
These surge arresters are of three-phase encapsulated design with an internal gas
compartment sealed by the barrier insulator (5).
The active components of the surge arrester are metal-oxide (MO) resistor disks
arranged in a stack. The flats of the individual disks have conductive metal coatings.
The height of the stack depends on the system voltage. Specially designed tie-rods
and springs maintain the correct contact pressure in the stack irrespective of tempera-
ture fluctuations.
Shielding electrodes at the HV-side of the resistor stacks control the electrical field of
the active components and the earthed metal enclosure.
The metal enclosure (1) and the base plate (3) of the surge arrester are made of
aluminum. The bursting disc (4) and the two gas connections (2) are mounted at the
base plate. One of the gas connections accommodates the density monitor. On the
base plate optional bushings (7) are provided for mounting surge counters (10) or
current-metering devices. In Figure 4.26-2 and Figure 4.26-3 the mounting position of
the surge counters (8, 9) is shown. The base plate also has four M16 earthing con-
nections (6).
1 4 View A 2
5 3 7 6
1 − Metal enclosure 4 − Bursting disc 6 − Earthing connection M16

2 − Gas connection 5 − Barrier insulator 7 − Bushing
3 − Base plate
Figure 4.26-1: Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B

8 − Surge counter Type Bowthorpe SC13
Figure 4.26-2: Mounting the surge counter type Bowthorpe SC13 on the base plate of
horizontal mounted surge arrester

9
9
3 − Base plate
9 − Surge counter
Figure 4.26-3: Mounting the surge counter type SAM 2 on the flange side (barrier insulator) on
vertical mounted surge arrester


Table 4.26-1: Ratings of Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B
Rated Values
Voltage Ueff kV Up to 25 % over Uc (depends on model)
Limit discharge current max. (peak value) kA 100
Discharge current (peak value) kA 10
Energy absorption capacity per kV Uc kJ 9
Line discharge class acc. to IEC 60 099-4 − 3
Permissible ambient temperature (without heating) °C −30 to +45
Minimum functional pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520 / 600
Maximum continuous load voltage Uc kVeff 48 − 100 101 − 150
Length L mm 1670 2280
Weight without SF6 kg 350 400
SF6 weight appr. kg 14 20
SF6 volume appr. ltr 350 500

4.27 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041

ELK-04 surge arresters (Figure 4.27-1) are employed in SF6-gas-insulated switchgear
to protect against atmospheric overvoltages and switching surges. These AZ 0 series
arresters can be connected at any unused flange of the switchgear.
compartment sealed by an upper sealing plate (7).
The active components of the surge arrester are metal-oxide (MO) resistor disks ar-
ranged in a stack. The flats of the individual disks have conductive metal coatings.
ture fluctuations.
Shielding electrodes above the resistor stacks control the electrical field of the active
components and the grounded metal enclosure.
aluminum. The external bursting disk (3) and the two DN20 gas ports (5) are mounted
in the base plate. One of the gas ports accommodates the gas leak detector (2) with
right-angle adapter (3). Glands (9) can be provided to specification for surge-response
counters or for current-metering devices. The base plate also has four M16 grounding
terminals (8), set at intervals of 90° .
1 2
View A"
3 4
5(2/3)
View “A”
5 5
6
8
7 6 9
1 − Surge arrester 4 − External bursting disk 7 − Upper sealing plate

2 − Gas leak detector 5 − Gas port 8 − M16 grounding terminal
3 − Rightangle adapter 6 − Base plate 9 − Gland
Figure 4.27-1: Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041


Table 4.27-1: Surge Arrester Type AZ 041
Rated Values
Max. 25 % over Uc
Voltage Ueff kV
(depends on model)
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Rated discharge current (peak value) kA 10
Line discharge class IEC-TC 37-WG 4 (9) − 3
Permissible ambient temperature (without heating) °C +40 to −40
Minimum functional pressure / Filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 420 / 500
Weight without SF6 kg 660 − 690
SF6-Weight kg 19
SF6-Volume approx. ltr 800
Maximum continuous load voltage Uc kVeff 30 −68 73 −112 117 −161
Length L mm 1295 1490 1735

4.28 Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A

ELK-04 surge arresters (Figure 4.28-1) are employed in SF6-gas-insulated switchgear
to protect against atmospheric overvoltages and switching surges. These AZ 0 series
arresters can be connected at any unused flange of the switchgear.
compartment sealed by the barrier insulator (7).
The active components of the surge arrester are metal-oxide (MO) resistor disks ar-
ranged in a stack. The flats of the individual disks have conductive metal coatings.
ture fluctuations.
Shielding electrodes at the HV-side of the resistor stacks control the electrical field of
the active components and the earthed metal enclosure.
aluminum. The bursting disc (4) and the two gas connections (5) are mounted at the
base plate. One of the gas connections accommodates the density monitor (2) with
right-angle adapter (3). On request, bushing segments (9) can be provided to specifi-
cation for discharge counters (10) or for current-metering devices. The base plate also
has four M16 grounding terminals (8), set at intervals of 90° .
7
View A
5(2,3)
1 9
5 4 10
1 − Surge arrester
2 − Density monitor
3 − Right-angle adapter
4 − Bursting disc
6
6 − Base plate
8 − Grounding terminal, 4xM16
9 − Bushing segment
VIEW6 A 4 10 − Discharge counter
Figure 4.28-1: Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A
1HDG 118 575 C en 27.02.2004 EXTMEWE 05.03.2004 CHSNIHA 4.28-1


Table 4.28-1: Ratings of Surge Arrester Type ELK AZ 041A
Rated Values
Voltage Ueff kV max. 25 % over Uc (depends on model)
Discharge current (peak value) kA 10
Line discharge class IEC-TC 37-WG 4 (9) − 3
Permissible ambient temperature (without heating) °C −40 to +40
Minimum functional pressure / Filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 420 / 500
Weight kg 450
Maximum continuous load voltage Uc kVeff 48 − 120
Mounting position suspended standing up horizontal
Length L1 mm 357 380 324
Length L2 mm up to 2138 up to 2161 up to 2105
1HDG 118 575 C en 27.02.2004 EXTMEWE 05.03.2004 CHSNIHA 4.28-2

4.29 3-Phase GIS-Capacitor

The 3-phase GIS-capacitor (Figure 4.29-1) is used in GIS-bays with circuit-breaker
and overhead line connections. The capacitor is only needed for short-circuit ratings
50 kA, 50 and 60 Hz. It shall be connected to a flange at the line side of the GIS.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1HDG 118 542−3
1 − Enclosure 4 − Sealing screw 6 − Bursting disc

2 − Barrier insulator 5 − Gas connection 7 − Density monitor
3 − HV-capacitor
Figure 4.29-1: 3-phase GIS-capacitor
For each phase, one cylindrical HV-capacitor (3) is used. At the earth side they are
connected by sealing screws (4) to the enclosure (1). At the HV-side they are con-
nected to the barrier insulator (2) by spring contacts.
The active components of the HV-capacitor are located within a fibre reinforced epoxy
insulator. Specially designed stainless steel bellows maintain the correct contact pres-
sure in the stack irrespective of temperature fluctuations.
Shielding electrodes at the HV-side control the electrical field of the active compo-
nents and the earthed enclosure (1).
The bursting disc (6) and the gas connections (5) are mounted at the enclosure (1).
One of the gas ports accommodates the density monitor (7).


Table 4.29-1: 3-phase GIS-capacitor
Rated Values kV 170
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Capacitance per phase pF 3500 +10% -5%
Partial discharge at 130 kV, 50 Hz pC ≤5
Dissipation factor tanδ - 20 x 10-4
Permissible ambient temperature

°C -40 to +80
(without heating)
SF6 minimum pressure/rated pressure

kPa 420 / 500
(absolute) at 20° C
Weight kg 220
Mounting position suspended standing up horzorizontal
Length L mm 898
L
1HDG 118 542−3
Figure 4.29-2: Length L

4.30 Composite insulating bushing type VDF

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 − Cable connector 7 − Control electrode

2 − Cap 8 − Bottom flange
3 − Top flange 9 − Transport cap
4 − Fiber-reinforced epoxy-resin tube 10 − Valve
5 − Silicon elastomer shield 11 − Protective cap
6 − Conductor tube
Figure 4.30-1: Composite insulating bushing, type VDF

The VDF composite insulating bushing (Figure 4.30-1) is a gas-insulated bushing in
accordance with IEC 137, 233, 815 and Project 1462.
On account of the simplicity of its design, the bushing is maintenance-free.
Instead of a capacitor element, the bushing includes a control electrode (7) for field
relief of the bottom flange (8). Therefore no measuring adapter is assigned.
The cable connector (1) can be round or flat and is made of aluminum or copper, de-
pending on the requirements.
The tracking paths are dimensioned for contamination level II (medium = 20 mm / kV).
On account of the hydrophobic (water-repellent) properties and the very short recov-
ery time of the silicon (5) after flashovers, the bushing can also be used for contami-
nation level III applications (severe = 25 mm / kV).
The bottom flange (8) features two M12 tapped holes which accommodate eyebolts
for lifting the bushing. Another eyebolt can be installed in the bore for the cable con-
nector, if necessary.
CAUTION For delivering the bushing is filled with N2 at a pressure of 150 kPa!
Vent the gas to atmosphere via the valve (10) before removing the transport
cap (9)!

Figure 4.30-2: Silicon composite insulating bushing, type VDF
Table 4.30-1: Silicon composite insulating bushing, type VDF (Figure 4.30-2)
Rated Values VDF 550 VDF 750
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 550 750
Power−frequency withstand voltage kV 230 325
Rated current A 3150
On-site voltage test (1 minute) kV 0.8 x rated power-frequency

withstand voltage
SF6 design pressure (relative, at 20 °C) kPa 750
Max. inclination out of vertical ° 90
Max. bending load kN 10
Weight without SF6 kg 50 63
SF6 volume cm3 59000 78000

4.31 Composite insulating bushing

4.31.1 General
The composite insulating bushing (Figure 4.31-1) is a gas-insulated bushing in accor-
dance with IEC 137−1995.
On account of the simplicity of its design, the bushing is maintenance-free.
The cable connector (1) can be round or flat and is made of aluminum or copper, de-
pending on the requirements.
Figure 4.31-1: Silicon composite insulating bushing
Table 4.31-1: Silicon composite insulating bushing (Figure 4.31-1)
Rated Values
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 650
Power−frequency withstand voltage kV 275
Rated current A 2500
Rated short time current kA/s 40/3
Min. SF6 operating pressure / filling pressure kPa 420 / 500

(at 20 °C)
SF6 design pressure (relative, at 20 °C) kPa 750
Max. inclination out of vertical ° 90
Max. bending load N 3500
SF6 volume ltr 45

4.32 Anti-Condensation Heater

The rated values of the anti-condensation heater are listed in Table 4.32-1.
Silicon connection leads (lead ends: tinned)

Figure 4.32-1: Silicon Heating Plate
Table 4.32-1: Anti-condensation heater
Rated Values V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Heater power for integrated local control cabinet W 45
Heater power for terminal box

− Inductive voltage transformer 10 15
(small terminal box)
− Inductive voltage transformer 30 30
W
(large terminal box, only ELK-04)
− Integrated current transformer 10 15
(circuit breaker compartment)
− Separate current transformer (barrel-type) 10 15
Heater power for operating mechanisms

− Circuit breaker 30 30
− Disconnector / earthing switch 10 15
− Earthing switch with short circuit W 10 15
making capacity
− Disconnector 10 15
− Switch-Disconnector 30 30
1HDG 518 450 A en 22.02.2001 ACEHOSC 26.02.2001 ACEVOTH 4.32-1

4.33 SMART-GIS
4.33.1 PISA
2
1 − Cover for plug-in connection systems for all lines

2 − Rating plate with plug-in connection diagram
3 − External, pluggable EEPROM
Figure 4.33-1: PISA (Process Interface for Sensors and Actuators)
4.33.1.1 General information

Process Interface for Sensors and Actuators “PISA”
PISA is a decentralised, digital control unit for high voltage switching devices and is
used for controlling and monitoring high-voltage switchgear. The PISA electronic sys-
tem is fitted “close to the process” in the drive boxes of the switching devices and is
connected to the bay control device REC580 and external protective gear.
The PISA subassemblies replace conventional methods of control by means of relays

and the auxiliary switch packs in the drives and, with the use of power electronics,
make it possible to control primary devices directly.
The use of PISA simplifies the wiring system and, through connecting up state-of-the-
art sensor technology, new functions are made possible which were not available in
previous conventional designs (with contactors) (cf Table 4.33-1, Page 4.33-3). Fur-
thermore, plant extension becomes easier and more flexible.
The status-oriented maintenance concept can lead to a long-term reduction in main-

tenance intervals and can mean that only technically necessary maintenance
measures need to be carried out.
At the same time using the control functions, the PISAs directly record various
measured variables and thus automatically provide the evaluation basis for a status-
oriented maintenance plan.

Figure 4.33-2 shows PISA as a “close-to-the-process” electronic system on the lowest

level in the substation control and protection system.
Filing and Substation control
interpretation system
monitoring (optional: separate)
B8 B9 B8 B9
C1 T1 Statio
n AT2 C2 C1 T1 Statio
n AT2 C2
B1 B2 B7 B1 B2 B7
B3 B4 B5 B6 C7 B3 B4 B5 B6 C7
DEC 3000 DEC 3000

AXP AXP
Alpha Alpha
Station bus with communication function

for monitoring
ABB ABB
Bay control device REC580 (control

? o n n ? o n n cubicle) for passing on monitoring data
Measured data
PISA PISA PISA PISA
acquisition
Figure 4.33-2: Monitoring as an integral component of a substation control and

protection system
4.33.1.2 Commissioning/decommissioning
The PISA voltage supply is via the 24-pin plug at the drive.
Before plugs are disconnected in PISA, the system must be de-energised.
When decommissioning, the plug at the drive should be unscrewed or the appropriate
automatic circuit-breaker in the control cubicle should be switched off. The following
designation for automatic devices is standard:
1. Automatic F101 for PISA circuit-breaker
2. Automatic F102 for all disconnector / earthing switches and earthing
switches with short circuit making capacity
Every PISA has 7 plug connections that are located under the protective screen (1)
(Figure 4.33-1). The plug assignment is illustrated on the circuit diagrams.
Overview
-X1 = Sensors input

-X3 = Power output
-X32= Message output
-X4 = Power supply
-X5 = External pluggable memory module
-TX = Optical waveguide transmitter (T=transmit)
-RX = Optical waveguide receiver (R=receive)
4.33.1.3 Structure / functional description

PISA consists of the following three electronic subassemblies:
Input card
The connections of all sensors and switches are made on the input card. Here, posi-
tion messages, circuit-breaker spring retraction, gas density, protective commands
and mechanical interlocks of switching devices are detected.

Processor card with external memory module
The processor card (CPU card) contains the central processor and storage elements.
All signals are processed here and are provided with a time indicator. The monitoring
of the load circuits and the temperature check of the semiconductor switches is car-
ried out here.
The external memory module contains a rewriteable memory chip for permanent se-
curity (Figure 1, item 3) and for storing drive-related data. When the PISA is being re-
placed, the external memory module must be placed inside the new device so that the
stored information is still available.
Output card
The output card controls the motors, interlock deactivation magnets and trip coils. All
of the power circuits are galvanically decoupled from the input side by means of op-
tical couplers. A total of 6 (individually controllable) IGBTs are available as power tran-
sistors. IGBT= Insolated Gate Bipolar Transistor. Beside the power semiconductors
for controlling the actuators, there are four configurable binary outputs for the conven-
tional control of protective gear.
4.33.1.4 Measured data acquisition

The following measured variables are recorded by sensors and processed in the
PISA:
Table 4.33-1: Measured variables that can be recorded by PISA and interpretation options
Measured variable Interpretation PISA action
Circuit-breaker operating mechanism HMB
Number of switching cycles Maintenance intervals Monitoring

(standard)
Number of pump starts / day Drawing conclusions about Recording info and passing it
the operating mechanism hy- on
draulic system (e.g. oil leaks) Mean value calculation for
or the condition of the pump further processing in the
motor monitoring unit
Gas density Trend analysis and prompt Monitoring of limit violation

warning of gas leaks
Reaction time Fault detection in trip circuit Monitoring of limit violation

(switching on coil until
leaving start position)
Motion time Fault detection in operating Monitoring of limit violation

(leaving start position until re- mechanism system
aching end position)
Energy content of springs Switching capacity of the op- Monitoring of limit violation
erating mechanism / circuit-
breaker
Loading speed Power capacity of the hy- Monitoring of limit violation

draulic pump

Measured variable Interpretation PISA action
Disconnector and earthing switch operating mechanism
Reaction time Fault detection in trip circuit Monitoring of limit violation
Motion time Fault detection in operating Monitoring of limit violation

mechanism system
GIS system
Gas density Trend analysis and prompt Algorithms

warning of gas leaks; electric
arcing detection
4.33.1.5 Visualisation and interpretation of the data

The measured data are filed, analysed and visualised at station level. A function-
oriented separation of the monitoring and control tasks takes place against the back-
ground of modularisation, i.e. the break down into delimitable components with clearly
defined interfaces. This results in increased flexibility with respect to:
S Strict separation of monitoring and control tasks
S Retrofitting existing substation control and protection systems
S Equipping new systems with Micro-SCADA systems
The visualisation and evaluation software can be run on Windows NT under Micro-
SCADA so that a separate monitoring computer is not absolutely necessary. At the
same time this creates the option of calling up further data (currents, voltages) which
already exist in the substation control and protection system and correlating them with
the PISA measured values. A modem interface offers the option of a remote inquiry
from a higher-ranking workplace for maintenance planning.
Non-time-critical evaluations of monitoring data with the objective of status evaluation

can be carried at a higher level. Above all, this allows the possibility at all times, even
when the system is in operation, of incorporating the improvements in the evaluation
algorithms that can be expected in the course of time (e.g. calculation of contact ero-
sion at the circuit-breaker).
Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation

4.33.1.6 Technical data

Table 4.33-2: PISA
Rated Values
Operating temperature range °C −10...+70
Storage temperature range °C −40...+70
Power input W 15 (no switching operation)
Processor Motorola MC68360, 20 MHz
Memory 2 MB static RAM, 4 MB Flash
Data save External, pluggable EEPROM, 2 kB, for configur-

ation data
Process bus 1 optical interface for process bus in accordance

with IEC1375
Real-time clock Synchronised with bay unit REC580

1 ms resolution for timestamping
+/− 0.5 ms accuracy
4 binary inputs for sensors / con-

trol switches
− Pick-up level V 12 DC +/− 10%
− Voltage V 0...280 DC
3 binary inputs for external pro-

tective commands
− Pick-up level V 12...280 DC
− Voltage V 0...280 DC
2 analogue inputs for SF6 gas

density sensors
− Current sink mA 4... 20
− Input resistor ohms 76
2 serial digital inputs for system sensors (absolute angle-of-rotation

transmitter)
− Transfer rate min. 10 k values / s with 12 Bit
6 power outputs
− standing current A 2 ducts max. 18 A, 4 ducts max. 10 A
− starting current A 2 ducts max. 90 A, 4 ducts max. 50 A
− Voltage V 60...250 DC (+10%, −15%)
4 message outputs
− max. standing current mA 100
− Voltage V 60...250 DC (+10%, −15%)
Weight kg approx. 2,53

4.33.2 Inductive Rotary Transducer
Figure 4.33-3: Inductive rotary transducer
4.33.2.1 Design and operating principle

The inductive rotary transducer (also called inductive rotary sensor, Figure 4.33-3)
measures (contact and wear-free) the spring excursion of the circuit-breaker operating
mechanism. The stored energy status of the operating mechanism spring is constantly
available since the spring excursion is measured in absolute values. The inductive
rotary transducer consists of three functional modules (not shown in Figure 4.33-3):
− Ferrite shells and measuring p.c.b. for measured-data generation
− Printed-circuit board with mixed-mode ASIC for measured-data processing
− Interface p.c.b. for measured-data output
Ferrite shells and measuring p.c.b.
The measuring system consists of two similarly shaped ferrite shells, mounted so that
they can rotate freely. A measuring p.c.b. with an integrated exciting coil is located
between the two shells.
The structure of the system makes error voltage measurement possible, depending
on the angle of rotation. Compensating for possible interference factors (e.g. tempera-
ture, electro-magnetic fields), guarantees signal generation without interference.
Printed-circuit board with mixed-mode ASIC
The mixed-mode ASIC implements the functions for measurement-signal analysis and
signal processing. ASIC stands for “user-specific integrated switching circuit”.
Interface p.c.b. for measured-data output
The interface board is the driver stage for various types of output signal. The signal-
ling mode used is synchronous serial interchange (SSI) with binary coding.


Table 4.33-3: Inductive rotary transducer (inductive rotary sensor)
Rated Values
Manufacturer RAP sensorics
Measuring principle − inductive
Measuring range ° 0... 360
Resolution − 12 bit
Impact load g 20 over 11ms
Vibration load g 10 (5 Hz to 2,000 Hz)
Average elec. durability h >100.000
Electrical protection − against polarity reversal
Output signal − absolute value, synchronous serial, binary
Rated operating voltage V DC 5V +/- 5%

4.33.3 Inductive Proximity Switch

1 2 3 4
1 − Housing
2 − Exciting coil
3 − Light-emitting diode
4 − Shielded cable
Figure 4.33-4: Inductive proximity switch

The inductive proximity switch (also called inductive proximity sensor, Figure 4.33-4)
is a cylindrical-frame type and three-conductor construction.
The inductive proximity switch consists of an exciting coil, electronics unit and an LED
which indicates the switching state “CLOSE”.
The detection of electro-conductive materials in defined form and dimension is carried

out inductively at the end face. An operational amplifier analyzes the change in volt-
age and initiates a switching change. The LED makes it possible to make an optical
check of the switching state.
The electronics system prevents spurious switch-on pulses and enhances resistance
to short-circuit and overload.
Operational safety of the electronics system is guaranteed by the three-conductor sys-

tem.


Table 4.33-4: Inductive proximity switch
Rated Values
Manufacturer Siemens
Measuring principle − inductive
Rated sensing distance mm 2.0
Impact load g 30 over 18 ms
Vibration load Hz 10...55, 1 mm amplitude
Tightening torque Nm 6
Electrical protection − against polarity reversal, short-circuit, overload
Output − 3 conductor DC pnp, normally open
No-load current mA 10
Operating voltage range V DC 10...65

4.33.4 Main Supply Module

10-pin connector (−X2)**
PCB
4-pin connector (−X1)*
Figure 4.33-5: Main supply module
Primary side
The switched-mode mains supply module has a variable input-voltage range (DC) and
can therefore cover the various voltage levels of the substation battery.
Secondary side
The mains supply module supplies the sensors and PISA electronics system with the
required voltage. The voltage outputs are galvanically isolated from one another.
Back-up supply
The mains supply module can support an input voltage failure for 50 ms without trans-
mitting an error signal.


Table 4.33-5: Main supply module
Rated Values
Manufacturer Vero Electronics
Primary side
− Input voltage V 60...250 DC (+10% to −15%)
Power input W at 60 VDC 110 VDC 220 VDC
− max 40 33 24
− typical use 18 15 11
Secondary side
− Outputs V 24 DC 0.1 A (inductive proximity switch)
V 15 DC 0.2 A (SF6 density sensors)
5 DC 0.5 A (Angle-of-rotation transmitter)
V
5 DC 2.0 A (Supply, PISA electronics)
− Override V
Power failure up to 50 ms without message
Another 30 ms with message Power Fail
Output power W max. 18

<8 in typical use (1 PISA + sensors)
Weight kg 1.1


(electronically amplified)

2
1 − Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity

2 − Capacitive voltage indicator
Figure 4.34-1: Indicator mounted on the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
The device is mounted on one of the gas connection flanges of the housing of the
earthing switch with short circuit making capacity (Figure 4.34-1).
When voltage measurement is not requested, an alternative is the capacitive voltage

indicator. This instrument is suitable for detecting operating voltage by a capacitive tap
(4), (Figure 4.34-2).The instrument meets all the DIN and VDE requirements for volt-
age indicating instruments.
Indication, initiated by pushbutton (1), is by flashing light emitting diodes (LED’s) (2)
and (3), (Figure 4.34-2). The LED’s (2) and (3) are located on the housing cover of the
instrument (Figure 4.34-2).
RED = Voltage detected

GREEN = No voltage detected
Electronic amplification of the picked up capacitive voltage is enabled by means of a

long life Lithium/Thionylchlorid (Li/SOCI2) battery.
2 1
detected
Voltage
when both LED’s are
alternate blinking
System o.k.
detection
2.Voltage
No voltage
detected
3
1. System-
check
For using the voltage
detection unit please
follow steps 1 and 2
4
1HDG 111 911P1
Battery o.k.
1 − Pushbutton, Voltage test

2 − LED red − Voltage detected
3 − LED green − No voltage detected
4 − Capacitive tap
Figure 4.34-2: Capacitive voltage indicator

Carrying out the system test
A system test, as described in the control panel (Figure 4.34-3) must be carried out
before every voltage test.
After pressing the operating key (1) for the system test, the battery display LED
lamp (3) lights up permanently if the system is intact (Figure 4.34-3). The two voltage
display LEDs (4) and (5) flash alternately (Figure 4.34-3). Therefore the operating key
has to be pushed for a minimum of 10 seconds.
Carrying out the voltage test
To carry out the voltage test, press the operating key (2), (Figure 4.34-3).
The LEDs (4) and (5) have the following meaning (Figure 4.34-3):
S RED = voltage detected
S GREEN = no voltage detected
4 5
For using the voltage System o.k.

detection unit please when both LED’s are
follow steps 1 and 2 alternate blinking
1. System- 2. Voltage-
Check detection
Battery o.k.
No voltage Voltage
detected detected
1HDG 111 911P1
3 1 2
1 − Operating key, system test

2 − Operating key, voltage test = red
3 − Battery display LED
4 − Voltage display LED GREEN
5 − Voltage display LED RED = green
Figure 4.34-3: Control panel with function display of the capacitive voltage detection unit


Table 4.34-1: Indicating Instrument
Rated Values
For installations of rated voltage 72.5 to 170 kV
Temperature range −40 °C to +80 °C
Requirements DIN and VDE
Weight including battery approximately 3 kg
Table 4.34-2: Battery
Rated Values
System Li/SOCl2
Voltage 3.6 Volt
Capacity 27 Ah
Minimum life at 5 measurements per day 5 years
Weight approximately 200 g

¤ Installation
4.35 Mounting UHF PD sensor on barrier insulator

CAUTION The mounting of the PD sensor shall be only carried out by specially authorized
staff!
Assembly (Figure 4.35-1)

1. Remove contact screw and contact spring (1)
2. Insert sensor adaptor (2) and tighten it firmly
3. Check galvanic contact of sensor adaptor (2) conductor to enclosure
4. Fix UHF sensor (3) using clamp (4) onto mounting plate (5)
5. Tighten nut of flange bolt (6) with prescribed tightening torque (M12=45Nm)
6. Mount sensor cable (7) between sensor adapter (2) and UHF-sensor FCU (3)
7. Connect adaptor (2) to sensor FCU (3) using sensor cable (7)
1 2 7 3 4 5 4 3 5 6
1 − Contact spring 5 − Mounting plate

2 − Sensor adaptor 6 − Nut of flange bolt
3 − UHF sensor FCU 7 − Sensor cable
4 − Clamp
Figure 4.35-1: Active UHF PD sensor

4.36 High Voltage Detection System on Cable Sealing

End
4.36.1 Design and Functional Description
Figure 4.36-1: Electrode on Cable Sealing End
A-A
A
Figure 4.36-2: Cable Sealing End
The high voltage detection system (HVDS) is able to recognize the service voltage on
the conductors via a capacitive voltage detection.
Voltage detection systems are normally used in bays which are not equipped with a
voltage transformer. The main application is to observe the voltage-free state of a high
voltage cable bevor closing the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity. Due
to this reason the measuring point is placed close to the conductors of the cable sea-
ling end.
WARNING! The HVDS is not suitable for assuring the voltage-free state acc. to the require-
ments for protection of persons. Hence, during all work on the GIS the safety rules
have to be followed strictly (1HDG 518 020)!
1HDG 518 471 en 13.05.2004 EXTMEWE 22.06.2004 CHSVOTH 4.36-1

The voltages of all three phases are measured separately via a capacitive voltage
detection and are transferred to the analyzing electronic. The analyzing electronic is
placed in the local control cubicle and shows the voltage-free state by relay contacts .
For additional information in the analyzing electronic a dispay in the front panel is pro-
vided.
The requirements for voltage indication acc. to IEC 61243-5 are fulfilled.
This description applies only for HVDS with voltage detection on the cable sealing
end. For systems with other measurement points separated descriptions are given.
Measurement of Voltage
Figure 4.36-3 shows the schematic design of a capacitive voltage detection.
HV
C1 U1
Utot
C2 Z CE CA CI
U2
Figure 4.36-3: Schematic Design of a Voltage Measure Detection

S C1= Primary capacitance of the electrode
S C2 = Stray capacitance of the electrode
S Z = Surge arrestor
S CE = Capacitance of the coaxial cable (typically 101pF per meter)
S CA = Additional trim capacitance
S CI = Input capacitance of the evaluating processor unit
S U1 = Voltage across electrode
S U2 = Measured voltage on input of the evaluating processor unit
S U tot U 1 U 2 Voltage of conductors against earth
The measurement of voltage is done by an electrode in the cable sealing end. A surge
arrestor Z is located in a distribution rack directly located at the electrode. From this
point a coaxial cable conducts the measured signal to the evaluating processor unit
which is located in the local control cubicle.
The system in Figure 4.36-3 represents a capacitive voltage divider with
U2 C
1 (1)
U1 C2

By replacing of U1 with Utot follows for the measured signal U2:
U tot
U2 C (2)
C1
2
1
Because C2, CA, CE and CI are switched parallel,

the earthing capacitance C2tot is:
C 2tot C 2 C A C E C I(3)
C2 and CI are fixed values, whereas CE is dependant of the length of the coaxial cable
(typically 101 pF per meter). With CA as free parameter the measured voltage can be
set to different system voltages (i.E. 170 kV, 110 kV, 72 kV, etc).
From (3) then follows:
U tot
U 2 C (4)
C1
2tot
1
Acc. to IEC 61243-5 the voltage evaluation for voltages below 0.1 x Ur shall not react
but for voltages > 0.45 x Ur has to be activ. This means that in the range of 0.1 x Ur ≤
U ≤ 0.45 x Ur an evaluation is possible but not necessary.
The trim capacitance CA is calculated project-specific from ABB to comply with the
required limit values.
Evaluating Processor Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 − LED HV On (red) 5 − Voltage indication phase L1

2 − LED HV Off (green) 6 − Voltage indication phase L2
3 − LED Error (red) 7 − Voltage indication phase L3
4 − LED Power (red)
Figure 4.36-4: Front panel of the evaluating processor unit
The evaluating processor unit is equipped with two potential-free relay contacts
which are designed as closing contact. Relay contact 1 (“Ready”) is closed if all
three phases show the same status. Relay contact 2 (“Voltage free”) is closed if all
three phases are voltage-free.
For feeding the relays a supply energy is required. In case the supply energy is
dropped both relays pass into the opened basic status
(relay 1: “Fault”, relay 2: “Voltage present”).
Furthermore the evaluating processor unit is equipped with a three-phase LCD dis-
play. As symbol for measured voltage a lightning arrow was chosen.

Table 4.36-1: LCD Display
Display threshold Meaning Symbol
U < 0.1 x Ur “Voltage free” no indication
U > 0.45 x Ur “Voltage present”
U = Ur / √3 “Service voltage present” and “Signal o.k.”
with
U = Conductor-Earth voltage on primary side
Ur = Service voltage between phases of the arrangement
For supplying the display the energy of sensor signals is sufficient. Hence, anytime at
a drop out of the auxiliary energy a standardized indication is ensured.

Table 4.36-2: System
Rated values kV 72.5 ... 170
Temperature range °C −40 ... +85
Requirements IEC 61243-5
Max. cable length between electrode and m 12

evaluating processor unit
Table 4.36-3: Evaluating Processor Unit
Rated values Unit Value
Kind of protection IP 54
Operational temperature °C −25 ... +55 °C
Auxiliary voltage V DC/AC 24 ... 230
Power consumption VA max. 1
Breaking capacity of relays 250 VDC; 0.3 A ohmic

250 VAC; 5 A ohmic
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 144 x 48 x 64
Required cut-out mm 138 x 45

4.37 Camera box

4.37.1 Introduction
The camera box contains equipment to inspect primary contacts inside the GIS. A
miniature camera is used to acquire a picture of the contacts inside the gas compart-
ments through a dedicated view port. A mobile TFT-monitor is used to visualize the
picture.
The camera box is used in combination with the light-source box

1HDG 002 030 R0004.
This document describes handling of the camera box and its contents only. A detailed
description how to acquire the contact position on GIS modules is given in GIS prod-
uct documentation.
4.37.2 Security notice

CAUTION The camera box contains sensitive electronic devices that require careful han-
dling. Prevent unnecessary mechanical stress to the camera-box. Shock or bump
can result in damage of the devices.
Do not expose the devices to high humidity, dust, steam, oil, smoke, direct sunlight
etc.
Do not use thinners or other chemical reagent. Use a soft cloth for cleaning only.
Use only the specified adaptors and power sources.
The power supply voltage must be within 100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Check your sup-
ply voltage before connecting any devices.
As long as the power cord is inserted in the power outlet, the devices are con-
nected to the power supply, even when they are turned off.
To unplug the devices, always pull at the plug! Never pull at the cable to prevent
damages at the cable.
Never connect or disconnect cables when the power cord is inserted in the power
outlet.
Note It doesn’t mean that the monitor is broken if some light or dark color dots appear on the
LCD. It’s a reasonable situation to the TFT-LCD-technology. Up to 5 pixel faults are
normal.

4.37.3 Contents of the camera box

The contents of the camera-box are:
1 7
8
2
3
6
1 − Camera with connection cable 6 − Mobile TFT-Monitor with stand

2 − Adapter cable 7 − Viewport adapter
3 − Extension cable for camera 8 − Power supply adapter
4 − Extension cable for power supply 9 − Documentation − not shown
5 − Plug-In power supply
Figure 4.37-1: Contents of the camera box
Note The instructions given below are based on the specific hardware and software version
of the used components. Therefore these instructions can be used as example,
deviations in naming or displays are possible. Please refer to the provided manufacturer
documentation in case of ambiguity.

4.37.4 Operation of the monitor

4.37.4.1 Operating elements
1
2
3
1 − SOURCE button 4 − VOL− button

2 − VOL+ button 5 − Power(standby) ON/OFF button
3 − ANS button 6 − Power indicator (LED)
Figure 4.37-2: Front view of monitor
7 − DC power input socket

8 − Main power switch
9 − Video Input 1 socket
Figure 4.37-3: Rear view of monitor

4.37.4.2 Turn on the monitor

1. First make sure that main power switch (8) is set to ON.
2. Then press the Power (standby) ON/OFF button (5) once
(now the power indicator (6) should be highlighted).
4.37.4.3 Select the input channel

The monitor has inputs for several video signal sources. After startup the selected
input channel is “Video 1” (9).
To change the input channel press the button “SOURCE” (1) once or several times.
The input channel is changed in circular order from
S AV1 – signal from RCA input Video 1
S AV2 – signal from RCA input Video 2
S SVIDEO – signal from SVIDEO input
S PC-RGB – signal from VGA input
After pressing the SOURCE (1) button the screen displays the actual input channel,
e.g. “AV1”.
Note If there is no input signal, the screen will display “NO SIGNAL”.
4.37.4.4 Adjusting the picture settings

Press the ANS button (3) to select successively brightness, contrast or color setting.
The screen shows a symbol for the actual setting.
Brightness setting
Contrast setting
Color setting
Then press VOL+ (2) or VOL− (4) to adjust the setting.

4.37.5 Installation
Note Before opening the camera box, make sure that the camera box is placed on a flat,
horizontal support with enough amount of space. The stands of the camera box must be
located at the bottom side.
1. Take the monitor out of the box, flip the stand to an acceptable position and
fix this position. Place the monitor on a flat horizontal support.
2. Connect the adaptor cable to the monitor:
The RCA plug to VIDEO Input 1 (marked with “1”) of the monitor and
the DC plug to Power supply input the monitor (marked with “2”).
Figure 4.37-4: Connecting the adaptor cable to the monitor

3. Connect the extension cable to the 5 pin DIN plug of the adapter cable
(marked with “4”).
4. Connect the camera to the other end of the extension cable.
5. Connect the power supply output to the DC jack of the adaptor cable
(marked “3”).
6. Insert the plug-in power supply into the multiple socket outlet.
CAUTION The power supply voltage must be within 100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
Check your supply voltage before connecting any devices.
7. Connect the cord of the multiple socket outlet to a suitable power outlet. If
necessary use the supplied power supply adapter.

4.37.6 De-Installation
De-Installation takes place in opposite order as installation
1. Turn off the monitor by pressing the Power (standby) ON/OFF button (5)
2. Unplug the power cord from outlet
3. Disconnect all cables
4. Store all parts into the camera box by use of the appropriate cut−outs. Place
the monitor with the screen face down to prevent scratches or other damage
to the sensitive TFT-screen.
5. Flip the stand of the monitor to the back of the monitor.
6. Place the documentation flatly on top of the stored parts.
7. When closing the camera box take care that no mechanical stress can occur
that may damage the parts
4.37.7 Trouble shooting

The power indicator (6) of the monitor is not highlighted
− Verify that the main power switch (7) of the monitor is in position ON.
− Check the connection from the power supply to the monitor
− Make sure that the power outlet provides a suitable voltage
The monitor displays “NO SIGNAL”

− Check that the camera is connected properly to input channel AV1
− Check that you have selected the correct input channel
(“4.37.4.3 Select the input channel”)
The screen of the monitor is black

− Make sure that the protection cap of the camera is removed.
− Check the connection of the camera to the monitor
− Check that you have selected the correct input channel
(“4.37.4.3 Select the input channel”)
− Check the brightness settings of the monitor
(“4.37.4.4 Adjusting the picture settings”)
The picture displayed by the monitor is not clear

− Check the brightness settings of the monitor
(“4.37.4.4 Adjusting the picture settings”)
− Check that the monitored objects are well illuminated.

4.37.8 Part list

Figure Description ABB part number
CCD camera assembled 1HDG 912 018 R0003
Adapter cable 1HDG 812 011 R0001
Audio-extension cable 1HDG 002 047 P0001
Mobile TFT-Monitor 8” 1HDG 832 002 R0001
Plug-in power supply, 12V, 2A 1HDG 002 040 R0001
Multiple socket outlet 1FKD 794 947 P0002
View port adapter 1HDG 111 102 R0002
Power supply adapter
Documentation 1HDG818000


Construction
Housing and door steel plate

Dimension approx. (H, W, D): 2000 mm x 800 mm x 600 mm.
Control panel section Glass insert

Figure 4.38-1: Free standing control cubicle
Fastening Points
Via four screwings in the ground
Design
“Design”-bent steel door plates, top edge of the door terminates with cubicle, locking
with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at 170°, side- and back-
wall enclosed, as adjacent cubicle also with separation plate as side wall with cutout
for the overhead ring conduit channel, varnished rack, unscrewable supporting lugs.
Conventional Control
Control panel section, back side with mounting plate and plug mounting plate, lateral
wire frame, plug cutout ‘large’.
SCADA Systems (SCADA = Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition)
Glass insert in front door, swing frame with swivel lever handles, back side with
mounting plate, lateral wire frame, plug cutout ‘large’.
Swing Frame
Optional, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at 170°, locking with swivel lever handle.

Completion
Swing frame and cubicle door may be fixed selectively to the left or right, but main
door and swing frame always in contrary sense, each two holders left and right side
for vertical mounting of terminal rows. Cable clampbar and also PE-bar stacked above
left and right side, bag for circuit diagrams.
Floor Plate
External cabling passes the floor plate through three right, middle and left positioned
openings with canted edges, lockable via slidable canted plates, sliding area 5 cm,
tightness on the part of the builder with mounting foam.
Selective also solid floor plate with cable glands.
Heat Exchange
S Way of mounting: row cubicle
S Room temperature max. 40°C / 104°F
S Inner cubicle temperature max. 55°C / 131°F
Based on this data an analytically interchangeable power loss for the surface of
340 W is given, for normal operation the value is limited to 280 W.
Table 4.38-1: Power Losses
Conventional Control SCADA Systems
Control unit ventilation − 23 W −
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Sum AC Permanent Load 1W 24 W 1W
Alarm annunciator 10 W − −
Position indicators 8W − −
Aux. relays 15 W − −
Bay control unit REC580 − 120 W −
Bay control unit REF542 − − 50 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Sum DC Permanent Load 35 W 122 W 52 W
Climatic Measures
The normal heat emission via the surface is sufficient also for a second set of bay
controller and / or single protection relays. With a possible inner air circulation a con-
stant temperature in the housing and an improved heat emission via the surface is
obtained.


Construction

Dimension approx. (H, W, D): 2000 mm x 1200 mm x 600 mm

Fastening Points
Design
“Design”-bent steel door plates, top edge of the door terminates with cubicle, locking
with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at 170°, side- and back-
wall enclosed, as adjacent cubicle also with separation plate as side wall with cutout
for the overhead ring conduit channel, varnished rack, no vertical strut between both
doors, unscrewable supporting lugs.
mounting plate and plug mounting plate, lateral wire frame, plug cutout ‘large’.
Swing Frame

Completion
Swing frame and cubicle doors may be fixed selectively to the left or right, but main
Floor Plate
Heat Exchange
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.


Construction

Dimension approx. (H, W, D) 1800 mm x 800 mm x 600 mm
Figure 4.40-1: Integrated control cubicle
Fastening Points
Via terminal points on back-side U- or L-straps
Design
“Design”-bent steel door plates with lockable door, top edge of the door terminates
with cubicle, locking with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at
170°, unscrewable supporting lugs.
Control panel section, back side with mounting plate, lateral wire frame, plug cutout
‘large’.
Glass insert in front door, swing frame, back side with mounting plate, lateral wire
frame, plug cutout ‘large’.
SMART-GIS
frame, plug cutout ‘small’, plug base mounted and varnished in cubicle colour.
Swing Frame

Completion
left and right side.
Floor Plate
External cabling passes the floor plate through left and right positioned openings with
canted edges, lockable via slidable canted plates and mounting foam, sliding area
5 cm, tightness on the part of the builder with mounting foam.
Heat Exchange
S Mounting in bay partition dimension 1200 mm
(that means way of erection single housing exposed on all sides)
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Bay control unit REF542 − -- 50 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.


Construction

Dimension approx. (H, W, D): 2000 mm x 1200 mm x 600 mm

Fastening Points
Design
Locking with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at 170°, side-
and backwall enclosed, as adjacent cubicle also with separation plate as side wall
with cutout for the overhead ring conduit channel, no vertical strut between both
doors, unscrewable supporting lugs.
Swing Frame

Completion
Swing frame and cubicle doors may be fixed selectively to the left or right, but main
Floor Plate
Heat Exchange
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.


Construction

Dimension approx. (H, W, D) 1850 mm x 800 mm x 600 mm
Figure 4.42-1: Integrated control cubicle
Fastening Points
Via terminal points on back-side U- or L-straps
Design
Door plates with lockable door, locking with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle
170°, lockable at 170°, unscrewable supporting lugs.
Control panel section, back side with mounting plate, lateral wire frame, plug cutout
‘large’.
frame, plug cutout ‘large’.
SMART-GIS
frame, plug cutout ‘small’, plug base mounted and varnished in cubicle colour.
Swing Frame

Completion
left and right side.
Floor Plate
External cabling passes the floor plate through left and right positioned openings with
canted edges, lockable via slidable canted plates and mounting foam, sliding area
5 cm, tightness on the part of the builder with mounting foam.
Heat Exchange
S Mounting in bay partition dimension 1200 mm
(that means way of erection single housing exposed on all sides)
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Bay control unit REF542 − -- 50 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.


Construction

Dimension approx. (H, W, D): 2000 mm x 800 to 1000 mm x 600 mm.

Fastening Points
Design
Locking with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°, lockable at 170°, side-
and backwall enclosed, as adjacent cubicle also with separation plate as side wall
with cutout for the overhead ring conduit channel, varnished rack, unscrewable sup-
porting lugs.
Swing Frame

Completion
Floor Plate
Heat Exchange
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.

4.44 Outdoor Control Cubicle

Construction
Housing and door aluminium plate

Dimension approx. (H, W, D): 1800 mm x 1200 mm x 620 mm.
Figure 4.44-1: Outdoor control cubicle
Fastening Points
Design
Glass insert in front door, locking with swivel lever handles, door aperture angle 170°,
lockable at 170°, unscrewable supporting lugs, roof for raining protection, swing
frame, aperture angle 170°,lockable at 170°, locking with swivel lever handles, back
side with mounting plate and plug mounting plate.
Base Frame
Optional, height 300 mm.

Completion
Floor Plate
tightness on the part of the builder with mounting foam, selective also solid floor plate
with cable glands.
Note All technical data of the control cubicle is described in detail in chapter “Equipment and
Functional Descriptions” in document 1HDG 518 404 “Control Cubicle (Outdoor)”.
Heat Exchange
S Way of mounting: single cubicle
S Ambient temperature max. 40°C / 104°F
Control unit ventilation -- 23 W --
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Alarm annunciator 10 W -- --
Position indicators 8W -- --
Aux. relays 15 W -- --
Bay control unit REC580 -- 120 W --
Bay control unit REF54x -- -- 50 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Climatic Measures
obtained.

4.45 Control Cubicle (Outdoor)

Material, Resistance to Corrosion
S Housing and cover: Plate AlMg3F24, thickness 2 mm
S Swing frame: Plate AlMg3F24, thickness 3 mm, varnished
S Inner assembly plates: Varnished steel plate or aluminium plate,
2 mm thickness
S Hinges, locks, screws, etc.: Resistant to corrosion
Varnish
The control cubicles are dependant from supplier varnished wet or coated with
powder. If they are coated with powder, the desired colour can be applied with another
wet varnishing. To every wet varnish a fungicide is added.
S Thickness of dry film 80μm
S Adhesive strength acc. to DIN EN ISO 2409 <= Gt 1
S Degree of hardness acc. to ISO 2815
S Temperature resistance 150°C permanent load
S Degree of brilliance satin-frosted <60° 15-30%
S Standard colours:
− NCS 0530-R80B light blue
− NCS 1704-Y15R light beige
− RAL 7032 pebble grey
Protection acc. to IEC 60529

S IP54 − (weatherproof hood is intended)
Dimensional Stability
S Acc. to DIN ISO 2768 P1, P2 “medium”
Stability
S Complete cubicle:
After mounting on site, alignment and fixing of the cubicles the saw-tooth
curve of the top edge of the door exceeds not more than 3 mm.
S Doors:
Designed for an additional load of 100 kg in the center of gravity of the door
S Swing frame:
Designed for an additional load of 200 kg
Seismic withstand capability acc. to IEC 60068-3-3
This standard includes strength specifications acc. to class AG5 with 5 m/s2 resp. in
the application class III with 15 m/s2 for the acceleration of decks.

4.45.1 Earthing of Protective Conductors

Cubicle Parts
All parts of the control cubicle are connected in a conductive way with each other. Var-
nished parts are earthed on the screwing with a minimum of two diametral placed con-
tact washers.
The doors are connected to the cubicle with two flexible CU-strips top and bottom with
a minimum of 4 mm2.
The swing frame ist connected to the cubicle with two flexible CU-strips top and bot-
tom with a minimum of 16 mm2.
Cubicle Earthing
From the earthing bar to the earthing of the building.


Material, Protection to Corrosion
S Housing frame of free standing cubicles:
galvanized tinned, thickness 3 mm
S Cover:
Varnished, thickness 2 mm
S Inner separation plates of free standing cubicles:
Sendzimir tinned or zinc-aluminium alloy, thickness 2 mm
S Inner assembly plates, floor base plates, etc.:
S Swing frame:
S Hinges, locks, screws, etc.:
Protected from corrosion
Galvanization
Sendzimir tinning or zinc-aluminium alloy:

Thickness of coat bothsides: Min. 12 μm.
Cold galvanization is restricted to treating of edges and refinish treatment.
Varnish
wet varnishing. To every wet varnish a fungicide is added. Integrated
control cubicles are galvanized on the inside.
S Thickness of dry film 80μm
S Temperature resistance 150°C permanent load
S Standard colours:

S IP41, this is extentable up to IP54

Stability
S Complete cubicle:
S Doors:
S Swing frame:
This standard includes strength specifications acc. to class AG5 with 5 m/s2 resp. in

Cubicle Parts
tact washers.
a minimum of 4 mm2.
Cubicle Earthing


Material, Protection to Corrosion
S Housing frame of free standing cubicles:
Sendzimir tinned, thickness 2 mm
S Cover:
Varnished, thickness 2 mm
S Inner separation plates of free standing cubicles:
S Inner assembly plates, floor base plates, etc.:
Sendzimir tinned or zinc-aluminium alloy, steel plate, thickness 2 mm
S Swing frame:
Sendzimir tinned or zinc-aluminium alloy, steel plate
S Hinges, locks, screws, etc.:
Protected from corrosion
Galvanization
S Galvanization:
Thickness of coat outside: Min. 12 μm,
Thickness of coat inside: Min. 8 μm.
S Sendzimir tinning or zinc-aluminium alloy:
Thickness of coat bothsides: Min. 12 μm.
Cold galvanization is restricted to treating of edges and refinish treatment.
Varnish
wet varnishing. To every wet varnish a fungicide is added. Integrated
control cubicles are galvanized on the inside.
S Thickness of dry film 80 μm
S Temperature resistance 150 °C permanent load
S Standard colours:

S IP41, this is extentable up to IP54

Stability
S Complete cubicle:
S Doors:
S Swing frame:
This standard includes strength specifications acc. to class AG5 mit 5 m/s2 resp. in

Cubicle Parts
tact washers.
a minimum of 4 mm2.
Cubicle Earthing

4.48 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle

General
For having enough mounting space with integrated control cubicles for all required
devices a special mounting and wiring system is used.
Mounting
The wiring system consists of prefabricated parts which are mounted to a wiring
frame. The frame mainly is made of vertical bearing rail on the sides, horizontal
mounting bars, mounting straps and wiring profiles. This frame replaces the back-side
mounting plate. The mounting bars on the front side are elaborated according to the
DIN mounting plates. Here are the single devices snapped on. Single vertical posi-
tioned mounting bars on the side of the cubicle are provided for mounting of terminal
bars. In the wiring frame distributed on the height some single horizontal covers inten-
tionally are carried out a bit larger for being able to grip behind the frame.
Wiring
For this wiring system the wiring is established in the back area. The wiring is totally
accessible from the front.
Advantages
S Because of the establishment of wiring in the back area, cable channels are
not required. With this technic it’s possible to reduce the volume of the
control cubicle compared to a free standing type about approx. 45 %.
S The wiring is done with automatically produced single wires.
S Because of the loose distribution of the wiring over the complete back side of
the control cubicle and division of wiring and device area the air ciculation is
improved, a good heat emission is given. Special hot spots as it happens in
filled-up cable channels are avoided.
S A fast and uncomplicated accessibility is given for refinished wiring or
changes. There is always enough space in the wiring area for additional
wiring.
S In case of a faulty device the device may be changed immediately and
service-friendly because the single wirings for the device connections are
passed from behind to front via special supporting cams. The connecting
wires stay because of the cams in position and make any confusion im-
possible.

4.49 Heat Balance of the Control Cubicle

Installed Power Losses
The total power consumption of a local control cubicle includes supplying different cu-
bicle-external components, which are not to be considered for a rating.
Furthermore single consumers don’t have any influence to the heat emission during
permanent operation.
Therefore the following positions of electrical power may be excluded for the calcula-
tion of the installed heating power in the control cubicle:
AC:
S Light: Only at open door
S Anti-condensation heaters of the local control cabinet:
Controlled by thermostat and hygrostat
S Anti-condensation heaters of the operating mechanisms: External load
S Socket: External load
DC:
S Relays circuit breaker supervision: External load
S PISA operating mechanism assemblies: External load
S All short-time and peak loads: External load
With this the maximum heating efficiency in worst case is calculated (under the
assumption electric power equals heating efficiency) from the components fan, micro
circuit breaker and computing assembly (Table 4.49-1).
With this a sum of 146 W as installed power loss results for a control cubicle with one
computing assembly of the type REC580, 53 W with a combined control and protec-
tion unit type REF54x.
For further computing assemblies corresponding power losses have to be added, an

additional fan is not needed.
The internal consumption of eventually build-in protection relays is dependant of the

type of relay used and may differ extremely. For this reason this is not mentioned in
the typical overview.

Control unit ventilation -- 23 W --
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Alarm annunciator 10 W -- --
Position indicators 8W -- --
Aux. relays 15 W -- --
Bay control unit REC580 -- 120 W --
Bay control unit REF542 -- -- 50 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Radiating Power Loss
For a local control cubicle in steel plate design the power loss via the radiation on the
surface is determined in dependance of different agreements.
Determining factors are the ambient temperature and the maximum permissible inner
temperature for the cubicle.

4.50 Power Demand Local Control Cubicle

The power demand per bay is subject to the type of control technology and
switchgear.
The consumption values to be considered for a typical bay (double busbar with circuit
breaker, earthing switch and three disconnector / earthing switches) are displayed in
the table on page 2 hereunder.
It has to be distinguished between the following types of consumers respectively

loads:
Permanent Loads
AC
S Cubicle lighting (with open cubicle door)
S Heater for control cubicle
S Heater for operating mechanisms (depends on the control voltage:
from 60 VAC to 125 VAC / up to 250 VAC optional)
S Ventilation for bay control unit
S MCBs for AC-circuits
DC
S Alarm annunciators (max. at lamp test)
S Position indicators
S Auxiliary relays
S Contactors CB control
S Bay control unit REC580
S PISA process interfaces / drives
S MCBs for DC-circuits
Short Time Load, 1 sec. - 30 sec.
DC
S Hydraulic pump CB, 24 sec.
S Motors for disconnector / earthing switch, 1 sec.
S Interlocking solenoid
disconnector / earthing switch,
1 sec. (only ELK-04)
For the max. power demand sum only one drive and interlocking solenoid together
with the hydraulic pump function is relevant at the same time.

Dyn. Peak Load, < 1 sec.
DC
S Switch-on peak
Trip / Close coils CB,
20 ms
Starting Current
S Hydraulic pump CB
50 ms
S Operating mechanism motors for disconnector / earthing switch,
50 ms
For the max. power demand sum only the hydraulic pump and one operating
mechanism motor is relevant at the same time.
Temporarely Load
AC
S Panel socket outlet
Simultaneity
For the calculation of simultaneity-factors it has to be considered, that

S a busbar protection can trip all circuit breakers simultaneously.
S the hydraulic pump of circuit breaker will start to run only after an ON-com-
mand or subject to the position of the spring travel monitoring level to avoid
simultaneous start of all CB pumps and hereby high loads.
S under normal conditions only one operating mechanism motor will run at a
certain time in one bay (Double Command Blocking)
Protection Relays
The power demand of possibly built in protection relays strongly depends on the type
and make of the relay and may vary considerably. Due to this reason the table below
does not show typical Watt figures for such relays. Therefore this demand is not taken
under consideration in the table for the typical power demand below.

Table 4.50-1: Typical Power Demand for Local Control Panels
ELK-04 EXK-0
Conventional Computerised Conventional Computerised

Control Control (SCS). hybrid Control Control (SCS). hybrid
Panel lighting 40 W 40 W 40 W 40 W 40 W 40 W
Panel heating 75 W 75 W 75 W 45 W 45 W 45 W
Heater operating 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W
mechanisms
Control unit ventilation -- -- 23 W -- -- 23 W
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W 1W 1W 1W
Sum AC 286 W / 306 W 286 W / 306 W 309 W / 329 W 256 W / 276 W 256 W / 276 W 279 W / 299 W
Permanent Load
Alarm annunciator 10 W -- -- 10 W -- --
Position indicators 8W -- -- 8W -- --
Auxiliary relays 15 W -- -- 15 W -- --
Contactors CB control 21 W 21 W 21 W 21 W 21 W 21 W
Bay control unit REC580 -- -- 120 W -- -- 120 W
Bay control unit REF54x -- 60 W -- -- 60 W --
PISA process interface -- -- -- -- -- --
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W 2W
Sum DC
Permanent Load 56 W 83 W 143 W 56 W 83 W 143 W
Hydraulic pump 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W

Operating mechanism 300 W 300 W 300 W 150 W 150 W 150 W
motor
Interlocking solenoid 30 W 30 W 30 W -- -- --
Sum DC
Short time Load 990 W 990 W 990 W 810 W 810 W 810 W
Trip coil I CB, 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W

L/R = 40 ms
Trip coil II CB, 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W
L/R = 40 ms
Hydraulic pump, 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W 660 W
IA / IN = 4
Operating 300 W 300 W 300 W 150 W 150 W 150 W
mechanism motor,
IA / IN = 7
Sum DC
Starting Load 1560 W 1560 W 1560 W 1410 W 1410 W 1410 W
Panel socket outlet 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W
Sum AC
Time to time load 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W


Control, Indication, Signals
4.51.1 Circuit-Breaker Control ON

REMOTE SIGNAL
DISCONNECTOR INTERMEDIATE
POSITION INTERLOCKING
PUMP PREVENTION
ONBLOCKING
Figure 4.51-1: Schematic of Circuit Breaker Control “ON”
Activation
The closing coil Y1 is alternatively activated by (Figure 4.51-1):

S ON pushbutton S0E locally
S Remote signal
Deactivation
The closing coil Y1 is deactivated by an auxiliary-switch contact S0 in the circuit-

breaker.
Interlocks
The circuit-breaker can be operated only when the disconnectors are in a defined ON
or OFF position (intermediate position interlocking).
Pump prevention
Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit-breaker with a

continuous ON pulse and a simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching (ON/
OFF) is permissible. Manual switching on is possible when an OFF pulse is applied.

ON blocking
ON blocking occurs when the driving energy is too low and/or the SF6 pressure is too
low.
Operation counter
The operation counter P201, which records all the making operations of the circuit-
breaker, is connected in parallel to the making coil.
4.51.2 Circuit-Breaker Control OFF

REMOTE PROTECTION I PROTECTION II
OFFBLOCKING OFFBLOCKING
OFF OFF
I II
Figure 4.51-2: Schematics of Circuit Breaker Control “OFF”
Activation
The first breaking coil Y2 is alternatively activated by (Figure 4.51-2):

S OFF pushbutton S0A locally
S Remote signal
S Protection OFF signal
The second breaking coil Y3 is wired up potential free to terminals and can be acti-
vated by a second independent protection OFF signal.
Deactivation
The breaking coils Y2 and Y3 are deactivated by an auxiliary-switch contact S0 of the

circuit-breaker.
OFF blocking
OFF blocking occurs when the driving energy and/or the SF6 pressure is too low.

4.51.3 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring
GAS DEN- SPRING−TRAVEL SWITCH GAS DEN-

SITY STORED ENERGY SITY
MONITORING MONITORING
GAS SU- GAS SU-

PERVISION PERVISION
OFF−BLOCKING I ON AR OFF−BLOCKING I
BLOCK. BLOCK.
Figure 4.51-3: Schematics of Circuit Breaker Supervision
Blocking
Operation of the circuit-breaker is blocked when (Figure 4.51-3):

S SF6 pressure is too low
S Driving energy is too low
The corresponding values are monitored at the SF6 extinguishing gas compartment by
the travel stroke switch (driving energy) and by the density monitor (SF6 pressure).
Synchronous operation supervision
For circuit breakers with single pole operating mechanisms the synchronous operation
of the three poles is supervised. This causes an automatic trip of the circuit breaker if,
after a delay of 2 s., all poles are not in the same switch position.

4.51.4 Hydraulic-Pump Control
S0 K208
MOTOR ON CO BLOCKING
TRAVEL STROKE SWITCH
K210
K208
K208 K210
P202
K208
Figure 4.51-4: Schematics Hydraulic Pump Control
Control
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following preconditions

(Figure 4.51-4):
S Circuit-breaker switched ON and
”Motor ON” travel stroke switch closed
or
S Circuit-breaker switched OFF and
“CO Blocking” travel stroke switch closed
This results in sequential starting of the hydraulic pump motors. The time relay K210
limits the pump running time.
The pump pressurizes oil into the storage cylinder, whose piston tensions the disk-
spring column via tie-rods. The pump is deactivated via the travel stroke switch when
sufficient spring force has been achieved.
Failure of pump limit switch
If the pump limit switch should fail, a mechanically actuated overflow valve prevents:
S Disk-spring column from being overstressed
S Unacceptable high oil pressure
Running counter LS-hydraulic pump
The start-up counter P202, in parallel to the hydraulic pump motor, records all starting
operations of the hydraulic pump

4.51.5 Disconnector / Earthing-Switch Control

ON OFF
DISCONNECTOR DISCONNECTOR
SWITCH SWITCH
OFF ON
INTERLOCK
EARTHING EARTHING
SWITCH SWITCH
ON OFF
DUAL OPERATION INTERLOCK
DEACTIVATION
LIMIT SWITCHES
ON OFF
DISCONNECTOR/
SOLENOID EARTHING SOLENOID
SWITCH ON/OFF
Figure 4.51-5: Schematics of the Disconnector/Earthing Switch (control circuits)
The system is switched ON and OFF using the appropriate pushbuttons

(Figure 4.51-5). Once the switch interlock and the dual operation interlock have been
scanned and released, the ON or OFF control contactor responds, it remains locked
in and controls the corresponding solenoid and driving motor.
The actuated solenoid mechanically unlocks the operating mechanism. The final posi-
tion of the disconnector or earthing switch is mechanically achieved by the non-ener-
gized solenoid.
Activation
The disconnector and its relevant earthing switch are activated and deactivated by the
clockwise and counterclockwise rotation of the driving motor.
Deactivation
The motor and the solenoid are electrically deactivated by means of limit switches.


Control
ON OFF
EARTHING EARTHING
SWITCH SWITCH
OFF ON
INTERLOCK
DUAL OPERATION INTERLOCK
DEACTIVATION
LIMIT SWITCHES
ON OFF
EARTHING
SWITCH
ON/OFF
Figure 4.51-6: Schematics of Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity (control cir-
cuits)
Activation
The system is switched ON and OFF using the appropriate pushbuttons

(Figure 4.51-6). Once the switch interlock and the dual operation interlock have been
scanned and released, the ON or OFF control contactor responds and controls the
corresponding solenoid and driving motor.
When deactivated, the driving motor tightens a spring. When activated, the motor
starts and releases the interlock for the tightened spring. The equipment is switched
on.
Deactivation
The motor are electrically deactivated by means of limit switches.

4.51.7 Functions on Bay Level

Double command lockout
The double command lockout prevents the disconnectors or earthing switches in a

bay from carrying out more than one switch command at a time. Additionally it is pre-
vented that opposing commands cause damage to the operating mechanism.
Hand crank electrical interlocking
The insertion hole for the hand crank, on disconnectors and earthing switches, is
closed by a sliding plate. If at the local control cubicle the interlocking requirements for
the switching mechanism are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of a
solenoid. When the hand crank is inserted into the insertion hole, this will be recorded
by a limit switch of the appropriate switching device. An electrical activation of the
drive is not possible.
End position interlocking
Disconnectors and earthing switches are lockable in the end position. A limit switch
causes the interlocking chain of the switching mechanism to be blocked, so that ac-
tivation of the drive is not possible.
Circuit protection
Due selectivity requirements the loads in the bay (for example drives of switching de-
vices, cubicle heating, etc.) are divided into different circuits by miniature circuit
breakers.
S AC
− Heating and lighting control cubicle
− Bay heating
S DC
− Circuit breaker control
− Disconnector and earthing switch control
− Disconnector and earthing switch motors
− Hydraulic pump motor
− Alarms
− Bay interlocking
− Station interlocking
− Protection-OFF II
If the disconnector and earthing switch supply voltage fails, the control voltage to the
switching mechanisms is interrupted, too.

4.51.8 Position Indication

LOCAL
AUXILIARY
SWITCH
CON-
TACTS
Figure 4.51-7: Schematics of Position Indicatins
The positions of the high-voltage switching devices are displayed by bar-type position
indicators in the mimic diagram of the control cubicle (Figure 4.51-7). The position
indicators are activated by the auxiliary switches in the high-voltage switching devices.
Position indicators
The position indicators have three display positions (Figure 4.51-8):
ON OFF Intermediate position

Malfunction
Figure 4.51-8: Position Indicatiors

4.51.9 Alarm Signals

SIGNAL I SIGNAL II
SIGNALLING UNIT
Figure 4.51-9: Schematics Alarm Signalling
Activation
The input voltages for the alarm signals are each fed to an electronic switching circuit
via optocouplers and resistor dividers (Figure 4.51-9).
LED displays
The LED displays are directly activated by the switching circuit and they are powered
by the supply voltage.
If a fault signal is applied for longer than approx. 100 ms, the appropriate LED flashes
and the signal is stored.
All incoming fault signals are indicated by the LED rapidly flashing. Faults that have
been rectified but not yet acknowledged are indicated by the LED flashing in phase
opposition.
Acknowledgement
When the acknowledgement button has been operated:

− The LED stops flashing and is permanently lit if the fault signal is still applied
− The LED is extinguished if the fault signal is no longer applied


Control, Indication, Signals for SCADA systems
(SCADA = Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition)
4.52.1 Circuit-Breaker Control ON

REMOTE SIGNAL
OFF
REMOTE SIGNAL
LOCAL OPERATION
INTERLOCKING
OPERATION COUNTING
BAY CONTROL
UNIT
PUMP PREVENTION
ON−BLOCKING
Figure 4.52-1: Schematics of Circuit Breaker Control “ON”
Activation
The closing coil Y1 can be activated by either of the following (Figure 4.52-1):
S Switching ON on the display of the bay control unit
S Remote signal
Deactivation
The closing coil Y1 is deactivated by an auxiliary-switch contact S0 in the circuit-

breaker.
Interlocks
The circuit-breaker can be operated only when the disconnectors are in a defined ON
or OFF position (intermediate position interlocking).
Pump prevention
Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit-breaker with a

continuous ON pulse and a simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching (ON/
OFF) is permissible. Manual switching ON applied manually to the coil is possible,
when an OFF pulse is applied.
1HDG 118 650 G en 07.02.2006 EXTMEHA 17.02.2006 CHSVOTH 4.52-1

ON blocking
ON blocking occurs when the driving energy is too low and/or the SF6 pressure is too
low.
Operation counting
All switchings of the circuit breaker are recorded by the bay control unit.
4.52.2 Circuit-Breaker Control OFF

REMOTE SIGNAL
PROTECTION I PROTECTION II
OFF
REMOTE SIGNAL
LOCAL OPERATION
INTERLOCKING
BAY CON-
TROL UNIT
OFF-BLOCKING OFF−BLOCKING
OFF I OFF II
Figure 4.52-2: Schematics Circuit Breaker Control “OFF”
Activation
The first breaking coil Y2 is alternatively activated by (Figure 4.52-2):

S switching OFF on the display of the bay control unit
S a remote signal
S a protection OFF signal
The second breaking coil Y3 is wired up potential free to terminals and can be acti-
vated by a second independent protection OFF signal.
Deactivation
The breaking coils Y2 and Y3 are deactivated by an auxiliary-switch contact S0 of the

circuit-breaker.
OFF blocking
OFF blocking occurs when the driving energy and/or the SF6 pressure is too low.

4.52.3 Circuit-Breaker Monitoring
GAS DENSITY SPRING−TRAVEL SWITCH GAS DENSITY

MONITORING STORED ENERGY MONITORING
OFF−BLOCKING I ON AR OFF−BLOCKING I
BLOCK. BLOCK.
Figure 4.52-3: Schematics of Circuit Breaker Monitoring
Blocking
Operation of the circuit-breaker is blocked when (Figure 4.52-3):

S The SF6 pressure is too low
S The energy stored in the operating mechanism is too low
The corresponding values are monitored at the SF6 extinguishing gas compartment by
the travel stroke switch (driving energy) and by the density monitor (SF6 pressure).
Synchronous operation supervision
of the three poles is supervised. This causes an automatic trip of the circuit breaker if,
after a delay of 2 s., all poles are not in the same switch position.

4.52.4 Hydraulic Pump Control
S0 K208
MOTOR ON CO BLOCK
SPRING TRAVEL SWITCH
K210
K208
K210
Operation
counter
K208 K208 Bay control unit

−
Control
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following preconditions

(Figure 4.52-4):
S Circuit-breaker switched ON and
“Motor ON” travel stroke switch closed
or
S Circuit-breaker switched OFF and
“CO Blocking” travel stroke switch closed
This results in sequential starting of the hydraulic pump motors. The time relay K210
limits the pump running time.
The pump pressurizes oil into the storage cylinder, whose piston tensions the disk-
spring column via tie-rods. The pump is deactivated via the travel stroke switch when
sufficient spring force has been achieved.
Failure of pump limit switch
In case of failure of the pump limit switch a mechanically operated safety valve pre-
vents:
S Overcharging of the disk springs
S Build-up of an unpermissibly high system pressure
Hydraulic pump start counter
The number of all starts of the circuit breaker’s hydraulic pump is registered by a
counter incorporated in the bay control unit.

4.52.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Control

REMOTE SIGNAL
ON OFF
ON OFF
REMOTE SIGNAL
LOCAL OPERATION DISCONNECTOR DISCONNECTOR
BAY INTERLOCKING OFF ON
CONTROL
UNIT
EARTHING EARTHING
SWITCH SWITCH
ON OFF
DEACTIVATION
LIMIT SWITCHES
DISCONNECTOR/
SOLENOID EARTHING SOLENOID
SWITCH ON/OFF
ON OFF
Figure 4.52-5: Schematics Disconnector / Earthing Switch (control circuits)
The system is switched ON and OFF either on the display of the bay control unit or by
a remote signal (Figure 4.52-5). Once the switch interlock has been scanned and re-
leased, the ON or OFF control contactor responds, it remains locked in and controls
the corresponding solenoid and operating mechanism motor.
The actuated solenoid mechanically unlocks the operating mechanism. The final posi-
tion of the disconnector or earthing switch is mechanically achieved by the non-ener-
gized solenoid.
Activation
The disconnector and its relevant earthing switch are activated and deactivated by the
clockwise and counterclockwise rotation of the driving motor.
Deactivation
The motor and the solenoid are electrically deactivated by means of limit switches.

4.52.6 Control Earthing Switch

Control Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
REMOTE SIGNAL
ON OFF
ON OFF
REMOTE SIGNAL
LOCAL OPERATION EARTHING EARTHING
BAY SWITCH SWITCH
INTERLOCKING
CONTROL OFF ON
UNIT
DEACTIVATION
LIMIT SWITCHES
EARTHING
SWITCH
ON/OFF
ON OFF
Figure 4.52-6: Schematics Earthing Switch (control circuit)
Activation
The system is switched ON and OFF either on the display of the bay control unit or by
a remote signal (Figure 4.52-6).
Once the switch interlock has been scanned and released, the ON or OFF control
contactor responds and controls the corresponding solenoid and driving motor.
When deactivated, the operating mechanism motor tightens a spring.
When activated, the motor starts and releases the interlock for the tightened spring.
The equipment is switched on.
Deactivation
The motor are electrically deactivated by means of limit switches.

4.52.7 Functions on the Bay Level

Hand crank electrical interlocking
The insertion hole for the hand crank, on disconnectors and earthing switches, is
closed by a sliding plate. If at the local control cubicle the interlocking requirements for
the switching mechanism are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of a
solenoid.
End position interlocking
causes the interlocking chain of the switching mechanism to be blocked, so that ac-
tivation is not possible.
Circuit protection
Due selectivity requirements the loads in the bay (for example drives of switching de-
vices, fan, cubicle heating, bay control unit, etc.) are divided into different circuits by
miniature circuit breakers.
S AC
− Heating, lighting and socket control cubicle
− Fan
− Bay heating
S DC
− Circuit breaker control
− Disconnector and earthing switch control
− Disconnector and earthing switch motors
− Hydraulic pump motor
− Alarms
− Bay interlocking
− Station interlocking
− Protection-OFF II
If the disconnector and earthing switch supply voltage fails, the control voltage to the
switching mechanisms is interrupted, too.

AUXILIARY
SWITCH
CONTACTS
BAY CONTROL UNIT
Figure 4.52-7: Schematics of Position Indication
The positions of the high-voltage switching devices are indicated on the display of the
bay control unit (Figure 4.52-7). Auxiliary switches of the high-voltage switching de-
vices are signalling the position indications to the bay control unit.
Position indication
The symbols of the high voltage switching devices on the display of the bay control
unit have 3 switch positions (Figure 4.52-8):
flashing
ON OFF FAULT
(INTERMEDIATE POSITION)
Figure 4.52-8: Position Indicators

4.52.9 Alarm Signalling

ALARM SIGNAL I ALARM SIGNAL II
Bay control unit
Activation
The input voltages for the alarm signals are each fed to the bay control unit via binary
inputs (Figure 4.52-9).
LED displays
The occuring alarms are displayed either:

S By a steady red light of the LEDs at the bay control unit
(in additon a red LED “ALARM” will light up)
or
S By the red “ALARM” LED only
(e. g. if all available LEDs are allocated to other signals or if further alarm
messages are required)
When the fault is eliminated, the associated LED is extinguished (even if the fault is
not acknowledged).
The acknowledgement of the alarms can be carried out either:

S At the MicroSCADA and locally at the bay control unit
or
S At the MicroSCADA only
In the last mentioned case the alarms at the bay control unit are acknowledged auto-
matically.
If an alarm is acknowledged while a fault is still applied, the associated LED and the
signalling text “ALARM” are still lighted.


Control, indication, signals for SMART-GIS
4.53.1 Circuit Breaker Control ON
Remote signal +
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON
Protection
Bay control unit
Autoreclose
ON +
Anti-pumping
ON Blocking Logic Y1
Deactivation
ON −
Operation counter
PISA
−
Optical connection
Electrical connection
Figure 4.53-1: Schematics Circuit Breaker Control “ON”
Activation
The closing coil Y1 is activated by either of the following (Figure 4.53-1):

S Locally on the bay control unit
S Remote signal
S Protection ON signal (e .g. after autoreclosure)
Deactivation
The closing coil Y1 is deactivated by the PISA (Process Interface for Sensors and
Actuators) in the circuit breaker operating mechanism.
Interlockings
The circuit breaker can only be operated if the disconnectors are in a defined ON or
OFF position (intermediate position interlocking).
Anti-Pumping
Anti-pumping keeps the circuit breaker from uncontrolled switching (pumping) in case
a continuous ON signal and an OFF pulse are simultaneously active.

ON Blocking
ON blocking is initiated if the energy stored in the operating mechanism and / or the
SF6 pressure in the circuit breaker is too low.
Operation Counter
All closing operations of the circuit breaker are accumulated by an operation counter
incorporated into the bay control unit.
4.53.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF
+ +
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
OFF
Bay control unit Main protection Back−up protection
Trip I
Trip II
OFF +
Anti-pumping
Logic Y2
OFF Blocking
Deactivation OFF −
PISA
−
Optical connection
Activation
The breaking coil Y2 is activated by either of the following (Figure 4.53-2):

S Remote signal
S Protection TRIP signal
The two protection trip signals TRIP I and TRIP II are terminated potential-free and
can be activated by two independent protection TRIP signals (e. g. main protection
and back-up protection).
Deactivation
The breaking coil Y2 is deactivated by the PISA in the circuit breaker operating
mechanism.
OFF Blocking
OFF blocking is initiated if the energy stored in the operating mechanism and / or the
SF6 pressure in the circuit breaker is too low.

4.53.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision

+ +
Rot. sensor
spring travel Density sensor Position sensors
AR- Main Back-up

function protection protection
OFF Blocking
ON Blocking
Logic
Input circuit supervision
Load circuit supervision
PISA
Y1 Y2
Figure 4.53-3: Schematics Circuit Breaker Supervision
Blocking
The circuit breaker is blocked from operation if (Figure 4.53-3):

S The energy stored in the operating mechanism is too low
S The position of the disconnector switch is undefined
The rotary sensor for the spring travel monitors the energy stored in the operating
mechanism, the gas density monitor the SF6 pressure and the position sensors (prox-
imity sensors) the position of the circuit breaker.
Load Circuit Supervision
The load circuits of the making and the breaking coil, as well as the load circuit of the
hydraulic pump are permanently monitored for interruption.
Supervision of the PISA’s Binary Inputs
The PISA’s three binary inputs for the protection signals are permanently monitored
for interruption.

ON+
Spring travel
Logic
Circuit breaker position
ON−
PISA
Control
The hydraulic pump is started (ON signal) if either one of the following conditions
prevails (Figure 4.53-4):
S The circuit breaker is closed (ON position) and
the spring travel sensor is in position “motor ON”
or
S The circuit breaker breaker is open (OFF position) and
The spring travel sensor is in position “CO blocking”
As a result, the hydraulic pump motors start sequentially. The runtime of the hydraulic
pump is limited.
The hydraulic pump delivers the hydraulic oil into the storage cylinder. The storage
cylinder’s piston then charges the set of disk springs via a tie rod. The hydraulic pump
is deactivated by the spring travel sensor when the disk springs have been sufficiently
recharged.
Failure of spring travel sensor
In case the spring travel sensor should fail, a mechanically operated safety valve
prevents:
Hydraulic Pump Start Counting
The number of all the starts of the circuit breaker’s hydraulic pump is registered by a
counter incorporated in the PISA.

4.53.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Control
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON / OFF
Bay control unit
Motor Lifting magnet
Interlocking
Logic M
Deactivation
Operation counter
PISA
Optical connection
Figure 4.53-5: Schematics Disconnector / Earthing Switch Control
Description
Switching the disconnector and the earthing switch ON or OFF is initiated by either of
the following (Figure 4.53-5):
S A remote signal
Activation
Prior to activating the respective electric lifting magnet, which effects the mechanical
unlocking, the bay control unit checks the bay-level interlocking logic (switchgear posi-
tions) and the PISA checks the process-level interlocking logic (end position interlock-
ing and electric handcrank interlocking).
The ON and OFF operation of the disconnector and the earthing switch is executed by
the right- and leht-hand rotation of the driving motor.
Deactivation
The motor and the electric lifting magnet are electrically deactivated by means of an
end position sensor and a power semiconductor in the PISA.

4.53.6 Earthing Switch Control

Earthing Switch witch Short Circuit Making Capacity Control
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON / OFF
Bay control unit
Interlocking
Logic M
Deactivation
Operation counter
PISA
−
Optical connection
Figure 4.53-6: Schematics Control of Earthing Switch witch short circuit making capacity
Activation
Switching the earthing switch witch short circuit making capacity ON or OFF is
initiated by either of the following (Figure 4.53-6):
S Remote signal
Prior to activating the respective operating mechanism motor, the bay control unit
checks the bay-level interlocking logic (switchgear positions) and the PISA checks the
process-level interlocking logic (end position interlocking and electric handcrank inter-
locking). During the OFF operation the operating mechanism motor charges a snap
spring.
During the ON operation the motor activates and releases the charged and locked
snap spring. The earthing switch witch short circuit making capacity then closes.
Deactivation
The operating mechanism motor is electrically deactivated by means of an end

position sensor and a power semiconductor in the PISA.

4.53.7 Functions on the Process Level

Electrical Handcrank Interlocking
At the disconnector/earthing switch the plug-in opening for the hand crank is closed by
a gate valve. If the PISA does not contain any locking conditions for the respctive
switching device, the actuation of the gate valve will result in its unlocking by means of
an electric lifting magnet. When the hand crank iis inserted into the plug-in opening,
this will be detected by the control system of the respective switchung device by
means of a terminal switch, so that the operation mechanism cannot be electricially
triggered.
End position Locking
Both, the disconnector and the earthing switch, can be locked in either one of the end
positions. A limit switch signals an end position to the PISA of the respective switching
device that prohibits a motor operation.

Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers in a

GIS bay (e. g. the operating mechanisms, the fans, the bay control unit etc.), micro
circuit breakers are used to distribute them onto several independent circuits:
S AC:
− Electrical power outlet and lighting in the local control cabinet
− Fans
S DC:
− Power supply circuit breaker
− Power supply disconnector / earthing switch
− Disconnector / earthing switch motors
− Hydraulic pump motors
− Bay control unit − signals
− Bay control unit − supply
− Protection TRIP II
− Making / breaking coils of the circuit breaker

Position indication
Bay control unit
Position from proximity sensors Switching device
PISA
Optical connection
Figure 4.53-7: Schematics Position Indication
The position of the individual high voltage devices of the GIS bay is detected by prox-
imity sensors and forwarded to the associated PISA. These position information are
transmitted to the bay control unit and indicated on its integrated display
(Figure 4.53-7).
Position indicators
The switchgear symbols have three different statuses on the display of the bay control
unit (Figure 4.53-8):
flashing
ON OFF FAULT


PISA module
Bay control unit
Optical connection
Activation
Alarm signals originating from the operating mechanisms are transmitted to the bay
control unit via optical fibres, all other alarm signals are hardwired to the binary inputs
of the bay control unit (Figure 4.53-9).
LED indicators
Freshly acquired alarm signals are signalled either:

S By a steady red LED on the bay control unit
(in addition a red LED “ALARM” will light up)
or
(e. g. if all LED’s are allocated to other signals or if further alarm messages
are required)
Once an alarm no longer active, the associated LED on the bay control unit extin-
guishes (regardless, whether the alarm had already been acknowledged or not).
Acknowledgment of an alarm is possible either:

S Remotely from the MicroSCADA and locally on the bay control unit
or
S From the MicroSCADA only
In the latter case all alarms are automatically reset locally, as well.
If an alarm is acknowledged, but is still active, the associated LED respectively the
“ALARM” LED remain red lit.


Control, indication, signals for SMART-GIS (circuit breaker with redundant PISA)
4.54.1 Circuit Breaker Control ON
Remote signal +
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON
(Main) Protection
Bay control unit Autoreclose
ON +
Anti-pumping
ON Blocking Logic Y1
Deactivation
ON −
Operation counter
PISA I
−
Optical connection
Figure 4.54-1: Schematics Circuit Breaker Control “ON”
Activation
The closing coil Y1 is activated by either of the following (Figure 4.54-1):

S Remote signal
S Protection ON signal (e .g. after autoreclosure)
Deactivation
The closing coil Y1 is deactivated by the PISA (Process Interface for Sensors and
Actuators) in the circuit breaker drive mechanism.
Interlockings
The circuit breaker can only be operated if the disconnectors are in a defined ON or
OFF position (intermediate position interlocking).
Anti-Pumping
Anti-pumping keeps the circuit breaker from uncontrolled switching (pumping) in case
a continuous ON signal and an OFF pulse are simultaneously active.

ON Blocking
ON blocking is initiated if the energy stored in the drive mechanism and/or the SF6
pressure in the circuit breaker is too low.
Operation Counter
All closing operations of the circuit breaker are accumulated by an operation counter
incorporated into the bay control unit.
4.54.2 Circuit Breaker Control OFF with redundant PISA
+ +
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interleocking
OFF
Bay control unit Main protection Back-up protection
TRIP I
TRIP II
+ +
OFF + OFF +
Anti-pumping Anti-pumping
Logic Y2 Logic Y3
OFF Blocking OFF Blocking
Deactivation OFF − Deactivation OFF −
PISA I PISA II
− −
Optical connection
Activation
The breaking coil Y2 is activated by either of the following (Figure 4.54-2):
S Remote signal
S Protection TRIP signal (main protection)
The breaking coil Y3 is activated by the following (Figure 4.54-2):
S Protection TRIP signal (Back-up protection)
The two protection trip signals TRIP I and TRIP II are terminated potential-free and
can be activated by two independent protection TRIP signals (e. g. main protection
and back-up protection).
Deactivation
The breaking coils Y2 and Y3 are deactivated by the PISA in the circuit breaker drive
mechanism.

OFF Blocking
OFF blocking is initiated if the energy stored in the drive mechanism and/or the SF6
pressure in the circuit breaker is too low.
4.54.3 Circuit Breaker Supervision with redundant PISA

+
Rotary sensor
spring travel Density sensor I Position sensors I
AR- Main-
function protection
OFF Blocking
ON Blocking
Logic
PISA I
Y1 Y2
Figure 4.54-3: Schematics Circuit Breaker Supervision (PISA I)

+
Spring travel switch Density sensor II Position sensors II
Back-up-
protection
OFF Blocking
On Blocking
Logic
PISA II
Y3
Figure 4.54-4: Schematics Circuit Breaker Supervision (PISA II)
Blocking
The circuit breaker is blocked from operation if (Figure 4.54-3 and Figure 4.54-4):
S The energy stored in the drive mechanism is too low
S The position of the disconnector switch is undefined

The respective values are observed by the rotary sensor spring travel (energy stored
in the drive mechanism, PISA I), respectively by the spring travel switch (energy
stored in the drive mechanism, PISA II) at the SF6 transducer and by position sensors
(proximity sensors) at the operating rods.
Load Circuit Supervision
The load circuits of the making and the breaking coil, as well as the load circuit of the
hydraulic pump are permanently monitored for interruption.
Supervision of the PISA’s Binary Inputs
The PISA’s three binary inputs for the protection signals are permanently monitored
for interruption.
ON+
Spring travel
Logic
Circuit breaker position
ON−
PISA
Control
The hydraulic pump is only started from PISA I; PISA II does not have any connection
to the hydraulic pump.
The hydraulic pump is started (ON signal) if either one of the following conditions pre-
vails (Figure 4.54-5):
S The circuit breaker is closed (ON position) and
the spring travel sensor is in position “motor ON”
or
S The circuit breaker breaker is open (OFF position) and
The spring travel sensor is in position “CO blocking”
As a result, the hydraulic pump motors start sequentially. The runtime of the hydraulic
pump is limited.
The hydraulic pump delivers the hydraulic oil into the storage cylinder. The storage
cylinder’s piston then charges the set of disk springs via a tie rod. The hydraulic pump
is deactivated by the spring travel sensor when the disk springs have been sufficiently
recharged.
Failure of spring travel sensor
In case the spring travel sensor should fail, a mechanically operated safety valve pre-
vents:

Hydraulic Pump Start Counting
The number of all the starts of the circuit breaker’s hydraulic pump is registered by a
counter incorporated in the PISA I.
4.54.5 Diconnector/Earthing Switch Control
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON / OFF
Bay control unit

+
Interlocking
Logic M
Deactivation
Operation counter
PISA
−
Optical connection
Figure 4.54-6: Schematics Disconnector/Earthing Switch Control
Description
Switching the disonnector and the earthing switch ON or OFF is initiated by either of
the following (Figure 4.54-6):
S A remote signal
Activation
Prior to activating the respective electric lifting magnet, which effects the mechanical
unlocking, the bay control unit checks the bay-level interlocking logic (switchgear posi-
tions) and the PISA checks the process-level interlocking logic (end position interlock-
ing and electric handcrank interlocking).
The ON and OFF operation of the disconnector and the earthing switch is executed by
the right- and leht-hand rotation of the driving motor.
Deactivation
The motor and the electric lifting magnet are electrically deactivated by means of an
end position sensor and a power semiconductor in the PISA.

4.54.6 Fast Acting Earthing Switch Control
Remote signal
Logic
Local operation
Interlocking
ON / OFF
Bay control unit
Interlockng
Logic M
Deactivation
Operating counter
PISA
−
Optical connection
Figure 4.54-7: Schematics Fast Acting Earthing Switch Control
Activation
Switching the fast acting earthing switch ON or OFF is initiated by either of the follow-
ing (Figure 4.54-7):
S Remote signal
Prior to activating the respective drive motor, the bay control unit checks the bay-level
interlocking logic (switchgear positions) and the PISA checks the process-level inter-
locking logic (end position interlocking and electric handcrank interlocking). During the
OFF operation the drive motor charges a snap spring.
During the ON operation the motor activates and releases the charged and locked
snap spring. The fast acting earthing switch then closes.
Deactivation
The drive motor is electrically deactivated by means of an end position sensor and a
power semiconductor in the PISA.

4.54.7 Functions on the Process Level

Electrical Handcrank Interlocking
The handcrank to manually operate the disconnector/earthing switch is closed by an

interlocking plate. In order to insert the handcrank this metal plate has to be moved to
the side. A limit switch signals the opening of the plate to the PISA of the respective
switching device that prohibits a motor operation.
End position Locking
Both, the disconnector and the earthing switch, can be locked in either one of the end
positions. A limit switch signals an end position to the PISA of the respective switching
device that prohibits a motor operation.

Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers in a

GIS bay (e. g. the drive mechanisms, the fans, the bay control unit etc.), micro circuit
breakers are used to distribute them onto several independent circuits:
S AC:
− Electrical power outlet and lighting in the local control cabinet
− Fans
S DC:
− Power supply circuit breaker
− Power supply disconnector/earthing switch
− Disconnector/earthing switch motors
− Hydraulic pump motors
− Bay control unit − signals
− Bay control unit − supply
− Protection TRIP II
− Making/breaking coils of the circuit breaker

Position indication
Bay control unit
Position from proximity sensors Switching device
PISA
Optical connection
Figure 4.54-8: Schematics Position Indication
The position of the individual high voltage devices of the GIS bay is detected by prox-
imity sensors and forwarded to the assocated PISA. These position information are
transmitted to the bay control unit and indicated on its integrated display
(Figure 4.54-8).
Position indicators
The switchgear symbols have three different statuses on the display of the bay control
unit (Figure 4.54-9):
flashing
ON OFF FAULT


PISA module
Bay control unit
Optical connection
Activation
Alarm signals originating from the drive mechanisms are transmitted to the bay control
unit via optical fibres, all other alarm signals are hardwired to the binary inputs of the
bay control unit (Figure 4.54-10).
LED indicators
Freshly acquired alarm signals are signalled either:

S By a steady red LED on the bay control unit
(in addition a red LED “ALARM” will light up)
or
(e. g. if all LED’s are allocated to other signals or if further alarm messages
are required)
Once an alarm no longer active, the associated LED on the bay control unit extin-
guishes (regardless, whether the alarm had already been acknowledged or not).
Acknowledgment of an alarm is possible either:

S Remotely from the MicroSCADA and locally on the bay control unit
or
S From the MicroSCADA only
In the latter case all alarms are automatically reset locally, as well.
If an alarm is acknowledged, but is still active, the associated LED respectively the
“ALARM” LED remain red lit.

4.55 Conventional Bay Control

Basic Concept
The bay control of a switch-bay contains all those functions, which are necessary for a
secure operation of such a bay in a switchgear. The necessary equipment is located
in the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes of the HV-apparatus. The
splitting-up is made in that way, that the contactors for the motors and, for the C.B.,
the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located in the operating mechanism
housings.
4.55.1 Function List

4.55.1.1 Basic Functions
The following basic functions of the electric control are unrenouncable contained in a
conventional bay control:
S HV-apparatus control with pushbuttons
S HV-apparatus position indication with semaphore
S Alarm indication
S Antipumping control of C.B.
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low gas density level in the C.B.-housing
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low drive force level
S Synchronized pole unit operation check for C.B.
with 1-pole auto-reclosing (AR)
S Circuit breaker operation counting
S Hydraulic pump start-up counting
S Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump
S SF6-gas density supervision
S Bay interlocking
S Protection of disconnector and earthing-switches against switching under
load
S Intermediate position interlocking of the C.B.
S Double command lockout on bay level
S Electric hand-crank interlocking
S Hand-crank hole interlocking (only ELK-04)
S End-position interlocking
S Protection of the different voltage control circuits

4.55.1.2 Additional Standard Functions

In addition to the basic functions the following functions are included as standard:
S MCBs for protection of the low voltage circuits of voltage transformer
S Off / Local / Remote switch
S Station interlocking
S Interlocking bypass switch
S Interface remote control
S Cubicle lighting
4.55.1.3 Optional Equipment

As an option the following functions can be added on request:
S Metering
S Energy counter
S Socket
S Cubicle anti-condensation heating
S Operating mechanism anti-condensation heating
S Transducers
S Interposing relay
S Auxiliary switch contact reproduction
S Bus voltage replication
S Protection systems
S Remote control systems
S Numeric interlocking systems
S Trip circuit supervision
S Synchrocheck
S Parallel switching arrangement
S Arc detection
4.55.1.4 Optional Applications

As an option the following applications can be added on request:
S Additional spare terminals (10% spare are included as standard)
S Customer defined terminal types
S Ferrules
S Special wiring / cabling (coloured, halogen free, heat-resistant)

4.55.2 Functional Description

Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers mini
circuit breakers are used to distribute them onto several independent circuits.
AC:
S Anti-condensation heating and cubicle lighting
DC:
S Circuit breaker control and TRIP I
S TRIP II
S Disconnector / earthing switch control
S Disconnector / earthing switch motors
S Hydraulic pump motor
S Interlocking
S Position Indications
S Alarm signals
Cubicle Lighting
Via a door contact switch a incandescent bulb is switched. Because of the preferential
integrated mounting of the control cubicle to the switch bay and because of the impact
of the circuit breaker operation a layout resistant to shock is chosen.
Anti-condensation Heating (optional)
The heating of the control cubicle is controlled with a regulator dependant of

hygroscopic moisture and temperature.
HV-apparatus Position Indication
The positions of the high-voltage switching devices are displayed by semaphore posi-
tion indicators in the mimic diagram of the control cubicle. They are controlled by the
auxiliary switches of the high voltage switching devices.
Alarm Indication
Up to 16 single alarms are visualized per bay via the alarm indication combination
SSM16. This alarm indication combination consists of a switch board housing
96x96 mm.
The indication display is realized with 5 mm LED’s. The respective label strips are to
be inserted in transparency foil (in double rows with up to 21 mm text length and
10 mm heigth per channel).
The indication combination is provided with buttons for LED-test and -acknowledge.
The indication voltage may rise up to DC 250 V. There is a seperated potential from
the supply voltage.
The contacts of the relays for eventual remote signalling are potential-free and layed
out as standard as normally open contact.

Off / Local / Remote-changeover Switch
The operating status is selected via a control switch on bay level:

S Off
No switching operations are possible, alarms and indications remain active
S Local
The bay can be operated only locally
S Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level or from load
distribution
Protection of Disconnectors and Earthing-switches against Switching under

Load
The interlocking prevents the disconnector and earthing-switches from switching

during the circuit-breaker being closed.
Intermediate Position Interlocking of the Circuit Breaker
The circuit-breaker can be closed only if the disconnectors are in a defined ON or

OFF position.
Electric Hand-crank-hole Interlocking (only ELK-04)
The insertion hole for the hand crank on disconnectors and earthing switches is
closed by a sliding plate. If the interlocking requirements for the switching mechanism
are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of an electrically controled
solenoid.
Electric Hand-crank Interlocking
With the hand-crank inserted the control voltage to the drive contactors will be
interrupted by limit switches.
End-position Interlocking
causes the interlocking chain of the switching mechanism to be blocked, so that
activation is not possible.
Interlocking Bypass
The complete interlocking except the end-position and the hand-crank interlocking can
be by-passed by using a key-operated switch.
Antipumping Control of Circuit Breaker
Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit-breaker with

a continuous ON pulse and a simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching
(ON / OFF) is permissible. Manual switching ON is possible when an OFF pulse is
applied.

OFF-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
OFF-Blocking occurs, if the drive energy for a TRIP or if the SF6 gas density in the
C.B.-housing is too low.
ON-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
ON-Blocking occurs, if the drive energy for a CLOSE/TRIP-cycle or if the SF6 gas
density in the C.B.-housing is too low.
Synchronized Pole Unit Operation Check for C.B. with 1-pole AR
of the three poles is supervised. This causes an automatic trip of all three poles of the
circuit breaker if, after a delay of 2 seconds, all poles are not in the same switch posi-
tion.
Circuit Breaker Operation Counting
The operation counter P201, which records all the making operations of the circuit-
breaker, is connected in parallel to the making coil.
Hydraulic Pump Start-up Counting
The start-up counter P202, in parallel to the hydraulic pump motor, registers all
starting operations of the hydraulic pump.
Control and Supervision of the Hydraulic Pump

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following
preconditions:
− Circuit-breaker switched ON
S “Motor ON” travel stroke switch closed
− Circuit-breaker switched OFF
S “CO Blocking” travel stroke switch closed
Depending on the switch position a different reserve of energy is stored in
the operating mechanism. During connected (ON) position a OCO-cycle of
the circuit breaker is possible, during opened (OFF) position the energy store
ranges from OCO- (shortly charged) and CO-cycle.
This causes after switching off the circuit breaker, that the hydraulic pump will
not start pumping immediately, which is important to the batterie of the sys-
tem, specially at a trip of the busbar protection.
The control starts the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit breaker.
Inbetween approx. 10 seconds the energy is available for switching an OCO-
cycle.
A time characteristic of the starting hydraulic pump motors results of this con-
trol. A check of the travel time will cause stop pumping in the event of a fault.

4.55.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control

Mounting
The control cubicle contains all devices which are required for controlling and super-
vising a switch bay. The operation and indication elements are positioned at the front.
With opened door of the control cubicle the access to the devices and terminal strips
installed at the back and side walls. All devices and terminals are protected against
electric shock, this means safe for fingers in the operation area, in the inner cubicle at
least safe for the outer hand.
Mosaic / Operation Panel
In the cubicle front is a mosaic or an operation panel with a circuit diagram of the
switch bay, therein positioned semaphore position indicators for position indication of
the HV-apparatus. Beneath the position indicators are the push-buttons for switching
on or off the HV-apparatus. Beneath the position indicator of the circuit breaker are
addionally two impulse counters, one for counting of the switching cycles, the other for
counting the pump start-ups of the circuit breaker. On top of the circuit diagram
an ammeter and, if neccessary, a voltmeter, each with selector switch, are placed.
Inbetween both indication instruments an alarm indication device for up to 16 alarms
is positioned. Below this, the Off / Local / Remote switch is placed, below the single
line diagram the key switch for switching without locking is placed.
Construction
In the inner cubicle are placed beside the cubicle lighting and evtl. cubicle heating
also the MCBs for the different potential circuits, relays for interlocking double
operation and interlocking, and terminal straps. The terminal straps are grouped in
a functional way.
The supervision of the circuit breaker and the drive contactors of the HV-apparatus
are not placed in the control cubicle but directly mounted in the drive housings.
Wiring
All wiring of the single devices to each other is realized with homogeneous black
switching wire, preferably with 1.0 mm2 profile.
Designation of Wire
If designations of wire are situated they consist of labeled straps which are inserted in
transparent tube applied on the wires. The designation straps may use up to 12 char-
acters for labelling per label. The labels are printed with the thermotransfere pro-
cedure.
Cabling
The connection between the operating mechanisms and the control cubicle is realized
with system cables with 50 or 64 core leads. Gas density monitor-, current- and if
necessary voltage transformer- as well as additionally heating-cables are inserted in
the cubicle by cable glands.
The cabling from the station side is inserted through the cubicle bottom. There is a
slidable bottom plate with chamfered egdes which leads to a variable gap for the
inserted cables. Remaining gaps are filled on the construction site with mounting
foam.

Table 4.55-1: Used Devices
Designation Usage
MCB with auxiliary switch Fuse protection
Door contact switch Switching on the light
Incandescent bulb (shock-resistant) Lightning
Thermostat / Hygrostat Regulation of anti-condensation heating
Anti-condensation heating Heating for control cubicle
Voltage / current measuring instrument Display of voltage / current
Control switch 3 positions, locking possible Choice of control level Off / Local / Remote
Control switch key operated with release Interlocking bypass
Control switch 7 positions Voltage measuring changeover switch
Control switch 4 positions Current measuring changeover switch
Pushbutton red Switching on HV-apparatus
Pushbutton green Switching off HV-apparatus
Position indicator STQ1G Position indicator circuit breaker
Position indicator ST1G Position indicator disconnector / earthing switch
Alarm indicator SSM16 Alarm indicator
Plug-in relais DC with socket Interlocking, double operation blocking
Plug-in relais AC with socket Voltage supervision
Impulse counter Circuit breaker operation counting,

hydraulic pump start-up counting
Terminal UDK4 Internal alarm indication, remote control,

heating, reserve contacts of HV-apparatus,
internal control, interlocking, synchronization
Terminal UK5-MTK-P/P External alarm indication
Terminal UK10 Ring conduit AC, DC
Terminal URTK/S Circuit breaker test terminals, protective signals
Terminal URTK/S Voltage transformer, current transformer
Terminal PVB 3 Potential distribution
Terminal USLKG10-1 Protector ground
Terminal AZK35 Cubicle ground
Pushbutton white (only for 2step control) Selection of switching device

4.56 Control System:

Conventional Substation Automation
The bay control of a high voltage switch-bay contains all those functions necessary for
the safe operation of such a bay in an switchgear. The devices required are located in
the local control cubicle and in the connection boxes of the high-voltage devices. The
contactors for the motors and the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located
in the operating mechanism housings.

User interface for local control system

S HV-apparatus control from the single line diagram
S HV-apparatus position indication
Alarm system
S Process alarms
S Logical alarms
S System alarms
CB operation counter
Measured Values
S Electrical current, three-phase
S Voltage, three-phase
Interlocking
S Bay interlocking
S Apparatus interlocking
S Protection of disconnector and earthing switches against switching under
load
S Intermediate position interlocking of the circuit breaker
S Station wide interlocking
S Interlocking against coupling, sectionalizer and busbar earthing switch
S Interlock override with key switch possible

S Time synchronisation
S HMI (human machine-interface)
S Selfsupervisor
S Conventional functions
S Antipumping control of circuit breaker (CB)
S Blocking or autotrip of the circuit breaker at too low gas density level in the
CB gas compartment
S Blocking or autotrip of the circuit breaker at too low drive force level
S Protection of the different control voltage circuits
S Cubicle lighting
S Socket
S MCBs for protection of the low voltage circuits of voltage transformer
4.56.1.2 Options
The following optional functions can be added on request:
Measurements
S Power
− Active power
− Reactive power
− Apparent power
S cos phi
Indications
S Indications from a protection system
S Indications from a transformer
Interface stations system (e.g. MicroSCADA) / remote control system
Optional Equipment
S Transducers
S Coupling relays
S Auxiliary switch contact reproduction
S Busbar replication
S Protection system
S Synchrocheck
S Arc detection

Optional Applications
S Additional spare terminals (10% are included as standard)
S Customer-specific terminal types
S Ferrules
S Special wirings / cablings
(coloured, halogen-free, heat-resistant)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 − Sensor for electronic key switch 5 − ON button

2 − Emergency of circuit breaker 6 − Menu button
(has to be pressed together with 7 − Enter button
button 3 to trip the circuit breaker) 8 − Button to scroll up
3 − OFF button 9 − Button to scroll down
4 − Select button
Figure 4.56-1: REF542plus
The following list describes all the functions which are available and conventional wir-
ing between control cubical and GIS.

User interface for local control
The local control is possible via a display which is connected to the control unit of the
REF542plus via a serial interface. The display offers the following functions:
S Single line diagram in accordance with project-specific arrangement with dis-
play of the current positions of the switchgear
S Control switchgear devices
S Alarm acknowledgement
S OFF / LOCAL / REMOTE / LOCAL&REMOTE switchover
(via electronic key switch)
S 3 displays for measurements values
S Individual alarms on LED with full text description
in accordance with project-specific alarm configuration (max. 32)
HV apparatus control
The devices can be controlled locally at the display or via the station bus. Control is
possible after checking the various interlocking conditions and the switching authority,
with one switch impulse via binary output (BO). The circuit breaker will trip immedi-
ately when a protection device gives the command to trip.
HV apparatus position indication
Double point indications are picked up by binary inputs (BI) from the auxiliary switch of
the high-voltage devices and are displayed on the REF542plus display, and can also
be transmitted via the station bus. In the case of intermediate position of the switching
devices, an alarm is created and transmitted via the station bus.
Alarm system indication
Alarms are visible on the REF542plus display and transmission via the station bus is
possible. The alarms can be acknowledged either manually in the REF542plus menu
or automatically.
S Process alarms
(e.g. CB alarms, MCB trip, SF6 gas density from the GIS bay and messages
from the protection system via BI)
S Logical alarms
(e.g. intermediate position)
S System alarms
(e.g. computer malfunction)

Selection of the switching authority
With the REF542plus it is possible to realise four operating statuses, corresponding to

the position of the OFF / LOCAL / REMOTE / LOCAL&REMOTE switch:
S OFF
No switching actions are possible
S LOCAL
Switching actions are only possible from the local control system
(REF542plus display)
S REMOTE
Switching actions are only possible from a superordinate device (e.g. Station
control system).
S LOCAL&REMOTE
Switching actions possible from local and from a superordinate device.
This selection switch position can be transmitted via the station bus, including a time
stamp.
Switching cycle count CB
All switch-off procedures of the circuit breaker are registered via BI, shown on the dis-
play as a numerical value in the range 0 to 32767, and transmitted via the station bus.
Operation Measurement
Standard input sizes are 0 – 1 A and 0 – 100 V

S Electrical current:
The appropriate values (three-phase measurement) are shown on the dis-
play and can be transmitted via the station bus
S Voltage
The appropriate values (three-phase measurement) are shown on the dis-
play and can be transmitted via the station bus
Interlocking
All interlockings in the REF542plus are realised by function blocks in the application
software.
Interlock bypass
The complete interlocking − with the exception of the end position and hand crank in-
terlock − can be bypassed using a key switch.
S Interlock override with key switch
The complete interlocking − with the exception of the handcrank and the end
position interlock − is by-passed at this position. The mode can also be trans-
mitted via the station bus, including a time stamp.

Bay interlocking
S Device interlocking
Standard interlocking , low voltage side is included in the interlock.
S Interlocking against switching of the disconnector and earthing switches
under load
The interlock prevents switching of the disconnector and earthing switches,
as long as the appropriate circuit breaker is closed.
S Intermediate position interlock of the circuit breaker
The circuit breaker can only be switched on at a defined ON or OFF position
of the disconnector
S Hand crank interlock
When the hand crank is inserted in, the corresponding switching device, all
control is blocked. This message is transmitted via the station bus, including
time stamp.
S End position interlocking
When a switching device is locked, the corresponding switching device con-
trol is blocked.
Station wide locking

S Interlock against coupler, sectionalizer and bus bar earthing switch via trans-
mission of the corresponding signals via the station bus.
Time synchronisation
All connected REF542plus can be synchronised via the station bus.
Self supervision
The REF542PLUS checks its hardware components and program execution automati-
cally. The bus connections (if available) are also checked continuously.
Fuse protection for the electrical circuits
For reasons of selectivity, there are several electrical circuits in the bay cubicle:
AC:
S Cubicle heating and lighting
DC:
S Circuit breaker control and protection trip circuit #1
S Protection trip circuit #2
S REF542plus
S Disconnector and earthing switch control
S Disconnector and earthing switch motors
S Motor-hydraulic pump
S Interlocking
S Position indications
S Indications / Alarms

Cubicle lighting
A bulb is switched on via a door contact switch. Since integrated cubicles are used a
shock-proof design is selected because of the switch impact of the circuit breaker.
Cubicle heating (option)
The cubicle heating is switched on automatically by a regulator depending on humidity

and temperature.
Antipumping control of circuit breaker
Pump prevention stops the uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit breaker
when there is a continuous ON impulse and a simultaneously applied OFF impulse.
A single switching operation (ON / OFF) is permitted. With an applied OFF impulse, it
is possible to switch on manually.
OFF blocking of the circuit breaker
The OFF blocking occurs if the drive energy for a trip,or if the SF6 gas density in the
C.B. housing is too low.
ON blocking of the circuit breaker
The ON blocking occurs if the drive energy for a Close/Trip sequence or the SF6 gas
density in the C.B. gas compartment is too low.
Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated under the following conditions:
− When the circuit breaker is switched on:
S Spring travel switch contact ‘Motor ON’ closed
− When the circuit breaker is switched off:
S Spring travel switch contact ‘CO blocking’ closed
In this way, varying energy reserves are stored in the operating mechanism
depending on the switch status. A circuit breaker OCO cycle is therefore al-
ways possible in the ON status, while in OFF status the energy reserve
ranges from OCO (newly recharged) to CO cycles.
This ensures that the hydraulic pump does not start up as soon as the circuit
breaker is switched off, which is particularly important for the battery layout of
an installation, especially when the bus bar protection causes several C.B.
trips.
The control starts up the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit
breaker. Within approx. 10 seconds, the energy required for an OCO cycle is
available again.
This results in staggered start-up times for the hydraulic pump motors. A time
relay limits the pump running time in the case of an error.

4.56.2.2 Options
The following optional functions can be added on request:
Measured Values
S Power
− Active power
The respective values are calculated from the electrical current and
voltage in the REF542plus, shown on the display and can be transmitted
via the station bus.
− Reactive power
The respective values are calculated from the electrical current and volt-
age in the REF542plus, shown on the display and can be transmitted via
the station bus.
− Apparent power
The respective values are calculated from the electrical current and volt-
age in the REF542plus and can be transmitted via the station bus.
S cos phi
The appropriate values are measured and can be transmitted via the
station bus.
Indications
S Indications from protection system
− External protection system:
When using the REF542plus together with a protection system from an
external supplier, signals can be integrated via BI and transmitted to the
station control system via the station bus.
− Protection system with station bus connection:
The messages are transmitted from the protection device to the super-
ordinate control system via the station bus.
In this case, the disturbance recordings can be transmitted via the sta-
tions bus as well.
S Indications from transformer
The appropriate signals can be connected to the REF542plus using BI and
transmitted via the station bus.
Station control interface (e.g. for MicroSCADA) / remote control system
By using a plug-in board, the REF542plus can be connected to a bus system

(e.g. ABB LON Bus).
It is possible to use this to connect a station control system (e.g. ABB MicroSCADA)
or a remote control system.
This bus can be used in the monitoring direction to transmit the position indications of
the switchgear and the measured values.
In control direction, commands for the remote control of the bay can be received by
REF542plus.

4.56.3 Completion of SCADA-System Cubicles

Mounting
vising a switch bay. The control and display unit of the REF542plus is positioned at
the front or at the swivel frame. With opened door of the control cubicle an access to
the devices and terminal strips mounted on the rear or lateral sides of the cubicle is
granted. All devices are contact safe, this means finger safe in the operating area and
in the inner cubicle at least safe for back of the hand contact.
Completion of cubicles
Beneath cubicle lightning and eventually cubicle heating also the M.C.B.’s for the dif-
ferent voltage circuits as well as terminal strips are installed in the inner cubicle. The
terminal strips are grouped functionally.
The circuit breaker supervision as well as the operating mechanism contactors of the
high voltage devices are not mounted in the control cubicle but directly in the operat-
ing mechanism boxes.
Wiring
The wiring of the single devices one with another is performed with black switching
wire, preferably with 1.0 mm2 cross section.
Wire designation
If wire designations are applied they are made of label strips which are shoved in
transparent tubes mounted onto the switching wires. The designation plates allows a
labeling with approximately 12 characters per plate. The plates are labeled by the
thermotransfere method.
Cabling
The connection between the operating mechanisms and the control cubicle is per-
formed with 50 or 60core system cables. Gas density monitor, current and if necess-
ary voltage transformer as well as heating cables are inserted into the cubicle by ca-
ble glands.
The cabling of the station side is performed through the cubicle floor. In the cubicle
floor a movable folded floor plate is located hence follows a variable gap for the
inserted cables. Remaining gaps are filled with assembly foam on site.

4.57 Control via SCADA Systems

SCADA = Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Basic Concept
secure operation of such a bay in switchgear. The necessary equipment is located in
the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes of the HV-apparatus. The
splitting-up is made in that way, that the contactors for the motors and, for the C.B.,
the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located in the operating mechanism
housings.

Operator Interface: Local Control

S Single line diagram
S HV-apparatus control via single line diagram
S Indications
Alarm Indication
S Process alarms
S Logical alarms
S System alarms
Choice of Control Level
Measuring
S Current, single phase
S Voltage, single phase

Interlocking
S Bay interlocking
S HV-apparatus interlocking
S Protection of disconnectors and earthing-switches against switching under
load
S Release of electric hand-crank hole interlocking (only ELK-04)
S Hand-crank interlocking
S Interlocking against busbar couplers, busbar sectionalizers and busbar earth-
ing switches
S Interlocking bypass with external key-switch possible
S Time Synchronisation
S Man-Machine-Communication Interface
S Self Supervision
S Conventional Functions
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low drive energy level
S Synchronized pole unit operation check for C.B. with 1-pole AR
S Protection of miscellaneous circuits
S Cubicle lighting
S Socket
S Protection of voltage transformer circuits

4.57.1.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current
− Earth-fault current
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage
− Earth-fault voltage
S Power
− Active power
− Reactive power
− Apparent power
S cos phi
Alarm Processing
S Protection signals
S Transformer signals
Automatics
S Connect / disconnect bay
S Transformer regulation
S Transformer fan control
S Petersen-coil regulation
Interface Station System (i.E. MicroSCADA)
Interface Remote Control

S Energy counter
S Transducer
S Interposing relay
S Auxiliary switch-contact reproduction
S Bus voltage replication
S Synchrocheck
S Arc detection

Optional applications
S Ferrules


In the following a list of all functions which are possible in the REC580 with conven-
tional wiring between control cubicle and GIS:
General alarm READY LED 10.4” electroluminescence-

display (640 x 384 pixel)
Alarm Arrow
and buttons for
status navigation
LED’s
Acknowledge
Select Close Key switch: Service PC

Set, Operation connector
Alarm texts Open Key switch:
Off, Local, Remote
Figure 4.57-1: REC580
The local control is realized via an electroluminescent-display, which is connected to

the CPU of the REC580 with a serial interface, with the following functionality:
S Single line diagram according to the project specific single line diagram with
display of the position of the HV-apparatus
S HV-apparatus control
S Alarm acknowledge
S Off / Local / Remote changeover (via key switch)
S 3 bar graph displays with up to 9 measured values
S 11 single alarm LED’s resp. alarm list according to projectspecific alarm
configuration

HV-apparatus Control
The HV-apparatus may be controlled from local as well from remote via the interbay-
bus. The control is done under consideration of the different interlocking conditions
and the choice of control level with a switching signal via Binary Output (BO) to
conventional wired operating mechanisms. As there is a trip command of a protection
relay, the circuit breaker will be tripped directly. At an internal fault of the REC580 all
commands to the bay resp. to the HV-apparatus are blocked.
Double position indication of the auxiliary switch of the HV-apparatus via Binary
Input (BI) and displaying the position of the HV-apparatus on the REC580 display and
transmission via the interbay-bus including time tagging. At an intermediate position
after a certain time, wich can be parametrized, an alarm is generated and transmitted
by the interbay-bus.
Alarms
Visualization on the front of the REC580 and the display as well as transmission via
the interbay-bus. The alarms can be acknowledged automatically or by a push button
on the front of the REC580. In the standard consecutive alarms are not suppressed.
S Process alarms
as CB-alarms, MCB-trip, SF6-gas density
S Logical alarms
as intermediate position
S System alarms
as controller fault, communication failure

With the REC580 three levels of control are possible, according of the key-operated
Off / Local / Remote-changeover switch:
S Off
No switching operations are possible
S Local
S Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level
Those positions of the changeover switch are transmitted by the interbay-bus includ-
ing time-tagging.
All making operations of the circuit breaker are registered and displayed in the range
of 0 to 32767 and transmitted by the interbay-bus.
All start-ups of the hydraulic pump are registered and displayed in the range of 0 to
32767 and transmitted by the interbay-bus.

Measuring
Standard inputs are 0 to 1 A and 0 to 100 V

The values are measured three-phase, and displayed single-phase (L2) on
the display and transmitted by the interbay-bus
The values are measured three-phase as phase values and phase-to-phase,
and displayed phase-to-phase (L1-L3) on the display and transmitted by the
interbay-bus

Interlocking
All interlockings are realized in the REC580 software.
Interlocking Bypass
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position interlocking may be
by-passed with a key-switch.
S Interlocking bypass with external key-switch:
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position inter-
locking is by-passed in Local-position of the Off / Local / Remote switch
in this mode. It is transmitted by the process-bus including time-tagging.
Bay Interlocking
standard interlocking including higher or lower voltage level
load
The interlocking prevents the disconnectors and earthing-switches from
switching during the circuit-breaker being closed.
The circuit-breaker can be closed only if the adjacend disconnectors are in a
defined ON or OFF position.
The insertion hole for the hand crank on disconnectors and earthing switches
is closed by a sliding plate. If the interlocking requirements for the switching
mechanism are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of an elec-
trically controled solenoid.
With the hand-crank inserted the control of the respective drive is blocked.
This is transmitted by the interbay-bus including time-tagging.
Disconnectors and earthing switches are lockable in the end position.
This causes a blocking of the respective drive.
Station interlocking
ing switches by transmission of the respective signals via the interbay-bus.

Time synchronisation
Via the interbay-bus all connected REC580 can be synchronized.
Man-Machine-Communication (MMC-Interface)
In reporting direction process data are transmissed cyclically. Additionally for certain
signals (events) a spontaneous transmission with time tagging is done.
In control direction the correct transmission of the received commands via the inter-
bay-bus is confirmed.
Self Supervision
All units based on the REC580 and the PISA-modules do a self-supervision with re-
spect to the hardware components as well as to program processing. All bus connec-
tions are checked permanently as well.
Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers micro
AC:
DC:
S Control circuit breaker and TRIP I
S TRIP II
S Processing computer
S Control disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanisms disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanism hydraulic pump
S Interlocking
S Interference signals
Cubicle Lightning
of the circuit breaker operation a resistance to shock layout is chosen.


applied.

ON-Blocking occurs, if the operating mechanism energy for a CLOSE/TRIP-cycle or if

the SF6 gas density in the C.B.-housing is too low.
tion.

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following precondi-
tions:
This causes after switching off the circuit breaker that the hydraulic pump will
not start pumping immediately which is important to the batterie of the sys-
tem, specially at an indication of the busbar protection.
cycle.

4.57.2.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current:
The values are measured three-phase and displayed on the display and
transmissed three-phase by the interbay-bus
− Earth-fault current:
The value is measured, and displayed on the display and transmitted by
the interbay-bus
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage:
transmissed phase-to-phase by the interbay−bus
− Earth-fault voltage:
the interbay-bus
S Power
− Active power:
The values are calculated in the REC580 out of voltage and current, and
displayed on the REC580-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus,
including sign
− Reactive power:
including sign
− Apparent power:
displayed on the REC580-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus
S cos phi
transmitted by the interbay-bus

Alarm Processing
− Non-ABB protection relays:
Using the REC580 in connection with non-ABB protection relays, up to
12 signals per bay are connected through BI and transmitted to the sta-
tion level by the interbay-bus. In case fault recording is included, the re-
ports are transmitted through a separate bus system.
− Protection with interbay-bus connection:
Protection signals are transmitted to the REC580 and to the station con-
trol system.
In this case fault reports can be transmitted by the station bus.
Those signals are read into the REC580 by up to 12 BIs and are transmitted
by the interbay-bus
Automatics
Depending on a signal from station control system the chosen bay will be
switched to or from the selected busbar. The switching sequence is:
− Move all earthing switches in position off
− Switch on Q1 or Q2
− Switch on Q9
− Switch on Q0
Interface MicroScada
There is the possibility to give out switch orders and get position indication as well as
reports of metering, operation counting, condition information and alarms including
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the station control. Those signals
are stored in a separate signal list.
Interface Remote control
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the remote control. Those signals


Mounting
vising a switch bay. The control and display unit of the REC580 is positioned at the
front or at the swivel frame. With opened door of the control cubicle an access to the
devices and terminal strips mounted on the rear or lateral sides of the cubicle is
The circuit breaker supervision as well as the operating mechanism contactors of the
high voltage devices are not mounted in the control cubicle but directly in the operat-
ing mechanism boxes.
Wiring
Wire designation
transparent tubes mounted onto the switching cables. The designation plates allows a
Cabling
formed with 50 or 60core system cables. Gas density monitor, current and if necces-
sary voltage transformer as well as heating cables are inserted into the cubicle by ca-
ble glands.

4.58 SMART-GIS Control

Basic Concept
secure operation of such a bay in switchgear. The necessary equipment is located in
the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes of the HV-apparatus.


S Single line diagram
S HV-apparatus control via single line diagram
S Indications
Alarm Indication
S Process alarms
S Logical alarms
S System alarms
Measuring

Interlocking
S Bay interlocking
load
S Hand-crank interlocking
ing switches
S Interlocking bypass with external key-switch possible
Time Synchronisation
Communication to Superior Level
Self Supervision
Control Functions
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low drive energy level
S Protection of miscellaneous circuits
S Cubicle lighting
S Socket
S Protection of voltage transformer circuits

4.58.1.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current
− Earth-fault current
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage
− Earth-fault voltage
S Power
− Active power
− Reactive power
− Apparent power
S cos phi
Alarm Processing
Automatics
S Transformer fan control
Interface Station System (i.E. MicroSCADA)

S Energy counter
S Transducer
S Interposing relay
S Synchrocheck
S Arc detection

Optional applications
S Ferrules


In the following a list of all functions which are possible in the REC580 with
SMART-GIS:
General alarm READY LED 10.4” electroluminescence-

display (640 x 384 pixel)
Alarm Arrow
and buttons for
status navigation
LED’s
Acknowledge
Select Close Key switch: Service PC

Set, Operation connector
Alarm texts Open Key switch:
Off, Local, Remote
Figure 4.58-1: REC580
The local control is realized via an electroluminescent-display, which is connected to

the CPU of the REC580 with a serial interface, with the following functionality:
S Single line diagram according to the project specific single line diagram with
display of the position of the HV-apparatus
S Control out of the single line diagram as
− HV-apparatus control
− Alarm acknowledge
− Off / Local / Remote changeover
− Set / Operation changeover
S Indications as
− Position indication
− Counted values indication
− 3 bar graph displays with up to 9 measured values
− 11 single alarm LED’s resp. alarm list according to projectspecific alarm
configuration

HV-apparatus Control
The HV-apparatus may be controlled from local as well from remote via the interbay-
bus. As it is a standard, maintenance earthing switches are controlled only locally. The
control is done under consideration of the different interlocking conditions and the
choice of control level via PISA-modules (Process Interface for Sensors and Actua-
tors), which are located in the drives. They are connected to the REC580 by an optical
process-bus and do control direct coils and motors.
As there is a trip command of a protection relay, the circuit breaker will be tripped
directly by the PISA-module. Therefore there are two Binary Inputs (BI) on the PISA-
module. At an internal fault of the REC580 or the PISA-module all commands to the
bay resp. to the HV-apparatus are blocked.
Position indication of HV-apparatus by endposition sensors to the PISA-module and

displaying the position of the HV-apparatus on the REC580 display and transmission
via the interbay-bus including time tagging. At an intermediate position after a certain
time, wich can be parametrized, an alarm is generated and transmitted by the inter-
bay-bus.
For protection purposeses the position indication of the HV-apparatus can be taken
from always one Binary Output (BO) directly from the PISA-module. For the busbar
protection an early closing contact can be parametrized. At the circuit breaker addi-
tionally the signals O and OCO of the spring travel stroke switch are available.
Alarms
Visualization on the front of the REC580 and the display as well as transmission via
the interbay-bus. The alarms can be acknowledged automatically or by a push button
on the front of the REC580. In the standard consecutive alarms are not suppressed.
S Process alarms
as CB-alarms, MCB-trip, SF6-gas density
S Logical alarms
as intermediate position
S System alarms
as controller fault, communication failure
With the REC580 three levels of control are possible, according of the key-operated
Off / Local / Remote-changeover switch:
S Off
No switching operations are possible
S Local
S Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level
Those positions of the changeover switch are transmitted by the interbay-bus includ-
ing time-tagging.

All making operations of the circuit breaker are registered by PISA and displayed in
the range of 0 to 32767 as numerical data on the display and transmitted by the inter-
bay-bus.
All start-ups of the hydraulic pump are registered by PISA and displayed in the range
of 0 to 32767 as numerical data on the display and transmitted by the interbay-bus.
Measuring
Standard inputs are 0 to 1 A and 0 to 100 V.

The values are measured three-phase, and displayed on the display and
The values are measured three-phase as phase values and phase-to-phase,
and displayed on the display and transmitted by the interbay-bus

Interlocking
All interlockings are realized in the REC580 software.
Interlocking Bypass
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position interlocking may be
by-passed with a key-switch.
S Interlocking bypass with external key-switch:
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position inter-
locking is by-passed in Local-position of the Off / Local / Remote switch
in this mode. It is transmitted by the process-bus including time-tagging.
Bay Interlocking
Standard interlocking including higher or lower voltage level
load
The interlocking prevents the disconnectors and earthing-switches from
switching during the circuit-breaker being closed.
The circuit-breaker can be closed only if the adjacend disconnectors are in a
defined ON or OFF position.
If the interlocking requirements for the switching mechanism are fulfilled, the
interlocking is deactivated seperately for disconnector and earthing switch by
means of an electrically controled solenoid.
With the hand-crank inserted the control of the respective drive is blocked.
This is transmitted by the interbay-bus including time-tagging.
Disconnectors and earthing switches are lockable in the end position. This
causes a blocking of the respective drive. This is transmitted by the interbay-
bus including time-tagging.
Station interlocking
ing switches by transmission of the respective signals via the interbay-bus.

Time Synchronisation
Via the interbay-bus all connected REC580 can be synchronized.
Communication to Superior Level
In reporting direction process data are transmissed cyclically. Additionally for certain
signals (events) a spontaneous transmission with time tagging is done.
In control direction the correct arrive of the received commands via the interbay-bus is
confirmed.
Self Supervision
All units based on the REC580 and the PISA-modules do a self-supervision with
respect to the hardware components as well as to program processing. All bus
connections are checked permanently as well.
S Connection of interbay- and process-bus
S Connections to and function of the sensors
S All load circuits on interrupt and short-circuiting
S Trip-circuits from the protection relay on interrupt
Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers micro
AC:
DC:
S Control circuit breaker and TRIP I
S TRIP II
S Processing computer
S Control disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanisms disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanism hydraulic pump
S Interlocking
S Interference signals
Cubicle Lightning
of the circuit breaker operation a resistance to shock layout is chosen.



applied.
ON-Blocking occurs, if the operating mechanism energy for a CLOSE/TRIP-cycle or if

the SF6 gas density in the C.B.-housing is too low.
tion.

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following precondi-
tions:
This causes after switching off the circuit breaker that the hydraulic pump will
not start pumping immediately which is important to the batterie of the sys-
tem, specially at an indication of the busbar protection.
cycle.

4.58.2.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current:
transmissed three-phase by the interbay-bus
− Earth-fault current:
the interbay-bus
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage:
transmissed phase-to-phase by the interbay−bus
− Earth-fault voltage:
the interbay-bus
S Power
− Active power:
including sign
− Reactive power:
including sign
− Apparent power:
displayed on the REC580-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus
S cos phi

Alarm Processing
− Non-ABB protection relays:
Using the REC580 in connection with non-ABB protection relays, up to
12 signals per bay are connected through BI and transmitted to the sta-
tion level by the interbay-bus. In case fault recording is included, the re-
ports are transmitted through a separate bus system.
− Protection with interbay-bus connection:
Protection signals are transmitted to the REC580 and to the station con-
trol system.
In this case fault reports can be transmitted by the station bus.
Those signals are read into the REC580 by up to 12 BIs and are transmitted
by the interbay-bus
Automatics
Depending on a signal from station control system the chosen bay will be
switched to or from the selected busbar. The switching sequence is:
− Move all earthing switches in position off
− Switch on Q1 or Q2
− Switch on Q9
− Switch on Q0
According to separate description on request
According to separate description on request
Interface MicroSCADA
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the station control. Those signals
Via this interface also the time synchrionization is done for all units connected to the
interbay-bus.
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the remote control. Those signals


Mounting
vising a switch bay. The control and display unit of the REC580 is positioned at the
front or at the swivel frame. With opened door of the control cubicle an access to the
devices and terminal strips mounted on the rear or lateral sides of the cubicle is
Wiring
Wire designation
transparent tubes mounted onto the switching cables. The designation plates allows a
Cabling
formed with 25 or 7core system cables and fiberoptical leads. Gas density sensor,
current and if necessary voltage transformer as well as heating cables are inserted
into the cubicle by cable glands.

4.59 Mobile Substation

4.59.1 Preparation for Changing Site

4.59.1.1 Equipment Position
The equipment are to be operated in the following position:
S Circuit breaker − Closed
S Disconnectors − Open
S Maintenance earthing switch − Open
S Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity − Open
4.59.1.2 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note The circuit breaker operating mechanism is described in detail in chapter “Equipment and
Functions Descriptions” in document “Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism”
1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1 (1HDG 118 577 for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).
With the circuit breaker in closed position the following steps have to be done:
S Relieve the hydraulic pressure in the operating mechanism, by turning pres-
sure relief screw B18 clockwise.
S Switch off MCB F107 to avoid unintensional pump start by recommissioning
before pressure relief screw B18 has been reset.
Note The operating mechanism is in closed position with the pressure relieved and the circuit
breaker automatically interlocked.
4.59.1.3 Protection Covers

Protection covers have to be mounted over the bushings.
4.59.1.4 SF6 Pressure

1. Lower the pressure in the circuit breaker and the voltage transformer gas
compartments to 150 kPa
2. Lower the pressure in all other gas compartment to 150 kPa
CAUTION Please drive carefully, especially under bad road conditions!

4.59.2 Preparation for Recommissioning

4.59.2.1 SF6 Pressure
Fill all gas compartments with SF6 up to their filling pressure.
4.59.2.2 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note The circuit breaker operating mechanism is described in detail in chapter “Equipment and
Functions Descriptions” in document “Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism”
1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1 (1HDG 118 577 for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).
With the circuit breaker in closed position the following steps have to be done:
S Close pressure release screw B18 by turning it anticlockwise.
S Push the rubber cap of the ON-Solenoid B22 to move change over valve to
defined ON position.
S Switch on MCB F107 to start the pump to put the circuit breaker operating
mechanism under pressure.
4.59.2.3 Protection Covers

Protection covers have to be dismounted from the bushings
4.59.2.4 Tests
Carry out functional tests of all HV apparatus from the control panel.
Other tests are not required.
4.59.2.5 Equipment Position for Mounting the Down Droppers

The equipment are to be operated in the following position:
S Circuit breaker − Open
S Disconnectors − Open
S Maintenance earthing switch − Closed
S Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity − Closed
4.59.2.6 Equipment Position before Energizing

e) Bring all HV apparatus to the open position
CAUTION Be sure, that all earthing switches are opened!
f) Operate in the following sequence, when overhead line is alive

11. Close disconnector
12. Close circuit breaker

Content
5 ¤ Service
Content
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1
5.2 SF6 Gas Moisture Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.1 Replacing the Bursting Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.2.2 Replacing the SF6 Gas Moisture Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.2.3 Mounting the Bursting Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-2
5.3 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.4 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.5 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1
5.5.2 Exchanging the Interrupting Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.3 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-7
5.6 Circuit Breaker 50 / 63 kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-1
5.6.2 Changing of the Interrupting Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-3
5.6.2.6 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-6
5-1
Content

5.7.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-5
5.7.3.3 Replacing Moving Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-7
5.8 Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-6
5.8.3.3 Replacing the Switching Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-9
5.9 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . . . . . . 5.9-1
5.9.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-3
5.9.2 Inspection of the Conducting Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-3
5.9.3 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-4
5.9.4 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-4
5.11 High Voltage Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-1
5.12 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1 PISA-self-monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1.1 Group alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.12.1.2 Position sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-2
5.12.1.3 SF6 Gas-density sensors, gas-density monitoring . . . . 5.12-3
5.12.1.4 Spring-travel sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-5
5.12.1.5 Protection input circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-7
5.12.1.6 Output circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-8
5.12.1.7 Monitoring switching functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-9
5.12.1.8 Monitoring the hydraulic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-11
5.12.1.9 PISA internal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-12
5.12.2 REC580-self-monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-15
5.12.2.1 Implicit monitoring of process bus devices . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-15
5.12.2.2 Implicit monitoring of REC580 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-16
5.12.2.3 Programmable monitoring of external elements . . . . . . 5.12-16
5.12.3 Standard signal texts and project-specific signal texts . 5.12-18
5-2
Content
5.13 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1

5.13.1 PISA Self-Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1
5.13.1.1 Position Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-2
5.13.1.2 SF6 Gas Density Sensors, Gas Density Supervision . . 5.13-3
5.13.1.3 Spring Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-5
5.13.1.4 Protection Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-7
5.13.1.5 Output Ciruits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-8
5.13.1.6 Monitoring of Switching Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-9
5.13.1.7 Monitoring of Hydraulic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-10
5.13.1.8 Internal PISA Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-11
5.13.1.9 Communication Failure PISA <-> REC580 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-12
5.13.2 REC580 Self Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-13
5.13.2.1 Implicit Supervision of Process Bus Devices . . . . . . . . . 5.13-13
5.13.2.2 Implicit Supervision of REC580-Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-14
5.13.2.3 Freely programmable Supervision of External Elements 5.13-14
5.13.3 Signal Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-16
5.14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-1
5.14.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker . . . 5.14-1
5.14.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-2
5.14.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-2
5.14.4 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 5.14-2
5.14.5 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-3
5.14.6 Other Switchgear Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14-3
5.15 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.2 Information on Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-1
5.15.3 GIS Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-2
5.15.4 Material of the GIS-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15-6
5.15.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components . . . 5.15-8
5-3
¤ Service
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS

The operational safety of gas insulated switchgear is not affected by any external im-
pacts such as dirt, humidity etc. For this reason our SF6-gas insulated switchgear re-
quires virtually no maintenance.
Inspection:
Functional and visual inspections are carried out at 8-year intervals. The gas com-
partments are not opened for such inspections.
Maintenance:
The individual switchgears have to be controlled after a certian number of operations,

and their contacts are to be overhauled depending on the current loads imposed.
Such an overhaul requires opening the respective gas compartment. For the duration
of the maintenance the installation has to be partly taken out of service.
We recommend calling in our service for all work involving the interior parts of the
switchgear.
Note Please find our contact address in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction”
in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 007 “Contact”.
Maintenance Schedule:
Table 5.1-1 summarizes all relevant inspection and maintenance intervals.
Table 5.1-1: Maintenance Schedule
Inspection after Maintenance after

5 000 operating cycles
2 closing operations
onto short circuit
20 fault clearings
Device
8 years
or
Overall Installation F
Circuit Breaker F F
Disconnector/Earthing Switch F F
Earthing Switch with short circuit

F F F
making capacity

¤ Service
Regulations for Overhaul and Maintenance
O-rings
Note All O-rings which have been removed during maintenance work should be replaced by
new ones when remounting parts.
SF6 gas moisture filter
Note All SF6 gas moisture filters which have been removed during maintenance work should
be replaced by new ones when remounting parts.
Tightening torques for screws
Tightening torques for gas valves
Note The tightening torque for the coupling nut at the gas valve 1HDG 111 031 (Mounting a gas
density monitor, a tightening nut or an adapter) are 50 Nm. The coupling nuts (M30x2)
get not greased.

¤ Service
5.2 SF6 Gas Moisture Filter

The SF6 gas moisture filter (3) is located underneath the bursting disk (Figure 5.2-1).
To replace the filter the gas compartment has to be isolated and earthed on both
sides. Once the SF6 has been evacuated from the gas compartment, it can be opened
and the bursting disk can be removed. Afterwards the gas moisture filter can be re-
placed and the bursting disk be put in place again. After refilling the gas compartment
with SF6, the GIS can be reenergized.
Note Before installing the new filter, make sure that the filter material is dry (check the moisture
indicator supplied with the filter material).
CAUTION Bursting Disk
CAUTION Filter
1HDG 118 470 I en 01.06.2006 EXTMEHA 07.06.2006 CHSVOTH 5.2-1

¤ Service
5.2.1 Replacing the Bursting Disk

1. Isolate the GIS feeder and earth all active parts on both sides
4. Loosen the screws (1), (Figure 5.2-1)
5. Remove the protective cover (5)
6. Remove the bursting disk (4)
5.2.2 Replacing the SF6 Gas Moisture Filter

1. Remove the filter (3), (Figure 5.2-1)
2. Replace used filter material by a new one
3. Replace used o-ring gasket (2) by a new one
1
5
3
1HDG118470
1 − Screws 4 − Bursting disc

2 − O-ring 5 − Protective cover
3 − SF6-gas moisture filter
Figure 5.2-1: Bursting disc with SF6-gas moisture filter
5.2.3 Mounting the Bursting Disk

1. Insert the bursting disk (4), (Figure 5.2-1)
2. Mount the protective cover (5)
3. Tighten the screws (1); make sure not to exceed the prescribed torque
5. Check the flange of the bursting disk for gas tightness
1HDG 118 470 I en 01.06.2006 EXTMEHA 07.06.2006 CHSVOTH 5.2-2

¤ Service
5.3 Control Devices

Conventional Design
5.3.1 Maintenance
All control devices of the GIS are maintenance-free.
5.3.2 Inspection
During inspection the devices and their proper functions are being checked.
Circuit Breaker Operation Counter
The number of operations of the circuit breaker are counted. Check the reading of the
operation counter once a year.
Note After 5 000 operations: Overhaul the circuit breaker. The procedures associated with
overhauling the circuit breaker are described in chapter “Service” in document “Circuit
Breaker”.
Pump Start Counter
The number of starts of the hydraulic pump are counted. Check the reading of the
pump start counter once a year.
Note All works associated with the handling of the operating mechanism of the circuit breaker
are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” for ELK-04 in
document “Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1
(1HDG 118 577 for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S), for EXK-0 in document
1HDG 918 753 (1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).
Micro Circuit Breakers
Micro circuit breakers shall be operated at least once a year.
Filter Elements for Louvers
Control cubicles equipped with filter elements for louvers have to be checked once a
year. In case of pollution the filter elements must be changed.
Maintenance
Maintenance of the secondary devices of the GIS can not be recommended.

Exchange defective devices against original spares of the same type (refer to the
parts lists in the secondary drawings included in the project specific part of the docu-
mentation).

¤ Service
5.4 Control Devices

SCADA systems (SCADA = Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) and
SMART-GIS design
5.4.1 Maintenance
All control devices of the GIS are maintenance-free.
5.4.2 Inspection
During inspection the devices and their proper function are being checked.
Circuit Breaker Operation Counter
The number of operations of the circuit breaker are indicated by the bay control unit.
Check the reading of the operation counter once a year.
Note After 5 000 operations: Overhaul the circuit breaker. The procedures associated with
overhauling the circuit breaker are described in chapter “Service” in document “Circuit
Breaker”.
Pump Start Counter
The number of starts of the hydraulic pump are counted.
Check the reading of the pump start counter once a year.

are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” for ELK-04 in
document “Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1
(1HDG 118 577 for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S) and for EXK-0 in document
1HDG 918 753 (1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1).
Micro Circuit Breakers
Micro circuit breakers shall be operated at least once a year.
Filter Elements for Louvers
Control cubicles equipped with filter elements for louvers have to be checked once a
year. In case of pollution the filter elements must be changed.
Maintenance
Maintenance of the secondary devices of the GIS can not be recommended. Ex-
change defective devices against original spares of the same type (refer to the parts
lists in the secondary drawings included in the project specific part of the documenta-
tion).
1HDG 518 521 E en 10.05.2005 EXTMEWE 11.05.2005 CHSVOTH 5.4-1

¤ Service
5.5 Circuit Breaker

SF6 gas insulated switchgear requires only a minimum of maintenance work at the
intervals given in Table 5.5-1.
Service work to be performed after
Component 20 short circuit breakings under

8 years 5 000 CO operating conditions at rated
breaking current
Interrupting chamber − Replace Replace
Circuit Breaker
Inspection Inspection −
Operating Mechanism
SF6 Gas Moisture Filter − Replace Replace
Power relays Inspection − −
Note Varying specifications for 1pole drive will be mentioned separately.
Note All instructions given in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of
the GIS” need to be observed.
Note Replace all O-rings that have been removed during maintenance by new ones prior to
reassembly.
Note The replacement of the SF6 gas moisture filters is described in chapter “Service” in
document “SF6 gas moisture filter” 1HDG 118 470.
are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” in document
“Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1 (1HDG 118 577
for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).
1HDG 118 473 T en 02.06.2006 EXTMEHA 08.06.2006 CHSVOTH 5.5-1

¤ Service
5.5.1 Inspection of Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note The initial steps of maintenance work involve the operation of the circuit breaker. For this
reason, the system has to be set up in such a way as to allow for operation of the circuit
breaker while it is isolated.
CAUTION The circuit breaker shall only be operated when filled with SF6 to the minimum func-
tional pressure!
Inspection
For a routine inspection after 8 years of operation the following steps a) through f)
have to be carried out. After exchanging the interrupting chamber the additional steps
g) through j) have to be performed.
a) Checking of number of operations
b) Checking of number of pump starts
c) Inspection of carbon brushes (min. height: 11 mm)
d) Visual inspection of drive elements: drive shaft bushing
e) Visual inspection of drive elements: auxiliary switch position indicator
f) Inspection of power relais
g) Functional test of OPEN valve 1:
(time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 1 - contact separation = 20 − 35
ms, with a maximum deviation of ± 3 ms from commissioning measurement)
h) Functional test of OPEN valve 2:
i) Functional test of CLOSE valve:
(time measurement: pulse output CLOSE coil - contact touch = 40 − 65 ms,
with a maximum deviation of ± 3 ms from commissioning measurement)
j) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation
Note The operating diagrams and the technical data are listed in detail in chapter “Equipment
and Functional Descriptions” in document 1HDG 118 520 “Circuit Breaker”.

¤ Service
5.5.2 Exchanging the Interrupting Chamber

The interrupting chamber must be exchanged after the specified number of operations
or current interruptions. Be carried out involves accessing the circuit breaker gas com-
partment, the gas compartment must first be opened.
WARNING! The circuit breaker must be isolated and earthed on both sides during overhaul.
5.5.2.1 Dismounting Interrupting Chamber (3pole Drive)

When dismounting the interrupting chambers, the following sequence of steps must
be observed. (Steps refer to the design as shown in Figure 5.5-1, featuring a flange
connection for a double busbar, but may also be applied to other variations of flange
connections)
1. Pull off plug connector from secondary terminals (9)
2. Disconnect feed line from heating and density relay
3. Detach the corresponding terminal plug unit mounted on the housing
4. Remove coupling pin (4) (connecting joint rod and outer lever)
5. Disconnect connection (6) (position indicator for remote control operation)
6. Dismount drive assembly (7) by removing bolts (10)
7. Lift off drive unit (8)
8. Dismount cover (5) from housing
9. Remove coupling pin (11) (connecting inner lever and operating rod)
10. Remove mounting plate (3) with bursting disc assembly
11. Before dismounting the connectors, secure the interrupting chamber to the
crane hook by the eyebolt on the operating rod
12. Dismount connectors (2)
13. Remove clips (12) by loosening bolts (13)
14. Pull off outgoing feeders (14) from plug-in contacts (15)
15. Loosen screwed connection (16) (removal is not necessary)
16. Then lift off interrupting chamber (1)

¤ Service

be observed (Steps refer to the design as shown in Figure 5.5-1, featuring a flange
connections).
2. Disconnect feed lines from heating and density relay
3. Loosen connection (6) of position indicator for remote control operation
4. Lift off the upper part of the cabinet (8) by removing screws
5. Dismount joint rod connecting outer lever and auxiliary switch and remove
coupling pin (4) connecting outer lever and joint rod
6. Dismount drive assembly (7) and the lower part of the cabinet (8) by remov-
ing screws (10)
8. Remove coupling pin (11) connecting inner lever and operating rod

¤ Service
5
4
6
7
3
8
2*
10***(*)
11**
12
13*
14
15 2*
16***
1HDG118520-1
* Tightening torque = 86 Nm
** Tightening torque = 14 Nm
*** Tightening torque = 150 Nm
( ) for 1pole drive
1 −
Interrupting chamber 9 − Secondary terminals
2 −
Connector 10 − Screws
3 −
Mounting plate 11 − Coupling pin
4 −
Coupling pin 12 − Clips
5 −
Cover 13 − Screws
6 −
Connection of position indicator 14 − Outgoing feeder
for remote control operation 15 − Plug-in-contacts
7 − Operating Mechanism 16 − Screwed connection
8 − Cabinet

¤ Service
5.5.2.3 Reassembly of Interrupting Chambers

Reassembly of interrupting chambers is the reverse of disassembly.
Treating contacts
To ensure proper functioning of the switchgear equipment with moving contacts it is

necessary to grease the main contacts with Shell Alvania 3 (GMN 598000P 504).
Using a linnen cloth lightly soaked with this grease, wipe the contacts applying a thin,
even smear on the surface. The cloth must be non fibrous. There must be no drops or
collection of grease left remaining.
Note The cleaning of operating rods and insulating tubes is described in detail in chapter
“Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS”. The threaded
connections (11), 18, 21, 24) and (28) are to be secured with Loctite 241 (blue).
5.5.2.4 Measurement of Voltage Drop

After reassembling the interrupting chamber, a measurement of voltage drop has to
be carried out. The resistance value must not exceed the limit of R = 22.5 mW .
5.5.2.5 Test for Correct Adjustment

After remounting the interrupting chambers, the operating rod must be checked for
correct adjustment. For this purpose, push the operating rod fully down into the
CLOSED position until stopped by the contact finger carrier of the heating chamber.
The alignment dimension from the upper edge of the circuit-breaker casing to the
center of the eyebolt’s bore is: 73 mm 1,5 mm.
dimension
reference
73±1,5 mm
Figure 5.5-2: Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
CAUTION The bore in the eyebolt must be perpendicular to the direction of the operating
rod’s sideward motion (check marking on upper end of operating rod).
5.5.2.6 Test for Reference Dimension

After remounting the operating mechanism, check in the CLOSED position the refer-
ence dimension of 151 mm1 mm (147.5 mm 0.3 mm for 1pole drive) from the
upper edge of drive housing to the upper edge of the pan−head screw.

¤ Service
5.5.3 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work

Fill gas compartments with SF6.
After completion of all assembly work, the following steps have to be carried out:
a) Functional test of OPEN valve 1:
b) Functional test of OPEN valve 2:
c) Functional test of CLOSE valve:
(time measurement: pulse output CLOSE coil - contact touch = 40 − 65 ms,
d) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation
tional pressure!

¤ Service
5.6 Circuit Breaker 50 / 63 kA

SF6 gas insulated switchgear require only a minimum of maintenance work at the in-
tervals given in Table 5.6-1.
Service work to be performed after
Component 20 short circuit breakings

8 years 5 000 CO under operating conditions at
rated breaking current*
Interrupting chamber − Replace Replace
Circuit Breaker Operating

Inspection Inspection −
Mechanism
SF6 Gas Moisture Filter − Replace Replace
Power relais Inspection − −
Note Varying specifications for 1pole drive will be mentioned separately.

Note All instructions given in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 ”Installation of
Note Replace all O-rings that have been removed during maintenance by new ones prior to
reassembly.
Note The replacement of the SF6 gas moisture filters is described in chapter “Service” in
document “SF6 gas moisture filter” 1HDG 918 095.
are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” in document
“Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 118 576 for HMB-1 (1HDG 118 577
for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).

¤ Service
5.6.1 Inspection of Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note The initial steps of maintenance work involve the operation of the circuit breaker. For this
reason, the system has to be set up in such a way as to allow for operation of the circuit
breaker while it is isolated.
tional pressure!
Inspection
For a routine inspection after 8 years of operation the following steps a) through f)
have to be carried out. After overhauling the conducting path the additional steps g)
through j) have to be performed.
a) Checking of number of operations
b) Checking of number of pump starts
c) Inspection of carbon brushes (min. height: 11 mm)
d) Visual inspection of drive elements: drive shaft bushing
e) Visual inspection of drive elements: auxiliary switch position indicator
f) Inspection of power relais
g) Functional test of OPEN valve 1:
(time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 1 - contact separation, with
a maximum deviation of ± 3 ms from commissioning measurement)
h) Functional test of OPEN valve 2:
(time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 2 - contact separation, with
i) Functional test of CLOSE valve:
(time measurement: pulse output CLOSE coil - contact touch, with
j) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation
Note The specific switching times, operating diagrams and technical data are listed in detail
in chapter “Equipment and Functional Descriptions” in document 1HDG 118 520 “Circuit
Breaker”.

¤ Service
5.6.2 Changing of the Interrupting Chambers

The interrupting chambers must be changed after the specified number of operations
or current interruptions. The changing of the interrupting chambers require an oper-
ation in the gas compartment of the circuit breaker.
WARNING! The circuit breaker must be isolated and earthed on both sides during overhaul.

be guaranteed. (Steps refer to the design as shown in Figure 5.6-1, featuring a flange
connections)
2. Disconnect feed line from heating and density relay
3. Detach the corresponding terminal plug unit mounted on the housing
4. Remove coupling pin (4) (connecting joint rod and outer lever)
5. Disconnect connection (6) (position indicator for remote control operation)
6. Dismount drive assembly (7) by removing bolts (10)
7. Lift off drive unit (8)
9. Remove coupling pin (11) (connecting inner lever and operating rod)

¤ Service
4
6
7
8 3
9 2*
10***(*)
11**
12
13*
14
15
2*
16***
1HDG118556
* Tightening torque = 86 Nm
** Tightening torque = 14 Nm
*** Tightening torque = 150 Nm
( ) for 1pole drive
1 −
Interrupting chamber 9 − Secondary terminals
2 −
Connector 10 − Screws
3 −
Mounting plate 11 − Coupling pin
4 −
Coupling pin 12 − Clips
5 −
Cover 13 − Screws
6 −
Connection of position indicator 14 − Outgoing feeder
for remote control operation 15 − Plug-in-contacts
7 − Operating Mechanism 16 − Screwed connection
8 − Cabinet

¤ Service
5.6.2.2 Reassembly of Interrupting Chambers

Reassembly of interrupting chambers is the reverse of disassembly.
Treating contacts

necessary to grease the main contacts with Shell Alvania 3 (GMN 598 000 P504).
Note The lubrication of the moving contacts and the cleaning of operating rods and insulating
tubes is described in detail in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200
“Installation of the GIS”. The screw pin (30) in the fixed contact pin is to be secured with
Loctite 270 (green). The threaded connections (11), (18), (24) and (28) are to be secured
with Loctite 241 (blue).
5.6.2.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop

After reassembling the interrupting chamber, a measurement of voltage drop has to
be carried out. The resistance value must not exceed the limit of R = 22.5 mW .
5.6.2.4 Test for Correct Adjustment

After remounting the interrupting chambers, the operating rod must be checked for
correct adjustment. For this purpose, push the operating rod fully down into the
CLOSED position until stopped by the contact finger ring of the heating chamber.
The alignment dimension from the upper edge of the circuit-breaker casing to the
center of the eyebolt’s bore is: 83 mm − 8.5 mm = 74.5 mm 1.5 mm.
Dimension
Reference
74.5±1.5
mm
Figure 5.6-2: Circuit breaker operating mechanism
WARNING! The bore in the eyebolt must be perpendicular to the direction of the operating
rod’s sideward motion (check marking on upper end of operating rod).
5.6.2.5 Test for Reference Dimension

After remounting the operating mechanism, check in the CLOSED position the refer-
ence dimension of 151 mm1 mm from the upper edge of drive housing to the upper
edge of the head of the pan-head screw.

¤ Service
5.6.2.6 Recommissioning after Maintenance Work

Fill gas compartments with SF6.
After completion of all assembly work, the following steps have to be carried out:
a) Functional test of OPEN valve 1: (time measurement:
pulse output OPEN coil 1 - contact separation,
b) Functional test of OPEN valve 2: (time measurement:
pulse output OPEN coil 2 - contact separation,
c) Functional test of CLOSE valve: (time measurement:
pulse output CLOSE coil - contact touch,
d) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation
tional pressure!
Note The specific switching times, operating diagrams and technical data are listed in detail
in chapter “Equipment and Functional Descriptions” in document 1HDG 118 520 “Circuit
Breaker”.

¤ Service

SF6 gas insulated switchgear requires only a minimum of maintenance work at the
intervals given in Table 5.7-1.
Table 5.7-1: Maintenance plan
Works to be performed after

Component
8 years 5 000 CO operations
Motor Inspection Inspection
Gear Box Inspection Inspection
Auxiliary Switches Inspection Inspection
Solenoids Inspection Inspection
Main Contacts − Inspection
SF6-Gas Moisture Filter − Replacement
Treating contacts

necessary to grease the main contacts with Shell Alvania 3 (GMN 598 000 P 504).
1HDG 118 471 N en 01.06.2006 EXTMEHA 09.06.2006 CHSVOTH 5.7-1

¤ Service
5.7.1 Inspection of Operating Mechanism

During service work we recommend to follow and enter in the commissioning report.
Note At the beginning of maintenance work the disconnector / earthing switch will be operated.
Make sure that powerfree operations are possible.
The following work must be done during inspection period:

S Mechanical performance test using crank (ON-OFF)
S Inspection of limit switches, crank locking switches, and position indicators
S Inspection of center-position lock (mechanical system, solenoids)
S Inspection of crank lock and end position lock
S Checking of electrical connections
S Electrical performance test of operating mechanism (ON-OFF)
S Measuring of motor current at rated voltage
S Check of the carbon brushes
S Functional test of heater (if equipped)

¤ Service
5.7.2 Inspection of Main Contacts

Checking the main contacts involves opening of the disconnector / earthing switch
enclosure.
S The following options are available for inspecting main contacts:
S Visual and physical inspection via the opened bursting disc flange
S Inspection by means of an endoscope inserted through the opened blind
cover / inspection window flange
S Inspection of active parts through the opened flange of cable sealing end
5.7.2.1 Visual Inspection at the Busbar
1. Isolate and earth active parts of the disconnector / earthing switch on both ends
4. Move the moving contacts out of the middle position by turning the hand
crank
5. Check contact silver plating through the inspection whole, Figure 5.7-1 −
Figure 5.7-2. Silver plating of the contacts must not be worn through
6. If contacts are in a good condition, then close the inspection hole and fill gas
compartments with SF6
7. If contacts are not in a good condition, then replace them
(“5.7.3.1 Overhaul of the Main Contacts”)
Bursting disc flange
1HDG118471−1
Figure 5.7-1: Visual inspection of main contacts via the bursting disc flange
Inspection window
1HDG118471−1
Figure 5.7-2: Visual inspection using a bundle of endoscopes via the inspection window
5.7.2.2 Visual Inspection at the Cable Sealing End

1. Isolate and earth active parts of the disconnector / earthing switch on both
ends

¤ Service
4. Dismount flange bolts (2), Figure 5.7-3

5. Remove assembly unit (1) from cable sealing end assembly unit
6. Check contacts through the open flange (3); the silver plating on the contact
fingers must not be worn through
7. If main contacts are in a good condition, then close the inspection whole and
fill gas compartments with SF6
8. If main contacts are not in a good condition, then replace them
Open flange of the cable sealing end unit
1
3
2
1HDG118521−3
1 − Assembly unit
2 − Flange bolts
3 − Flange
Figure 5.7-3: Visual inspection of the contacts at the open flange of the cable sealing end unit

¤ Service
5.7.3 Overhaul
5.7.3.1 Overhaul of the Main Contacts
To overhaul the main contacts, the disconnector / earthing switch must be dismounted
from the switchbay and opened.
5.7.3.2 Dismounting the Disconnector / Earthing Switch

To dismount the disconnector / earthing switch the complete bevel gear must be re-
moved first.
Note When the complete bevel gear (19) is dismounted, note that the springs (17) by removing
the insulating rod (16) become loose (Figure 5.7-4). The springs has to be mounted again
at assembly after maintenance.
20
16
20
19
17 1HDG118471−4
16 − Insulating rod
17 − Spring
19 − Bevel gear
20 − Bolts
Figure 5.7-4: Dismounting bevel gear
Service steps
1. Remove 4 bolts (20), (Figure 5.7-4) − These 4 bolts are near the center of
the insulation rods; do not open the other 3 screws!
2. Dismount complete bevel gear (19) in middle position (OPEN)
3. Dismount the insertion units (1) and (6) of the switchgear to be disassembled
and of adjacent switchgear (Figure 5.7-5) −
Note All works associated with the coupling of feeders are described in detail in
chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 118 531 “Bay Coupling”.
4. Dismount flange fixing (2), leaving the insulator (3) and the active parts (4)
attached to the opposite flange
5. Pull off enclosure (7) and insulator (5) in the direction indicated by the arrow
6. Check fixed contacts of disconnector (15) and earthing switch (18),
(Figure 5.7-7); the silver plating on the contact fingers must not be worn
through

¤ Service
7. Turn moving contact (12) so that it becomes visible − the contact silver plat-
ing must be fully intact within the contact mating area
8. Clean and grease immaculate contacts
9. If contacts and insulator drive shafts are not in a good condition, replace
them (follow the instructions below)
10. After overhaul mount the disconnector / earthing switch
11. Evacuate the gas compartments
Note After completion of maintenance work, the disconnector / earthing switch operating
mechanism has to be inspected.
3
6 5 2 1
7
1HDG118521−5
1 − Insertion unit 5 − Insulator

2 − Flange fixing 6 − Insertion unit
3 − Insulator 7 − Enclosure
4 − Active part
Figure 5.7-5: Busbar with insertion unit

¤ Service
5.7.3.3 Replacing Moving Contact

1. Remove the insulator shaft (16) of the first phase (Figure 5.7-6).
Note Springs (17) are fitted at all joining points and must be refitted when
reassembling (Figure 5.7-6)
2. Loose screws (14), (Figure 5.7-7)
3. Remove conductors (13) one after the other
4. Replace conductor (13) with included moving contact (12)
5. Remount insulator shaft (16) with spring (17)
Note When refitting, make sure the pole spacing of 160 ± 1 mm and the contact blade
adjustment tolerance of ± 2o is maintained.
5.7.3.4 Replacing Fixed Contact Disconnector

2. Pull off shield (11)
3. Loose 3 screws (9) and replace contact (15)
4. Remount shield (11)
5.7.3.5 Replacing Fixed Contact Earthing Switch

1. Loose the screws fittings (7), (Figure 5.7-7)
2. Replace the 3phase fixed contact (8)
3. Fix contact (8) with screw fitting (7)
1HDG118471−6
16 17 12
12 − Moving contact
16 − Insulator shaft
17 − Spring
Figure 5.7-6: Dismounting / mounting the insulator shaft

¤ Service
8
18
17
14
13
16
12
160 ±1
15 12 11 10 9
1HDG118471−7
7 − Screws fittings 11 − Shield 15 − Fixed contact disconnector

8 − 3phase fixed contact 12 − Moving contact 16 − Insulator shaft
9 − Screws 13 − Conductor 17 − Spring
10 − Screws 14 − Screws 18 − Fixed contact earthing switch
Figure 5.7-7: Main contacts of disconnector / earthing switch

¤ Service
5.8 Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A

SF6 gas insulated switchgear require only a minimum of maintenance work at the in-
tervals given in Table 5.8-1.
Table 5.8-1: Maintenance plan

Component
8 years 5 000 CO operations
Motor Inspection Inspection
Gear Box Inspection Inspection
Auxiliary Switches Inspection Inspection
Solenoids Inspection Inspection
Main Contacts − Inspection
SF6-Gas Moisture Filter − Replacement
Treating contacts

necessary to grease the main contacts with Shell Alvania 3 (GMN 598 000 P 504).
1HDG 118 371 C de 22.05.2006 EXTMEHA 06.06.2006 CHSVOTH 5.8-1

¤ Service
5.8.1 Inspection of Operating Mechanism

During service work we recommend to follow and enter the commissioning report.
Note At the beginning of maintenance work the disconnector / earthing switch will be operated.
Make sure that powerfree operations are possible.
The following work must be done during inspection period:

S Inspection of center-position lock (mechanical system, solenoids)
S Checking of electrical connections

¤ Service
5.8.2 Inspection of Main Contacts

Checking the main contacts involves opening of the disconnector / earthing switch
enclosure. The following options are available for inspecting main contacts:
S Visual and physical inspection via the opened bursting disc flange
S Inspection by means of an endoscope inserted through the opened blind
cover / inspection window flange
S Inspection of active parts by opening the flange on the opposite site of the
cable sealing end
5.8.2.1 Visual Inspection at the Busbar

1. Isolate and earth active parts of the disconnector / earthing switch on both ends
4. Remove bursting disc (8) and dry filter (9)
5. Move the switch blades out of the middle position by turning the hand crank
6. Check contact silver plating through the inspection whole, Figure 5.8-2 −
Figure 5.8-2. Silver plating of the contacts must not be worn through
7. If contacts are in a good condition, close the inspection hole and fill gas com-
partments with SF6
8. If contacts are not in a good condition, then replace them
8 7 2 3
4 5 5(6) 1
1 − Fixed contact earthing switch 6 − Support insulator
2 − Fixed contact disconnector 7 − Insulator shaft
3 − Movable switching contact 8 − Bursting disc
4 − Conductor 9 − Dry filter

¤ Service
Bursting disc flange

7 2 3
4 5 5(6) 1
1 − Fixed contact earthing switch 5 − Barrier insulator

2 − Fixed contact disconnector 6 − Support insulator
3 − Movable switching contact 7 − Insulator shaft
4 − Conductor
5.8.2.2 Visual Inspection at the Cable Sealing End

1. Isolate and earth active parts of the disconnector / earthing switch on both
ends
4. Dismount flange bolts (3), (Figure 5.8-3)
5. Remove assembly unit (1) from flange (2) (Figure 5.8-3)
6. Check contacts through the open flange (2); the silver plating on the contact
surfaces must not be worn through (Figure 5.8-3)
7. If main contacts are in perfect condition, close the inspection hole and fill gas
compartments with SF6
8. Replace main contacts which are not in a perfect condition

¤ Service
Opened flange of the adjacent side of the cable

sealing end
1
2
3
1 − Adjacent unit
2 − Flange
3 − Flange bolts
Figure 5.8-3: Visual inspection of the contacts
Figure 5.8-3 shows the visual inspection of the contacts at the open flange on the op-
posite side of the cable sealing end unit.

¤ Service
5.8.3 Overhaul
5.8.3.1 Overhaul of the Main Contacts
To overhaul the main contacts, the disconnector / earthing switch must be discon-
nected, earthed and opened.
5.8.3.2 Dismounting the Disconnector / Earthing Switch

To dismount the disconnector / earthing switch the complete bevel gear must be re-
moved first.
Note When the complete bevel gear (2) is dismounted, note that the springs (3) and (5) by
removing the insulator shaft (4) become loose (Figure 5.8-4). These springs have to be
mounted again at assembly after maintenance.
1 2 1
1 − Bolt 4 − Insulator shaft

2 − Bevel gear 5 − Spring
3 − Spring
Figure 5.8-4: Dismounting bevel gear

¤ Service
View X
View X
1
2
4
5
1 − Drive unit 5 − Gear unit

2 − Drive shaft 6 − Fitting screws gear
3 − Fitting screws 7 − Locking bolt
4 − Adaptor
Figure 5.8-5: Drive-gear unit
Dismounting the gear unit

1. Bring the disconnector / earthing switch either motor driven or manually in
middle position (Figure 5.8-6)
2. Block gear with a locking bolt (7), (Figure 5.8-5)
3. Loosen lightly the locking bolts of the drive unit (1), (Figure 5.8-5)
4. Remove the fitting screws (3), (Figure 5.8-5)
5. Sligthen the adaptor (4) backwards (Figure 5.8-5)
6. Release the four fitting screws (6) of the gear unit (5), (Figure 5.8-5)
7. Dismount the complete bevel gear in middle position (OPEN) from the
housing (Figure 5.8-4)
Inspection of the contacts

1. Dismount the insertion units (1) and (6) of the switchgear to be disassembled
and of adjacent switchgear (Figure 5.8-6)
Note All works associated with the coupling of feeders are described in detail in
chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 118 586 “Bay Coupling 4000 A”.
2. Dismount flange fixing (3), leaving the insulator (4) and the active parts (5)
attached to the adjacent flange (Figure 5.8-6)
3. Pull off enclosure (7) and insulator (2) in the direction indicated by the arrow
(Figure 5.8-6)

¤ Service
4. Check fixed contacts of disconnector (8) and earthing switch (1),

(Figure 5.8-8); the silver plating on the contact surfaces must not be worn
through
5. Turn switch contact (10) so that it becomes visible − the contact silver plating
must be fully intact within the contact mating area (Figure 5.8-8)
7. Replace contacts which are not in a perfect condition
Assembly after end of inspection

1. After overhaul mount the disconnector / earthing switch in reverse order
2. Make sure, that the switching contacts are in middle position!
3. Place gear and couple onto the connection rod
4. Couple all gear elements and fix the gear unit
5. Remove the locking bolt
Note After completion of maintenance work, the disconnector / earthing switch operating
mechanism has to be inspected.
5 4 3
6 2 1
7 8
1 − Insertion unit 5 − Active part
2 − Insulator 6 − Insertion unit
3 − Flange fixing 7 − Enclosure
4 − Insulator 8 − Switching contact
Figure 5.8-6: Busbar with insertion unit

¤ Service
5.8.3.3 Replacing the Switching Contacts

1. Remove the insulator shaft (3) of the first phase (Figure 5.8-7).
Note Springs (1) are fitted at all joining points and must be refitted when
reassembling (Figure 5.8-7)
3. Remove contact carrier (11) one after the other, (Figure 5.8-8)
4. Replace contact carrier (11) with included switching contacts (10),
(Figure 5.8-8)
5. Remount insulator shaft (3) with spring (1), (Figure 5.8-7)
6. Adjust the contacts again
Note When refitting, make sure the pole spacing of 165 ± 1 mm is maintained, and control the
middle position of the contact.
5.8.3.4 Replacing Fixed Contact Disconnector

1. Remove twisted contacts (9), (Figure 5.8-8)
3. Replace contact (8), (Figure 5.8-8)
5.8.3.5 Replacing Fixed Contact Earthing Switch

1. Loose the screws fittings (2), (Figure 5.8-8)
2. Replace the 3phase fixed contact (1), (Figure 5.8-8)
3. Fix contact (1) with screw fitting (2), (Figure 5.8-8)
1 2 3
1 − Spring
2 − Switching contact
3 − Insulator shaft
Figure 5.8-7: Dismounting / mounting the insulator shaft

¤ Service
7 8 9 10 11 12
6 3 5 3(4) 2 1
1 − Fixed contact earthing switch 7 − Insulator shaft

2 − Screws earthing switch 8 − Fixed contact disconnector switch
3 − Barrier insulator 9 − Twisted contacts
4 − Support insulator 10 − Movable switching contact
5 − Screws busbar conductor 11 − Contact carrier
6 − Conductor 12 − Screws contact carrier
Figure 5.8-8: Main contacts of disconnector / earthing switch

¤ Service
5.9 Earthing Switch

with Short Circuit Making Capacity
SF6-gas insulated switchgear is virtually maintenance-free. Only the works listed in

Table 5.9-1 below need to be performed.

Component
8 Years 2 000 CO 2 Short Circuit Makings
Motor Inspection Inspection −
Drive mechanics Inspection Inspection −
Auxiliary Switches Inspection Inspection −
Main Contacts − Inspection Replacement
SF6-Gas Moisture Filter − Replacement Replacement
Note All instructions given in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of
Treating contacts

necessary to grease the main contacts with Shell Alvania 3 (GMN 598 000 P504).

¤ Service
5 4
13
14
16
6
12
7
8
9
12
10
11
17 1 2 15 3
1 − Earthing switch enclosure 7 − Seals 13 − Connectors

2 − Seal 8 − Conducting path 14 − Point of connection
3 − Plug 9 − Damping rubber 15 − Point of connection
4 − Fixed contacts 10 − Drive housing 16 − Point of connection
5 − Contact tips 11 − Contact housing 17 − Cover
6 − Contact tubes 12 − Connectors
12
13
12 connector
13 connector
Figure 5.9-2: Mounting of the connectors

¤ Service
5.9.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism

During service work we recommend to follow and enter in the commissioning report.
Note At the beginning of maintenance work the earthing switch with short circuit making
capacity will be operated. Make sure that powerfree operations are possible.
Works to be performed during Inspection

S Visual inspection of electrical connections
5.9.2 Inspection of the Conducting Path

Maintenance work on the main contacts involves opening of the earthing switch en-
closure.
Inspection of the Conducting Path

1. Isolate active parts in the opposite flange
2. Close earthing switch
4. Pull out plug (3), (Figure 5.9-1)
5. Unscrew and deattache complete earthing switch from flange
6. Check the fixed contacts (4) of the earthing switch: The silver coating on the
contact fingers must be fully intact: There must be a continuous silver coating
on the contact tips (5) and contact tubes (6)
8. Use a new seal (2) when remounting the earthing switch on the flange

¤ Service
5.9.3 Overhaul
Replacing of the conducting path
1. To dismount the earthing switch follow the instructions under
“5.9.2 Inspection of the conducting path”
2. Remove connectors (12, 13) from contact housings (11), (Figure 5.9-1)
3. Dismount contact housings (11) from earthing switch enclosure (1)
4. Remove guide and dampin rubber (9) from drive housing (10)
5. Pull out movable conducting path (8) and replace it by a new one
6. Replace damping rubber (9)
7. Grease conducting path
8. Mount new contact housings (11) using new seals (7)
9. Screw connectors to contact housings
10. Replace fixed contacts (4) by new ones
11. Remount earthing switch to the mating flange using a new seal (2)
Note After completion of maintenance work, the operating mechanism of the earthing switch
with short circuit making capacity has to be checked.
5.9.4 Measurements
Using the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity for measurements
For measurement of voltage drop or for measurement of switching time from the cir-
cuit breaker follow these steps:
1. Remove the cover (17), (Figure 5.9-1)
2. Switch on manual or by motor, to check that the bay is deenergized
3. Switch off manual or by motor
4. Remove connectors (12, 13)
5. Switch on manual or by motor
6. Lock the limit stop
7. Now you can contact the main conducting paths by point
of connection (14−16).
After measurement you must follow these steps:

1. Unlock the limit stop
2. Switch off manual or by motor
3. Mount the connectors (12, 13), (Figure 5.9-2)
4. Fix the cover (17)

¤ Service

Apart from changing the batteries and replacing the desiccant bag, the unit is main-
tenance-free. The batteries and the desiccant bag are replaced every 5 years.
CAUTION Removing the housing cover of the electronics there is a danger of short circuit −
therefore remove the connector of the battery connection cable from the circuit
board before.
Note Take care that neither the circuit board nor the electronic components are damaged. Do
not allow metal objects to come into contact with the circuit board.
1. Loosen the securing screws for the housing cover (2) and raise to the side
(Figure 5.10-1)
2. Remove the connector of the battery connection cable from the circuit board
3. Replace desiccant bag (3)
4. Remove the securing screws (5) from the battery cover (4) and take off the
cover
5. Replace battery (1)
6. Re-attach the battery cover (4)
7. Re-connect the battery connection cable
8. Close the housing cover (2) and secure with screws
9. Carry out system test
2 3
5 1 4
1 − Li/SOCl2 battery
2 − Housing cover
3 − Desiccant bag
4 − Battery cover
5 − Securing screws
Figure 5.10-1: Capacitive voltage indicator

¤ Service
5.11 High Voltage Detection System

The complete high voltage detection system (HVDS) is maintenance-free.
A test of functionality can be done during normal operation.
For testing the high voltage cable has to be earthed respectively impressed with high
voltage.
At earthed arrangement no indication shall appear in the LC display of the evaluating

processor unit. The LED indication of the front panel shall correspond with
Figure 5.11-1.
At service voltage the completely filled arrow has to be shown for all three phases on
the LC display of the evaluating processor unit (see Table 5.11-1). The LED indication
shall correspond with Figure 5.11-2.
Table 5.11-1: Display on the evaluating processor unit
Display threshold Meaning Symbol
U < 0.1 x Ur “Voltage free” no indication
U > 0.45 x Ur “Voltage present”
U = Ur / √3 “Service voltage present” and “Signal o.k.”
HV On HV Off Error Power
Figure 5.11-1: LED Display at earthed arrangement
HV On HV Off Error Power
Figure 5.11-2: LED Display at service voltage
1HDG 518 542 B en 16.08.2005 CHSGAKP 14.09.2005 CHSVOTH 5.11-1

¤ Service
5.12 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0

This document contains a checklist for troubleshooting on a SMART-GIS bay.
Abbreviations and definitions
AIP Analogue Input and Pre-Processing Module
CB Circuit breaker
CO-blocked Closure blocked (Switching sequence Close-Open)
ITM Isolation transducer module
LED Light emitting diode
MBA Multi-function process bus administrator
MTM Mixed transformer module
O-blocked Open blocked (Open)
OCO-blocked Automatic reclosing blocked (Switching sequence Open-Close-Open)
PSM Power supply module
REC580 Bay control unit (product designation)
SF6 Sulfur Hexafluorid (Insulating gas)
5.12.1 PISA-self-monitoring functions

Fault signals on REC580 display or substation control system (SCS):
5.12.1.1 Group alarms
SERIOUS FAULT ALARM (red)

MINOR FAULT ALARM (yellow)
When a fault signal is generated, the group alarm assigned to this signal is initialized
simultaneously. A group alarm corresponds to an OR interconnection of all signals
with which it is configured, i.e. it is initialized when at least one original signal is initial-
ized, and deleted when all original signals are reset.
If another fault occurs after the group alarm has already been initialized, the group
alarm is cancelled for a short while and then initialized once again. This means that a
group alarm that has possibly been acknowledged switches to “unacknowledged”
again.
The types of messages that do not represent a status but rather an individual event,
e.g. the message “Max. switching time exceeded” can also be linked to a group alarm.
In this case, the alarm is present for a short while.
The minimum specified time that an alarm is present is 2 seconds. This should be suf-
ficient, even with cyclic transmission, to transmit the status to all data sinks.

¤ Service
Example of an REC580 event sequence after a fault initially occurs in the SF6 sensor
followed by a fault in the pump circuit:
Date Time Signal Text Message Text
98−03−29 17:12:00.351 Q0 SF6 SNSR1 FAULT COMING
98−03−29 17:12:00.353 Q0 SERIOUS FAULT COMING
98−03−29 17:13:15.010 Q0 PUMP CIRCUIT FAULT COMING
98−03−29 17:13:15.011 Q0 SERIOUS FAULT GOING
98−03−29 17:13:15.012 Q0 SERIOUS FAULT COMING
The time codes of the signals generated for the group alarm are offset by 1 ms re-
spectively so that the sequence is always clear. The time coupling means that the as-
signment of alarm and signal can be determined at any time. The cause of an alarm,
therefore, can be determined from the event list.
5.12.1.2 Position sensors
POSITION SENSORS INCONSISTENT
Fault signal tripped by:
More than 1 inductive proximity switch simultaneously signal “assigned”
In the event of a fault:
Blocking of all switching operations
Cause Remedy
Mechanical fault, i.e. there is conductive Repair mechanical system

material in the detection range of several sen-
sors
A sensor is defective and signals “assigned” Check functioning of all proximity switches.
although it is not assigned When electrically conductive material ap-
proaches, the yellow LED at the sensor must
light up. Replace faulty sensor and switch off
the PISA
PISA binary input is faulty Replace PISA
Note The proximity switches themselves cannot be monitored. As described below, it is

possible to recognize a defective sensor.
Fault in an unassigned proximity sensor:
After a possible switching operation, the fact that end position has been reached is not
recorded. Once the set maximum run time has been covered, all actuators will be re-
set and the switching operation terminated. The signal “intermediate position” is trans-
mitted.
Fault in an assigned proximity sensor:
After the failure of a proximity switch that has just been assigned, intermediate posi-
tion is signalled. At the circuit-breaker, the message “Switching without command” is
also transmitted.

¤ Service
5.12.1.3 SF6 Gas-density sensors, gas-density monitoring

The following description applies to both sensors:
SF6 STAGE 2 (too low)

SF6 STAGE 1 (low)
Fault signals tripped by:
SF6 density has fallen below limit value for stage 2 or stage 1 alarm
In the event of faults:
With SF6 STAGE 2 in the circuit-breaker: Blocking of all switching operations
If autotrip was configured for falling below the stage 2 lower limit
(PISA configuration parameter 35 = 1): Circuit-breaker is switched off
For all other gas compartments: The respective signal is set
Cause Remedy
Leak in monitored gas compartment Search for leak and rectify

Fill with SF6 Gas
SF6 sensor faulty Replace sensor
SF6 STAGE 0 (too high)

SF6 density has risen above limit value for stage 0 alarm

Signal only, no blocking
Cause Remedy
Too much insulating gas filled Extract SF6 gas
Insulating partition to neighbouring circuit- Repair insulating partition

breaker gas compartment broken

¤ Service
SF6 SENSOR FAULT
Sensor current fallen below 4 mA, i.e. the value is invalid
Circuit-breaker: Blocking of opening and closing operations
Signal: SF6 Stage 1
Signal: SF6 Stage 2
If autotrip was configured for falling below the stage 2 lower limit (PISA configuration
parameter 35 = 1), the circuit-breaker is switched off.
Cause Remedy
SF6 sensor faulty Replace sensor
Sensor supply feed interrupted Use a continuity tester to identify the faulty
(plug disconnected, wire breakage) line section and repair it
Auxiliary power supply (15 V) failure Check connection power supply unit <−>
PISA and repair if faulty.
Measure 15 V output voltage of the power
supply unit (see operating mechanism wiring
system circuit diagrams), replace power sup-
ply unit if faulty
4..20 mA input of the PISA is faulty Replace PISA
Note Incorrect values within the valid range of 4 ... 20 mA and which cannot be filtered out by
the 2 Hz low-pass filter, cannot be recognized as faults.

¤ Service
5.12.1.4 Spring-travel sensor
O-BLOCKED (BLOCKED)
CO-BLOCKED (CLOSURE BLOCKED)
OCO-BLOCKED (AUTOM. RECLOSING BLOCKED)
Fault signals tripped by:
Measured spring travel has dropped below limit value for various blocking stages.
This means that there is not sufficient spring energy to guarantee safe switching of
corresponding switching sequences
In the event of faults:
The pump is started to restore missing energy
The respective switching sequence is blocked
Depending on the type of configuration, the blocking is transmitted to external

protection devices
If autotrip was configured for falling below the O-blocking lower limit (PISA configura-
tion parameter 36 = 1), the circuit-breaker is switched off
Cause Remedy
If there is a continuous signal, it is possible Repair hydraulic system or pump motor

that there is a fault in the hydraulic system or
in the pump motor
The spring-travel sensor was removed and Calibrate spring-travel sensor

then reinstalled with the position gear wheel
to gear rack altered. With the spring un-
loaded, the reference value has changed
Note CO-BLOCKED may also be signalled if the trip circuit supervision has detected a fault.
The exact faults are signalled additionally (“5.12.1.5 Protection input circuits” and
“5.12.1.6 Output circuits”).

¤ Service
SPRING-TRAVEL SENSOR FAULTY
No valid data are received by single turn sensor
Blocking of opening and closing operations
Message:
O-BLOCKED (BLOCKED)
CO-BLOCKED (CLOSURE BLOCKED)
OCO-BLOCKED (AUTOM. RECLOSING BLOCKED)
Depending on the type of configuration, the blocking is transmitted to external

protection devices
If autotrip was configured for falling below the O-blocking lower limit
(PISA configuration parameter 36 = 1), the circuit-breaker is switched off
Cause Remedy
Single turn sensor faulty Replace sensor
Sensor supply feed interrupted (plug discon- Use a continuity tester to identify the faulty
nected, wire breakage) line section and repair it
Auxiliary power supply (5 V) failure Check connection power supply unit <−>
PISA and repair if faulty
Measure 5 V output voltage of the power sup-
ply unit (see operating mechanism wiring sys-
tem circuit diagrams), replace power supply
unit if faulty
PISA serial input is faulty Replace PISA
Note Incorrect values that are transmitted with the correct serial telegram cannot be detected
as faults (this fault, however, is highly improbable).
SPRING-TRAVEL SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED
No calibration value is stored in external memory
All switching operations are blocked
Cause Remedy
The sensor was not calibrated after a new Calibrate spring-travel sensor
external memory was put in use

¤ Service
5.12.1.5 Protection input circuits
FAULT IN PROTECTION INPUT CIRCUIT 1
Voltage measured at each respective protection input has fallen below the monitoring
threshold
If all protection inputs configured as protection-OPEN signal a fault, circuit-breaker

closure will be blocked.
Message: CO-BLOCKED (CLOSURE BLOCKED)

(“5.12.1.4 Spring travel sensor”)
If autotrip was configured for this case (PISA configuration parameter 44 = 1),
the circuit-breaker is switched off.
Cause Remedy
Protection input circuit interrupted Use a continuity tester to identify the faulty
line section and repair it
Auxiliary power supply for protection tripping Reconnect auxiliary power supply
has failed
Parallel resistor at protection tripping contact Replace parallel resistor

faulty
Protection device input at PISA faulty Replace PISA
Monitoring threshold incorrectly configured Reconfigure monitoring threshold

¤ Service
5.12.1.6 Output circuits
PUMP CIRCUIT FAULTY (only circuit-breaker)
CLOSING CIRCUIT FAULTY (only circuit-breaker)
OPENING CIRCUIT FAULTY (only circuit-breaker)
DISCONNECTOR/EARTHING SWITCH MOTOR FAULTY
DISCONNECTOR/EARTHING SWITCH INTERLOCK DEACTIVATION MAGNET FAULTY
No voltage is measured at an opened power transistor in the PISA
At a power transistor which is closed for a brief period, the voltage, unexpectedly,
does not collapse
If the opening circuit at the circuit-breaker is faulty, the circuit-breaker closure will be
blocked.
Message: CO-BLOCKED (CLOSURE BLOCKED)

(“5.12.1.4 Spring travel sensor”)
No other control functions will be blocked. Attempts will be made to carry out
switching operations in spite of the reported fault.
Cause Remedy
Load circuit interrupted (wire breakage Use a continuity tester to identify the faulty
outside the PISA) line section and repair it
Power transistor short-circuiting Replace PISA
Power transistor can no longer be switched Replace PISA
Auxiliary power supply for motors and coils Reconnect auxiliary power supply
has failed
PISA self-monitoring function faulty Replace PISA
Note Short-circuit of an actuator (motor or coil) cannot be detected.

¤ Service
5.12.1.7 Monitoring switching functions
MAXIMUM SWITCHING TIME EXCEEDED
After a switching command was recognized, there was either a delay in leaving the
starting position or the end position was not reached in time
No change of function, switching is possible again
Cause Remedy
When the position signal indicates Repair mechanical system

“intermediate position”:
The switch has become mechanically stuck in
intermediate position
When the position signal indicates Repair proximity switch

“intermediate position”:
Proximity switch for target position is faulty
When position signal continues to indicate Repair mechanical system

starting position:
The switch has become mechanically stuck in
starting position
SWITCHING WITHOUT COMMAND
The position of the circuit-breaker changes without the PISA having received a switch-
ing command from the REC580 or a protection device
No change of function or impairment
Cause Remedy
The switchover valve at the operating This is not a fault when the switchover was
mechanism was actuated manually done intentionally
The proximity switch that signalled the previ- Replace proximity switch
ous position has failed
One of the configured autotrip preconditions The cause of the autotrip is also indicated.
is present and the switch has reacted to it by Further procedure can be read off the corre-
switching off sponding fault message

¤ Service
SWITCHING COMMAND TO INPUT 1 RECEIVED

These messages are not fault signals but notifications to the user to help identify
which protection device tripped a switching operation, or attempted to.
Signals tripped by:
On one of the protection inputs (1..3), the switching threshold was exceeded
Cause If signals are present
The connected protection device tripped Depending on the switching position or the
blocking status, the switching operation is
either carried out or it is not

¤ Service
5.12.1.8 Monitoring the hydraulic functions
MAXIMUM PUMP RUNNING TIME EXCEEDED
After the hydraulic pump was switched on, full spring charging was not attained within
1 minute.
Three further attempts are made to charge the spring. After four consecutive negative
pump attempts, automatic pumping is disabled. Pumping cannot be started again until
PISA is restarted (turned off and on by means of mini-circuit breakers).
Cause Remedy
Pressure relief valve is opened The pressure relief valve is closed

by releasing the handwheel
Leak in hydraulic system Repair mechanical system
The pressure relief valve is opened via the Switch off mini-circuit breaker for the pump
mechanical system before the spring-travel motor (F107).
sensor reaches the pump switch-off limit Go into PISA setup mode and read off
value currently measured value
(setup function “f21”).
If the displayed measured value lies just
under 52 mm, adjust the pressure-relief valve
mechanical stop so that the valve is not
pressed until later.
If the displayed measured value is clearly
under 50 mm, the spring-travel sensor must
be calibrated again
MONITORING: Maximum number of pump starts a day without switching operations has been exceeded
The hydraulic pump has been started up within 24 hours more times than the speci-
fied limit (see setting parameters at monitoring)
No impairment to function
Cause Remedy

¤ Service
MONITORING: Re-charging speed too low
The re-charging speed (mm per second) has dropped below specified limit
(see setting parameters at monitoring)
No impairment of function as long as the maximum pump running time is not

exceeded
Cause Remedy
Pump motor power loss Replace hydraulic pump
5.12.1.9 PISA internal functions
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE TOO LOW
Measurement by the temperature sensor at the heat sink. Measured value is below or
above respective limit
No change to function
Cause Remedy
Ambient temperature too high / low Adjust ambient temperature by heating /

cooling
Too much load on the power transistors be- Allow respective switching device time to re-
cause switching frequency is too high cover
PISA self-monitoring function faulty Replace PISA

¤ Service
HARDWARE FAULT
Communication failure with external memory
Temperature sensor not providing any more measurements
Changes at switching-cycle counter are no longer being stored
Cause Remedy
External memory plug connector has become Plug external memory back in firmly
disconnected
External memory is faulty Replace external memory:

Reconfigure PISA. To do this, place PISA in
start-up mode and re-enter the parameter va-
lues that are in the project-specific docu-
mentation
Temperature sensor at the heat sink is faulty Replace PISA
SOFTWARE FAULT
An internal partial application has encountered an unexpected software error
Restart
Cause Remedy
Programming error Notify ABB Service

¤ Service
PISA NOT CONFIGURED
CONFIGURATION ERROR
The software cannot find a configuration parameter that it urgently requires
PISA goes to Reset and attempts to start up again.

Switching operations are not possible
Cause Remedy
One or more configuration parameters were In start-up mode, check and correct configur-
not set or incorrectly set ation parameters
The external memory was replaced without Reconfigure PISA:

reconfiguring PISA To do this, place PISA in start-up mode and
re-enter the parameter values that are in the
project-specific documentation
5.12.1.10 Communication failure PISA <−> REC580

In case of a communication failure, PISA does not transmit an explicit fault message.
If it is only the connection that has failed and the REC580 is still operating, this failure
is detected by the REC580 and reported (“5.12.2.1 Implicit monitoring of process bus
devices”).
Cause of fault:
− Disturbance in optical fibre connection
− REC580 star-coupler module failed
− REC580 bus administrator failed
− The CPU of REC580 failed
Action taken by PISA (Stand-alone mode)

During the failure:
− Supervision of blocking by the SF6 and spring energy (with autotrip, if
configured)
− Automatic follow-up pumping
− No long term monitoring functions
− No storing of time-coded events since synchronisation is missing
After reconnection of communication:
− Logging back to REC580
− Transmission of current signal states, including event reporting after
possible status changes. For these events, the logging back time code is
transmitted

¤ Service
5.12.2 REC580-self-monitoring functions

5.12.2.1 Implicit monitoring of process bus devices
Every bus device (PISA, BIO, AIP) transmits cyclically a “sign of life” i.e. the trans-
mitted data increments a counter and this, in turn, enables the REC580 CPU to deter-
mine whether the transmitted data are currently valid.
If there is no “sign of life”, a “Board-Valid” signal changes from “True” to “False” and
this can be evaluated in the function chart.
Alarms can be linked with this signal.
Internal REC580 active cards (BIO and AIP) constantly report their system status to
the REC580 CPU. Should a serious internal fault occur, the CPU also changes the
“Board-Valid” signal to “False” = “Invalid”. An internal fault, therefore, is reported the
same way as a complete failure.
Passive modules such as MTM and ITM do not have self-monitoring.
PISA/BIO/AIP NOT VALID
The respective module has switched to fault status or no longer reports to the process
bus
REC580 behaviour while fault is present
All signals from the faulty module become invalid
Cause Remedy
Optical fibre connection PISA <−> REC580 Check optical fibre connection and replace if
faulty necessary
REC580 star-coupler module failed Replace star-coupler module
REC580 bus administrator failed Replace bus administrator
PISA/BIO/AIP defective Replace PISA/BIO/AIP
PISA power supply failed Check supply lines

PISA <−> power supply unit
and / or
power supply unit <−> control cubicle,
repair if necessary
Replace PISA power supply unit

¤ Service
5.12.2.2 Implicit monitoring of REC580 functions
REC580 POWER SUPPLY UNIT FAULT
A power supply unit in the REC580 reports a fault to the REC580 central processor
module
No impairment of function as long as only one power supply unit has failed.
The fault signal must be acknowledged manually.
Cause Remedy
Power supply unit 500PSM02 is faulty Replace faulty power supply unit
5.12.2.3 Programmable monitoring of external elements

Every external device with a watchdog or monitoring contact can be detected by
means of the binary inputs. These are, in particular: Fan, protection device, mini-
circuit breaker, etc.
FAN FAILED
Monitoring contact of the fan opened
No impairment of function as long as uncooled operation is only for a brief period
Cause Remedy
Fan not turned on Switch fan on
Supply voltage for fan failed Reconnect supply voltage
Auxiliary power supply for monitoring contact Reconnect auxiliary power supply
failed
Fan defective Repair / replace fan

¤ Service
MINI-CIRCUIT-BREAKER FAILURE
Monitoring contact of the mini-circuit breaker opened
The function of the device protected by the specific mini-circuit breaker is impaired
Cause Remedy
Mini-circuit breaker is switched off (manually Check whether overload shutdown was
or by means of overload shutdown) caused by a short-circuit or another fault, re-
pair if necessary
Switch mini-circuit breaker back on
Auxiliary power supply for monitoring contact Reconnect auxiliary power supply
failed

¤ Service
5.12.3 Standard signal texts and project-specific signal texts

Table 5.12-1 shows which fault corresponds to a special project-specific message.
The standard signal texts correspond to the signal designations of this document.
The fault references from monitoring are not included in this table.
Table 5.12-1: Reference table for signal texts
Signal texts used in this document Project-specific signal texts
Minor fault alarm (yellow)
Serious fault alarm (red)
Position sensors inconsistent
SF6 Stage 1 (low)
SF6 Stage 2 (too low)
SF6 Stage 0 (too high)
SF6 sensor fault
O-blocked (blocked)
CO-blocked (closure blocked)
OCO-blocked (autom. reclosing blocked)
Spring-travel sensor faulty
Spring-travel sensor not calibrated
Fault in protection input circuit 1
Pump circuit faulty (only circuit-breaker)
Closing circuit faulty (only circuit-breaker)
Opening circuit faulty (only circuit-breaker)
Disconnector / earthing switch motor faulty
Disconnector / earthing switch interlock

deactivation magnet faulty
Maximum switching time exceeded
Switching without command
Switching command to input 1 received
Maximum pump running time exceeded
Internal temperature too high
Internal temperature too low
Hardware fault
Software fault
PISA not configured

¤ Service
Signal texts used in this document Project-specific signal texts
Configuration error
PISA/BIO/AIP not valid
REC580 power supply unit fault
Fan failed
Mini-circuit breaker failure

¤ Service
5.13 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS

This document contains a check list for troubleshooting on a SMART-GIS bay.
Abbrevations and Definitions
AIM Analogue Input Module
BIM Binary Input Module
CB Circuit Breaker
BOM Binary Output Module
CAP580 Engineering-Tool for the REC580
CO-blocked Closing blocked (switching sequence Close-Open)
LED Light Emitting Diode
O-blocked Opening blocked (Open)
OCO-blocked Auto-Reclosing blocked (switching sequence Open-Close-Open)
PISA Process-Interface for Sensors and Actuators
SF6 Sulfur Hexafluoride (Insulating Gas)
5.13.1 PISA Self-Supervision

Error messages on the display of the REC580 or on the station control system:
The following signal names respectively error messages are examples. The default
text for the signal is given in brackets.
1HDG 518 530 B en 11.06.1999 ACEMEWE 11.06.1999 ACEHENE 5.13-1

¤ Service
5.13.1.1 Position Sensors
POSITION SENSOR ALARM (PSAL)
Error Message triggered by:
More than one inductive proximity sensor simultaneously signals “occupied”
Reaction of the PISA to this Fault:
Blocking of all switching operations
Cause Remedy
Mechanical failure, i.e. there is a conducting Fix mechanics

material in the detection area of several sen-
sors
A sensor is defective and signals “occupied” Function check of all proximity sensors. If a
even though it is not conducting material is approached to the sen-
sor, the yellow LED on the sensor must light
up. Replace faulty sensors. Switch off the
PISA during replacement.
Defective binary input on the PISA Replace the PISA
Note The proximity sensors can not be monitored directly. In the following it is described how
to identify a defective sensor indirectly.
Defect of a non-occupied proximity sensor:
During a switching operation reaching the final position is not detected. After lapse of
the preset maximum operating time, all actuators are de-activated and the switching
operation is aborted. An intermediate position is signalled.
Defect of an occupied proximity sensor:
In case an occupied proximity sensor fails the PISA signals “Intermediate Position”
and “Maximum Operating Time Exceeded (SWERR)”. The REC580 detects that no
switching command was issued and will generate an error message.

¤ Service
5.13.1.2 SF6 Gas Density Sensors, Gas Density Supervision

The following messages are valid for both possibly connected sensors:
SENSOR 1 SF6 STEP 2 (GASLL1)

SENSOR 1 SF6 STEP 1 (GASL1)
SENSOR 2 SF6 STEP 2 (GASLL2)

SENSOR 2 SF6 STEP 1 (GASL2)
SF6 gas density dropped below the threshold for Step-2- resp. Step-1-alarm
Reaction of the PISA to this Fault:
At SF6 STEP 2 in the circuit breaker: Blocking of all switching operations
If autotrip at Step-2 was configured (PISA configuration parameter 40 = 1),

the circuit breaker is tripped instead.
For all other gas compartments the respective error message is generated.
Cause Remedy
Leakage in the supervised gas compartment Detect and repair leakage

Refill with SF6
Defective SF6 gas density sensor Replace sensor

¤ Service
SF6 SENSOR1 FAILURE (GASAL1)

SF6 SENSOR2 FAILURE (GASAL2)
The sensor current dropped below 4 mA, i.e. the value is invalid
Reaction of PISA to this Fault:
CB: Blocking of all switching operations
Message: SF6-Step 1
Message: SF6-Step 2
If autotrip at Step-2 was configured (PISA configuration parameter 40 = 1),

the circuit breaker is tripped instead.
Cause Remedy
Defective SF6 gas density sensor Replace sensor
Sensor connection interrupted Identify defective wire section with continuity

(Plug unplugged, wire broken) tester and repair
Failure of 15 V auxiliary voltage Check connection power supply <−> PISA

and repair, if defective
Measure15V-output voltage on the power
supply (refer to circuit diagrams of operating
mechanism) and replace power supply, if de-
fective
Defective 4..20 mA-input on the PISA Replace PISA
Note Wrong values within the defined 4 .. 20 mA range that can not be filtered by the 2 Hz
low-pass filter will not be detected as failure.

¤ Service
5.13.1.3 Spring Travel Sensor
O−BLOCKED (L1BLK)
CO−BLOCKED (L2BLK)
OCO−BLOCKED (L3BLK)
Measured spring travel dropped below the threshold for the various blocking stages.
The stored spring energy is too low to ensure the respective switching sequences.
The pump is started to recharge the disk spring column.
The respective switching sequence is blocked.
Depending on the configuration the blocking signal is transferred to external protection

devices.
If autotrip at O-Blocking was configured (PISA configuration parameter 41 = 1), the

circuit breaker will be tripped.
Cause Remedy
If the signal is permanently active, the hy- Repair hydraulic system or pump motor
draulic system or the pump motor may be
defective.
The spring travel sensor was removed and Recalibrate the spring travel sensor
installed with a different position of the cog
wheel to the rod. The reference value at com-
pletely released spring has changed.
Note The signal CO-BLOCKED is also activated, if closing is blocked due to a fault in the trip
circuit. CO-BLOCKED is further signalled, if all input circuits for tripping of the circuit
breaker or if the load circuit of the trip coil are defective.
In addition, a detail error message is generated (“5.13.1.4 Protection Input Circuits“ and
”5.13.1.5 Output Circuits”).

¤ Service
SPRING TRAVEL SWITCH DEFECTIVE (ENSAL)
The spring travel sensor does not receive any valid data.
Blocking of all operations.
Messages:
O-BLOCKED (L1BLK)
CO-BLOCKED (L2BLK)
OCO-BLOCKED (L3BLK)
Depending on the configuration this blocking signal will be transmitted to external

protection devices.
If autotrip at O-Blocking was configured (PISA configuration parameter 41 = 1), the

circuit breaker will be tripped.
Cause Remedy
Defective spring travel sensor Replace sensor
Sensor connection interrupted (plug un- Identify faulty wire section with continuity
plugged, wire broken) tester and repaor
Failure 5 V auxiliary voltage Check connection power supply <-> PISA

and repair, if defective.
Measure 5V-output voltage at the power sup-
ply (refer to circuit diagrams of operating
mechanism) and replace power supply, if de-
fective
Defective serial input on PISA Replace PISA
Note Wrong values that are transmitted with a correct serial telegram can not be identified as
failure (this fault is highly unlikely).

¤ Service
5.13.1.4 Protection Input Circuits
FAILURE PROTECTION INPUT CIRCUIT 1 (TRINAL1)
The voltage measured at the respective protection input has dropped below the
supervision threshold
If all protection inputs signal a fault that have been configured as Protection-TRIP, the
circuit breaker is blocked from closing.
Message:
CO-BLOCKED (L2BLK)
(”5.13.1.3 Spring Travel Sensor“)
If autotrip was configured for this case (PISA configuration parameter 42 = 1),
the circuit breaker will be tripped.
Cause Remedy
Protection input circuit interrupted Identify the defective wire section with conti-
nuity tester and repair
Failure of protection-trip auxiliary supply Repair auxiliary supply
Defective resistor parallel to the protection Replace resistor

trip contact
Defective protection input on PISA Replace PISA
Supervision threshold configured incorrectly Reconfigure supervision threshold

¤ Service
5.13.1.5 Output Ciruits
Circuit Breaker EXK-01 and ELK-04:
PUMP CIRCUIT DEFECTIVE (PFLT)

CLOSING CIRCUIT DEFECTIVE (VAAL1)
TRIPPING CIRCUIT DEFECTIVE (VAAL2)
Disconnector / Earthing Switch EXK-01:
DISCONNECTOR SWITCH MOTOR DEFECTIVE (ACTAL1)

EARTHING SWITCH MOTOR DEFECTIVE (ACTAL2)
Disconnector / Earthing Switch ELK-04:
DISCONNECTOR / EARTHING SWITCH MOTOR DEFECTIVE (ACTAL1)

DISCONNECTOR / EARTHING SWITCH BLOCKING RELEASE MAGNET DEFECTIVE (ACTAL2)
EARTHING SWITCH BLOCKING RELEASE MAGNET DEFECTIVE (ACTAL3)
No voltage measured on open power transistor in the PISA.
Voltage does not collapse on briefly closed power transistor.
If the trip circuit of the circuit breaker is defective, closing of the circuit breaker will be
blocked.
Message:
CO-BLOCKED (L2BLK)
(“5.13.1.3 Spring Travel Sensor”)
All other control functions will not be blocked. Execution of an operation command will
be attempted despite of the detected defect.
Cause Remedy
Load circuit interrupted Identify faulty wire section with continuity

(broken wire external to the PISA) tester and repair
Short circuit of power transistor Replace PISA
Power transistor can no longer be switched Replace PISA
Failure of auxiliary voltage for motors and Repair auxiliary supply

solenoids
Defective supervision function in the PISA Replace PISA
Note Short circuit of an actuator (motor or solenoid) can not be detected.

¤ Service
5.13.1.6 Monitoring of Switching Functions
MAXIMUM RUN TIME EXCEEDED (SWERR)
The starting position is not left or the final position not reached in time after a switch-
ing command has been received
No change, repeated switching possible
Cause Remedy
If intermediate position is signalled Repair switch mechanics

Switch mechanically stuck in intermediate
position
If intermediate position is signalled Repair proximity sensor

Defective proximity sensor for final position
If starting position is continuously signalled Repair switch mechanics

Switch mechanically stuck in starting position
COMMAND ON INPUT 1 (TRIPEX1)

These are not error messages, but signals that help the operator identify, which
protection device triggered (or attempted to trigger) an operation.
Message triggered by:
The switching threshold was exceeded on one of the protection inputs (1..3)
Cause Reaction of PISA
The protection device connected to the re- Depending on the switch position and the
spective input tripped blocking condition, the command is executed
or not

¤ Service
5.13.1.7 Monitoring of Hydraulic Functions
MAXIMUM PUMP RUN TIME EXCEEDED (PAL)
The disk spring column is not fully charged within 1 minute after pump start.
Three more attempts are made to charge the disk spring column. If four consecutive
attempts to charge the disk spring column fail, the automatic pump start is deactiva-
ted. In order to activate pumping again, the PISA needs to be reset (switch MCB off
and back on).
Cause Remedy
Pressure-relief valve open Close pressure-relief valve by opening the

handwheel
Leakage of hydraulic system Repair mechanics
Pressure-relief valve is opened before the Switch off MCB for pump motor (F107)
spring travel sensor reaches the limit position Read the currently measured value in the
for switching off the pump PISA setup mode (setup function “f21”)
If measured value is just below 52 mm, adjust
the mechanical end position of the pressure-
relief valve so that the valve is activated a
little later
If measured value is signifcantly below 50
mm, the spring travel sensor must be recali-
brated
LOSS OF ENERGY (ENAL)
The hydraulic pump experienced more than 20 pump starts within 24 h (excluding
switching operations).
The PISA functionality is not impaired.
Cause Remedy

¤ Service
MONITORING: Recharging Speed Too Low
The recharging speed in millimeters per second has dropped below the limit (refer to
setting for monitoring).
The PISA functionality is not impaired, as long as the maximum pump run time is not
exceeded.
Cause Remedy
Loss of power of the pump motor Replace hydraulic pump
5.13.1.8 Internal PISA Functions
PISA HARDWARE FAULT (PISAFLT)
Communication with external memory failed.
Reaction of PISA for this Fault:
Status changes of the operations counter are no longer stored
Cause Remedy
Plug connection to external memory un- Reconnect external memory

plugged
Defective external memory Replace external memory:

Reconfigure PISA. Switch PISA into setup
mode and input the parameters as given in
the project-specific documentation.

¤ Service
5.13.1.9 Communication Failure PISA <-> REC580

The PISA does not generate an error message, if the communication with the
REC580 fails. If only the connection failed, but the REC580 is still operating, the
REC580 will detect the fault and generate a respective error message
(“5.13.2.1 Implicit Supervision of Process Bus Devices”).
Cause, Failure:
− Fiberoptic connection disturbed
− REC 580 star coupler module failed
− REC580 bus administrator failed
− REC580 CPU failed
Reaction of PISA without Process Bus Communicat ion (“Stand-Alone” Mode)

− Supervision of blocking for SF6- and stored-energy conditions
(with autotrip, if configured)
− Automatic pumping
− No monitoring
− Generation of time-tagged events
S Previously time-synchronized:
Generation and storage of up to 100 time-tagged events
S Not previously time-synchronized:
No generation and storage of time-tagged events
− External blocking signals:
S Open-Blocking:
Maintaining the status valid at time of failure
S Close-Blocking:
Maintaining the status valid at time of failure
S Exception:
If the CB is in the OPEN position close-blocking is activated for safety
reasons.
Reaction of PISA upon (Re-)Establishment of Communication

− Logon at REC580 and waiting for time synchronization
If first time synchronization of the PISA:

− Transmittal of the current signal statuses including events. These events are
time-tagged with the logon time.
− Restart of the mean value calculation for monitoring functions
If repeated time synchronization of the PISA:

− Transmittal of stored events
− Restart of mean value calculation for monitoring functions

¤ Service
5.13.2 REC580 Self Supervision

5.13.2.1 Implicit Supervision of Process Bus Devices
Each process bus device (PISA, BIO, BIM, BOM, AIM) sends a cyclic “alive” signal.
These signals increment a counter, which allows the REC580 CPU to determine
whether the received data is current or not.
If the “alive” signal is not received, the status of “Board-Valid” changes from “True” to
“False”. This status change can be evaluated in the function chart.
Alarms can be linked to this signal.
The active boards of the REC580 (BIO, BIM, BOM and AIM) signal their system status
to the REC580 CPU on a continuous base. In case of a significant internal fault, the
CPU sets the status of ”Board-Valid” to “False” = “Invalid”.
An internal fault is thus treated like a complete blackout.
Passive components such as MTM and ITM do not have a self supervision.
PISA / IO-MODUL INVALID
The respective module has changed to failed status or does no longer send signals
over the process bus
Reaction of REC580 to this Fault:
All signals of the faulty module are considered invalid and discarded
Cause Remedy
Fiberoptic connection PISA <-> REC580 dis- Check fiberoptics and replace, if necessary
turbed
REC580 star coupler module failed Replace star coupler module
REC580 bus administrator failed Replace bus administrator
Defective PISA / BIO / BIM / BOM / AIM Replace PISA / BIO / BIM / BOM / AIM
PISA supply voltage failed Check connections PISA <-> power supply
respectively power supply <-> local control
cabinet and repair, if necessary
Replace PISA-power supply

¤ Service
5.13.2.2 Implicit Supervision of REC580-Functions
REC580-POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
A REC580 power supply board signals a defect to the REC580 CPU
The functionality is not impaired, as long as only one power supply board failed.
The error message must be locally acknowledged.
Cause Remedy
Defective power supply board 500PSM02 Replace defective power supply board
5.13.2.3 Freely programmable Supervision of External Elements

Every external device with a watchdog- respectively a supervision-contact can be de-
tected through binary inputs. Among these devices are: fans, protection devices,
micro circuit breakers, etc.
FAN FAILURE
Monitoring contact of the fan opened.
The functionality is not impaired, as long as the operational time without cooling is li-
mited.
Cause Remedy
Fan switched off Switch fan back on
Fan supply voltage failed Fix supply voltage
Auxiliary supply for monitoring contact failed Fix auxiliary supply
Defective fan Repair / replace fan

¤ Service
MCP TRIP
Monitoring contact of the MCB opened.
The functionality of the device protected by the tripped MCB is impaired.
Cause Remedy
MCB is tripped Check for short circuit or other fault that

(either manually or from overload) could have caused an overload trip; repair, if
necessary
Switch MCB back on
Auxiliary supply for monitoring contact failed Fix auxiliary supply

¤ Service
5.13.3 Signal Text

Standard Signal Text and project-specific Signal Text
The following table explains, which failure is described with a distinct project-specific
error message. The standard signal text corresponds to the signal names in this docu-
ment.
The error messages generated from the monitoring are not included in the table
below.
Table 5.13-1: Reference Table for Signal Text
Project-specific
Signal text used in this document Message
signal text
Position sensors Alarm PSAL
Sensor 1 SF6 Step 1 GASL1
Sensor 1 SF6 Step 2 GASLL1
Sensor 2 SF6 Step 1 GASL2
Sensor 2 SF6 Step 2 GASLL2
SF6 Sensor 1 Failure GASAL1
SF6 Sensor 2 Failure GASAL2
O-blocked L1BLK
CO-blocked L2BLK
OCO-blocked L3BLK
Spring travel sensor faulty ENSAL
Fault in protection input circuit 1 TRINAL1
Pump circuit faulty (CB only) PFLT
Closing circuit faulty (CB only) VAAL1
Trip circuit faulty (CB only) VAAL2
Disconnector switch motor faulty (EXK-01) ACTAL1
Earthing switch motor faulty (EXK-01) ACTAL2
Disconnector / earthing switch motor faulty (ELK-04) ACTAL1
Disconnector switch interlocking deactivation magnet
ACTAL2
faulty (ELK-04)
Earthing switch interlocking deactivation magnet faulty
ACTAL3
(ELK-04)
Maximum switching time exceeded SWERR
Switching command received on input 1 TRIPEX1
Maximum pump run time exceeded PAL
Loss of energy ENAL
Monitoring recharging speed too slow

¤ Service
Project-specific
Signal text used in this document Message
signal text
PISA hardware failure PISAFLT
PISA / IO-module invalid
REC580-power supply failure
Fan failure
MCB trip

¤ Service
5.14 Troubleshooting
Practical experience has shown that strict adherence to the recommendation of this
instructions will ensure the best proceed to restore the function of the switchgear.
These instructions are based on the present technical design. ABB reserves the right
to make any technical changes.
5.14.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker

Table 5.14-1: Troubleshooting operating mechanism of circuit breaker
Trouble Reasons Remedical Measures
Operating mechanism is not charged MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

automatically Supply voltage lacking Secure the supply voltage
Motor defective Replace the motor
Coal brushes worn out Replace the coal brushes
Motor is running but the disc spring as- Pressure release screw in the position Close the pressure release screw
sembly is not tensioned “open”
Changeover valve in intermediate Press the rubber cap of the OPEN-
position (only HMB-1 and HMB-1S) solenoid
Pump defective Replace the pump
Oil level too low Refill the oil
Filter clogged Exchange the filter
Operating mechanism does Tripping voltage lacking Secure the tripping voltage
not trigger Coil defective Replace the coil
Auxiliary switch does not transmit the Adjust the auxiliary switch
command
Auxiliary switch defective Replace the auxiliary switch
Corrosion in the operating mechanism Heating MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on
housing Heating voltage lacking Secure the heating voltage
Heating plate defective Replace the heating plate
Mechanism housing not tight Check the seals of the operating
mechanism housing and if necessary
replace them
Operating mechanism too often Pressure release screw not in the Close the pressure release screw
repumps position “closed”
(On an average more than Internal leak Operate the operating mechanism
20 times per day / 600 times several times
per month)
If the trouble continues: Perform the leak
test and if necessary inform ABB.
*) MCB = mini circuit breaker

¤ Service
5.14.2 Circuit Breaker

Table 5.14-2: Troubleshooting circuit breaker
Fault Cause Remedy
Lower SF6-pressure Alarm of pilot relay Check leakage rate:

“Low SF6-pressure” <1% / year is normal
S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
S Check flange seals and change the
faulty seal
S When sealing system is ok, check
electric circuit
Circuit breaker is locked Alarm of pilot relay Check SF6-pressure

“Circuit breaker locked” Check charging condition of operating
mechanism
Check electric circuit
5.14.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch

Table 5.14-3: Troubleshooting disconnector / earthing switch
Fault Cause Remedy
Low SF6-pressure Alarm of pilot relay Check leakage rate:

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit
Operating mechanism not running MCB* tripped Switch on MCB*

Supply voltage locking Secure supply voltage
Motor defect Change motor, check limit switch
Conductor defect Change conductor
No ON-/OFF-Signal MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

Control voltage lacking Secure the control voltage

Table 5.14-4: Troubleshooting earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
Fault Cause Remedy
Operating mechanism not running MCB* tripped Switch on MCB*

Supply voltage locking Secure supply voltage
Motor defect Change motor, check limit switch
Conductor defect Change conductor
No ON-/OFF-Signal MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

Control voltage lacking Secure the control voltage

¤ Service
5.14.5 Voltage Transformer

Table 5.14-5: Troubleshooting voltage transformer
Fault Cause Remedy

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit
5.14.6 Other Switchgear Modules

Table 5.14-6: Troubleshooting other switchgear modules
Fault Cause Remedy

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit

¤ Service
5.15 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts

5.15.1 General
GIS is environmental-friendly. After end of life of a GIS (estimated to 30 − 50 years)
the GIS-components shall be disposed. Several working groups are currently elabor-
ating guide-lines for disposal (e.g. CIGRE). Therefore this manual only can give brief
recommendations for disposal. For details please refer to the actual CIGRE-publica-
tion or contact your local ABB-service department.
5.15.2 Information on Disposal

All GIS components can be disposed of in accordance with the applicable laws and
regulations and in an environmentally friendly way. The disposed component parts
can be utilized as mixed or pure scrap. The scrap contains the following material,
which can all be considered as non-hazardous:
S Metals (aluminium, ferrous and non-ferrous metals)
S Porcelain and ceramics
S Plastics (PA / PTFE / silicon)
S Cast resin
S Filter material (AL2O3)
S Electronic components
S Oil and grease
S Acrylic varnish
The SF6 gas has to be removed with the appropriate equipment (e .g. DILO) and can
be recycled after filtering and drying. Open gas compartments might contain solid SF6
decomposition products generated during switching operations. All gaseous decom-
position products are bound in the filtering material.
WARNING! SF6 decomposition products might cause irritation to the skin, the eyes and the
mucous membranes.
Note For the disposal of switchgear using SF6 as insulating or arc quenching medium all
relevant safety measures have to be taken. Make sure to comply with all respective
national and local regulations. The return of SF6 gas is contractually regulated with the
SF6 suppliers. ABB will guarantee the return of SF6 gas in accordance with the applicable
regulations.
Prior to disposal of the components, the hydraulic oil contained in the drive mechan-
ism of the circuit breaker has to be removed and disposed of separately.
WARNING! The disk spring column is mechanically precharged with high tension forces.
Disassembly of disk spring should be handled by authorized personnel only
according to ABB procedure and safety regulation. For disposal, the local regula-
tions and laws should be followed. The different materials and utilities used in HMB
drives are listed in this document.

¤ Service
The local ABB representatives will be happy to help you with any questions relating to
disposal of equipment components.
5.15.3 GIS Components

Please refer to Figure 5.15-1 to Figure 5.15-13 for the single GIS-components.
Table 5.15-1 will give more details about the material.
13 12 11 10
1 2 3 4 5
1 − Control Cubicle 8 − Earthing Switch with Short Circuit
2 − Disconnector / Earthing Switch (3flange) Making Capacity
3 − Circuit Breaker 9 − Disconnector / Earthing Switch (4flange)
4 − Support Structure with Base Frame 10 − Voltage Transformer
5 − Cable Plug 11 − Barrier Insulator
6 − Cable Sealing End 12 − Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
7 − Support Insulator 13 − Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Operating Mechanism
Figure 5.15-1: SF6 Switchgear with Cable Branch
4
3
1 − Capacitive Voltage Detector 3 − Housing for Outdoor Bushing 5 − Angle Piece

2 − Busduct 4 − Outdoor Bushing
Figure 5.15-2: SF6 Switchgear with Angle Piece, Busduct and Outdoor Bushing

¤ Service
Figure 5.15-3: Surge Arrester
1 − Operating Mechanism Load Disconnector

2 − Load Disconnector
Figure 5.15-4: Load Disconnector

¤ Service
Figure 5.15-6: Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity, 1pole
Figure 5.15-7: Distribution Element
Figure 5.15-8: Transformer Connection, 1phase
Figure 5.15-9: Transformer Connection, 3phase
Figure 5.15-10: Electrooptical Voltage Transformer (EOVT)

¤ Service
Figure 5.15-11: HMB-1
Figure 5.15-12: HMB-1S
Figure 5.15-13: HMB-2

¤ Service
5.15.4 Material of the GIS-Components

Table 5.15-1: Material of the GIS-Components
GIS-Bauteil GIS-Component Weight Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Total Weight
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Index-No. and Name
Plastics
(Position-No. correspond to Figure 5.15-1 to Figure 5.15-13 in
SF6
this document)
Pos. All GIS-components incl. conductor, Portion of total component weight in %:

kg kg
No. without insulators F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depending on the type
Figure 5.15-1 1 Control cubicle 150 − F F F F
Figure 5.15-1 Control cubicle, Smart GIS F

Disconnector/earthing switch, 3flange
Figure 5.15-1 2 380 10.2 F f f F f
without transversal erection module

Figure 5.15-1 430 11.7 F f f F f
with transversal erection module
Figure 5.15-1 3 Circuit breaker with current transformer 1 244 50.4 F F f F F f

Figure 5.15-1 4 Support structure with base frame 150 − F F
Cable connection for Plug-in cable end

Figure 5.15-1 5 − f f f F
unit
Figure 5.15-1 6 Cable end unit 160 3.4 F f f F +
Figure 5.15-1 Plug-in cable end unit − − f f F F
Figure 5.15-1 7 Support insulator 42 − F F

Figure 5.15-1 8 70 − F f f f F
capacity, 3pole

Figure 5.15-1 9 400 8.8 F f f f f
without transversal erection module

Figure 5.15-1 450 10.3 F f f f
with transversal erection module
Figure 5.15-1 10 Voltage transformer 600 7 F F F f
Figure 5.15-1 11 Barrier insulator 68 − F F

Operating mechanism
Figure 5.15-1 13 30 − F F F f f F f
disconnector/earthing switch
Figure 5.15-2 1 Capacitive voltage detector 3 − F F f F F

98 +
Figure 5.15-2 2 Busduct 750 mm 6 + 8/m F +
60/m
Figure 5.15-2 3 Housing, outdoor bushing − 2.4 F f
100 −
Figure 5.15-2 4 Outdoor bushing − F + +
205
Figure 5.15-2 5 Angle element 90° 100 9 F +
Figure 5.15-2 Angle element 30° 100 8 F +
* Al-Metals = Aluminium, Non-ferr. Metals = Non-ferrous Metals

¤ Service
GIS-Bauteil GIS-Component Weight Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Total Weight
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Index-No. and Name
Plastics
(Position-No. correspond to Figure 5.15-1 to Figure 5.15-13 in
SF6
this document)
Pos. All GIS-components incl. conductor, Portion of total component weight in %:

kg kg
No. without insulators F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depending on the type
Figure 5.15-3 Surge arrester 3pole 690 25 F F F F F F f

Surge arrester 1pole 270 6 F F F F F F f f
Figure 5.15-4 1 Operating mechanism load disconnector 50 − F F F F f f

Figure 5.15-4 2 Load disconnector, I-form 500 8.1 F F F F f
Figure 5.15-4 Load disconnector, L-form 520 9.3 F F F F f

Figure 5.15-4 Load disconnector, T-form 520 9.3 F F F F f
Figure 5.15-5 Separate current transformer 790 7.2 F F F

Figure 5.15-6 200 2 F F F
capacity, 1pole
Figure 5.15-7 Distribution element 285 18 F F F
Figure 5.15-8 Transformer connection, 1phase 35 2 F F F

Figure 5.15-9 Transformer connection, 3phase 400 25 F f F f f
Figure 5.15-10 EOVT (Voltage transformer) 100 2 F f f f F f F

Figure 5.15-11 CB Operating mechanism (HMB-1) 120 − F F f f F F
Figure 5.15-12 CB Operating mechanism (HMB-1S) 140 − F F f f F F

Figure 5.15-13 CB Operating mechanism (HMB-2) 135 − F F f f F F
ca.
O-ring for housing flange − F
0.5/St.
Quantity of varnish for varnished equipments/field:

S Indoor approximate 5kg polyurethane paint
S Outdoor approximate 5kg epoxy-resin primer and
5kg polyurethane paint

¤ Service
5.15.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components

Table 5.15-2: Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components
Injurious Gases Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Injurious gases in the air
Plastics
F = non-critical
Chem.
Designation f = non-critical, as long as international
formula
boundary values are kept
SO2 Sulfur dioxide F F f F f f f f F
NOx Nitrous oxide F F f F f f f f f

CO Carbon monoxide F F F F F f f F f
Hydro carbons
− Benzene (Phenyl hydride)
− Formaldehyde F F F F f f f f f
− Ethylene
− Perchlorethylen
O3 Ozone F F F F f f f F f
Dust
− Sulfate
F F F F F F f f f
− Nitrate
− Lead
Heavy metals (i.E. cadmium) F F F F f f f f f

Operation Manual - Erection and Maintenance

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual - Erection and Maintenance

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear

Erection and Maintenance Type ELK-04

ABB AG - High Voltage Products

Main List of Documents

Erection and Maintenance

4 Equipment and Functional Descriptions

4.53 Functional Description (SMART-GIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 118 411 A

Erection and Maintenance

2.11 Cables (IEC, LXGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-1

2.16 Bay Coupling 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16-1

2.26 Test bushing on test adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26-1

3.3 System start SMART-GIS with PISA 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1

3.5 Commissioning of a SMART-GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1

3.8 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8-1

4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.8 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-1

4.12 Disconnector / Earthing Switch Type ELK-TE 04 DR 04 . . . . . . . 4.12-1

4.16 Earthing Switch Type ELK-EB 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16-1

4.29 3-Phase GIS-Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29-1

4.37 Camera box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37-1

4.52 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52-1

4.56 Control System: Conventional Substation Automation . . . . . . . 4.56-1

5.8 Disconnector / Earthing Switch 4000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1

5.13 Troubleshooting SMART-GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1

1.1.1.2 Types of packaging

Wooden support/skid and protective sheeting

Requirements for container

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-1

General container requirements

1.1.1.3 Container data

1.1.1.4 Environmental factors

The preservation required depends on the method of transportation, the storage

Storage requirements and classifications are described in detail in chapter “Delivery”

In the case of ocean transport, preservation of the equipment is mandatory, since

Protection against condensation of humidity is provided for a transportation period of

The packaging may be monitored by means of moisture indicators.

1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment

All open flanges must be sealed with a shipping cover.

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-2

1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment

When unpacking switchgear components, check shock indicators on packag-

1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment

Make sure that loads are evenly distributed.

1.1.1.9 Shipping marks

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-3

1.1.2.2 Means of transportation

1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses in transportation

Figure 1.1-1: Forces and stresses in transportation

Table 1.1-1: Forces in g (g = Acceleration due to gravity)

Railway 4.0 g 0.5 g 0.4 g

Road 1.0 g 2.0 g 0.6 g

Ship 0.4 g 2.0 g 0.8 g

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-4

Check shipping container for any damage before opening.

Photographs should be taken of any damaged packaging to serve as evidence at a

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-5

1.1.5 Standards and regulations

Standards and regulations of the country of destination shall be considered, if appli-

Applicable regulations and guidelines issued by ABB shall also be observed.

1HDG 118 070 A en 11.05.2005 EXTMEWE 12.05.2005 CHSVOTH 1.1-6

1.2 Receiving Inspection

Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_____of_____

1HDG 518 100 en 26.06.1998 ACEMEWE 29.06.1998 ACEHENE 1.2-1

Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_of_